b.e. (mechatronics) 2015 regulations, curriculum & … · laboratory, mini-project, life-skills...

B.E. (Mechatronics)

2015 Regulations, Curriculum & Syllabi

BANNARI AMMAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY (An Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai

Approved by AICTE - Accredited by NBA New Delhi, NAAC with ‘A’ Grade and ISO 9001:2008 Certified)

SATHYAMANGALAM – 638 401 Erode District Tamil Nadu

Phone : 04295 226000 Fax : 04295 226666

Web:www.bitsathy.ac.in E-mail : [email protected]

CONTENTS

Page No.

Regulations i PEOs xxiii POs xxiv Mapping of PEOs and POs xxv Connectivity Chart xxvi Curriculum 2015 1 Syllabi (I – VIII Semesters) 9 Electives 136

B.E. / B.Tech. Rules and Regulations 2015

Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 i

REGULATIONS 2015

(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)

(Common to all B.E./B.Tech. Degree Programmes)

Regulation 2015 has been prepared in accordance with the guidelines given by the University

Grants Commission, All India Council for Technical Education and affiliating University

incorporating the features of the Choice Based Credit System (CBCS). The Regulation 2015

is applicable to the candidates admitted to the Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) / Bachelor of

Technology (B.Tech.) Degree Programmes of the Institution in the academic year 2015-2016

for Regular admission (Academic year 2016-2017 for Lateral Entry) and subsequently.

The regulations hereunder are subjected to amendments as may be decided by the Academic

Council of the Institution from time to time. Any or all such amendments will be effective

from such date and to such batches of students (including those already in the middle of the

programme) as may be decided by the Academic Council.

1. ADMISSION

Candidate, seeking admission to the B.E./B.Tech. Programme, shall satisfy the conditions

of admission prescribed by the Directorate of Technical Education and Anna University,

Chennai as given below.

1.1 Regular Admission

Candidates, for admission to the first semester of the eight semesters B.E./B.Tech.

Degree Programmes, shall be required to have passed:

Higher Secondary Examination (10 +2) of Curriculum (Regular Academic

Stream) prescribed by the Government of Tamil Nadu with Mathematics,

Physics, and Chemistry as three of the four subjects of the study prescribed

under Part-III or any other examinations of any Board or University or

authority accepted by the Syndicate of the University / Directorate of

Technical Education (DoTE), Chennai as equivalent thereto.

(or)

Should have passed Higher Secondary Examination of Vocational Stream

(Engineering/Technology), prescribed by the Government of Tamil Nadu.


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 ii

1.2 Lateral Entry Admission

1.2.1 The candidates who possess Diploma in Engineering / Technology awarded by

the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Tamil Nadu or its

equivalent are eligible to apply for Lateral Entry admission to the third semester

of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes in the branch of study as per the eligibility

criteria prescribed by the Directorate of Technical Education from time to time.

(or)

1.2.2 The candidates who possess the Bachelor Degree in Science (B.Sc.) (10+2+3

stream) with Mathematics as a subject in B.Sc. is eligible to apply for Lateral

Entry admission to the third semester of B.E./B.Tech. Programmes, as per the

eligibility criteria prescribed by the Directorate of Technical Education from

time to time. Such candidates shall undergo two additional Engineering

subject(s) one each in third and fourth semesters, as bridge courses.

2. PROGRAMMES OFFERED

A candidate may be offered admission to any one of the programmes offered by the

Institution for the candidates specified in Clause 1.1 and as per the eligibility criteria of

DoTE for the candidates under Clause 1.2 from the list given below:

B. E. Programmes

i. Aeronautical Engineering

ii. Agricultural Engineering

iii. Automobile Engineering

iv. Civil Engineering

v. Computer Science and Engineering

vi. Electrical and Electronics Engineering

vii. Electronics and Communication Engineering

viii. Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

ix. Mechanical Engineering

x. Mechatronics

B. Tech. Programmes

i. Biotechnology

ii. Fashion Technology

iii. Information Technology

iv. Textile Technology

v. Food Technology


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 iii

3. STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME

3.1 Every programme shall have a distinct curriculum with syllabi consisting of theory,

laboratory, mini-project, life-skills and personality development courses, as

prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies, broadly categorized under:

(i) Basic Science courses including Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry and further

specialization in these subjects

(ii) Basic Engineering courses including Engineering Graphics, Workshop

Practices, Basics of Electrical, Electronics, Civil, Mechanical Engineering,

Engineering Mechanics and Computer Programming.

(iii) Humanities and Social Science courses including Language Courses,

Management Courses, Life Skills and Professional Ethics.

(iv) Professional Courses include Discipline Core Courses, Professional Electives,

Core Electives and Open Electives.

(v) Employability Enhancement Courses (EEC) include Project Work and /or

Internship, Seminar, Industrial /Practical Training, Value Added and Certificate

Courses.

The assortment of different courses shall be designed that the student, at the end of

the programme, would be able to be trained not only in his / her relevant

professional field but also as a socially mindful human being.

The medium of instruction is English for all the Courses, Examinations, Seminar

Presentation, Projects and any other courses that a student registers for.

3.2 Each course is normally assigned a certain number of credits, with 1 credit per

lecture period per week, 1 credit for 2 periods of tutorial, 1 credit for 2 periods of

laboratory courses, and 1 credit for 2 periods of seminar/project work per week.

3.3 A Diagnostic Test will be administered to all the B.E. / B.Tech. students after the

admission to assess the proficiency in English and based on the score they will be

brought under two streams namely, Stream A and Stream B. Students under Stream

A will study Communicative English I and Stream B will study Basic English I

under Language Elective I in the First Semester. In the Second Semester, Stream A

will be further divided into two categories based on their English language

proficiency assessed in the Continuous Assessment, while the upper segment can


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 iv

enroll and study German / Japanese / French / Chinese / Hindi and the remaining

students of that Stream will study Communicative English II. The students under

Stream B will study Basic English II or may opt for Communicative English II

based on the assessment carried out at the end of the semester I.

3.4 Every student shall be required to opt for Nine electives from the list of electives.

Students can opt for the electives (Core / Professional / Open Elective) from any

branch of B.E/B.Tech. Programmes, besides his / her own discipline courses, during

V to VIII Semesters, if he/she satisfies the prerequisite for that particular course.

3.5 However, out of nine electives, every student shall be required to opt for, a

minimum of three electives as open electives from the list of open electives of the

branch / branches other than his / her branch of specialisation. There shall be no

pre-requisite course(s) for such open electives.

3.6 Students can also opt for one-credit courses of 15 to 20 hour duration, which will

be offered by the experts from the industry on specialised topics. Students can opt

for such one-credit courses during the semesters I to VII as and when these courses

are offered. A student will also be permitted to register the one-credit courses

offered by other Departments, provided the student has fulfilled the necessary pre-

requisites or the courses that may not require any pre-requisites. Under no

circumstances, the same one credit course shall be repeated in subsequent semesters

in any Department / Centre and a maximum batch size for a given course shall not

exceed 40. In the case of disciplines with multiple divisions (intake more than 60)

different course(s) shall be offered to other batch(es) of students.

On successful completion of one credit courses, Credits will be indicated in the

Grade Sheet, but will not be considered for computing the Cumulative Grade Point

Average (CGPA). However, if a student wishes to avail the exemption from any

one of the Electives (other than open elective) of the Semester VIII, he / she can do

so by exercising his / her option in writing to the respective Head of the Department

during the beginning of the VIII Semester, following the equivalence norm, that

one regular elective (in the VIII Semester) is equivalent to three one-credit

courses completed by the student during the previous semesters, IV to VII. Details

of the one credit courses offered by the department shall be forwarded to the Office


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 v

of the Controller of Examinations. However one credit courses completed during I

to III semesters shall be maintained in the Grade sheet as “Additional credits

earned” (not considered for the computation of GPA/CGPA).

3.7 Fast Track System shall enable students to undergo a semester-long Internship or

Special Training during Semester VIII. A student who secures a minimum CGPA of

8.50 in Semester IV with no current arrears, as on that date and maintains the

CGPA of 8.50 till VI Semester without any arrears shall be eligible to opt for Fast

Track System and such student is required to complete three elective courses

satisfactorily, while completion of Semester VII, as additional Credits during the

semesters V to VII.

3.8 Every student shall be required to carry out a Project Work in the Department /

Industry or by exercising Fast track during VIII Semester in consultation with the

Faculty Guide and submit the project report, in the prescribed format, at the end of

the VIII Semester for the valuation.

3.9 A student can register for Self-Study Elective(s) over and above the electives from

any branch of Engineering / Technology at the rate of one per semester starting

from V semester onwards provided he/she maintains a Cumulative Grade Point

Average (CGPA) of 8.50 or above till the previous semesters with no current

arrears. Credits will be indicated for such courses in the grade sheets (additional

credits) but will not be considered for computing the CGPA.

3.10 A Student may be permitted to credit online courses with the approval of the

Departmental Consultative Committee constituted by the Head of the Department,

subject to a maximum of three credits. Such students may be exempted from

attending the classes, if such course(s) are offered in the semester. Summary of such

on-line courses, taken by the students, along with the offering agency shall be

presented to the Academic Council for information and further suggestions.

However, those students need to obtain certification from the agency / agencies

offering the course, to become eligible for writing or seeking exemption (core

elective course) from the End Semester Examination. In case of credits earned

through online mode, from the other Institute / University, the credits may also be

transferred directly after due approval from the Departmental Consultative


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 vi

Committee and the Office of the Controller of Examinations. A student can get

exemption for a maximum of 3 credits during the entire programme (in lieu of

Discipline elective or Open elective).

4. VALUE ADDED COURSES / ADD-ON COURSES

A Student can opt for the Value Added Courses / Add-on Courses offered by the various

Department / Centres for which the batch size will not exceed 40 per course from

Semester II to VII. Head of the Department / Centre shall submit the list of such courses,

duly approved / ratified by the Academic Council, to the Controller of Examinations to

administer the examination process. A separate Certificate will be issued on successful

completion of the course by the Office of the Controller of Examinations.

5. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

5.1 A regular student (admitted after 10+2) or equivalent is normally expected to

satisfactorily fulfil the requirements for award of the degree B.E. / B.Tech. within

four academic years (8 semesters) from the date of admission but in any case not

more than 7 years (14 Semesters); lateral entry students shall fulfil such

requirements within three academic years (6 semesters) from the date of admission

but in any case not more than six years (12 Semesters) leading to the award of

Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) / Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech.) of

Anna University, Chennai.

5.2 The total period for completion of the programme from the commencement of the

semester, to which the student was admitted, shall not exceed the maximum period

(Clause 5.1), regardless to the break-of-study (vide Clause 15) or period of

prevention in order.

5.3 Each semester shall consist of minimum 90 working days or 450 periods of 60

minutes each or equivalent. Head of the Department shall ensure that every faculty

member teaches the subject / course as prescribed in the approved curriculum and

syllabi.

5.4 Special Theory / Practical Sessions may be conducted for students who require

additional inputs over and above the number of periods normally specified


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 vii

(Remedial Classes), as decided by the Head of the Department, within the specified

duration of the Semester / Programme.

6. COURSE ENROLLMENT AND REGISTRATION

6.1 Each student, on admission shall be assigned to a Faculty Advisor (vide Clause 8)

who shall advise / counsel the student about the details of the academic programme

and the choice of course(s) considering the student’s academic background and

career objectives.

6.2 Every student shall enroll for the courses of the succeeding semester, in the current

semester. However, the student shall confirm the enrollment by registering for the

courses within the first five working days after the commencement of the semester

concerned.

6.3 After registering for a course, a student shall attend the classes, satisfy the

attendance requirements, earn Continuous Assessment marks and appear for the

End Semester Examinations.

6.3.1 Each student, on admission to the programme, shall register for all the courses

prescribed in the curriculum in the first Semester of study (III Semester for

students admitted under lateral entry stream).

6.3.2 The enrollment for all the courses of the Semester II will commence 10 working

days prior to the last working day of Semester I. The student shall confirm the

enrollment by registering for the courses within the first five working days after

the commencement of the Semester II. In the case, if a student fails to register in

the course(s), he/ she may be permitted to register the same, as specified in the

Clause 6.5, in the subsequent semesters or when it is offered.

6.3.3 The enrollment for the courses of the Semesters III to VIII will commence 10

working days prior to the last working day of the preceding semester. The

student shall enroll for the courses with the guidance of the student’s Faculty

Advisor. If a student wishes, the student may drop or add courses (vide Clause

6.4) within five working days after the commencement of the semester

concerned and complete the registration process duly authorized by the Faculty

Advisor.


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 viii

6.4 Flexibility to Add or Drop courses

6.4.1 A student has to earn the total number of credits specified in the Curriculum of

the respective Programme of study in order to be eligible to obtain the degree.

However, if a student wishes, the student is permitted to earn more than the total

number of credits prescribed in the curriculum by opting for one- credit courses,

self study electives or additional courses.

6.4.2 From the III to VIII semesters (from IV to VIII Semesters in case of lateral

entry students), the student has the option of registering for additional courses or

dropping existing courses. Total number of credits of such courses cannot

exceed 6 in a given Semester. However the maximum number of credits that a

student can register in a particular semester shall not exceed 30 credits

(regardless to the reappearance credits). In such cases, the attendance

requirement as stated Clause 7 is mandatory.

6.4.3 The minimum number of credits that a student can register in a particular

semester shall not be less than 18 credits (except VII / VIII semester).

6.4.4 The student shall register for the project work in the VIII semester only.

6.5 Reappearance Registration

6.5.1 If a student fails in a theory course, the student shall do reappearance

registration (Examination) for that course in the subsequent semesters or when it

is offered next.

6.5.2 On registration, a student may attend the classes for the reappearance

registration courses, if the student wishes, and the attendance requirement (vide

Clause 7) is not compulsory for such courses.

6.5.3 However, if a student wishes to improve his/ her continuous assessment, in the

second attempt during reappearance, shall satisfy the Clause 6.5.5 and appear

for continuous assessment as given for that particular course.

6.5.4 If the theory course, in which the student has failed, is either a professional

elective or an open elective, the student may register for the same or any other

professional elective or open elective course, respectively in the subsequent

semesters. However, the change of elective courses is permitted only once.


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 ix

6.5.5 In this case (Clause 6.5.4), the student shall attend the classes, satisfy the

attendance requirements (vide Clause 7), earn Continuous Assessment marks

and appear for the End Semester Examination.

6.5.6 The student who fails in any Laboratory Course/ Project work / Seminar or any

other EEC courses (Specified in Clause 3.1) shall register for the same in the

subsequent semesters or when offered next, and repeat the course as per Clause

6.5.5.

6.5.7 If a student is prevented from writing the end semester examination of a course

or several courses due to lack of attendance, the student has to register for that /

those course(s) again, when offered next, attend the classes and fulfill the

requirements as per Clause 6.5.5 & 6.5.6. If the course, in which the student has

‘lack of attendance’, is a Core Elective or an Open Elective, the student may

register for the same or any other Core Elective or Open Elective course(s)

respectively in the subsequent semesters and appear in the examination as per

Clause 6.5.5.

7. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR THE END SEMESTER

EXAMINATION OF A COURSE

A student who has fulfilled the following conditions (vide Clause 7.1 and 7.2) shall be

deemed to have satisfied the attendance requirements for appearing for End Semester

Examination of a particular course.

7.1 Every student is expected to attend all the periods and earn 100% attendance.

7.2 If a student, secures attendance between 70% and 79% in any course(s) in the

current semester due to medical reasons (prolonged hospitalization / accident /

specific illness) or participation in Institution/ University/ State/ National/

International level extra and co-curricular activities, with prior permission from the

Head of the Department, shall be permitted to appear for the current semester

examinations subject to the condition that the student shall submit the medical

certificate / participation certificate attested by the Head of the Department (along

However, a student shall secure not less than 80% attendance course wise taking

into account the number of periods required for that course as specified in the

curriculum.


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 x

with Condonation form). Such certificates along with the condonation forms shall

be forwarded to the Controller of Examinations for verification and permission to

attend the examinations. However during the entire programme of study, a student

can avail such Condonation in any two semesters only (regardless the number of

courses).

7.3 A student shall normally be permitted to appear for End Semester Examination of

the course(s) if the student has satisfied the attendance requirements (vide Clause

7.1 – 7.2) and has registered for examination in those courses of that semester by

paying the prescribed fee.

7.4 Students who do not satisfy Clause 7.1 and 7.2 and who secure less than 70%

attendance in a course will not be permitted to write the End-Semester Examination

of that course. The student has to register and repeat this course in the subsequent

semesters or when it is offered next (vide Clause 6.5).

7.5 In the case of reappearance registration for a course (vide Clause 6.5), the student

has to register for examination in that course by paying the prescribed fee.

7.6 A student who has already appeared for a course in a semester and passed the

examination is not entitled to reappear in the same course for improvement of

grades.

8. FACULTY ADVISOR

To help the students in planning their courses of study and for general advice on the

academic programme, the Head of the Department will attach a certain number of

students to a Faculty member of the Department who shall function as Faculty Advisor

for those students. The Faculty Advisor shall advise and guide the students in registering

of courses, reappearance of courses, monitor their attendance and progress and counsel

them periodically. If necessary, the Faculty Advisor may also discuss with or inform the

parents about the progress / performance of the students concerned.

9. COMMITTEES

9.1 Common Course Committee

9.1.1 A theory course handled by more than one faculty including the discipline with

multiple divisions (greater than or equal to 2 ) shall have a “Common Course

Committee” comprising of all members of faculty teaching that course with one


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xi

of the members as the Course Coordinator, nominated by the Head of the

Institution (Head of the Department in the case of multiple divisions of a

discipline) and student representatives (one per specialization or division)

registered for that course in the current semester.

First meeting of the Common Course Committee shall be held within fifteen

days from the date of commencement of the semester. Two subsequent

meetings in a semester may be held at suitable intervals. During these meetings,

the student members shall meaningfully interact and express their opinions and

suggestions of all the students to improve the effectiveness of the teaching-

learning process. It is the responsibility of the student representatives to convey

the proceedings of these meetings to all the students.

9.1.2 In addition, Common Course Committee (without the student representatives)

shall meet to ensure uniform evaluation through the common question papers

during Continuous Assessment and End Semester Examinations.

9.2 Class Committee Meeting

For all the courses taught, prescribed in the curriculum, Class Committee meeting

shall be convened thrice in a semester (first meeting within 15 days from the

commencement of the semester and other two meetings at equal interval after the

first meeting) comprising members of the faculty handling all the courses and two

student representatives from the class.

One of the members of the faculty (preferably not handling any courses to that

class), nominated by the Head of the Department, shall coordinate the activities of

the Committee. During these meetings, the student members shall meaningfully

interact and express their opinions and suggestions of all the students to improve the

effectiveness of the teaching-learning process. It is the responsibility of the student

representatives to convey the proceedings of these meetings to all other students.

10. SYSTEM OF EXAMINATION

10.1 Performance in each course of study shall be evaluated based on (i) Continuous

Assessment throughout the semester and (ii) End Semester examination at the end

of the semester for the regular courses or as given in the Clause 16. However, the


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xii

final examination in the case of one credit courses / certificate / value added courses

may be conducted, as and when the course is completed, through the office of the

Controller of Examinations.

10.2 Each course, both theory and practical including project work, shall be evaluated as

per the Scheme of Assessment given in Clause 16.

10.3 The End Semester Examinations shall normally be conducted after satisfying the

Clause 5.2. Supplementary Examinations may also be conducted, at such times, for

the benefit of the students as decided by the Controller of Examinations.

10.4 For the End Semester examinations, both theory and practical courses including

project work, the internal and external examiners (from Academia or Industry) shall

be appointed by the Controller of Examinations as per the guidelines given by the

Examination and Evaluation Board of the Institute.

11. PASSING REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS

11.1 A student who secures not less than 50% of total marks prescribed for a course,

vide Clause 16, comprising a minimum of 50% of the marks prescribed for the End

Semester Examination, shall be declared to have passed the course successfully and

earned the prescribed credits for that course, applicable for all registered courses.

11.1.1 If a student fails to secure a pass in a particular course, i.e., failing to obtain

minimum marks, as stated above, it is mandatory that he/she shall register and

reappear for the examination in that course in the subsequent semester(s)

whenever the examinations are conducted for that course, till he / she secures a

‘Pass’.

11.1.2 Continuous Assessment (CA) marks obtained by the student in the first

appearance shall be retained and considered valid for one subsequent attempt,

except Clause 6.5.4, 6.5.5, 6.5.6 and 6.5.7. However, from the third attempt

onwards, the student shall be declared to have passed the course if he/she

secures a minimum of 6 Grade Points (B Grade) in the course prescribed during

the End Semester Examinations.

11.2 The minimum number of total credits to be earned by a student to qualify for the

award of Degree in the various branches of study as prescribed by the respective

Boards of Studies is given below:


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xiii

Branch of Study

Minimum Credits

Regular

Admission

Lateral

Entry

B.E. Programmes

Aeronautical Engineering 178 134

Agricultural Engineering 177 133

Automobile Engineering 179 134

Civil Engineering 176 131

Computer Science and Engineering 176 131

Electrical and Electronics Engineering 176 132

Electronics and Communication Engineering 177 132

Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 177 133

Mechanical Engineering 179 135

Mechatronics 177 133

B.Tech. Programmes

Biotechnology 175 131

Fashion Technology 176 132

Information Technology 176 131

Textile Technology 175 131

Food Technology 175 131

11.2.1 Student Migration and Credit Transfer: Normalization of the Credits will be

carried out in consultation with the Board of Studies of the programme

concerned and approved by the Head of Institution, if a student migrates from

other institutions to Bannari Amman Institution of Technology or rejoins from

previous regulation to this regulation.

11.3 A student shall be declared to have qualified for award of B.E/B.Tech. Degree if

he/she successfully completes the course requirements (vide Clause 7, 10 and 11)

and passed all the prescribed courses of study of the respective programme (listed in

Clause 2), within the duration specified in Clause 5.1.


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xiv

12. ASSESSMENT AND AWARD OF LETTER GRADES

12.1 The assessment shall be based on the performance in the End Semester

Examinations and / or Continuous Assessment, carrying marks as specified in

Clause 16. Letter Grades (based on Credit Point and Grade Point) are awarded to

the students based on the performance in the evaluation process.

12.2 Credit Point is the product of Grade Point and number credits for a course and

Grade Point is a numerical weight allotted to each letter grade on a 10-point scale

(as specified in the Clause 12.3), while the Letter Grade is an index of the

performance of a student in a said course.

12.3 The performance of a student will be reported using Letter Grades, each carrying

certain points as detailed below:

Range of Total Marks (as

specified in Clause 16) /

Specific Reason

Grade

Points Letter Grade

91 to 100 10 O (Outstanding)

81 to 90 9 A + (Excellent)

71 to 80 8 A (Very Good)

61 to 70 7 B + (Good)

50 to 60 6 B (Above average)

0 to 49 0 RA (Reappearance Registration)

Incomplete 0 I

Withdrawal 0 W

Absent 0 AB

Shortage of Attendance 0 SA

‘RA’ ---Reappearance registration is required for that particular course

‘I’ --- Continuous evaluation is required for that particular course in the

subsequent examinations.

‘SA’ --- shortage of attendance (Clause 7) and hence prevented from writing

end semester examination.

12.4 After completion of the evaluation process, Grade Point Average (GPA), and the

Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is calculated using the formula:


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xv

GPA/CGPA =

where

iC : Credit allotted to the course.

ig : Grade Point secured corresponding to the course.

n : number of courses successfully cleared during the particular

semester in the case of GPA and all the semesters, under

consideration, in the case CGPA.

12.5 A student who does not appear for the End Semester Examinations in a course, after

registering for the same, shall be deemed to have appeared for that examination for

the purpose of classification (Subject to Clause 14 and 15).

12.6 For the non credit courses Grades shall be indicated as given in the Clause 16 and

shall not be counted for the computation of GPA/CGPA.

12.7 Photocopy / Revaluation: A student, who seeks the re-valuation of the answer

script is directed to apply for the photocopy of his/her semester examination answer

paper(s) in the theory course(s), within 2 working days from the declaration of

results in the prescribed format to the Controller of Examinations through the Head

of the Department. On receiving the photocopy, the student can consult with a

competent member of faculty and seek the opinion for revaluation. Based on the

recommendations, the student can register for the revaluation through proper

application to the Controller of Examinations. The Controller of Examinations shall

arrange for the revaluation and declare the results. Revaluation is not permitted to

the courses other than theory courses. In the case of theory courses with laboratory

component, a student can seek revaluation for the theory component only, following

the procedure stated above.

13. CLASSIFICATION OF THE DEGREE AWARDED

For the purpose of the ‘Award of Degree’, the duration of completion of the programme

shall be the total duration taken by a student for completing first time registration of all

the required courses and satisfying Clause 11, regardless to the period of Break-of-study

as per Clause 15 and satisfy any one of the conditions required as given below.

n

i

i n

i

C

g C

1

1 *


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xvi

13.1 First Class with Distinction: A student who qualifies for the award of the Degree

having passed all the courses of study of all the Eight Semesters (six semesters for

lateral entry students) at the first opportunity, after the commencement of his / her

study and securing a CGPA not less than 8.50 (vide clause 12.3) shall be declared to

have passed with First Class with Distinction.

13.2 First Class: A student who qualifies for the award of the Degree having passed all

the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters for lateral entry

students) after the commencement of his / her study and securing a CGPA not less

than 6.50 shall be declared to have passed with First Class (not exceeded the total

duration as specified in the Clause 5).

13.3 Second Class: All other students who qualify for the award of the Degree shall be

declared to have passed in Second Class.

13.4 Course Completion Certificate shall be given to a student, provided he / she should

have registered all the courses and also registered for the examinations in those

courses (subject to Clause 6.0 and 7.0).

14. WITHDRAWAL FROM THE EXAMINATION

14.1 A student may, for valid reasons, be granted permission by the Head of the

Department to withdraw from appearing in the examination in any course(s) only

once during the entire duration of the degree programme.

14.2 Withdrawal application shall be valid only, if the student is eligible to write the

examination as per Clause 7 and, if such request for withdrawal is made prior to the

submission of the Continuous Assessment marks of the course(s) with the

recommendations from the Head of the Department.

14.3 Withdrawal shall not be considered as an appearance in the examination for the

eligibility of a student for First Class with Distinction or First Class.

15. AUTHORIZED BREAK OF STUDY FROM A PROGRAMME

15.1 A student is permitted to go on break of study for a maximum period of one year

either as two breaks of one semester each or a single break of one year.

15.2 A student is normally not permitted to break the period of study temporarily.

However, if a student happens to discontinue the programme temporarily during the


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xvii

middle of programme of study, for reasons such as personal accident or

hospitalization due to ill health or in need of health care, he/she shall apply to the

Head of the Institution in advance, in any case, not later than the last date for

registering for the semester examination, through the Head of the Department

stating the reasons for the break-of-study (for one academic semester or 6 months,

whichever is earlier). However, a student detained for want of minimum attendance

requirement as per Clause 7 shall not be considered as permitted ‘Break of Study’

and Clause 15.3 is not applicable for such case.

15.3 The student is permitted to rejoin the programme after the break shall be governed

by the rules and regulations of DoTE and the Curriculum and Regulations in force

at the time of rejoining, subject to the Clause 11.2.1.

15.4 Authorized break of study will be counted towards the duration specified for

passing all the courses (vide Clause 5.1 and 5.2) and for the purpose of

classification of Degree (vide Clause 13).

15.5 The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from the

commencement of the first semester to which the student is admitted shall not

exceed the maximum period specified in Clause 5.1, irrespective of the period of

break of study in order that he / she may be eligible, for the award of the degree

(vide Clause 13).

15.6 In case of valid reasons (as stated in Clause 15.2) extended break-of-study may be

granted by the Head of the Institution for a period not more than one year (total

duration or two semesters whichever is earlier) in addition to the earlier authorized

break of study.

15.7 If a student does not report back to the Institute, even after the extended Break of

Study, the name of the student shall be deleted permanently from the college

enrollment. Such students are not entitled to seek readmission under any

circumstances.


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xviii

16. SCHEME OF ASSESSMENT

Courses offered under B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes are assessed as given below:

I THEORY COURSES Marks

Continuous Assessment 50

Distribution of marks for Continuous Assessment:

Test I (15)

Test II (15)

Open book test (10)

Library - Seminars / Assignments (Two) (10)

End Semester Examination 50

Total Marks 100

II THEORY COURSES WITH LAB COMPONENT Marks



Test I (10)

Test II (10)

Conduct of Experiment

Preparation(5)

Experiment and Results (5)

Record Note

Final Lab Examination (20)

End Semester Examination

(QP pattern as per (I)) 50

Total Marks 100

III LABORATORY COURSES Marks



Conduct of Experiment

i. Preparation (5)

ii. Experiment and Results (10)

iii. Record / Observation (5)

Test – Cycle I (15)

Test – Cycle II (15)


Experiments & Results (40)

Viva Voce – (10) 50

Total Marks 100

Reports / Record Note / Integrated Lab Manual to be retained for 1 year for Academic Audit, by respective Department


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xix

IV TECHNICAL SEMINAR Marks



Presentation I (25)

Presentation II (25)


Report (20)

Presentation (20)

Viva voce (10)

50

Total Marks 100

V PROJECT Marks



Review I

Literature survey (10)

Problem Identification (5)

Methodology (10)

Review II

Continuation in Methodology (10)

Results / Progress (15)


Report (20)

Presentation (20)

Viva voce (10)

50

Total Marks 100

VI LANGUAGE ELECTIVE

(CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT ONLY)

Marks

Test 1

Listening (10)

Speaking (5)

Reading (5)

Writing (5)

25

Test 2

Listening (10)

Speaking (5)

Reading (5)

Writing (5)

25

Oral Exam 50

Total Marks 100

Reports / Record Note / Integrated Lab Manual to be retained for 1 year for Academic Audit, by respective Department


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xx

VII ONE-CREDIT COURSE Marks

Test 30

Quiz 20

Final Examination 50

Total Marks 100

VIII

MINI-PROJECT


Marks

Review I 25

Review II 25

Project Evaluation

Report (25)

Presentation&Viva Voce (25)

50

Total Marks 100

IX

LIFE SKILLS


Marks

Test I 25

Test II 25

Final Examination 50

Total Marks 100

Grades (Excellent / Good / Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory)

X VALUE ADDED / CERTIFICATE COURSES


Marks

Test I 25

Test II 25

Final Evaluation / Test 50

Total Marks 100

Grades (Excellent / Good / Satisfactory / Not Satisfactory)

XI ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Marks



Class work (based on attendance) (5)

Assignments (Minimum 8 Assignments) (20)

Model Examination (25)

End Semester Examination 50

Total Marks 100

Reports / Record Note / Integrated Lab Manual to be retained for 1 year for Academic Audit, by respective

Department


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xxi

Optional Test: A student becomes eligible to appear for the one optional test

conducted after the Periodical Test II, only under the following circumstances: (i)

absent for Test I or Test II or both on account of medical reasons (hospitalization /

accident / specific illness), or (ii) participation in the College / University / State /

National / International level Sports events with prior permission from the Head of the

Institution and (iii) on satisfying the conditions (i) or (ii), the student should have

registered for the Optional Test, through the concerned member of faculty who handles

the course or through the respective Head of the Department, submitted to the

Controller of Examinations. Such Optional Tests are not conducted for the courses

under the categories III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, IX, X and XI listed above.

17. FIELD / INDUSTRIAL VISIT / INTERNSHIP

Heads of Departments, in order to provide the experiential learning to the students,

shall take efforts to arrange at least two industrial visits / field visits in a semester. The

students may also undergo in-plant training / internship during summer / winter

vacation between III and VII semesters.

18. PERSONALITY AND CHARACTER DEVELOPMENT

Every student shall be required to undergo a minimum of 40 hours of Personality

Development Programmes viz, NSS / NCC / YRC / YOGA / Sports and Games /

Technical and Non-technical Club activities during the first year, failing which he/she

shall not be permitted to appear for the End Semester examinations of semester II and

there onwards. Such students are permitted to appear for the End Semester

examinations of semester II and there onwards only after completing satisfactorily the

requirements.

The attendance of the personality and character development courses / events shall be

maintained on the regular basis by the concerned First Year Co-ordinators and made

available in the Office of the Controller of Examinations before the commencement of

Semester examinations of Semester I or Semester II.


Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xxii

19. DISCIPLINE

A student is expected to follow the rules and regulations laid down by the Institute and

the affiliating University, as published from time to time. Any violations, if any, shall

be treated as per the procedures stated thereof.

If a student indulges in malpractice in any of the End Semester / Continuous

Assessments, he / she shall be liable for punitive action as prescribed by the Institution /

University from time to time.

20. REVISION OF REGULATIONS, CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI

The Institution reserves the right to revise/amend/change the Regulations, Curriculum,

Syllabi, Scheme of Examinations and date of implementation and to introduce

Additional Electives, Open Electives, One Credit Courses and Value Added Courses

through the Academic Council.

The Question Paper pattern (Theory Examination) for UG Programme is given below:

PART A

Objective Type Questions: 20 (20X1 = 20 Marks) 20

PART B

Short Answer Questions: 10 (10X2 = 20 Marks) 20

PART C

Long Answer Questions: 5 (5X12 = 60 Marks) 60

------

Total 100

Department of Mechatronics, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015 xxiii

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

I. Graduates possess adequate knowledge on mechanical, electronics and electrical

engineering to solve problems pertaining to mechatronics

II. Graduates are capable of integrating and using systems or devices incorporating

information technologies and modern engineering tools for product design,

development and manufacturing

III. Graduates aspire for higher studies and can reveal professional interaction and work

effectively on multi-disciplinary teams along with professional and ethical

responsibility

Department of Mechatronics, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015 xxiv

a. Engineering Knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex

engineering problems.

b. Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and

analyse complex engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using

first principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.

c. Design/ Development of Solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering

problems and design system components or processes that meet the specified

needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the

cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.

d. Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems: Use research-based knowledge and

research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data,

and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.

e. Modern Tool Usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and

modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modelling to complex

engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.

f. The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual

knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the

consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.

g. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional

engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate

the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.

h. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and

responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.

i. Individual and Team Work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member

or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

j. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with

the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to

comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make effective

presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

Department of Mechatronics, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015 xxv

k. Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and

understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply these to

one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in

multidisciplinary environments.

l. Life-long Learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and

ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of

technological change.

Department of Mechatronics, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015 xxvi

MAPPING OF PEOs AND POs

POs a b c d e f g h

i j k l

PEO1 X X

PEO2 X X X X

PEO3 X X

X X X X

Department of Mechatronics, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015 1 Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting

B.E. MECHATRONICS

Minimum Credits to be Earned : 177

First Semester

Code No. Course

Objectives

& Outcomes L T P C

Maximum Marks Category

PEOs POs CA ES Total

15MA101 MATRICES AND CALCULUS I a,b 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 BS

15PH102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS I a 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 BS

15CH103 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE II g 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 HSS

LANGUAGE ELECTIVE I - - - - - 3 100 - 100 HSS

15GE105

BASICS OF ELECTRICAL

AND ELECTRONICS

ENGINEERING

I a 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 ES

15MC106 INTRODUCTION TO

AUTOMATION I a,b 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 ES

15GE107 WORKSHOP PRACTICE I b 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 ES

Total 11 2 10 20 400 300 700 -

Second Semester

Code No. Course

Objectives

& Outcomes L T P C



15MA201 VECTOR CALCULUS AND

COMPLEX ANALYSIS I a,b 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 BS

PHYSICS ELECTIVE - - - - - 4 50 50 100 BS

CHEMISTRY ELECTIVE - - - - - 4 50 50 100 BS

LANGUAGE ELECTIVE II - - - - - 3 100 - 100 HSS

15GE205

BASICS OF CIVIL AND

MECHANICAL

ENGINEERING I a 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 ES

15GE206 COMPUTER

PROGRAMMING III a,b,e 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES

15GE207 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS I,II a,b,d,e 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 ES

Total 9 2 6 24 400 300 700 -

Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech (Continuous Assessment) Common to AE,AG,AU,CE,ME,MTRS, BT,TT,FD (I Semester) and to CSE,FT,IT (II Semester) Common to AE, AG,AU,ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT ,FD (I Semester) and to CE,CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (II

Semester) Common to CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,FT,IT (I Semester) and to MTRS, BT,TT, FD (II Semester) Common to CE (I Semester) and to AE,AG,AU, ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT,FD (II Semester) Common to CE,CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (I Semester) and to AE, AG,AU,ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT, FD (II

Semester)


Third Semester

Code No. Course

Objectives &

Outcomes L T P C Maximum Marks

Category


15MA301 FOURIER SERIES AND

TRANSFORMS I a 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 BS

15MC302 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY I,II a,b,c 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC

15MC303 ELECTRON DEVICES AND

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS II c,e 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 ES

15MC304 ELECTRICAL MACHINES I,II b,c,e 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 PC

15MC305 MANUFACTURING

TECHNOLOGY II c 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC

15MC306 OBJECT ORIENTED

PROGRAMMING III h,i 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 ES

15MC307

ELECTRON DEVICES AND

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

LABORATORY

II,III d,e,h 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 ES

15MC308 MANUFACTURING

TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY I,III a,f,h,k 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC

15MC309 MINI PROJECT I I,II,III a-l 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EES

15GE310 LIFE SKILLS: BUSINESS

ENGLISH III j 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EES

Total 17 4 12 24 600 400 1000 -

Fourth Semester

Code No. Course

Objectives &


Category


15MA401 NUMERICAL METHODS AND

STATISTICS I a 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 BS

15MC402 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY I,II a,b,c 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC

15MC403 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS I,II a,b,c 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC

15MC404 FLUID MECHANICS AND

MACHINERY I,II a,b,c,d,e 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 ES

15MC405 CONTROL SYSTEM I,II b,c 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC

15MC406 POWER ELECTRONICS AND

DRIVES I,II,III b,c,e,f 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 PC

15MC407 FLUID MECHANICS AND

MACHINERY LABORATORY I,II,III a,b,d,h 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 ES

15MC408 COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE

DRAWING III f,h,i 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC

15MC409 MINI PROJECT II I,II,III a-l 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EES

15GE410 LIFE SKILLS: VERBAL

ABILITY III j 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EES

Total 17 8 10 25 600 400 1000 -

Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech. except CSE Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech (Non-Credit Course) Common to AG,AU,ME,MTRS,EEE,EIE,BT,TT,FT,FD


Fifth Semester

Code No. Course

Objectives &


Category


15MC501 SENSORS AND

INSTRUMENTATION II c,e 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC

15MC502 MICROPROCESSORS AND

MICROCONTROLLER I,II b,e 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC

15MC503 FLUID POWER SYSTEM II c 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 PC

15MC504 THERMODYNAMICS AND HEAT

TRANSFER I,II a,e 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC

ELECTIVE I - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE

ELECTIVE II - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE

15MC507

SENSORS AND

INSTRUMENTATION

LABORATORY

III h,i 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC

15MC508

MICROPROCESSORS AND

MICROCONTROLLER

LABORATORY

I,II,III b,d,f,h 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC

15MC509 TECHNICAL SEMINAR I I,II,III i,j 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 EEC

15MC510 MINI PROJECT III I,II,III a-l 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EEC

15GE511 LIFE SKILLS: APTITUDE I I a,b 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EEC

Total 11 2 12 23 650 450 1100 -

Sixth Semester

Code No. Course

Objectives &


Category


15GE601 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS II,III f,g,h 2 0 0 2 50 50 100 HSS

15MC602 PLC AND AUTOMATION I,II,III b,c,e,f,h,i 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC

15MC603 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS II e 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC

15MC604 DESIGN OF MACHINE

ELEMENTS I,II a,b,e 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC

ELECTIVE III - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE

ELECTIVE IV - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE

15MC607 PLC AND AUTOMATION

LABORATORY I,II,III b,c,e,h 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC

15MC608 ROBOTICS LABORATORY II e 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC

15MC609 TECHNICAL SEMINAR II I,II,III i,j 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 EEC

15MC610 MINI PROJECT IV I,II,III a-l 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EEC

15GE611 LIFE SKILLS: APTITUDE II I a,b 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EEC

Total 11 2 10 22 650 450 1100 -

Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech (Non-Credit Course) Common to AE, AU, CE, ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT, FD (VI Semester) and to CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (VII

Semester)


Seventh Semester

Code No. Course

Objectives &

Outcomes L T P C



15GE701 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS$ I,II,III a,f,g,k,l 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 HSS

15MC702 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS I,II b,e 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC

15MC703 MICRO ELECTRO

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS I,II,III b,d,e,f 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC

15MC704 CNC TECHNOLOGY II e 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC

ELECTIVE V - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE

ELECTIVE VI - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE

15MC707

MICRO ELECTRO

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

LABORATORY

I,II,III b,d,e,f 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC

15MC708 CAD/CAM LABORATORY I,II,III b,c,f,h,i 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC

15MC709 MINI PROJECT V I,II,III a-l 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EEC

15GE710 LIFE SKILLS : COMPETITIVE

EXAMS I,III a,b,l 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EEC

Total 12 0 8 21 600 400 1000 -

Eight Semester

Code No. Course

Objectives &

Outcomes L T P C



ELECTIVE VII - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE

ELECTIVE VIII - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE

ELECTIVE IX - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE

15MC804 PROJECT WORK I,II,III a-l - - - 9 50 50 100 EEC

Total - - - 18 200 200 400 -

$ Common to CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (VI Semester) and to AE, AG,AU,CE,ME,MTRS,BT,FT,TT, FD (VII

Semester)

Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech (Non-Credit Course)


Electives

Code No. Course Objectives & Outcomes

L T P C PEOs POs

LANGUAGE ELECTIVES

15LE101 BASIC ENGLISH I III j 3 0 0 3

15LE102 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH I III j 3 0 0 3

15LE201 BASIC ENGLISH II III j 3 0 0 3

15LE202 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH II III j 3 0 0 3

15LC203 CHINESE III j 3 0 0 3

15LF203 FRENCH III j 3 0 0 3

15LG203 GERMAN III j 3 0 0 3

15LH203 HINDI III j 3 0 0 3

15LJ203 JAPANESE III j 3 0 0 3

PHYSICS ELECTIVES

15PH201 PHYSICS OF MATERIALS I a 3 0 2 4

15PH202 APPLIED PHYSICS I a 3 0 2 4

15PH203 MATERIALS SCIENCE I a 3 0 2 4

15PH204 PHYSICS OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS I a 3 0 2 4

15PH205 SOLID STATE PHYSICS I a 3 0 2 4

CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES

15CH201 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY I a 3 0 2 4

15CH202 APPLIED CHEMISTRY I a 3 0 2 4

15CH203 APPLIED ELECTROCHEMISTRY I a 3 0 2 4

15CH204 INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY I a 3 0 2 4

15CH205 WATER TECHNOLOGY AND GREEN

CHEMISTRY I

a 3 0 2 4

DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES

15MC001 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY II c,e 3 0 0 3

15MC002 MAINTANANCE ENGINEERING II,III c,j 3 0 0 3

15MC003 ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND

METALLURGY II,III c,d,e,g,h,k 3 0 0 3

15MC004 PRODUCT DESIGN AND COSTING I,II,III b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,k 3 0 0 3

15MC005 RAPID PROTOTYPING I,III a,f 3 0 0 3

15MC006 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING II e 3 0 0 3

15MC007 SOFT COMPUTING II,III e,f 3 0 0 3

15MC008 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS II,III c,f 3 0 0 3


15MC009 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS II,III e,f 3 0 0 3

15MC010 FUZZY LOGIC AND NEURAL NETWORKS I,II a,c,e 3 0 0 3

15MC011 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION III f,j 3 0 0 3

15MC012 PROCESS CONTROL II c,e 2 0 2 3

15MC013 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING I,II a,c 3 0 0 3

15MC014 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN I,II b,c,e 3 0 0 3

15MC015 CAM AND FACTORY AUTOMATION II e 3 0 0 3

ENTREPRENEURSHIP ELECTIVES

15GE001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I I,II,III b,c,d,e,f,k 3 0 0 3

15GE002 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT II I,II,III b,c,h,i,j,k 3 0 0 3

PHYSICAL SCIENCE ELECTIVES

15GE0P1 NANOMATERIALS SCIENCE I a 3 0 0 3

15GE0P2 I a 3 0 0 3

15GE0P3 APPLIED LASER SCIENCE I a 3 0 0 3

15GE0C1 CORROSION SCIENCE I a 3 0 0 3

15GE0C2 ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL CELLS I a 3 0 0 3

15GE0C3 POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND PROCESSING I a 3 0 0 3

OPEN ELECTIVES

15MC0YA FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMATION I,II,III b,c,e,f 3 0 0 3

15MC0YB ROBOTICS I,II,III a,b,c,e,f 3 0 0 3

15MC0YC MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS I,II,III a,c,f 3 0 0 3

15MC0YD SENSORS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING I,II,III a,c,j 3 0 0 3

15MC0YE MECHATRONICS I,II,III a,b,c,f,i,j,k 3 0 0 3

ONE CREDIT COURSES

15MC0XA INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS II c,e - - - 1

15MC0XB AC/DC DRIVES II c,e - - - 1

ADDITIONAL ONE CREDIT COURSES (I to III Semesters)

15GE0XA HEALTH & FITNESS - - 1

15GE0XB FOUNDATION COURSE IN COMMUNITY

RADIO TECHNOLOGY - - 1

15GE0XC VEDIC MATHEMATICS - - 1

15GE0XD INTRODUCTION TO ALGORITHMS - - 1

15GE0XE ETYMOLOGY - - 1

15GE0XF HINDUSTANI MUSIC - - 1

15GE0XG CONCEPT, METHODOLOGY AND

APPLICATIONS OF VERMICOMPOSTING - - 1

15GE0XH AGRICULTURE FOR ENGINEERS - - 1

SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND DEVICES

Open%20Electives/15GE0C1%20-%20CORROSION%20SCIENCE.doc

Open%20Electives/15GE0C2%20ENERGY%20STORING%20DEVICE.doc

Open%20Electives/15GE0C3%20-%20POLYMER%20CHEMISTRY%20AND%20PROCESSING.doc


15GE0XI INTRODUCTION TO DATA ANALYSIS USING

SOFTWARE - - 1

15GE0XJ ANALYSIS USING PIVOT TABLE - - 1

BRIDGE COURSES

15MCB01 INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION

15MCB02 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


SUMMARY OF CREDIT DISTRIBUTION

S.No CATEGORY

CREDITS PER SEMESTER

TOTAL

CREDIT

CREDITS in

%

Range of Total

Credits

I II III IV V VI VII VIII Min Max

1 BS 7 12 4 3 26 14.5% 15% 20%

2 ES 7 9 7 4 27 15.2% 15% 20%

3 HSS 6 3 2 3 14 7.9% 5% 10%

4 PC

12 17 15 12 11 67 37.8% 30% 40%

5 PE 6 6 6 9 27 15.2% 10% 15%

6 EEC 1 1 2 2 1 9 16 9% 10% 15%

Total 20 24 24 25 23 22 21 18 177 100% - -

BS - Basic Sciences

ES - Engineering Sciences

HSS - Humanities and Social Sciences

PC - Professional Core

PE - Professional Elective

EEC - Employability Enhancement Course

CA - Continuous Assessment

ES - End Semester Examination

Department of Mechatronics, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulation 2015 | 9

Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting

15MA101 MATRICES AND CALCULUS 3 2 0 4

(Common to all Branches)

Course Objectives

Interpret the introductory concepts of Matrices and Calculus, which will enable them to

model and analyze physical phenomena involving continuous changes of variables

Summarize and apply the methodologies involved in solving problems related to fundamental

principles of Matrices and Calculus.

Develop enough confidence to identify and model mathematical patterns in real world and

offer appropriate solutions, using the skills learned in their interactive and supporting

environment.

Course Outcomes (COs)

1. Analyze the characteristics of a linear system with Eigen values and vectors.

2. Identify and model the real time problem using first order linear differential equations.

3. Recognize and solve the higher order ordinary differential equations.

4. Characterize the functions and get the solutions of the same.

5. Integrate the functions for evaluating the surface area and volume.

UNIT I 9 Hours

MATRICES Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors of a real matrix - Properties of Eigen Values-Stretching of elastic

membranes. Cayley - Hamilton Theorem - Quadratic form: Reduction of a quadratic form to a

canonical form.

UNIT II 8 Hours

ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF FIRST ORDER Leibnitz's Equations - Modelling and solutions using Newtons law of cooling of bodies - solutions to

R-L and R-C electric circuits.

UNIT III 11 Hours

ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF HIGHER ORDER Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients. Linear differential

equations of higher order with variable coefficients: Cauchys linear differential equation - Method of

variation of parameters for second order differential equations.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS Functions of Two Variables and their solutions- Total Differential - Derivative of implicit functions-

Jacobians Unconstrained maxima and minima.

UNIT V 8 Hours

MULTIPLE INTEGRALS Double integration with constant and variable limits-Region of integration -Change the order of

integration -Area as double integral in cartesian coordinates. Triple integral in Cartesian coordinates. FOR FURTHER READING Applications of mass spring system in ordinary differential equations of higher order

Total: 45+30=75 Hours



Reference(s)

1. C. Ray Wylie and C Louis Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Sixth Edition, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2003.

2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tenth Edition, Wiley India Private

Limited, New Delhi 2015.

3. Peter V. O Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Seventh Edition, Cengage Learning

India Private Limited, 2012.

4. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Forty Third Edition, Khanna Publications,

New Delhi 2014.

5. Glyn James, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Third Edition,Wiley India, 2014.

6. T.Veerarajan, Engineering mathematics for First Year,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

company Limited, New Delhi, 2014.

Assessment Pattern

UNIT/RBT Remember Understand Apply Analyse Evaluate Create

Total F C P M F C P M F C P M F C P M F C P M F C P M

1 2

6

6

6

20

2 2

2

4

4

6

18

3

2

2

6

6

6

22

4

2

6

8

6

22

5 2

4

6

6

18

Total 100

Assessment Questions Remember

1. Define spectral values of a matrix.

2. State Cayley - Hamilton theorem.

3. List out five natures of a quadratic form.

4. Reproduce the solution for the first order linear differential equation 𝑑𝑦

𝑑𝑥 + 𝑃𝑦 = 𝑄.

5. State Newton’s Law of cooling in ordinary differential equation.

6. Define Jacobian in three dimensions.

7. State Wronskian determinant.

8. List two sufficient conditions for extreme of a function .

9. Define Jacobian of with respect to .

10. Recall any two properties of Jacobians.

Understand

1. Identify whether there exist a square matrix without eigenvalues. Give reason .

2. Indicate the matrix which has real eigenvalues and real eigenvectors.

3. Identify in which cases can we expect orthogonal eigenvectors.

4. Compare second and higher order ordinary differential equation.

5. A condenser of capacity C discharged through an inductance L and resistance R in series and the

charge q at the time t satisfies the equation L +R + =0.given that L=0.25

),(),( baatyxfz

vandu yandx

2

2

dt

qd

dt

dq

c

q



henries,R=250 ohms,C=210-6 farads,and that when t=0,charge q is 0.002 coulombs and the

current =0,obtain the value of q in terms of t.

6. Represent the area bounded by the parabolas y2=4-x and y2=4-4x as a double integral.

7. Formulate Leibnitz’s equation where R=100 ohms L=0.05 henry E=100 Cos300t volts.

8. A condenser of capacity C discharged through an inductance L and resistance R in series and the

charge q at the time t satisfies the equation L +R + =0.the circuit consists of an

inductor of 1H,a resistor of 12,capacitor of 0.01 F,and a generator having voltage given by

E(t)=24 sin10t.find the charge q and the current I at time t,if q=0 and i=0 at t=0 where i= .

9. Formulate the area between the curves y2=4x and x2=4y.

10. Indicate and change the order of integration for .

Apply

1. Carry-out the three engineering applications of eigen value of a matrix.

2. Find the Eigen values and Eigen vectors of the matrix A = and hence find the

Eigen values of , 5A and using properties.

3. Use Cayley Hamilton theorem to find inverse of A = .

4. Find the points of the function where f is a maximum or minimum.

5. A body originally at 800C cools down to 600C in 20 minutes, the temperature of the air being

400C. what will be the temperature of the body after 40 minutes from the original?

6. If the temperature of a cake is 3000F when it leaves the oven and is 2000F 10 minutes later, when

will it be practically equal to the room temperature of 600F, say, when will it be 610F? Use

Newton’s law of cooling.

7. In an L-C-R circuit, the change q on a plate of a condenser is given by L +R =Esinpt,

where i= .the circuit is tuned to resonance so that p2=1/LC. If initially the current I and the

charge q be zero. Showthat, for small values of R/L, the current in the circuit at time t is given by

(Et/2L) sinpt.

8. Construct the solution for the equation (𝐷3 − D)y = 𝑥𝑒𝑥.

9. Use the method of variation of parameters to solve(𝐷2 + 4)𝑦 = cot 2𝑥.

10. Construct the equation 𝑥2𝑦′′ + 𝑥𝑦′ = 𝑥 into a linear differential equation with constant

coefficients.

dt

dq

2

2

dt

qd

dt

dq

c

q

dt

dq

2

1 2

0

x

x

xydydx

11 4 7

7 2 5

10 4 6

2A

1A

121

324

731

axyxyyxyxf 22

),(

2

2

dt

qd

dt

dq

c

q

dt

dq



Analyze

1. Justify whether the matrix B = is orthogonal or not?

2. Suppose that in winter the day time temperature in a certain office building is maintained at 70°F,

The heating is shut off at 10 P.M. and turned on again at 6 A.M. On a certain day the temperature

inside the building at 2 A.M. was found to be 65°F. The outside temperature was 50°F at 10 P.M.

and had dropped to 40°F by 6 A.M. Find the temperature inside the building when the heat was

turned on at 6 A.M.? .

3. Experiment show that the radioactive substance decomposes at a rate proportional to the amount

Present. Starting with 2grms at time t=0 find the amount available at a later time.

4. Differentiate RL and RC electric circuit.

5. Transform the equation 𝑥2𝑦′′ + 𝑥𝑦′ = 𝑥 into a linear differential equation with constant

coefficients.

6. If the voltage in the RC circuit is E = E0 cos ωt, find the charge and the current at time t.

7. Solve (x2D2-2xD+2)y = (3x2-6x +6)ex, y(1) = 2 +3e, 𝑦′(1) =3e

8. In a circuit the resistance is 12Ω and the inductance is 4 H. The battery gives a constant voltage

of 60 V and the switch is closed when t = 0, so the current starts with I(0) = 0. (a) Find I(t) (b)

Find what happens to the current after a long time justify the current after 1 s.

9. If where prove that

10. Solve .

Evaluate:

1. Use Cayley-Hamilton theorem to find the value of 𝐴8 − 5𝐴7 + 7𝐴6 − 3𝐴5 + 𝐴4 − 5𝐴3 +

8𝐴2 − 2𝐴 + 𝐼 if the matrix A = .

2. Determine the nature, index, rank and signature by reducing the quadratic form 2x2+2y2+2z2+2yz

to canonical form by an orthogonal transformation.

3. Determine the value of y from the equation 𝑑𝑦

𝑑𝑥 =

𝑥2+𝑦2+1

2𝑥𝑦.

4. Determine the solution of y of the equation √1 − 𝑦2𝑑𝑥 = (𝑠𝑖𝑛−1𝑥 – 𝑥)𝑑𝑦 .

5. Determine the value of y from the equation𝑑𝑦

𝑑𝑥 –

𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝑦

1+𝑥= (1 + 𝑥) 𝑒𝑥 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑦.

6. Determine the complete solution for y from the equation𝑑2𝑦

𝑑𝑥2 +1

𝑥

𝑑𝑦

𝑑𝑥=

12𝑙𝑜𝑔 𝑥

𝑥2 .

7. Determine the complete solution for y of(𝑥2𝐷2 − 𝑥𝐷 + 4)𝑦 = 𝑥2 sin(log 𝑥).

8. Determine the solution of the initial value problem 𝑦′′ + 𝑦′ − 6𝑦 =0 with the initial conditions

y(0)=10 and 𝑦′(0) =0.

9. Evaluate taken over the region of space defined by

and .

10. Evaluate by changing into polar coordinates.

cos sin 0

sin cos 0

0 0 1

),(),( vuyxg xyvyxu 2,22

2

2

2

2

22

2

2

2

2

)(4vu

yxy

g

x

g

2 2 22 2

0 0 0

a x ya a x

xdxdydz

2 1 1

0 1 0

1 1 2

dxdydzzyx 222 1

22 yx

10 x

2 2

0

a a

y

xdxdy

x y



15PH102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS 2 0 2 3


Course Objectives

To impart knowledge in properties of matter, crystallography and ultrasonics

To understand the applications of lasers and fiber optics

To implement the principles of quantum physics in the respective engineering fields


1. Realize the concept of properties of matter and apply the same for practical applications

2. Identify the suitable laser source for fiber optic communication applications

3. Determine the velocity of ultrasonic waves and apply the same for day today applications

4. Classify the different types of crystal structures and analyze their properties

5. Comprehend the efficacy of quantum equations in modern areas

UNIT I 8 Hours

PROPERTIES OF MATTER Elasticity: elastic and plastic materials - Hooke's law - elastic behavior of a material -stress -strain

diagram- factors affecting elasticity. Three moduli of elasticity- Poisson's ratio-torsional pendulum-

twisting couple on a cylinder. Young's modulus- uniform bending -non- uniform bending. Viscosity:

coefficient of viscosity -streamline and turbulent flow -experimental determination of viscosity of a

liquid -Poiseuille's method.

UNIT II 6 Hours

APPLIED OPTICS Interference: air wedge- theory- uses- testing of flat surfaces- thickness of a thin wire. Laser:

introduction- principle of laser- characteristics of laser- types: CO2 laser -semiconductor laser (homo

junction). Fiber optics: principle of light transmission through fiber- expression for acceptance angle

and numerical aperture- types of optical fibers (refractive index profile and mode)- fiber optic

communication system (block diagram only).

UNIT III 5 Hours

ULTRASONICS Ultrasonics: introduction- properties of ultrasonic waves-generation of ultrasonic waves-

magnetostriction- piezo electric methods- detection of ultrasonic waves. Determination of velocity of

ultrasonic waves (acoustic grating). Applications of ultrasonic waves: SONAR- measurement of

velocity of blood flow -study of movement of internal organs.

UNIT IV 5 Hours

SOLID STATE PHYSICS Crystal Physics: lattice -unit cell -crystal systems- Bravais lattices- Miller indices- 'd' spacing in cubic

lattice- calculation of number of atoms per unit cell, atomic radius, coordination number and packing

density for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures- X-ray diffraction: Laue's method - powder crystal

method.

UNIT V 6 Hours

QUANTUM MECHANICS Quantum Physics: development of quantum theory- de Broglie wavelength -Schrodinger's wave

equation- time dependent and time independent wave equations- physical significance. Application:



particle in a box (1d) - degenerate and non-degenerate states. Photoelectric effect: quantum theory of

light work function- problems.

FOR FURTHER READING Neutrions - expanding universe

2 Hours

INTRODUCTION Exposure to Engineering Physics Laboratory and precautionary measures

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Determine the moment of inertia of the disc and calculate the rigidity modulus of a given wire using

torsion pendulum (symmetrical masses method).

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Find the elevation of the given wooden beam at the midpoint by loading at the ends and hence

calculate the Youngs modulus of the material.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Find the depression at the midpoint of the given wooden beam for 50g, 100 g, 150 g, 200 g and 250 g

subjected to non-uniform bending and determine the Youngs modulus of the material of the beam.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Determine the coefficient of viscosity of the given liquid by Poiseulles method.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Form the interference fringes from the air wedge setup and calculate the thickness of the given wire.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 By applying the principle of diffraction, determine the wavelength of given laser and the average

particle size of lycopodium powder using laser source.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Determine the

(i) wavelength of ultrasonics in a liquid medium,

(ii) velocity of ultrasonic waves in the given liquid

(iii) compressibility of the given liquid using ultrasonic interferometer.

Total: 30+30 = 60 Hours

Reference(s)

1. D. S. Mathur, Elements of Properties of Matter, 5th edition, S Chand & Company Ltd., New

Delhi, 2012.

2. Charles Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, 8th edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2012.

3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan and S Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics, 6th

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

4. B. K. Pandey and S. Chaturvedi, Engineering Physics, 1st edition, Cengage Learning India

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.

5. Halliday and Resnick, Fundamentals of Physics, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 2011.

6. Ian Morison, Introduction to Astronomy and Cosmology, John Wiley and Sons, Ltd., 2013.



Assessment Pattern

Unit/RBT Remember Understand Apply Analyse Evaluate Create


1 2 2

4 2

6

4

4

24

2

2

2 6

2 4

4

20

3

4

4 2

4

4

18

4 2 2

4

5

5

18

5 2 2

4 4

4

4

20

Total 100


1. Reproduce Hooke’s law.

2. Name the three types of moduli of elasticity.

3. List the two applications of air wedge.

4. Recall the two conditions required for achieving total internal reflection.

5. Define magnetostriction effect.

6. Recognize the four applications of ultrasonics in medical field.

7. Write the Bragg’s condition necessary for obtaining X-ray diffraction in crystals.

8. Retrieve the seven types of crystal system.

9. Recall four physical significance of wave function.

10. Define photoelectric effect.

Understand 1. Explain the procedure adopted for determining the Young’s modulus of the given material by

non-uniform bending method.

2. Illustrate the effect of temperature on elasticity of a material.

3. Classify the fiber optics based on refractive index profile.

4. Indicate the role of optical resonators in the production of laser.

5. Compare the merits of magnetostriction and piezo-electric oscillators.

6. Summarize the four applications of ultrasonic waves in day-today life.

7. Identify the closely packed cubic crystal structure with an example.

8. Compare Laue method and powder crystal method used in X-ray diffraction.

9. Infer the significance of photoelectric effect.

10. Represent the two assumptions involved in solving the Schrödinger time dependent wave

equation.

Apply 1. Show that when a cylinder is twisted the torsional couple depends on torsional rigidity.

2. Using torsional pendulum, explain the rigidity modulus of the wire.

3. Design an experimental setup used for determining the thickness of a thin material.

4. A silica optical fiber has a core refractive index of 1.50 and a cladding refractive index of

1.47. Find the numerical aperture for the fiber.

5. Construct the piezo electric oscillator circuit and explain the generation of ultrasonic waves.

6. Find the depth of submerged submarine if an ultrasonic wave is received after 0.33 s from the

time of transmission.(given v=1400 m/s).

7. Show that the axial ratio for an ideal HCP structure is 1.633.

8. Sketch the planes having Miller indices (100) and (111).

9. Assess the various energy levels of an electron enclosed in a one dimensional potential well

of finite width ‘a’.

10. Compute the relation between de Broglie wavelength and velocity of a particle.



Analyse 1. Differentiate uniform bending from non-uniform bending.

2. Straight lined fringes are formed only in flat glass plates. Justify.

3. Conclude that the thickness of thin wire is influenced by band width of a material.

4. Outline the merits and demerits of magnetostriction oscillator method.

5. Five fold symmetry is not possible in crystal structures. Justify your answer.

6. Compare the degenerate state with non-degenerate state.

Evaluate 1. Determine the viscosity of a given liquid using Poiseuille’s method ( Given: water, burette,

stop clock, capillary tube, stand and travelling microscope).

2. When ultrasonic waves are passed through liquids, cavitations are produced. Criticize the

statement.

3. Check the packing factor for a simple cubic structure is 0.52.

4. Evaluate the expression for time dependent Schroedinger’s wave equation.

15CH103 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 2 0 2 3


Course Objectives

Understand the interdisciplinary and holistic nature of the environment

Understand how natural resources and environment affect the quality of life and stimulate the

quest for sustainable development

Recognize and evaluate the socio-economic, political and ethical issues in environmental

science


1. Demonstrate the importance of interdisciplinary nature of environment, its purpose, design

and exploitation of natural resources

2. Analyze the fundamental physical and biological principles that govern natural processes and

role of professionals in protecting the environment from degradation.

3. Apprehend the existing environmental challenges related to pollution and its management

4. Evaluate strategies, technologies and methods for sustainable management of environmental

systems

5. Characterize and analyze human impacts on the environment

UNIT I 6 Hours

NATURAL RESOURCES Forest resources: Use - over exploitation - deforestation - case studies. Water resources: Use - over

utilization of surface and ground water - conflicts over water. Mineral resources: Use - exploitation -

environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources - case studies. Food resources: Effects

of modern agriculture - fertilizer-pesticide problems (eutrophication, blue baby syndrome,

biomagnification) - water logging - salinity - case studies. Energy resources: renewable (solar, wind,

tidal, geothermal and hydroelectric power) - non renewable energy sources

UNIT II 6 Hours

ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY Concept of an ecosystem: Structure and function of an ecosystem - producers - consumers -

decomposers - food chains - food webs and ecological pyramids - Types of ecosystem: Introduction -

characteristic features: forest ecosystem - desert ecosystem - ecological succession. Biodiversity -



value of biodiversity - threats to biodiversity - endangered and endemic species - Conservation of

biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity - field study

UNIT III 6 Hours

ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION Pollution: Definition - causes - effects - control measures of air pollution - water pollution: (Sewage

water treatment by activated sludge and trickling filter process) - marine pollution - thermal pollution

- noise pollution. Disaster management: causes - effects - control measures of floods - earthquake -

cyclone - landslides

UNIT IV 7 Hours

SOCIAL ISSUES AND ENVIRONMENT Sustainable development: Definition - Unsustainable to sustainable development - urban problems

related to energy. Environmental ethics - issues and possible solutions - solid waste management -

causes - effects - 3R Principles (landfills, incineration, composting). Water conservation - rain water

harvesting - watershed management. Climate change - global warming - acid rain - ozone layer

depletion. Environment protection act: Air (Prevention and control of pollution) act - wildlife

protection act

UNIT V 5 Hours

HUMAN POPULATION AND ENVIRONMENT Human population: Population growth - characteristics - variation among nations - population

explosion - women and child welfare programmes - value education - HIV / AIDS. Role of

information technology in environment and human health - occupational safety and health

administration (OSHA)

FOR FURTHER READING Human rights: E - waste and biomedical waste -Identification of adulterants in food materials

2 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Preparation of N/10 Oxalic acid and M/10 Sodium carbonate solution

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Estimation of dissolved oxygen in a water sample/sewage by Winklers method

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Estimation of chloride content in water by argentometric method

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Estimation of calcium in lime by complexometric method

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Estimation of chromium in leather tannery effluents

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Determination of percentage purity of sodium carbonate

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Estimation of heavy metals in the given solution by EDTA method



4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Determination of concentration of unknown colored solution using spectrophotometer


Reference(s)

1. Anubha Kaushik, C.P. Kaushik, Environmental Science and Engineering , 4th Multi Colour

Edtion, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2014

2. A. Ravikrishnan, Environmental Science and Engineering, 5th revised Edition, Sri Krishna

Hitech Publishing company Ltd, Chennai, 2010

3. T. G. Jr. Miller, S. Spoolman, New Environmental Science, 14th Edition, Wadsworth

Publishing Co, New Delhi, 2014

4. E. Bharucha, Textbook of Environmental studies, second Edition, Universities Press Pvt. Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2013

5. A. K. De, Environmental Chemistry, 7th Edition , New age international publishers, New

Delhi, 2014

Assessment Pattern



1 3 2

4 5

1

1 3

1

20

2 4 1

4 7

1 2

1

20

3 3

4 6 2

1 1

1 1

1

20

4 1 2

3 8 1

4

2 4

25

5 1 2

2 5

1

1 3

15

Total 100


1. Define the term bio-magnification.

2. Name any four major gases responsible for air pollution.

3. Recall four gases responsible for greenhouse effect.

4. State environmental ethics.

5. List any two impacts of water pollution.

6. Mention the two objectives of value education.

7. List any four consequences of air pollution on human health.

8. Recall any two endangered and endemic species of India.

9. List any two disadvantages of nuclear energy production.

Understand 1. Summarize the structural and functional attributes of an ecosystem.

2. With the help of neat flow chart explain waste water treatment process using activated sludge

process.

3. Explain the modern method of rain water harvesting technique diagrammatically and discuss

the various strategies adopted for water conservation.

4. Summarize the abstracts of Wildlife (protection) Act, 1972.

5. Indicate the three consequences of noise pollution.

6. Classify the ecosystems on the basis of energy sources.

7. Infer two types of photochemical reactions involved in formation and destruction of ozone in

the stratosphere.

8. Explain how the impacts of natural disasters can be minimized on human communities with

on representative example.

9. Summarize four major effects caused on forests and tribal people due to big dam construction.

10. Infer the any two conflicts over water, confining to our nation.



11. Identify three major threats to Indian biodiversity.

12. Relate the concept of food chain and food web with tropic level and mention their three

significances.

Apply 1. Identify any seven impacts caused if ground water is used enormously.

2. Select the proper disaster management techiques that can be implemented to manage. a)

Earthquake b) Floods.

3. Summarize the concept age-structure pyramids as a tool to achieve stabilized population in

our nation.

4. Predict the significances of child welfare programmes in India.

5. Implement the 3R approach to manage solid waste.

6. Assess the four adverse effects of solid waste.

7. Assess how climate change affects human health.

Analyse 1. Differentiate between confined and unconfined aquifers.

2. Distinguish between critical and strategic minerals with two examples for each.

3. Outline variations in population growth among nations with necessary diagram.

4. “Day by day our atmosphere gets prone to serious effects” and “deterioration of environment

affects human health”. Justify these two statements.

5. Compare the major two advantages and limitations of major greenhouse pollutant CO2.

Evaluate 1. Choose any one suitable method to minimize the impact of acid rain on environment.

2. Determine the doubling time of population, if annual growth rate of a nation is 25 years.

15GE105 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND

ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

2 0 2 3

(Common to AE,AG,AU,CE,ME,MTRS, BT,TT,FD (I Semester) and to CSE,FT,IT (II Semester))

Course Objectives

To understand the basic concepts of electric circuits and magnetic circuits.

To illustrate the construction and operation of various electrical machines and semiconductor

devices.

To learn the fundamentals of communication systems.


1. Understand the basic concepts of electric and magnetic circuits.

2. Summarize the types of DC machines.

3. Classify the static and dynamic AC machines and explain their operation.

4. Interpret the operation of AC and DC drives

5. Illustrate the characteristics of semiconductor devices and communication systems.

UNIT I 7 Hours

ELECTRIC CIRCUITS Definition of Voltage, Current, Electromotive force, Resistance, Power & Energy, Ohms law and

Kirchoffs Law & its applications - Series and Parallel circuits - Voltage division and Current division

techniques - Generation of alternating emf - RMS value, average value, peak factor and form factor-

Definition of real, reactive and apparent power.



UNIT II 5 Hours

DC MACHINES Introduction of magnetic circuits - Law of Electromagnetic induction, Flemings Right & Left hand

rule- Types of induced emf - Definition of Self and Mutual Inductance - DC Motor- Contruction -

Working Principle- Applications.

UNIT III 6 Hours

AC MACHINES Single Phase Transformer - Alternator - Three phase induction motor - Single phase induction motor -

Contruction - Working Principle - Applications.

UNIT IV 5 Hours

ELECTRICAL DRIVES Speed control of dc shunt motor and series motor - Armature voltage control - Flux control -

Construction and operation of DC servo motor - Construction and operation of DC servo motor

stepper motor.

UNIT V

7 Hours

ELECTRON DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION Characteristics of PN Junction diode and Zener diode - Half wave and Full wave Rectifiers - Bipolar

Junction Transistor - Operation of NPN and PNP transistors - Logic gates - Introduction to

communication systems. FOR FURTHER READING Voltage Regulator - Stepper motor - Energy meter - SMPS, Satellite and Optical communication.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Analyze the VI characteristics of a fixed resistor and a lamp by varying its temperature.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Apply the voltage division and current division techniques for series and parallel connections of lamp

loads.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Understand the concept of electromagnetic induction using copper coil.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Understand the construction and working principle of DC machines.

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Determine the VI Characteristics of PN Junction diode and plot the input and output wave shapes of a

half wave rectifier.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Realize the working of transistor as an electronic switch through experiments.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Lighting applications using logic gates principle.




Reference(s)

1. T. K. Nagsarkar and M. S. Sukhija, Basic of Electrical Engineering, Oxford University Press,

2011.

2. Smarjith Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Prentice Hall

(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2010

3. A. Sudhakar, Shyammohan S Palli, Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2010

4. R. S. Sedha, A Textbook of Applied Electronics, S.Chand & Company Ltd, 2013

Assessment Pattern



1 2

2 6 4 6

20

2 4 4 2 6 4

20

3 2 10 4 4

20

4 4 6 4 6

20

5 4 4 6

6 20

Total 100


1. State Kirchhoff’s current law.

2. State Ohm’s law.

3. State Kirchhoff’s voltage law.

4. State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.

5. Give the properties of flux lines.

6. Define reluctance.

7. Define magnetic flux.

8. State the operating principle of a transformer.

9. State the operating principle of DC generator.

10. What is back emf?

11. State the operating principle of DC Motor.

12. State Fleming’s Left hand rule.

13. State Fleming’s Right hand rule.

14. Sketch the V-I characteristics of zener diode.

15. What is junction barrier?

16. What is BJT?

17. List the applications of optical fibre communication.

18. Define aspect ratio.

Understand 1. Define average value.

2. Compare series and parallel circuits.

3. Why domestic appliances connected in parallel?

4. Classify the magnetic circuits.

5. Describe the concepts of self and mutually induced emf.

6. What is leakage coefficient?

7. Interpret the laws of electromagnetic induction.

8. Elucidate the working principle of a transformer.

9. What is DC generator?



10. List the applications of DC motors.

11. Illustrate the construction and working principle of three phase induction motor.

12. Outline the applications of DC generators.

13. Demonstrate the action of diode in forward and reverse biasing.

14. Explain the operation of NPN transistor.

15. Draw symbol of diode and zener diode.

16. Illustrate the input and output characteristics of CE configuration.

17. Exemplify the need for modulation.

18. Summarize the advantages of FM over AM.

19. State the need for modulation.

20. Discuss the principle of frequency modulation.

Apply 1. Three resistors are connected in series across a 12V battery. The first resistance has a value of

2 Ω, second has a voltage drop of 4V and third has power dissipation of 12 W. Calculate the

value of the current in the circuit.

2. A 25 Ω resistor is connected in parallel with a 50 Ω resistor. The current in 50 Ω resistor is

8A. What is the value of third resistance to be added in parallel to make the total line

current as 15A?

3. The self - inductance of a coil of 500turns is 0.25H.If 60% of the flux is linked with a second

coil of 10500 turns. Calculate a) the mutual inductance between the two coils and b) emf

induced in the second coil when current in the first coil changes at the rate of 100A/sec.

4. An air cored toroidal coil has 480 turns, a mean length of 30cm and a cross-sectional area of

5 cm2.Calculate a)the inductance of the coil and b) the average induced emf, if a current of 4

A is reversed in 60 milliseconds.

5. A toroidal air cored coil with 2000 turns has a mean radius of 25cm, diameter of each turn

being 6cm. If the current in the coil is 10A, find mmf, flux, reluctance, flux density and

magnetizing force.

6. Construct the circuit of voltage regulator.

7. Outline the applications of DC motors.

8. Develop the block diagram of the television and explain each block.

9. Build the circuit of full wave bridge rectifier.

10. Develop the block diagram of the optical fibre communication and explain each block.

11. Construct the circuit of half wave rectifier.

Analyse 1. Analyze the voltage, current and power in a resistor supplied with an alternating voltage.

2. Obtain the equations for the equivalent star network resistances for a given delta network.

3. Derive the expression for RMS, average value, peak and form factor of sinusoidal voltage.

4. Analyze the voltage, current and power relationship in three phase star connected system.

5. Derive the expressions for self -inductance and mutual inductance.

6. Analyze the series and parallel magnetic circuit and derive the total mmf required.

7. Compare electric and magnetic circuits.

8. Derive the emf equation of DC Generator.

9. Obtain the expression for current amplification factor.

10. Derive the expression of ripple factor, efficiency of full wave bridge rectifier.



Evaluate

1. Estimate the value of mesh currents in the following network.

2. For the circuit in Fig. determine ix and compute the power dissipated by the 15-kΩ resistor.

3. Estimate the value of node voltage in the following network.

4. An iron rod of 1cm radius is bent to a ring of mean diameter 30cm and wound with 250 turns

of wire. Assume the relative permeability of iron as 800. An air gap of 0.1cm is cut across the

bent ring. Calculate the current required to produce a useful flux of 20,000 lines if leakage is

neglected.

5. The effective resistance of two resistors connected in series is 100 . When connected in

parallel, then effective value in 24 ohm’s. Determine the value of two resistors.

6. Determine the equivalent resistance of the following circuit.

7. Calculate the total resistance RT, and total current I in the following circuits using star

delta transformation technique.



Create

1. Create the circuit diagram of 5V regulated power supply.

2. Plan the combinational circuit diagram of EX-NOR gate using NOR gate.

15MC106 INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION 2 0 2 3

Course Objectives

To Impart fundamental knowledge in the areas of robotic system

To apply the fundamental knowledge of hydraulic and pneumatic system

To provide a clear view on Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) and its application


1. Understand the fundamentals of a control and robotic systems.

2. Classify and infer various types of sensors and transducers

3. Acquire the fundamentals of hydraulic and pneumatic systems.

4. Illustrate the operations of mechanical and electrical actuation systems.

5. Acquire basic knowledge on PLC for various applications.

UNIT I 6 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO MECHATRONICS AND ROBOTICS Introduction - Systems - Open loop system - closed loop system, Basic elements, sequential controller

and Microprocessor based controllers. Industrial Robot: Definition, laws of robots - Robot Anatomy -

Robot configurations - motions - work volume - drive system - Types of Robot Controls - Precision of

movement – Application.

UNIT II 6 Hours

SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Introduction to sensors and transducers, Types - Displacement, position and proximity - velocity and

motion - force - fluid pressure - liquid flow and level - Temperature - Light - Selection of sensors

UNIT III 6 Hours

HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS SYSTEM Pneumatic and hydraulic systems: Actuation system - Direction Control Valves - Pressure Control

Valves-Cylinders - Cylinder Sequencing - Servo and Proportional Control Valves - Process Control

Valves - Rotary Actuator

UNIT IV 6 Hours

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ACTUATION SYSTEMS Mechanical actuation System: Mechanical system - types of motion - Kinematic chain - cams - Gear

Trains - Ratchet and pawl - Belt and chain drives - Bearings - Mechanical aspects of Motor selection.

Electrical actuation system: Electrical Systems - Mechanical switches - Solid state switches -

Solenoids - Stepper motor

UNIT V 6 Hours

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Introduction - Basic structure - Input/output processing - programming - Mnemonics - Timers, relays

and counters - Shift registers - Data handling - Analogue input/output - Selection of PLC - Simple

problems



FOR FURTHER READING Application of PLC - Elevator control, traffic light control, sensors in automobiles, ATM & mobiles

phones, introduction to Smart Sensors (basics only)

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Identification of various components in the pneumatic system and hydraulic system to understand

their working principle. Symbolic representation of each and every component.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Automating the operation of a machine vice according to specified need using pilot valves.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Automating the operation of a machine by means of electrical signals and distinguishing the actuation

of cylinders using solenoid valves and pilot actuated valves.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Identifying proper circuit to control the speed of a double acting cylinder and performing the same

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Designing a simple pneumatic direct control circuit using FluidSIM software to open and close the

Gate of a factory such that by operating a push button valve, gate should open or close.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Using FluidSIM software design a pneumatic circuit with a double acting cylinder and 5/2 air spring

valve to open the main gate of a factory which can be controlled by a security personnel from the

security room.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Designing a pneumatic circuit by FluidSIM software using a double acting cylinder and 5/2 air spring

valve to lift the carton boxes at the loading point. The raising and lowering speeds are to be adjustable

separately.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 There are three double acting cylinders. The cylinders are extended first one after another. After the

extension of the entire three cylinders they want to retract one after another from the first cylinder and

the operations to the continued. Also there is a need to stop the piston of the cylinder within the

required length. Design a suitable circuit.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Application based Experiment Clamping of work piece using two single acting cylinder


Reference(s)

1. W. Bolton, Mechatronics: electronic control systems in mechanical and electrical engineering,

Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006

2. Devdas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, Mechatronics System Design, Cengage Delmar Learning

India Pvt Learning, 2012.

3. Mikell P.Groover, Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing,

Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2008.



4. V. S. Bagad, Mechatronics, Technical Publication, Pune, 2009.

5. Mikell P.Groover, Mitchall Lueiss, Roger N. Nagel and Nicholas G.Odery, Industrial

Robotics Technology, Programming and Application, McGraw Hill Book Company,

Singapore, 1996.

Assessment Pattern



1 4

3 3

2 2

3

3

20

2

3

4 3

2

2

2

2 2

20

3 4

4 3

2 2

2

3

20

4 4 3

3 3

2

2

1 2

20

5

3

3 3

2 2

2 2

2 1

20

Total 100


1. Define the term Mechatronics.

2. What are the two basic forms of control system?

3. State the laws of robots.

4. What are the various configurations of robots?

5. List various types of drive systems used in robotics.

6. Mention various types of sensors.

7. Write a short note on piezo electric sensors.

8. Give the classification of actuation system.

9. Draw the general form of Microprocessor system.

10. Write a note on Directional control valves.

Understand 1. How the automation is different from conventional system?

2. When the open and closed loop control system is choosed?

3. Give the importance of sensors in various applications.

4. How do you design the hydraulic or pneumatic system?

5. Differentiate the single and double acting cylinder.

6. Give the importance of pressure sensors in various applications.

7. How the PLC is different from other computers?

8. How the PLC can be used to handle an analogue output?


10. What are the factors to be considered while choosing microprocessor?

Apply 1. Discuss the relation of fixed, flexible and programmable automation.

2. Intelligent robot can alter their program of their own. Justify.

3. Sketch the block diagram of open loop and closed loop control system.

4. How can you determine the level of fluid in a container?

5. Explain how thermocouple is used in sensing temperature.

6. How do you calculate the overall gear ratio G?

7. Draw a simple pnematic circuit to actuate the single acting cylinder.

8. Explain the various steps involved to develop the program in microcontroller.

9. Explain how the sequence followed by PLC while carry out a program.

10. How can you control the timer and counter in PLC?

Analyse 1. Differentiate the open loop and closed loop control system.

2. Compare the various types of derive system in robotics.

3. Distinguish between personal computer and PLC.

4. Compare the electrical actuation system with mechanical actuation system.



5. Differentiate between Hydraulic and pneumatic systems.

6. Differentiate between sensors and transducers.

Evaluate 1. Compare the fixed, flexible and programmed automation.

2. Distinguish between different types of sensors.

15GE107 WORKSHOP PRACTICE

Common to AE, AG,AU,ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT ,FD (I Semester) and to CE,CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT

(II Semester)

0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To provide hands on training for fabrication of components using carpentry, sheet metal,

fitting and welding equipment/tools.

To develop the skills for preparing the green sand mould using foundry tools and to make

simple electrical & household pipe line connections using suitable tools.

To develop the skill to make / operate/utilize the simple engineering components.


1. Fabricate simple components using carpentry, sheet metal, fitting & welding equipment/tools.

2. Prepare green sand mould and make simple electrical & household pipe line connections

using suitable tools.

3. Make / operate / utilize the simple engineering components.

List of Experiments:

1. Forming of simple object in sheet metal using suitable tools – (Example: Dust Pan / Soap

Box) (or) making simple object using Metal Spinning Machine. (Example: Aluminum Cup).

2. Prepare ‘V’ (or) half round (or) square (or) Dovetail joint from the given mild Steel flat.

3. Fabrication of a simple component using thin and thick plates. (Example: Book rack)

4. Making a simple component using carpentry power tools. (Example: Electrical switch

Box/Tool box/ Letter box].

5. Construct a household pipe line connections using pipes, Tee joint, Four way joint, elbow,

union, bend, Gate way and Taps (or) Construct a pipe connections of house application

centrifugal pump using pipes, bend, gate valve, flanges and foot valve.

6. Prepare a green sand mould using solid pattern/split pattern.

7. Construct a domestic electrical wire connections using indicator, one way switch with calling

bell, two way switch with lamp, one way switch with fan regulator and one way switch with

socket

8. Soldering Practice for simple printed circuit board.

9. Demonstration of robotic links and joints using makeit kit.

10. Study of mechatronics products (ATM, printers, Washing machine, Billing Machine).

Total : 30 Hours



15MA201 VECTOR CALCULUS AND COMPLEX

ANALYSIS 3 2 0 4


Course Objectives

Implement the Complex Analysis, an elegant method in the study of heat flow, fluid

dynamics and electrostatics.

Summarize and apply the methodologies involved in solving problems related to fundamental

principles of Calculus viz: Differentiation, Integration and Vectors.

Develop enough confidence to identify and model mathematical patterns in real world and


environment.


1. Characterize the calculus of vectors.

2. Apply the theoretical aspects of vector integral calculus in their core areas.

3. Recognize the differentiation properties of complex functions.

4. Identify the complex functions and their mapping in certain complex planes.

5. Use the concepts of integration to complex functions in certain regions.

UNIT I 10 Hours

VECTOR CALCULUS Gradient -Divergence -Curl - Directional derivative- Solenoidal -Irrotational vector fields -Line

Integral -Surface integrals.

UNIT II 9 Hours

INTEGRAL THEOREMS OF VECTOR CALCULUS Green's theorem in a plane- Stoke's Theorem- Gauss divergence theorem- Applications involving

cubes and parallelepiped.

UNIT III 8 Hours

ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS Analytic Functions- Necessary and Sufficient conditions of Analytic Function- Properties of Analytic

function - Determination of Analytic Function using Milne Thompson method -Applications to the

problems of Potential Flow.

UNIT IV 8 Hours

MAPPING OF COMPLEX FUNCTIONS Physical interpretation of mapping- Application of transformation: translation, rotation, magnification

and inversion of multi valued functions - Linear fractional Transformation (Bilinear transformation).

UNIT V

10 Hours

INTEGRATION OF COMPLEX FUNCTIONS Cauchy's Fundamental Theorem - Cauchy's Integral Formula - Taylor's and Laurent's series-

Classification of Singularities - Cauchy's Residue Theorem.

FOR FURTHER READING Applications to Electrostatic and Fluid Flow.




Reference(s)

1. C. Ray Wylie and C. Louis Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-

HillPublishing Company Ltd, 2003

2. Erwin Kreyszig , Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tenth Edition, Wiley India Private

Limited,New Delhi 2015

3. J. A. Brown and R. V. Churchill, Complex Variables and Applications , Sixth Edition,

McGraw Hill,New Delhi, 2007

4. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Forty third Edition, Khanna Publications ,

New Delhi 2014

5. Peter V. O. Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Seventh Edition ,Cengage Learning

India Private Limited, 2012

6. Glyn James, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Third Edition,Wiley India,2007

Assessment Pattern



1 2

6

8

4

2

22

2 2

4

4

4

6

20

3

2

10

6

18

4 2

4

6

6

18

5 2

4

6

4

6

22

Total 100


1. Define gradient of a vector.

2. Define irrotational of a vector.

3. State Green s theorem.

4. State Gauss divergence theorem.

5. Check whether the function is f(z)=z3 analytic.

6. List the necessary condition for a function f(z) to be analytic.

7. Define bilinear transformation.

8. State the condition for the transformation w = f(z) to be conformal at a point.

9. State the formula for finding the residue of a double pole.

10. State Cauchy’s integral formula.

Understand

1. If evaluate the line integral from (0,0) to (1,1) along the path y=x.

2. Identify the unit normal vector to the surface at the point (1,-1, 2).

3. Identify the value of .(F ), using Stoke s theorem.

4. Formulate the area of a circle of radius a using Green s theorem.

5. Illustrate the two properties of analytic function.

6. Represent the analyticity of the function w = sin z.

7. Identify fixed points of the transformation w = z .

'

jxyixF22

drF .

422 zxyx

x'

'

2



8. Identify the image of the triangular region in the z plane bounded by the lines x= 0, y = 0, and

x+ y= 1 under the transformation w = 2z.

9. Infer where c is the circle .

10. Identify the residues of the function at its simple pole.

Apply

1. Find where along the line joining the points (0,0,0) to(2,1,1).

2. If , find where C is the curve in the xy-plane y=2x2 from (0,0) to

(1,0).

3. Apply Green’s theorem in the plane to Compute where C is the

boundary of the region defined by x=0, y=0 and x+y=1.

4. Using Gauss divergence theorem,Compute and S is the

surface of the cube bounded by x=0,y=0,z=0,x=1,y=1,z=1.

5. If =+i represent the complex potential for an electric field and , find

the function .

6. If , find v and f (z) such that f (z) =u+iv is analytic.

7. Find bilinear transformation which maps the points I,-1,I of the z plane into the points 0,1,∞ of

the w plane respectively.

8. Find the image of the circle in the complex plane under the transformation w = .

9. Find Taylor s series f(z) = cos z about z = .

10. Find the nature of singularity .

Analyze

1. Conclude .

2. Demonstrate the irrotational vector and solenoidal vector with an example.

3. Justify stokes s theorem for where S is the upper half of the sphere

.

4. Justify Gauss divergence theorem for where S is the surface of the

cuboid formed by the planes x= 0, x= a, y = 0, y = b, z = 0 and z = c.

5. The complex potential f(z)=z2 describes a flow with constant equipotential lines and

streamlines ,Determine the velocity vector.

cz

dz

2)3(

1z

)2(

4)(

3

zz

zf

drFc

. kxyzxzjiyF 32

jyixyF2

3

C

rdF

dyxyydxyx

c

)64()83(22

s

kyzjyixzFwheredsnF

2

4ˆ

22

22

yx

xyx

)log(22

yxu

11 zz

1

'

3

21

zez

2 2( ) ( ) ( 1)

n n ndiv grad r r n n r

',2

2kyyzjyiF

1222 zyx

kzjyixF222



6. Show that the function is harmonic and find the corresponding

analytic function.

7. Find the image of the rectangle whose vertices are (0,0), (1,0), (1,2), (0,2) by

means of linear transformation w = (1+i )z+2-i. Also compare the images.

8. Generate as Laurent’s series valid in the regions: and .

9. Use Cauchy’s integral formula Compute where C is the circle .

10. Find where C is .

Evaluate

1. Determine , where s is the closed surface of the sphere

.

2. Prove that .

3. Check Stokes theorem for taken around the rectangle bounded by

x=±a,y=0 y=b.

4. Check Green’s theorem in the plane to determine where c is the

boundary of the region defined by .

5. Determine the analytic function f (z) = P + iQ, if Q = , if f(0) = 1.

6. Determine f (z) and the conjugate harmonic v such that w = u + i v is an analytic function of z

given that u = .

7. Determine the image of the infinite strip under the transformation w = .

8. Determine the Laurent’s series expansion .

9. Determine where C is

10. Using Cauchy’s integral formula determine where C is |Z| =1.

3 2 2 23 2u x x xy xy y

31)(

zz

zzf 31 z 210 z

C

z

zz

dze

2)1()2(

3z

dzzz

z

C

52

4

221 iz

s

zdxdyydzdxxdydz )32(

2222

azyx

FFdivgradFcurlcurl

2

)()(

jxyiyxF

222

2 2

3 8 4 6

c

x y dx y xy dy

2( ) 0, 0, 1( )i x y x y ii y x and y x

yx

yx

2cosh2cos

sinhsin

xyeyx

2cos22

2

1

4

1 y

z

1

32

)3(2

1)(

zfor

zz

zzf

dzzz

z

C

52

4

221 iz

C

z

zz

dze

2

12



15GE205 BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL

ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3

Common to CSE, ECE,EEE, EIE,FT,IT (I Semester) and to MTRS, BT,TT, FD (II Semester)

Course Objectives

To impart basic knowledge in the field of Civil Engineering

To guide students to select the good building materials

To create awareness on various types of water supply and transportation systems

To impart basic knowledge in the various engineering materials and manufacturing Processes.

To understand the working principles of various Internal Combustion Engines, Refrigeration,

Boiler and power plants.


1. Understand the fundamental philosophy of Civil Engineering

2. Identify the nature of building components, functions, construction practices and material

qualities

3. Understand the fundamental concepts of water supply and transportation systems

4. Recognize the various engineering materials and understand the working principles and

operations of manufacturing processes.

5. Understand the working principles and operations of Internal Combustion Engines,

Refrigeration, Boiler and power plants.

UNIT I 7 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO CIVIL ENGINEERING History, development and scope of Civil Engineering Functions of Civil Engineers. Construction

Materials Characteristics of good building materials such as Stones

Bricks -Cement - Aggregates and concrete. Surveying: Definition and purpose Classification Basic

principles Measurement of length by chains and tapes.

UNIT II 7 Hours

GENERAL FEATURES RELATING TO BUILDINGS Selection of site Basic functions of buildings Major components of buildings. Types of foundation

Bearing capacity of soils General Principles of Brick masonry Stone masonry Beams Lintels Columns

Doors and windows Introduction to Green Building and Interior Design

UNIT III 7 Hours

WATER SUPPLY AND TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS Sources of water Supply Methods of Rain Water Harvesting Flow Diagram of Water treatment

Process Modes of Transportation Systems. Classification of Highways-Components of roads

Bituminous and cement concrete roads. Importance of railways - Gauges Components of permanent

way Types of bridges.

UNIT IV 8 Hours

ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURING PROCESSES Materials classification, mechanical properties of cast iron, steel and high speed steel Casting process-

Introduction to green sand moulding, pattern, melting furnace electric furnace Introduction to metal

forming process and types Introduction to arc and gas welding Centre lathe, Drilling and Milling

machines principal parts, operations.



UNIT V 8 Hours

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND REFRIGERATION Internal Combustion (IC) Classification, main components, working principle of a two and four stroke

petrol and diesel engines, differences Refrigeration working principle of vapour compression and

absorption system Introduction to Air conditioning.

UNIT VI 8 Hours

ENERGY, BOILERS, TURBINE AND POWER PLANTS Energy-Solar, Wind, Tidal, Geothermal, Biomass and Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion

(OTEC)Boilers classification, Babcock and Wilcox and La-Mont Boilers, differences between fire

tube and water tube boiler Steam turbines- working principle of single stage impulse and reaction

turbines Power plant classification, Steam, Hydel, Diesel, and Nuclear power plants.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. N. Arunachalam, Bascis of Civil Engineering, Pratheeba Publishers, 2000

2. M. S. Palanichamy, Basic Civil Engineering, TMH, 2009

3. G. Shanmugamand M. S. Palanichamy, Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering,Tata

McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2009

4. Pravin Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Pearson Education India, Pearson,2013.

5. G. Shanmugam and S. Ravindran, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Tata McGraw- Hill

Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2013.

6. S. R. J. Shantha Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai,

2015

Assessment Pattern



1 7

10

17

2 7

10

17

3 4

6

4

14

4 7

12

19

5 5

10

15

6 6

12

18

Total 100


1. Classify Boiler.

2. What are the uses of high carbon steel?

3. Define welding.

4. Define soldering.

5. Define Brazing.

6. What do you mean by milling?

7. Classify IC Engines.

8. List the various components of IC Engines.

9. Define Refrigeration.

10. Classify Boiler.

11. What is turbine?

12. Define water tube boiler.

13. Name the main parts of a turbine.

14. Classify power plants.



15. Writedown the scope of Civil Engineering.

16. Define surveying.

17. List the ingredients of concrete.

18. State the basic principles of survey.

19. What is meant by lintel?

20. Write down the components of buildings.

21. List the functions of foundation.

22. What is meant by bearing capacity of soil?

23. What are the factors to be considered in selection of site?

24. Define gauges.

25. Name the components of permanent way.

26. State the importance of railway.

27. List out the types of bridge.

28. Write down the classification of highway.

29. What do you meant by rain water harvesting?

30. What are the factors to be considered in design of green building?

Understand 1. Compare reaction and impulse turbines.

2. What is the difference between renewable and non-renewable sources of energy?

3. What is the function of a hydraulic turbine?

4. What is the function of a surge tank in Hydel power plant?

5. What is the function of a moderator in Nuclear power plant?

6. How to select the boiler?

7. Why air is pre-heated before enter into boiler?

8. How does a fusible plug function in boiler?

9. What is the function of a spark plug in IC engine?

10. What is the function of a fuel injector in diesel engine?

11. Compare and contrast 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine.

12. Describe the characteristics of good building stone.

13. Explain the various functions of Civil Engineer.

14. Discuss in detail about principles of surveying.

15. Describe the characteristics of cement and concrete.

16. Differentiate the English and Flemish bonds brick masonry.

17. What are the points to be observed in the construction of brick masonry?

18. Discuss about any four super structure components.

19. Distinguish between shallow and deep foundation.

20. Distinguish between stone and brick masonry.

21. Differentiate bituminous and cement concrete roads.

22. Elucidate the components of permanent way.

23. Describe the cross section of bituminous pavement.

24. Elucidate different sources of water supply.

Apply

1. Explain in detail about rain water harvesting.

2. Explain the process of water treatment.

3. Enumerate the procedure for construction of water bound macadam road.



15GE206 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING 3 0 2 4

Common to CE (I Semester) and to AE,AG,AU, ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT,FD (II Semester)

Course Objectives

To learn the basics of computer organization.

To study the basics of C primitives, operators and expressions.

To understand the different primitive and user defined data types.


1. Recognize the basic concepts of computers.

2. Implement programs using operators and expressions.

3. Demonstrate the usage of control structures.

4. Execute programs using Arrays and strings.

5. Summarize the concepts of structures and functions.

UNIT I 8 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS Introduction to computers - Characteristics of Computers - Evolution of Computers - Computer

Generations - Basic Computer Organization - Number System - Problem Solving Techniques -

Features of a Good Programming Language.

UNIT II 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO C PROGRAMMING Overview of C-Structure of C program-Keywords-Constants- Variables-Data types-Type conversion

Operators and Expressions: Arithmetic-Relational-Logical-Assignment- Increment and Decrement-

Conditional-Bitwise -Precedence of operators-Managing I/O operations-Formatted I/O-Unformatted

I/O.

UNIT III 10 Hours

CONTROL STATEMENTS Decision Making and Branching: simple if statement-if else statement-nesting of if else Statement-

Switch Statement.Decision Making and Looping: while statement-do while statement-for statement-

Nested for statement Jump Statements: goto-break-continue-return statement

UNIT IV 9 Hours

ARRAYS AND STRINGS Arrays: Introduction, one dimensional array, declaration - Initialization of one dimensional array, two-

dimensional arrays, initializing two dimensional arrays, multi dimensional arrays.

Strings: Declaring and initializing string variables- Reading strings from terminal - writing string to

screen - String handling functions.

UNIT V

9 Hours

STRUCTURES AND FUNCTIONS Structures and Unions: Introduction-defining a structure- declaring structure variables-accessing

structure members- structure initialization-Unions-Enumerated data type

User Defined Functions: Elements of user defined functions -Definition of functions-return values and

their types- function calls-function declaration-categories of function -call by value and call by

reference-recursion-Preprocessor directives and macros.



FOR FURTHER READING Creating and manipulating document using word - Mail merge - Creating spread sheet with charts and

formula using excel - developing power point presentation with Animations - C graphics using built in

functions

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Write a C program to perform arithmetic operations on integers and floating point numbers.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Write a C program to implement ternary operator and relational operators.

2 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Write a C program to find the greatest of three numbers using if-else statement.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Write a C program to display the roots of a quadratic equation with their types using switch case.

2 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Write a C program to generate pyramid of numbers using for loop.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Write a C program to perform Matrix Multiplication

2 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Write a C program to check whether the given string is Palindrome or not.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Write a C program to find the factorial of given number.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Design a structure to hold the following details of a student. Read the details of a student and display

them in the following format Student

details: rollno, name, branch, year, section, cgpa.

***************************************

NAME:

ROLL NO:

BRANCH:

YEAR:

SECTION:

CGPA:

Total:45+30 = 75 Hours



Reference(s)

1. Pradeep K. Sinha, Priti Sinha, Computer Fundamentals, BPB publications, 2008

2. Ashok. N. Kamthane, Computer Programming, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012

3. E.Balagurusamy, Programming in ANSI C, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012

4. Herbert Schildt, C -The complete Reference, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2013

5. Byron Gottfried, Programming with C, Schaum's Outlines, Tata Mcgraw-Hill, 2013

Assessment Pattern



1 6 4

4

6

20

2 6

2

12

20

3 2

2

4

6

6

20

4 6

2

4

4

4

20

5 4

2

2

2

6

4

20

Total 100


1. List the characteristics of a computer.

2. List the features of a good programming language.

3. Define a constant.

4. Define associativity.

5. List the three looping statements in C.

6. State the use of switch case statement.

7. Recall arrays.

8. Recall strings.

9. Define a structure.

10. Define a union.

Understand 1. Explain the generations of computers.

2. Exemplify the problem solving techniques.

3. Illustrate the structure of a C program with an example.

4. Summarize the operators in C.

5. Exemplify the decision making statements in C.

6. Classify the looping statements in C.

7. Classify the types of arrays in C.

8. Summarize the string handling functions in C.

9. Exemplify the process of defining a structure.

10. Explain the components of a function.

Apply 1. Predict the reason for calling C as a structured programming language.

2. Demonstrate the concept of number conversions.

3. Execute a C program to find the roots of a quadratic equation.

4. Implement a C program to use the bitwise operators.

5. Implement a C program to generate Fibonacci series.

6. Implement a C program to check whether a number i prime or not.

7. Implement a C program to perform matrix multiplication.

8. Implement a C program to check whether a string is a palindrome or not.

9. Implement a C program to find the size of a union.

10. Implement a C program to swap two numbers using call by value and call by reference.



Analyse 1. Differentiate while and do while statements.

2. Compare structure and union in C.

3. Organize the basic computer organization.

4. Differentiate == and = operators.

5. Differentiate break and continue statements.

Evaluate 1. Check the value of the expression c=(x*y+(z/x)) with x=10,y=20,z=30.

2. Determine the sum of n numbers using functions.

3. Determine the vowels using switch case statement.

4. Differentiate the use of strcpy() and strncpy() functions.

Create 1. Generate a structure to store the following details: Rollno, Name, Mark1, Mark2, Mark3,

Total, Average, Result and Class. Write a program to read Rollno, name and 3 subject marks.

Find out the total, result and class as follows:

a) Total is the addition of 3 subject marks.

b) Result is "Pass" if all subject marks are greater than or equal to 50 else "Fail".

c) Class will be awarded for students who have cleared 3 subjects

i. Class "Distinction" if average >=75

ii. Class "First" if average lies between 60 to 74 (both inclusive)

iii. Class "Second" if average lies between 50 & 59 (both inclusive)

d) Repeat the above program to manipulate 10 students' details and sort the structures as per

rank obtained by them.

2. Derive a C program that determines whether a given integer is odd or even and displays the

number and description on the same line.

15GE207 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 0 0 4 2

Common to CE,CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (I Semester) and to

AE, AG,AU,ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT, FD (II Semester)

Course Objectives

To learn conventions and use of drawing tools in making engineering drawings.

To understand the engineering drawing methods and procedures to draw two dimensional

drawings from three dimensional model and vice versa.

To provide the practice for converting simple drawing into the computer aided drawing.


1. Recognize the conventions and apply dimensioning concepts while drafting simple objects.

2. Develop the two dimensional drawings from three dimensional model and vice versa.

3. Utilize the visualization skill to convert simple drawing into the computer aided drawing.

12 Hours

CONVENTIONS AND BASIC DRAWINGS Importance - conventions - ISO and BIS - drawing tools and drawing sheets - lettering, numbering,

dimensioning, lines and symbols-Conic sections-types constructions-ellipse,parabola and hyperbola-

eccentricity and parallelogram method.



14 Hours

PROJECTIONS Principles-first and third angle projections - Points - first angle projection of points Straight lines -

parallel, perpendicular and inclined to one reference plane-Solid - cylinders, pyramids, prisms and

cones- perspective projections.

12 Hours

ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS AND SECTION OF SOLIDS Orthographic Projections - concepts - front view, top view and side view of simple solids -Section of

Solids-simple illustrations.

12 Hours

ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES Importance- orthographic to isometric projection- simple and truncated solids.

Development of surfaces - cylinders, pyramids, prisms, cones and simple truncated objects.

10 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO AUTOCAD Basics commands of AutoCAD- two dimensional drawing, editing, layering and dimensioning -

coordinate systems-Drawing practice - orthographic views of simple solids using AutoCAD.

Total: 60 Hours

Reference(s)

1. K Venugpoal, Engineering Drawing and Graphics, Third edition, New Age International,

2005.

2. Basant Agrawal, Mechanical drawing, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.

3. Engineering Drawing Practice for Schools & Colleges, BUREAU OF INDIAN

STANDARDS-SP46, 2008.

4. N. D. Bhatt and V. M. Panchal, Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House Pvt.

Limited, 2008.

5. K.V.Natarajan, A Text Book of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, 2013.

6. George Omura, Brian C. Benton, Mastering AutoCAD 2015 and AutoCAD LT 2015:

Autodesk Official Press, Wiley Publisher, 2015.

15MA301 FOURIER SERIES AND TRANSFORMS 3 2 0 4

(Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech. except CSE)

Course Objectives

To understand the concepts of Fourier series, Transforms and Boundary Conditions, which

will enable them to model and analyze the physical phenomena

To implement the Fourier analysis, an elegant method in the study of heat flow, fluid

mechanics and electromagnetic fields.

To summarize and apply the mathematical aspects that contribute to the solution of one

dimensional wave equation

To develop enough confidence to identify and model mathematical patterns in real world and


environment.




1. Recognize the periodicity of a function and formulate the same as a combination of sine and

cosine using Fourier series.

2. Formulate a function in frequency domain whenever the function is defined in time domain.

3. Apply the Fourier transform, which converts the time function into a sum of sine waves of

different frequencies, each of which represents a frequency component.

4. Classify a partial differential equation and able to solve them.

5. Use the Z-transform to convert a discrete-time signal, which is a sequence of real or complex

numbers, into a complex frequency domain representation.

UNIT I 9 Hours

FOURIER SERIES Dirichlet's conditions - General Fourier series - Odd and even functions - Half range cosine and sine

series - Root mean square value.

UNIT II

13 Hours

LAPLACE TRANSFORM Laplace Transform- Existence Condition -Transforms of Standard Functions - Unit step function, Unit

impulse function- Properties- Transforms of Derivatives and Integrals - Initial and Final Value

Theorems - Laplace transform of Periodic Functions - Inverse Laplace transforms.

UNIT III 8 Hours

FOURIER TRANSFORM Fourier Integral Theorem- Fourier Transform and Inverse Fourier Transform- Sine and Cosine

Transforms - Properties - Transforms of Simple Functions - Convolution Theorem - Parseval's

Identity

UNIT IV 8 Hours

APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Classification of Second Order Quasi Linear Partial Differential Equations - Fourier Series Solutions

of One Dimensional Wave Equation - One Dimensional Heat Equation - Steady State Solution of

Two-Dimensional Heat Equation - Fourier Series Solutions in Cartesian Coordinates.

UNIT V 7 Hours

Z -TRANSFORM Z-Transform - Elementary Properties - Inverse Z-Transform - Convolution Method- Partial fraction

method - Solution of Difference Equations using Z-Transform.

FOR FURTHER READING Solutions of one dimensional wave equation and heat equations using Laplace transforms method.


Reference(s)

1. Larry.C.Andrews and Bhimsen.K.Shivamoggi, Integral Transforms for Engineers, First

Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2007

2. Ian.N.Sneddan, The Use of Integral Transforms, 2ndEdition, McGraw Hill companies, 1972.

3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Eighth Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc,

Singapore, 2008.

4. Peter V. O. Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Seventh Edition, Cenage Learning

India Private Ltd, 2012.



5. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Fortieth Edition, Khanna Publications, New

Delhi 2007.

6. C. Ray Wylie and C. Louis Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Ltd, 2003.

Assessment Pattern



1 2

2

6

6

6

22

2 2

6

6

6

6

26

3

2

2

6

6

16

4

2

6

6

6

20

5 2

2

6

6

16

Total 100


1. State the Dirichlet’s Conditions.

2. Define even and odd function graphically.

3. List out the complex Fourier transform pair.

4. State convolution theorem in Fourier transforms.

5. Label the condition for the existence of Laplace Transform.

6. Reproduce L (t sin at).

7. State the final value theorem for Laplace Transform.

8. Label the inverse Laplace Transform of 1/(s2+w2)2 .

9. Recognize .

10. Recall the Z – Transform of .

Understand

1. Infer the half-range cosine series for the function .

2. Interpret the Fourier series of period 2 for the function .

3. Identify the Fourier transform of . Hence evaluate and

4. Illustrate the Fourier Sine and Cosine transform of and evaluate .

5. Exemplify using Laplace Transform.

6. Indicate the inverse Laplace transform of by the method of partial fraction.

7. Use convolution theorem to find the inverse Laplace transform of

.

( 1) ( )z f n interms of f z

cos2

n

xxxf 0,

212

10)(

xx

xxxf

1||0

11

xfor

xforxxf

0

2

sindx

x

x

0

4

.dxx

xsin

axe

0

22)( xa

dx

t

duutu

0

)cos(sin

( 1)( 2)( 3)

z

z z z

1412

82

zz

z



8. Classify the possible solutions of one dimensional wave equation.

9. Formulate .

10. Summarize Z-transform.

Apply

1. Execute the function to represent as a Fourier series of periodicity

2.

2. A taut string of length L is fastened at both ends. The midpoint of the string is taken to a height of

b and then released from rest in this position. Find the displacement of the string at any time t.

3. Find the Fourier transform of . Hence evaluate and .

4. Find the Fourier transform of hence evaluate and .

5. Verify the initial and final value theorem for the function 1 + e-2t.

6. Find .

7. Using Convolution theorem find the inverse Laplace transform of .

8. Find using Partial fraction method.

9. Using Convolution theorem evaluate

.

10. Solve the differential equation

.

Analyze

1. Organize the sine series for in the interval.

2. A tightly stretched string of length ‘ ’ fastened at both ends. The mid-point of the string taken to

a height ‘b’ and show that the displacement at any time‘t’ is given by

.

3. Organize the Fourier transform of f(x) given by . Hence evaluate

.

4. Integrate using transform method.

( ) ( )dF

z nf t z zdz

),(cos)( inxxf

axfor

axforxaxf

||0

0

2

sindx

x

x

0

4

.dxx

xsin

axfor

axforxf

||,0

||,1)(

0

sindx

x

xdx

x

x

0 2

2sin

t

ttL

3cos2cos

25

1

22ss

)3)(2(

22

1

ppp

ppL

2

1

( 1)( 3)

zz

z z

( 3) 3 ( 1) 2 ( ) 0 (0) 4, (1) 0 (2) 8y n y n y n given that y y and y

lxlinxl

lxinx

xf

2

20

)( l,0

........

3cos

3sin

3

1cossin

1

18),(

322

atxatxbtxy

2 2

( )

0

a x for x af x

for x a

3

0

sin cos

4

t t tdt

t

0

2222bxax

dx



5. Organize the Fourier sine and cosine transform of .

6. Prove that the Laplace Transform of the triangular wave of period 2 defined by

f (t) = is .

7. Organize the inverse Laplace transform of using partial fraction.

8. Solve using Laplace Transforms .

9. Find by the method of partial fraction.

10. Using Z – Transform solve .

Evaluate

1. Determine the Fourier series of the function f(x) of Period 2 given by .

2. A string is stretched between two fixed points at a distance apart and the points of the string

are given initial velocities ‘u’ where x being the distance from one

end point. Find the displacement of the string at any subsequent time.

3. Use transforms method to evaluate .

4. Determine the Fourier cosine transform of . Hence prove is a self-reciprocal.

5. Choose the Laplace transform of the function f(t) with period , where

f(t) = .

6. Using Laplace transform evaluate .

7. Using Convolution theorem find the inverse Laplace transform of .

15MC302 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY 3 2 0 4

Course Objectives

To learn various mechanisms and find their velocity and acceleration

To generate the cam profile for radial cams

To determine gear ratio for simple, compound, reverted and epicycle gear train

To understand the effects of dry friction in transmission and in machine components

, 0 1

( ) 2 , 1 2

0, 2

x x

f x x x

x

2,2

0,

tt

tt

2tan

1

2

sh

s

134

2

2

ss

s

1)0(';0)0(;442

2

yyteydt

dy

dt

yd t

2

1

2( 2)( 4)

zz

z z

( ) 3 ( 1) 4 ( 2) 0, 2 (0) 3 (1) 2y n y n y n n given that y and y

xinx

xinx

xf

02

1

02

1

)(

2

2)2(

0,

xinxc

xincx

u

2 2

0( 1)( 4)

dx

x x

22xa

e

2

2

x

e

2

2,0

0,sin

tfor

tfort

0

32sin dttte

t

25

1

22ss




1. Explain the basics and working of commonly used mechanisms

2. Draw the velocity and acceleration diagrams for planar mechanisms

3. Construct the cam profile for given follower motion

4. Identify the effects of friction in machine components

5. Determine speed ratio for simple, compound and planetary gear systems

UNIT I 9 Hours

BASICS OF MECHANISMS Basic concepts of link, pair, chain, mechanism, machine and structure - degree of freedom - mobility

of mechanism - Kutzbach criterion - Grashoffs law - Inversions of mechanisms: Four bar and slider

crank - Mechanical advantage - Transmission angle - Description of some common mechanisms:

Straight line generators, dwell mechanisms, ratchets and escapements, universal joint - Basic

structures of robot manipulators (serial and parallel)

UNIT II 9 Hours

KINEMATICS Displacement, velocity and acceleration - Graphical method of velocity (relative velocity method) and

acceleration diagrams for simple mechanisms - Kliens construction for single slider crank mechanism

- Coriolis component of acceleration

UNIT III 9 Hours

KINEMATICS OF CAM Classifications of cam and follower - Radial cam nomenclature - Analysis of follower motion:

uniform velocity motion, Simple harmonic motion, uniform acceleration and retardation motion and

cycloidal motion - Construction of cam profile for a radial cam - Pressure angle - undercutting

UNIT IV 9 Hours

DRY FRICTION Types of Friction - Types of Dry friction: Static, Dynamic and Rolling friction - Laws Friction in

inclined plane and screw threads - Friction in Journal bearings Friction in clutches: Single plate, multi

plate clutches and cone clutches - Friction in flat and V-belt drives - Friction aspects in brakes

UNIT V 9 Hours

GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS Law of toothed gearing - Involutes and cycloidal tooth profiles - Spur gear terminology and

definitions - Gear tooth action - Interference and undercutting Problems Helical, bevel, worm, rack

and pinion gears [basics only] - Introduction to gear correction - gear trains: Speed ratio - train value -

Parallel axis gear trains - Epicyclic gear trains - Determination of gear speeds using tabular method

FOR FURTHER READING Internal and external shoe brakes - Davis and Ackermanns steering mechanisms - Instantaneous

method of velocity and acceleration diagram - Tangent and circular arc cams - Automobile gear box:

constant mesh


Reference(s)

1. S. S. Rattan, Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New

Delhi, 2014.

2. Ashok G. Ambekar, Mechanism and Machine Theory, Prentice Hall of India Learning. Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2009



3. Joseph E. Shigley, John J. Uicker and Gordon R. Pennock, Theory of Machines and

Mechanism, Tata McGraw-Hall Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2009

4. R. S. Khurmi and J. K. Gupta, Theory of Machines, Eurasia Publishing House, New Delhi,

2008.

5. Kenneth J.Waldron and Garny L. Kinzel, Kinematics, Dynamics and Design of Machinery,

Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007

Assessment Pattern



1 3 2

2 3

2 2 2

2

2

2

20

2 3 2

2 4

2 1 2

2

2

20

3 3 2

2 3

2 2 2

2

2

20

4 3 2

2 4

2 2 2

2

1

20

5 3 2

2 4

2 2 2

1

2

20

Total 100


1. Define kinematic link, pair and chain.

2. Define Inversion of mechanism.

3. Define Kutzbach criterion to plane mechanism.

4. Define velocity and acceleration of a link.

5. What are all the classifications of cams?

6. Define pressure angle of the cam.

7. Define law of gearing.

8. Define module of gears.

9. Define static and dynamic friction.

10. List out the materials used for brake lining.

Understand 1. What are the differences between a machine and a structure?

2. What is a sliding pair, and how it differs from turning and rolling pair?

3. How to find the length of stroke of the crank and slotted lever quick return motion

mechanism?

4. How to draw the velocity and acceleration diagram for a slider link?

5. What is the difference between prime circle and pitch circle of cam?

6. Differentiate pitch and trace point of a cam.

7. How the power is transmitted in bevel and worm gear drive?

8. Which type of profile generally used in gear? Give reason

9. How to find the velocity ratio of epicyclic gear train?

10. What type of belt drive is selected for rotating the opposite direction of rotation of driver and

driven pulley?

Apply 1. Sketch and describe working of bicycle free wheel sprocket mechanism

2. A wheel accelerates uniformly from rest to 2000 r.p.m. in 20 seconds. What is its

angular acceleration? How many revolutions does the wheel make in attaining the speed of

2000 r.p.m.?

3. A crank and slotted lever mechanism used in a shaper has a centre distance of

300 mm between the centre of oscillation of the slotted lever and the centre of rotation of the

crank. The radius of the crank is 120 mm. Find the ratio of the time of cutting to the time of

return stroke

4. Find the mobility of slider crank mechanism



5. In a four bar chain ABCD, AD is fixed and is 150 mm long. The crank AB is 40

mm long and rotates at 120 r.p.m. clockwise, while the link CD = 80 mm oscillates about D.

BC and AD are of equal length. Find the angular velocity of link CD when angle BAD = 60°

6. A four bar mechanism has the following dimensions: DA = 300 mm ; CB = AB = 360 mm ;

DC = 600 mm. The link DC is fixed and the angle ADC is 60°. The driving link DA rotates

uniformly at a speed of 100 r.p.m. clockwise and the constant driving torque has the

magnitude of 50 N-m. Determine the velocity of the point B and angular velocity of the

driven link CB. Also find the actual mechanical advantage and the resisting torque if the

efficiency of the mechanism is 70 per cent.

7. A body, resting on a rough horizontal plane required a pull of 180 N inclined at 30º to the

plane just to move it. It was found that a push of 220 N inclined at 30º to the plane just moved

the body. Determine the weight of the body and the coefficient of friction.

8. Determine the maximum, minimum and average pressure in plate clutch when the axial force

is 4 kN. The inside radius of the contact surface is 50 mm and the outside radius is 100 mm.

Assume uniform wear.

9. A pair of gears, having 40 and 20 teeth respectively, are rotating in mesh,the speed of the

smaller being 2000 r.p.m. Determine the velocity of sliding between the gear teeth faces at

the point of engagement, at the pitch point, and at the point of disengagement if the smaller

gear is the driver. Assume that the gear teeth are 20° involute form, addendum length is 5 mm

and the module is 5 mm.

10. A cam is to give the following motion to a knife-edged follower :

1. Outstroke during 60° of cam rotation ; 2. Dwell for the next 30° of cam rotation ; 3. Return

stroke during next 60° of cam rotation, and 4. Dwell for the remaining 210° of cam rotation.

The stroke of the follower is 40 mm and the minimum radius of the cam is 50 mm. The

follower moves with uniform velocity during both the outstroke and return strokes. Draw the

profile of the cam when (a) the axis of the follower passes through the axis of the cam shaft,

and (b) the axis of the follower is offset by 20 mm from the axis of the cam shaft.

11. In a symmetrical tangent cam operating a roller follower, the least radius of the cam is 30 mm

and roller radius is 17.5 mm. The angle of ascent is 75° and the total lift is 17.5 mm. The

speed of the cam shaft is 600 r.p.m. Calculate: 1. the principal dimensions of the cam; 2. the

accelerations of the follower at the beginning of the lift, where straight flank merges into the

circular nose and at the apex of the circular nose. Assume that there is no dwell between

ascent and descent

Analyse 1. What happens to friction when we use wheels to roll an object instead of sliding it?

2. In a crank and slotted lever quick return motion mechanism, the distance between the fixed

centres is 240 mm and the length of the driving crank is 120 mm. Find the inclination of the

slotted bar with the vertical in the extreme position and the time ratio of cutting stroke to the

return stroke. If the length of the slotted bar is 450 mm, find the length of the stroke if the line

of stroke passes through the extreme positions of the free end of the lever.

3. In a crank and slotted lever quick return motion mechanism, the distance between the fixed

centres O and C is 200 mm. The driving crank CP is 75 mm long. The pin Q on the slotted

lever, 360 mm from the fulcrum O, is connected by a link QR 100 mm long, to a pin R on the

ram. The line of stroke of R is perpendicular to OC and intersects OC produced at a point 150

mm from C. Determine the ratio of times taken on the cutting and return strokes.

4. The crank and connecting rod of a theoretical steam engine are 0.5 m and 2 m long

respectively. The crank makes 180 r.p.m. in the clockwise direction. When it has turned 45°

from the inner dead centre position, determine : 1. velocity of piston, 2. angular velocity of

connecting rod, 3. velocity of point E on the connecting rod 1.5 m from the gudgeon pin, 4.

velocities of rubbing at the pins of the crank shaft, crank and crosshead when the diameters

of their pins are 50 mm, 60 mm and 30 mm respectively, 5. position and linear velocity of

any point G on the connecting rod which has the least velocity relative to crank shaft.

5. The following data relate to a pair of 20° involute gears in mesh:

Module = 6 mm, Number of teeth on pinion = 17, Number of teeth on gear = 49 ; Addenda



on pinion and gear wheel = 1 module.

Find: 1. The number of pairs of teeth in contact; 2. The angle turned through by the pinion

and the gear wheel when one pair of teeth is in contact, and 3. The ratio of sliding to rolling

motion when the tip of a tooth on the larger wheel (i) is just making contact, (ii) is just

leaving contact with its mating tooth, and (iii) is at the pitch point.

Evaluate 1. Two involute gears of 20° pressure angle are in mesh. The number of teeth on pinion is 20

and the gear ratio is 2. If the pitch expressed in module is 5 mm and the pitch linem speed is

1.2 m/s, assuming addendum as standard and equal to one module, find:

1. the angle turned through by pinion when one pair of teeth is in mesh; and

2. the maximum velocity of sliding.

2. A pinion having 18 teeth engages with an internal gear having 72 teeth. If the gears have

involute profiled teeth with 20° pressure angle, module of 4 mm and the addenda on pinion

and gear are 8.5 mm and 3.5 mm respectively, find the length of path of contact.

3. Two mating gears have 20 and 40 involute teeth of module 10 mm and 20° pressure angle.

The addendum on each wheel is to be made of such a length that the line of contact on each

side of the pitch point has half the maximum possible length. Determine the addendum height

for each gear wheel, length of the path of contact, arc of contact and contact ratio.

4. In an epicyclic gear train, an arm carries two gears A and B having 36 and 45 teeth

respectively. If the arm rotates at 150 r.p.m. in the anticlockwise direction about the centre of

the gear A which is fixed, determine the speed of gear B. If the gear A instead of being fixed,

makes 300 r.p.m. in the clockwise direction, what will be the speed of gear B?

Create 1. Design with suitable drive to transmit the power of 12 kW

2. A single dry plate clutch transmits 7.5 kW at 900 r.p.m. The axial pressure is limited to 0.07

N/mm2. If the coefficient of friction is 0.25, find 1. Mean radius and face width of the friction

lining assuming the ratio of the mean radius to the face width as 4, and 2. Outer and inner

radii of the clutch plate.

15MC303 ELECTRON DEVICES AND DIGITAL

ELECTRONICS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To understand the fundamentals of digital logic

To understand the various number systems and codes

To design various combinational and sequential circuits

To study the basics about synchronous and asynchronous circuits


1. Understand how Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors Impact Society and analyse the

Operation of JFET, MOSFET Using Semiconductor Properties

2. Examine the structure of various number systems and its application in digital logic design.

3. Create a gate-level implementation of a combinational logic function and analyse its timing

behaviour.

4. Design a sequential logic circuits using state diagram and apply the sequential memories for

logic design.

5. Differentiate synchronous and asynchronous circuits in a logic design.



UNIT I 9 Hours

FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS JFET's Drain and Transfer characteristics,-Current equations-Pinch off voltage and its significance

- MOSFET- Characteristics- Threshold voltage - Channel length modulation, D-MOSFET,

E-MOSFET-, Current equation - Equivalent circuit model and its parameters.

UNIT II 9 Hours

MINIMIZATION TECHNIQUES AND LOGIC GATES Number systems, Basic digital circuits: Logic cricuits - universal building block construction using

logic gates - Boolean Algebra- Simplification of Boolean functions - special forms of Boolean

functions minterm (SOP) maxterm (POS) - K Map representation of logic functions - simplification of

logic functions using K Map - Dont care conditions - Five variable K maps

UNIT III 9 Hours

COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS Half and Full Adders-Half and Full Subtractors - Code converters - Encoder-Decoder - Multiplexer-

Demultiplexer - Binary/ BCD adders, subtractors - Carry look ahead adder- parity checker-parity

generators- Magnitude comparator

UNIT IV 10 Hours

SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS General model of sequential circuits - flip-flops - latches - level triggering, edge triggering - master

slave configuration - Mealy/Moore models - state diagram - state table - State minimization State

assignment Excitation table and maps - shift registers - Sequential Memories: Recirculation shift

registers Programmable Logic Devices (PLD) - Programmable Logic Array (PLA) - Programmable

Array Logic (PAL) Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) - Implementation of combinational

logic circuits using ROM, PLA, PAL

UNIT V

8 Hours

SYNCHRONOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS Design of synchronous sequential circuits - parity checker - sequence detector - Asynchronous

sequential logic: Race conditions and Cycles - Hazards in combinational circuits. FOR FURTHER READING Memory types and terminology - static and dynamic RAM - ECL RAM - Non Volatile RAM --First

in first out memories - Magnetic core memories - magnetic disk memories- Magnetic tape and Bubble

memories

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. M. Morris Mano, Michel D. Ciletti, Digital Design, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012.

2. Ronald J. Tocci Neal S. Widmer and Gregory L. Moss, Digital Systems: Principles and

Applications, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.

3. A. Anand Kumar, Fundamentals of Digital Circuits, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. 2014.

4. Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Pearson Education Inc, New Delhi, 2003.

5. Donald P.Leach and Albert Paul Malvino, Digital Principles and Applications, Tata McGraw-

Hill Charles H.Roth. Fundamentals of Logic Design, Thomson Learning, 2003

6. Charles H.Roth. Fundamentals of Logic Design, Thomson Learning, 2003.



Assessment Pattern



1 4 3

2 7

4

20

2 2 3

2 5

4

2 2

20

3 3 3

2 4

3 3

2

20

4 4 3

2

3

3 5

20

5 4 3

4 4

2 3

20

Total 100


1. List the different classifications of binary codes.

2. Define Logic Gates.

3. State Demorgan’s theorem.

4. What are called ‘don’t care’ conditions?

5. Define prime implicant?

6. Define ‘minterms’ and ‘maxterms’.

7. Define Full Adder.

8. What is multiplexer?

9. Draw the structure of NMOS devices.

10. The passage of majority charge carriers from source to drain terminal takes place through the

channel only after an application of

a. Drain to Source Voltage (VDS)

b. Gate to Source Voltage (VGS)

c. Gate to Gate Voltage (VGG)

d. Drain to Drain Voltage (VDD)

11. JFET is considered as a voltage controlled device because

a. gate current is controlled by drain voltage

b. drain current is controlled by gate voltage

c. gate current is controlled by source voltage

d. drain current is controlled by source voltage

Understand 1. Define Duality Property.

2. Find the Octal equivalent of the decimal number 25.

3. Find the Decimal equivalent of the Octal Number 64.

4. Express x’+yz as the sum of minterms.

5. Find the complement of x’+yz.

6. Implement EX-OR gate and OR gate using NOR gate.

7. Design the combinational circuit with 3 inputs and 1 output. The output is 1 when the binary

value of the inputs is less than 3.The output is 0 otherwise.

8. Draw the state diagram of ‘T’ FF, ‘D’ FF.

9. How many parity bits are required to form Hamming code if message bits are 6?

10. Generate the even parity hamming codes for the following binary data 1101, 1001.

11. Derive the characteristic equation of a T flip flop.

12. Derive the characteristic equation of a SR flip flop.

13. Define interfacing?

14. On the applicationof VDD to JFET,the biasing strategy of gate to channel at any point over the

channel yields output equal to _______.

a. numerical sum of VDS & VGS ----

b. numerical difference of VDS & VGS



c. numerical product of VDS & VGS

d. numerical division of VDS & VGS

15. Where is the current source connected in JFET common gate amplifier circuit configuration

in the midst of input and output terminals so as to generate the gain of gmVgs ?

a. between source and drain terminals

b. between gate and drain terminals

c. between source and gate terminals

d. between source, gate and drain terminals

Apply 1. Why are NAND and NOR gates known as Universal gates?

2. Simplify using K-map to obtain a minimum POS expression:

(A’ + B’+C+D) (A+B’+C+D) (A+B+C+D’) (A+B+C’+D’) (A’+B+C’+D’) (A+B+C’+D)

3. Find the Minterm expansion of f(a,b,c,d) = a’(b’+d) + acd’.

4. Show that if all the gates in a two – level AND-OR gate networks are replaced by NAND

gates the output function does not change.

5. Implement Y = (A+C) (A+D’) ( A+B+C’) using NOR gates only.

6. Using a single 7483, Draw the logic diagram of a 4 bit adder/Subtractor.

7. Realize a BCD to Excess 3 code conversion circuit starting from its truth table.

8. Design a synchronous counter with states 0,1, 2,3,0,1 …………. Using JK FF.

9. Using SR flip flops, design a parallel counter which counts in the sequence

000,111,101,110,001,010,000 ………….

10. Design an asynchronous sequential circuit with two inputs X and Y and with one output Z.

Whenever Y is 1, input X is transferred to Z.When Y is 0, the output does not change for any

change in X.

11. Design an asynchronous sequential circuit with two inputs X and Y and with one output Z.

Whenever Y is 1, input X is transferred to Z.When Y is 0, the output does not change for any

change in X.

12. How will you minimize the number of rows in the primitive state table of an incompletely

specified sequential machine?

13. Which is the most significant current generating parameter in common drain JFET amplifier?

a.gmVi

b.gmVgs

c.gmrd

d. gm ( 1 + Vgs )

Analyse 1. Construct the state diagram and primitive flow table for an asynchronous network that has

two inputs and one output. The input sequence X1X2 = 00, 01, 11 causes the output to

become 1.The next input change then causes the output to return to 0.No other inputs will

produce a 1 output.

2. Develop the state diagram and primitive flow table for a logic system that has 2 inputs x and y

and an output z. And reduce primitive flow table. The behavior of the circuit is stated as

follows. Initially x=y=0 Whenever x=1 and y = 0 then z=1, whenever x = 0 and y = 1 then z =

0.When x = y = 0 or x = y = 1 no change in z it remains in the previous state. The logic

system has edge triggered inputs without having a clock 1 .the logic system changes state on

the rising edges of the 2 inputs. Static input values are not to have any effect in changing the

Z output.

3. Which region of drain characteristic displays linearity with the direct variation in current

corresponding to voltage especially for lesser values of drain-to-source voltage (VDS) by

enabling the JFET to act as an ordinary resistor?

a. Breakdown Region



b. Pinch-off Region

c. Ohmic Region

d. Saturation Region

15MC304 ELECTRICAL MACHINES 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

To understand the working principle and performance characteristics of DC Generator and

DC Motor

To understand the working principle of induction motor and synchronous machines

To provide knowledge in the area of special electrical machines


1. Analyze the characteristics of different types of DC generator and DC motor

2. Understand the operations of transformer under various load conditions

3. Know the construction and working principle of induction machines

4. Understand the construction and working principle of synchronous machines

5. Summarize the principle of operation of different kinds of special machines.

UNIT I 9 Hours

DC MACHINES Constructional details - Principle - Self and separately excited generators - Characteristics of series

and shunt generators. DC Motors: Types - Characteristics of series and shunt motors, starting

methods.

UNIT II 9 Hours

TRANSFORMERS Constructional details - Types of windings - Principle of operation - EMF equation - Transformation

ratio - Transformer on no-load and load - Equivalent circuit - Auto transformer.

UNIT III 9 Hours

INDUCTION MACHINES Three phase induction motors: Constructional details - Types of rotors - Principle of operation - Slip -

Slip-torque characteristics - Condition for maximum torque - Losses and efficiency - Starters - Single

Phase induction motors: Double field revolving Theory -Types-Applications

UNIT IV 9 Hours

SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES Constructional details - Types of rotors, operating characteristics - Emf equation - Synchronous

reactance - Armature reaction - Voltage regulation - EMF, MMF, methods - Synchronous motor:

Principle of operation - Torque equation - Starting methods - V and inverted V curves

UNIT V 9 Hours

SPECIAL MACHINES Special machines - Shaded pole induction motor, reluctance motor, repulsion motor, hysteresis motor,

stepper motor, servo motor, BLDC. Dynamic, regenerative and plugging. FOR FURTHER READING Testing of DC machines - Brake test. Open circuit and short circuit test on transformer, No load and

blocked rotor tests, Speed control of DC motor- Armature control and field control, Speed control of

induction motor.



4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Load test on DC shunt motor

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Load test on DC series motor

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Load characteristics of separately excited DC generator

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Load test on single phase transformer

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 O C and S C test on single phase transformer

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Load test on three phase slip ring Induction motor

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Speed control of 3 phase Induction motor

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Load test on 1 phase Induction motor


Reference(s)

1. D.P.Kothari and J.J.Nagrath, Electric Machines, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,

New Delhi, 2010

2. A.E.Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley and Stephen D. Umans, Electric Machinery, Tata McGraw-

Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

3. Stephen J. Chapman, Electric Machinery Fundamentals, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company Limited, New Delhi, 2015.

4. P. S. Bhimbhra, Electrical Machinery, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2011.

5. B.L.Theraja and A.K.Theraja, A Text Book of Electrical Technology - Volume II, S.Chand

and Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.

Assessment Pattern



1 4 3

2 3

4 2

2

20

2 4 3

2 4

2

3 2

20

3 4 3

2 6

2 2

1

20

4 2 3

2 5

2 2

4

20

5 2 3

2 4

2

4

3

20

Total 100


1. What is mean by self excited and separately excited dc generator?

2. Define the term armature reaction in dc machines.



3. What is the basic principle of operation of DC motor?

4. How will you change the direction of rotation of a DC motor?

5. Define slip of induction motor.

6. Write down the equation for frequency of emf induced in an alternator.

7. List the factors on which the speed of a DC motor depends.

8. Write an expression for the slip of an induction motor.

9. List the different methods of speed control employed for AC motors.

Understand 1. Illustrate is the function of carbon brush and commutator used in DC generator.

2. Illustrate the performance characteristics of DC shunt, series, and compound generator.

3. Explain the different types of DC generators.

4. Derive the equation for torque developed in DC motor.

5. Explain the working of three point starter.

6. Explain the working of four point starter.

7. Explain the different types of induction motor.

8. Derive the equation for torque developed in induction motor.

9. Why is the emf not zero when the field current is reduced to zero in a dc generator?

10. Indicate the slip-torque characteristics curve of three phase induction motor.

Apply 1. Predict the constructional features of of salient - pole and nonsalient - pole alternators with

neat diagram.

2. Explain plugging and dynamic braking as applied to 3-phase induction motor.

3. Draw the no-load and load phasor diagram of a transformer. Express the magnetizing current

and loss component of the no-load current in terms of no-load power factor.

4. Demonstrate the working of of 3-phase induction motor with star-delta starter.

5. Implement the suitable starter for DC motor which is used in electric locomotives.

6. Select the suitable transformer for converting 220 V ac to 110 V ac voltage.

7. Compute the phasor diagram of transformer for resistive, inductive and capacitive load

conditions.

8. Compute the equivalent circuit of transformer referred to primary side.

9. Select the suitable motor to move the robot arm and explain.

10. Demonstrate the effect of armature flux on the main flux for leading power factor.

Analyse 1. With the aid of necessary sketches, compare variable reluctance stepper motor and permanent

magnet stepper motor.

2. Differentiate the hysteresis motor and repulsion motor.

3. Compare the features of salient pole and non-alient pole type alternator.

4. Induction motor will never run at its synchronous speed. Justify.

5. Distinguish the DC motor and generator.

6. Determine the frequency of EMF generated in an 8-pole alternator running at 900 r.p.m.?

7. How does the starter reduce the starting current to a safe value? Differentiate three point

starter with four point starter.

8. Distinguish the shell type transformer and core type transformer with neat diagram.

9. Compare the characteristics curves of DC shunt and series generators and discuss about their

shapes.

10. Make a comparison in the weight of copper required in an autotransformer and a two-winding

transformer of the same rating.

Create 1. Two series motors run at the speed of 500 rpm and 550 rpm respectively when taking 50 A at

500 V. The terminal resistance of each motor is 0.5 ohm. Calculate the speed of the



combination when connected in series and coupled mechanically. The combination is taking

50A on 500V supply.

2. An Induction motor has 4 poles and it is energized from a 50Hz supply. If the machine runs

on full load at 2% slip, determine synchronous speed and running speed and frequency of

rotor current.

15MC305 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To understand working principle of conventional and non conventional casting, welding and

metal working processes

To study the working of machining processes including non-conventional types

To learn about the production methods of thermo and thermosetting plastics


1. Explain the basics and working principle of sand casting and special casting processes

2. Explain the principles of different joining processes like welding, brazing, soldering and

adhesive bonding

3. Identify the suitable metal forming processes for various application

4. Demonstrate the process of conventional machining and explain the principles of a few non-

conventional machining processes

5. Recognize suitable method to produce thermo and thermosetting plastics

UNIT I

9 Hours

CASTING PROCESSES Casting types, procedure to make sand mould, types of core making, moulding tools, machine

moulding - Introduction to special casting techniques: CO2 moulding, shell molding, investment

casting, permanent mould casting, pressure die casting, centrifugal casting, continuous casting and

blow molding process - casting defects.

UNIT II 9 Hours

JOINING PROCESSES Introduction to welding process - Principle of arc and gas welding - Tools and equipment - Filler and

flux materials - Flame types - Weld defects - Inspection standards - Safety in welding - Other welding

processes: resistance welding, ultrasonic welding, TIG welding, MIG welding - Brazing and soldering

- Adhesive bonding

UNIT III 9 Hours

MECHANICAL WORKING OF METALS Introduction to hot and cold working - Forging: open and close die, upsetting - Rolling: high roll mills

and shape rolling - Extrusion: forward and backward, tube extrusion - Drawing of wires, rods and

tubes - Sheet metal work: shearing bending and drawing operations - Stretch forming - Special

forming methods: hydro forming, rubber pad forming - Powder metallurgy (basics only)

UNIT IV 9 Hours

MACHINING PROCESSES Constructional features of machine tools: universal milling machine, shaping machine, cylindrical

grinding machine, capstan and turret lathe - Basics of CNC machines - General principles and



applications of water jet machining, electro discharge machining, electro chemical machining and

laser beam machining

UNIT V 9 Hours

FORMING AND SHAPING OF PLASTICS Types of plastics - Characteristics of the forming and shaping processes -Moulding of Thermoplastics

- Working principles and typical applications of - Injection moulding -Plunger and screw machines -

Blow moulding -Rotational moulding -Film blowing -Extrusion - Typical industrial applications -

Thermoforming -Processing of Thermosets -Working principles and typical applications -

Compression moulding -Transfer moulding -Bonding of Thermoplastics -Fusion and solvent methods

-Induction and Ultrasonic methods

FOR FURTHER READING Foundry: Disamatic moulding process - Automobile body assembly - Basics of rapid prototyping -

Introduction to modular production system.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. J. P. Kaushish, Manufacturing Processes, Prentice Hall of India Learning Private Limited,

New Delhi, 2014.

2. P. N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology - Vol I and II, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company

Limited, New Delhi, 2013.

3. D. K. Singh, Fundamentals of Manufacturing Engineering, ANE Books, New Delhi, 2008

4. Roy A. Lindberg, Processes and Materials of Manufacture, Prentice Hall of India Learning.

Ltd., New Delhi, 2009

5. T. R. Mishra, Non-Conventional Machining, Narosha Publishing House, New Delhi, 2012

6. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production System and Computer Integrated Manufacturing,

Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2015.

Assessment Pattern



1 4 2

2 3 4

2 3

20

2 2 2

2 3 4

2

2

3

20

3 4 2

2 4 2

3

3

20

4 2 2

2 4

3 4

3

20

5 2 2

4 2

2

4

4

20

Total 100


1. List out various moulding tools.

2. Classify the die casting process.

3. Categorize the electrodes used in arc welding.

4. What do you mean by extrusion ratio?

5. Categorize the rubber forming process.

6. Recall applications of thermo plastics and thermosetting plastics, at least two for each.

7. What is meant by up-milling and down milling?

8. Specify the applications of cylindrical grinding.

9. Write down some welding defects.

10. What is meant by indexing?



Understand

1. What are the functions of a binder in moulding sand?

2. In what aspects the special casting differs from sand casting?

3. State the significance of inert gas in welding.

4. Write down the difference in terms of filler metal in soldering and brazing.

5. Mention the importance of flux in welding.

6. Which bulk deformation process is similar to squeezing of toothpaste from a collapsible tube?

7. How the ECM is differing from other electrolyte processes?

8. What is non-conventional in non-conventional machining processes?

9. Why V- belt is preferred for transmission?

10. Why thermosetting plastics cannot be reused?

11. State two differences between thermosetting and thermoplastics.

Apply 1. Which type of special welding process is applied in joining of aero space components?

2. How electrodes are selected for a job?

3. Select a suitable process to machine turbine blade and explain its working principle.

4. Sequence the operations carried out in an automobile assembly process in their order of

occurence.

5. Compare and contrast thermo plastics and thermosetting plastics.

6. Compute the depth of cut for octagonal face milling.

7. Explain the procedure to control the stroke of slider.

8. How to select proper tap for given size of thread?

9. Infer the relation between surface roughness and abrasive grades.

10. How the use and throw plastic tumblers are manufactured?

Analyse

1. Which type of material is used for producing the core chaplets? Why?

2. Why the tungsten is preferred material for non-consumable electrodes?

3. Why a cold worked metal is annealed?

4. In aero space industry which type of sheet metal forming process is used for producing the

different profiles in wings?

5. In which way brazing differs from welding?

6. List solution for avoiding over heating of tool during machining.

7. For mass production of surface milled parts which type of milling process is preferred?

8. When to go for CNC machines?

9. What kind of casting defects are detectable without any instrument and how to eliminate

them?

Evaluate

1. Prepare a comparison chart for the five methods used for producing thermo plastics.

Create

1. Which process can be used to make a hole of diameter one mm and depth of 300 mm in a

cylindrical copper rod? Why?

2. How to make a steel pipe of diameter 300 mm?



15MC306 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 2 0 2 3

Course Objectives

To understand the concepts of Object Oriented Programming.

To study the concepts of objects and classes.

To familiarize the types of constructors.


1. Understand the characteristics and data types of C++ language.

2. Understand the Objects and Classes of C++ language

3. Develop efficient programs using operator overloading

4. Demonstrate the concepts of polymorphism to large scale software

5. Apply the concepts of files streams to real world problems

UNIT I 6 Hours

INTRODUCTION Need for object oriented programming Procedural Languages vs. Object oriented approach -

Characteristics Object oriented programming - C++ Programming Basics: Basic Program

Construction - Output Using Cout - Input with Cin - Data types - Variables and Constants Operators -

Control Statements-Manipulators - Type conversion

UNIT II 6 Hours

OBJECTS AND CLASSES Objects and Classes Simple Class - C++ Objects as Physical Objects C++ Object as Data types-

Constructors and Destructors- Object as Function Arguments - Returning Objects from Functions -

Structures and Classes - Arrays and Strings.

UNIT III 6 Hours

OPERATOR OVERLOADING AND INHERITANCE Operator overloading and Inheritance Need of operator overloading- Overloading Unary Operators-

Overloading binary Operators - Overloading Special Operators - Data Conversion Inheritance:

Derived Class and Base Class - Derived Class Constructors-Overriding Member Functions-Class

Hierarchies-Public and Private Inheritance-Levels of Inheritance-Multiple Inheritance.

UNIT IV 6 Hours

POLYMORPHISM AND FILE STREAMS Polymorphism and File Streams Virtual Function Friend Function Static Function-Assignment and

Copy Initialization- Memory Management: new and delete Pointers to Objects, this Pointer- Streams

String I/O Character I/O Object I/O I/O with Multiple Objects File Pointers Disk I/O with Member

Functions- Error Handling in File I/O.

UNIT V 6 Hours

STREAMS Stream classes- Formatted I/O- I/O Manipulators- User defined manipulators- File handling-File

pointer and manipulation- Sequential and random access- Error handling. FOR FURTHER READING Function templates, overloaded function templates, user defined template arguments, class templates -

Exception Handling: Exception handling mechanism, multiple catch, nested try, rethrowing the

exception Namespaces std namespace- Standard Template Library.



3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Program using constructors

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Program to implement function overloading

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Implement the concept of default argument function.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Implement the concept of array of objects

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Implement a class with dynamic objects and use constructors and Destructors

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Implement the concept of inheritance.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Implement the concept of operator overloading.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Implement the concept of class using static data member and static member functions.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Implement friend and friend classes to add the private data member of two different classes.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 10 Implement and Program using files


Reference(s)

1. Robert Lafore, Object Oriented Programming in-C++,4th Edition, Galgotia

Publication,Pearson India, New Delhi, 2008

2. Deitel & Deitel, C++ How to program, Prentice Hall, 2005.

3. D.S.Malik, C++ Programming, Thomson, 2007.

4. K.R. Venugopal, Raj Kumar and T.Ravishankar, Mastering C++, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.

Assessment Pattern



1 4 4

4 4

2 2

20

2 2

2 4

4 4

2

2

20

3 2

2

6

2 2

6

20

4

2

2

6

2 2

6

20

5 2 2

2

6

6

2

20

Total 100




1. Define object.

2. State the features of object- oriented programming.

3. Define Recursion.

4. List the class members.

5. List the categories of static data members.

6. Recall the constructor declaration and definition.

7. State parameterized constructors.

8. State abstract class.

9. Recall operator overloading.

10. Reproduce the functionalities of file pointers.

11. Mention the purpose of exception handling.

Understand 1. Demonstrate the determination of errors while dealing with files.

2. Give examples for dynamic initialization of variables.

3. Indicate the objects usage in function argument.

4. Explain function overloading.

5. Demonstrate the usage of bool data type.

6. Discuss this pointer.

7. Interrelate overloading and constructor.

8. lllustrate dynamic object initialization.

9. Give examples for the operators that cannot be overloaded.

10. Summarize the behavior of the static data members of a class template differ from the

behavior of static data members of a normal class.

Apply 1. How does C++apply the operators in the arithmetic expression?

2. Explain the message passing in C++.

3. Examine pseudo code.

4. Generalize class declaration.

5. Show the format for calling a member function.

6. Organize constructor declaration.

7. Discover the creation of an array using new operator.

8. Organize a class specifier that creates a class called leverage with one private data member

Crowbar, of type int and one public function whose declaration is void proxy().

9. Compute runtime polymorphism in C++.

10. While copying the objects if you say a = b and assume that '=' operator is overloaded then

what it will call, a copy constructor or operator overloading function.

Analyse 1. Demonstrate how a static data is accessed by a static member function.

2. Define a supplier class. Assume that the items supplied by any given supplier are different

and varying in number. Use dynamic memory allocation in the constructor function to

achieve the solution.

3. How to implement the runtime polymorphism using C++?

4. How do you differentiate a constructor from an ordinary function?

5. Which is the parameter that is added to every non-static member function when it is called?

6. How to create an array using new operator?

7. How will you create manipulators?

8. How does the behavior of the static data members of a class template differ from the behavior

of static data members of a normal class?

9. How to define our own namespace?



Create 1. Define an examiner class. Provide all necessary data and function members to provide the

following: The examiner must access answer sheets of at least one subject; He may examine

answer sheets of multiple subjects. The examiner represents a college and also a university;

Most of the examiners are local and represent local university; and have more than one

constructor including one default and one with default argument. Provide a meaningful copy

constructor.

2. For a supermarket, define a bill class. All the bill objects will contain bill number, name of

clerk preparing the bill, each item with quantity and price and total amount to be paid. Total

items in the bill are varying. Define dynamic memory allocation constructor for bill class such

that any number of items from 1 to 50 can be accommodated in a single bill. There is an array

describing each item with a price. The price is to be picked up from that array. Now overload

= operator and provide reason for the need of such operator.

15MC307 ELECTRON DEVICES AND DIGITAL

ELECTRONICS LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To design and implement the digital circuits

To gain expertise in digital systems implementation


1. Acquire a basic knowledge in solid state electronics including diode, FET, BJT.

2. Design the digital circuits for a given application

3. Know digital systems and simulation of digital circuits

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 FET Characteristics

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Study of Logic gates

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates BCD to excess-3 code and vice versa

Binary to gray and vice-versa

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Design and implementation of 4 bit binary adder/ subtractor and BCD adder.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Design and implementation of Magnitude comparator.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Design and implement a multiplexer and de-multiplexer

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Design and implement an encoder and decoder



3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Construction and verification of 4 bit ripple counter and Mod 10 Ripple counter.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Implementation of SISO, SIPO, PISO and PIPO shift registers using Flip- flops

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. I. N. Nagrath, Electronics: Analog and Digital, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,

2009.

2. Anant Agarwal, Joffrey H. Lang, Foundations of Analog and Digital Electronic Circuit,

Elsevier, 2006.

15MC308 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY

LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

Operate conventional machine tools such as lathe, milling machine, shaping machine, drilling

machine, gear hobbing machine, surface grinding machine and tool and cutter grinder

Correlate the theory course on machining processes

Measure various linear dimensions


1. Operate conventional machine tools such as lathe, milling machine, shaping machine, drilling

machine, gear hobbing machine, surface grinding machine and tool and cutter grinder

2. Correlate the theory course on machining processes

3. Measure various linear dimensions

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Machining a model whose diameter is continuously varying throughout its length (cotter pin).

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Making a model of screw used in vernier caliper.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Practicing to make models like table, chair, rack, teapoy, stool, etc using arc welding equipment.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Fabrication of a pin and hole with push fit assembly using centre lathe.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Preparing the shaft/key/coupling assembly by selecting suitable machining operations and to list the

sequence of operations.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Machining of flange with four holes placed at 90 and with internal thread at the centre that can be

used to connect pipes.



3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Machining a spur gear with 14 number of teeth of module 2 mm by selecting suitable machine tool.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Grinding of single point cutting tool in the 10 mm MS square rod with standard nomenclature using

tool and cutter grinding machine.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Preparing the surface of the shaft within the tolerance limit of ±0.002 mm to assemble with a bearing

of inside diameter 22 mm.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 10 Producing a square bar from the given 25 mm shaft with minimum material wastage by selecting

suitable machining operations.

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Central Machine Tool Institute (CMTI), Machine Tool Design Handbook, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Ltd, Bangalore, 2008.

2. Geoffery Boothroyd and Winston A. Knight, Fundamentals of Machining and Machine Tools,

CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, Indian Edition, 2008.

3. Heinrich Gerling and Karl H. Heller, All About Machine Tools, New Age International

Limited Publishers, Noida, 2008

4. Steve F. Krar, Arthur R. Gill and Peter Smid, Technology of Machine Tools, Tata McGraw-

Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2008

15MC309 MINI PROJECT I 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To develop knowledge to formulate a real world problem and project's goals.

To identify the various tasks of the project to determine standard procedures.

To identify and learn new tools, algorithms and techniques.

To understand the various procedures for validation of the product and analysis the cost

effectiveness.

To understand the guideline to Prepare report for oral demonstrations.


1. Formulate a real world problem, identify the requirement and develop the design

solutions.

2. Express the technical ideas, strategies and methodologies.

3. Utilize the new tools, algorithms, techniques that contribute to obtain the solution

of the project.

4. Test and validate through conformance of the developed prototype and analysis

the cost effectiveness.

5. Prepare report and present the oral demonstrations.



15GE310 LIFE SKILLS: BUSINESS ENGLISH 0 0 2 -


Course Objectives

To acquire command in both the receptive skills (Listening, Reading) and the productive

skills (Writing and Speaking) of English language

To understand and make effective use of English language in business contexts


1. Listen, Read, Speak, and Write Business English to the level of becoming independent users

2. Appear for the Business English Certificate (BEC) Vantage level examination conducted by

the Cambridge English Language Assessment

UNIT I 15 Hours

LISTENING AND READING (RECEPTIVE SKILLS) Listening for writing short answers - filling gaps in sentences - identifying topic, context and function

- identify different functions of language in business situations - identify prompts -identify

paraphrases of required information - Scanning - reading for gist - understanding sentence structure -

error identification - identify paraphrases - cohesive words and phrases - understand the importance of

analysing the distractors - identify grammatical and semantic relationships

UNIT II 15 Hours

WRITING AND SPEAKING (PRODUCTIVE SKILLS) Business Emails - notes - memos to colleagues or friends - Giving instructions - explaining a

development - asking for comments - requesting information - agreeing to requests - explaining -

apologising - reassuring - complaining - describing - summarising - recommending - persuading

Turn-taking - sustaining interaction - initiating - responding - giving personal information - Talking

about present circumstances, past experiences and future plans - expressing opinion - speculating -

organising a larger unit of discourse - giving information - expressing and justifying opinions -

speculating - comparing and contrasting - agreeing and disagreeing

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Whitehead, Russell and Michael Black. Pass Cambridge BEC Vantage Self-Study Practice

Tests with Key, Heinle,a part of Cengage Learning, Delhi, 2003.

15MA401 NUMERICAL METHODS AND

STATISTICS 2 2 0 3

(Common to Agri, Auto, Food Tech, Mech, Mechatronics, EEE, EIE, Bio-Tech, TT and FT)

Course Objectives

Understand the methods to solve polynomial equations and Implement the mathematical

ideas for interpolation numerically.

Summarize and apply the methodologies involved in solving problems related to ordinary

and partial differential equations.

Apply the concepts testing of hypothesis in their core areas.



Develop enough confidence to identify and model mathematical patterns in real world

and offer appropriate solutions, using the skills learned in their interactive and supporting

environment.


1. Classify the equations into algebraic, transcendental or simultaneous and apply the techniques

to solve them numerically.

2. Demonstrate and obtain the differentiation and integration of functions using the numerical

techniques.

3. Obtain the solutions of all types of differential equations, numerically.

4. Apply basic statistical inference techniques, including confidence intervals, hypothesis testing

to science/engineering problems.

5. Design an experiment for an appropriate situation using ANOVA technique.

UNIT I 6 Hours

SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Newton- Raphson method - Solution of system of

linear equations: Gauss elimination method - Inverse of a matrix: Gauss-Jordan method- Eigen values

of a matrix by Power method.

UNIT II 5 Hours

INTERPOLATION, DIFFERENTIATIONAND INTEGRATION Interpolation: Newton’s forward and backward interpolation formulae – Numerical differentiation:

Newton’s forward and backward interpolation formulae.

Numerical integration: Trapezoidal rule- Simpson’s rules for single integrals- Two point Gaussian

quadrature formula.

UNIT III 7 Hours

SOLUTION OF DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Solution of first order ordinary differential equations: Fourth order Runge- Kutta method - Solution of

partial differential equations: Elliptic equations: Poisson’s equation- Parabolic equations by Crank

Nicholson method- Hyperbolic equations by explicit finite difference method.

UNIT IV 6 Hours

TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS Sampling distributions- Large sample test: Tests for mean- Small sample tests: Tests for mean (t test),

F- test- Chi-square test for Goodness of fit and Independence of attributes.

UNIT V 6 Hours

DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS Completely randomized design - Randomized block design - Latin square design.

FOR FURTHER READING Collection of data and use the testing of hypothesis to analyze the characteristics of the data.

Total: 30 + 30 = 60 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Grewal B. S, Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science with Programms in C & C++,

Ninth Edition, Khanna Publications, 2010.



2. Sankara Rao. K, Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers, Third Edition, PHI earning

Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009.

3. Gerald C. F and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Seventh Edition, Pearson

4. Education, New Delhi, 2004.

5. Johnson R.A, Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers, Seventh Edition,

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2005.

6. Walpole R.E, Myers R.H, Myers R.S.L and Ye K, Probability and Statistics for Engineers

and Scientists, Seventh Edition, Pearsons Education, Delhi, 2002.

Assessment Pattern



1 2

6

8

4

2

22

2

2

12

6

20

3 2

2

4

4

6

18

4 2

4

6

4

6

22

5

2

4

6

6

18

Total 100

Assessment Questions

Remember 1. Define Algebraic and Transcendental equations. 2. Recall the order and condition of convergence of Newton-Raphson method. 3. Recognize the derivatives of Newton‘s Forward and Backward Interpolation formula. 4. List the conditions for applying Simpson‘s rule. 5. Reproduce the formula of Fourth order Runge – Kutta method. 6. Label the procedure used in Liebmann’s process. 7. Define the region of acceptance. 8. Label the types of errors in the hypothesis testing. 9. Recall the difference between CRD and RBD. 10. Label the uses of Latin Square Design.

Understand

Illustrate the condition of convergence of Regula False position method. 1. Indicate the order and condition of convergence of Newton‘s method. 2. Infer the working rule in Gaussian elimination method. 3. Interpret y’ (2) from the following:

X : 0 1 2 3 4 Y: 6.9897 7.4036 7.7815 8.1281 8.4510

4. Interpret the value of , using Trapezoidal rule. 5. Using Runge – Kutta method of fourth order, find y(0.2) given that 6. Exemplify the working rule for solving a boundary value problems using finite difference method. 7. Sample of 900 members is found to have a mean of 3.4 cms. Can it be regarded as a simple Sample from a large population with mean 3.2 cms and SD 2.3 cms.. 8. Narrate the properties and the advantages of 9. Classify three basic principles of experimental design. 10. Indicate the applications of RBD and CRD.



Apply 1. Explain briefly Gauss Elimination Iteration to solve simultaneous equations. 2. Find the solution by Gaussian elimination method: 6x + 3y +12z = 36; 8x -3y +2z = 20; 4x +11y –z =33.

3. The table given below reveals the velocity V of a body during the time ‘t‘ specified. Find its

acceleration at t = 1.1:

t: 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

v: 43.1 47.7 52.1 56.4 60.8

4. Using 11 ordinates calculate the value of by Trapezoidal rule and Simpson’s 1/3 rule.

Compare the results with the exact answer. 5. Construct up to t = 0.5 with spacing 0.1 subject to y(0,t) = 0, y(1,t) = 0, yt(x,0) = 0 and y(x,0) =10 + x (1-x). 6. Use Runge-kutta method, find y(0.01) from dy/dx= - x, y(0)=1.

7. Two independent samples of sizes 8 and 7 contained the following values :

Sample I: 19 17 15 21 16 18 16 14

Sample II: 15 14 15 19 15 18 16

Is the difference between the sample means significant? 8. Apply Gauss two point formula to evaluate 9. Use - test of goodness of fit,to test the normality of the following distribution. x: 125 135 145 155 165 175 185 195 205 Total f : 1 1 14 22 25 19 13 3 2 100 10. Compute y (0.2) given , y(0) = 1 by taking h = 0.1 using Runge – Kutta method of fourth order

Analyze / Evaluate

1. Organize to find the dominant Eigen value and the corresponding Eigen vector of the matrix A 2. Determine the solution using Newton-Raphson method, cos x – x ex = 0. 3. Use Newton’s forward interpolation formula to find x when y = 20 X : 1 2 3 4 Y: 1 8 27 64. 4. From the following data, find y’ at x = 43: X: 40 50 60 70 80 90 Y: 184 204 226 250 276 304

5. Solve the equation over the square with sides x = 0 =y, x = 3 = y with u=0 on the boundary and mesh length 1.

6. Evaluate y(0.2) and y(0.4) from given that y(0) = 1 by Runge – Kutta method of fourth order.

7. A survey of 320 families with five children each revealed the following distribution, No. of boys : 0 1 2 3 4 5 No. of girls : 5 4 3 2 1 0 No. of families : 12 40 88 110 56 14 Is this result consistent with the hypothesis that male and female are equally probable? 8. Test whether the example having the values 63,63, 64, 65, 66, 69, 70, 70 and 71 has been chosen

from a population with mean 65 at 5% LOS.

9. A farmer applied 3 types of fertilizers on 4 separate plots. The figure on yield per acre is tabulated

below:

Fertilizers Yield

A B C D

Nitrogen 6 4 8 6

Potash 7 6 6 9

Phosphates 8 5 10 9

Total 21 15 24 24



Find out if the plots are materially different in fertility, as also, if the three fertilizers make any

material difference yields.

10. In a Latin square experiment given below are the yields in quintals per acre on the paddy crop

carried out for testing the effect of four fertilizers A, B, C and D. Analyze the data for variances.

15MC402 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY 3 2 0 4

Course Objectives

To perform force analysis and balancing of reciprocating engines.

To understand the function of flywheel and to determine basic parameters of flywheel

To understand the effects of vibration in beams

To know the control mechanisms employed in governors and gyroscopes


1. Carry out static and dynamic force analysis on various parts of reciprocating engine

2. Determine flywheel parameters by constructing turning moment diagram

3. Balance the unbalanced forces developed in reciprocating engine

4. Model and analyse the behaviour of simple systems during free and forced vibration

5. Explain the working and effects of governor and gyroscopes for limited application.

UNIT I

9 Hours

FORCE ANALYSIS Static force analysis: Applied and constraint forces - Free body diagrams - Static equilibrium

conditions Two, three and four force members - Static force analysis of simple mechanisms -

Principle of superposition - Dynamic force analysis: Inertia force and Inertia torque - D Alemberts

principle - Dynamic Analysis in reciprocating engines : Gas forces, Bearing loads, Crank shaft torque,

Inertia force of piston and connecting rod

UNIT II

9 Hours

TURNING MOMENT DIAGRAM AND FLYWHEEL Turning Movement Diagram for a Single Cylinder Double acting Steam Engine, Four stroke engine

and Multi Cylinder Engine - Fluctuation of Energy - Flywheel and Flywheel in Punching Press -

Balancing of masses (Basics only)

UNIT III 9 Hours

BALANCING Single Rotating mass: by a single mass rotating in the same plane, by two masses rotating in different

planes - Several masses rotating in the same plane and different planes - Partial balancing of

unbalanced primary force in a reciprocating engine - Partial balancing of locomotives - Variation of

tractive force - Swaying couples - Hammer blow - coupled locomotives - Primary and secondary

forces of multi cylinder in-line engine, Radial engines

A 18 C 21 D 25 B 11

D 22 B 12 A 15 C 19

B 15 A 20 C 23 D 24

C 22 D 21 B 10 A 17



UNIT IV 9 Hours

VIBRATION Free vibration: Natural frequency of free transverse vibration due to a point load, uniformly

distributed load acting over a Simply Supported beam, Shaft fixed at both ends carrying a uniformly

distributed load - shaft subjected to a number of point loads - Critical speed at a shaft - Viscous

Damping - Damping and Magnification Factor - random vibrations - Resonance migration from one

point to another - Isolation and Transmissibility - Free Torsional Vibrations of a Single, Two and

Three Rotor System Condition monitoring

UNIT V 9 Hours

MECHANISM FOR CONTROL Governors: Types Centrifugal governors - Gravity controlled and spring controlled centrifugal

governors – Characteristics - Effect of friction - Controlling force - Other Governor mechanisms -

Gyroscopes: Gyroscopic forces and torques - gyroscopic stabilization - gyroscopic effects in

Automobiles, ships and airplanes

FOR FURTHER READING Equivalent masses- Flywheel in printing and cutting machines - Effect of partial balancing of

reciprocating parts of two cylinder locomotives - Torsionally equivalent shaft - Sensitiveness and

Hunting of governor


Reference(s)

1. S. S. Rattan, Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi,

2011

2. R. S. Khurmi, J. K. Gupta, Theory of Machines, Eurasia Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2008

3. R. L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2009

4. Sadhu Singh, Theory of Machines, Prentice Hall of India Learning, New Delhi, 2012

5. Kenneth J .Waldron and Garny L. Kinzel, Kinematics, Dynamics and Design of Machinery,

John Wiley and Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007

6. C .S .Sharma and Kamlesh Purohit, Theory of Mechanics and Machines, Prentice Hall of

India Learning. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006

Assessment Pattern



1 2 3

2 4

3 2

2 2

20

2 2 3

2 4

3 2

2 2

20

3 2 2

2 4

3 3

2 2

20

4

3

2 4

3 3

2 3

20

5 4 3

2 5

3 3

20

Total 100


1. State D Alembert’s principle.

2. Define ‘inertia force’ and ‘inertia torque’.

3. Write an expression for the inertia force due to reciprocating mass in reciprocating engine,

neglecting the mass of the connecting rod.

4. What is turning moment diagram?



5. Write the formula to calculate the turning moment on the crankshaft.

6. Define: Fluctuation of energy.

7. Define: Maximum fluctuation of energy.

8. In turning moment diagram, write the formula to calculate the work done per cycle.

9. In turning moment diagram, write the formula to calculate the mean torque.

10. Define: Coefficient of fluctuation of speed.

Understand 1. What is the difference between piston effort, crank effort and crank-pin effort?

2. The inertia of the connecting rod can be replaced by two masses concentrated at two points

and connected rigidly together. How to determine the two masses so that it is dynamically

equivalent to the connecting rod?

3. Given acceleration image of a link. Explain how dynamical equivalent system can be used to

determine the direction of inertia force on it.

4. What is the function of flywheel?

5. Draw the turning moment diagram for a single cylinder, double acting steam engine.

6. Draw the turning moment diagram for a four stroke cycle internal combustion engine

7. State the functional difference between the governor and flywheel?

8. What is the effect of friction on the functioning of a Porter governor?

9. State the limitations of the Watt governor.

10. How does a Porter governor differ from that of Watt governor?

Apply 1. How are velocity and acceleration of the slider of a single slider crank chain determined

analytically?

2. What is the velocity of the piston, when the crank is at the inner dead centre, in a horizontal

reciprocating steam engine?

3. Write the essential condition of placing the two masses, so that the system becomes

dynamically equivalent.

4. A horizontal steam engine running at 240 rpm has a bore of 300 mm and stroke 600 mm. The

connecting rod is 1.05 m long and the mass of reciprocating parts is 60 kg. When the crank is

600 past its inner dead centre, the steam pressure on the cover side of the piston is 1.125

N/mm2 while that on the crank side is 0.125 N/mm2. Neglecting the area of the piston rod,

determine:

The force in the piston rod; and

The turning moment on the crankshaft.

5. A machine has to carry out punching operation at the rate of 10 holes per minute. It does 6

kN-m of work per mm2 of the sheared area in cutting 25 mm diameter holes in 20 mm thick

plates. A flywheel is fitted to the machine shaft which is driven by a constant torque. The

fluctuation of speed is between 180 and 200 r.p.m. The actual punching takes 1.5 seconds.

The frictional losses are equivalent to 1/6 of the work done during punching. Find:

Power required driving the punching machine, and Mass of the flywheel, if the radius of

gyration of the wheel is 0.5 m.

6. The connecting rod of a gasoline engine is 300 mm long between its centres. It has a mass of

15 kg and mass moment of inertia of 7000 kg-mm2. Its centre of gravity is at 200 mm from

its small end centre. Determine the dynamical equivalent two-mass system of the connecting

rod if one of the masses is located at the small end centre.

7. In a slider crank mechanism, the length of the crank and connecting rod are 150 mm and 600

mm respectively. The crank position is 600 from inner dead centre. The crank shaft speed is

450 rpm (clockwise). Using analytical method, determine 1. Velocity and acceleration of the

slider and 2. Angular velocity and acceleration of the connecting rod.

8. The crank-pin circle radius of a horizontal engine is 300 mm. The mass of the reciprocating

parts is 250 kg. When the crank has travelled 600 from I.D.C., the difference between the

driving and the back pressures is 0.35 N/mm2. The connecting rod length between centres is



1.2 m and the cylinder bore is 0.5 m. If the engine runs at 250 r.p.m. and if the effect of piston

rod diameter is neglected, calculate the pressure on slide bars.

9. The crank and connecting rod of a petrol engine, running at 1800 r.p.m.are 50 mm and 200

mm respectively. The diameter of the piston is 80 mm and the mass of the reciprocating parts

is 1 kg. At a point during the power stroke, the pressure on the piston is 0.7 N/mm2, when it

has moved 10 mm from the inner dead centre. Determine the Net load on the gudgeon pin.

10. An instrument vibrates with a frequency of 1 Hz when there is no damping. When the

damping is provided, the frequency of damped vibrations was observed to be 0.9 Hz. Find 1.

The damping factor, and 2. Logarithmic decrement.

Analyse 1. A rotating shaft carries four masses A, B, C and D which are radially attached to it. The mass

centres are 30 mm, 38 mm, 40 mm and 35 mm respectively from the axis of rotation. The

masses A, C and D are 7.5 kg, 5 kg and 4 kg respectively. The axial distances between the

planes of rotation of A and B is 400 mm and between B and C is 500 mm. The masses A and

C are at right angles to each other. Find for a complete balance,

i. The angles between the masses B and D from mass A

ii. The axial distance between the planes of rotation of C and D,

iii. The magnitude of mass B.

2. A shaft 1.5 m long is supported in flexible bearings at the ends and carries two wheels each of

50 kg mass. One wheel is situated at the centre of the shaft and the other at a distance of 0.4 m

from the centre towards right. The shaft is hollow of external diameter 75 mm and inner

diameter 37.5 mm. The density of the shaft material is 8000 kg/m3. The Young’s modulus for

the shaft material is 200 GN/m2. Find the frequency of transverse vibration.

3. A Porter governor has all four arms 200 mm long. The upper arms are pivoted on the axis of

rotation and the lower arms are attached to a sleeve at a distance of 25 mm from the axis.

Each ball has a mass of 2 kg and the mass of the load on the sleeve is 20 kg. If the radius of

rotation of the balls at a speed of 250 r.p.m. is 100 mm, find the speed of the governor after

the sleeve has lifted 50 mm. Also determine the effort and power of the governor.

4. A machine of mass 75 kg is mounted on springs and is fitted with a dashpot to damp out

vibrations. There are three springs each of stiffness 10 N/mm and it is found that the

amplitude of vibration diminishes from 38.4 mm to 6.4 mm in two complete oscillations.

Assuming that the damping force varies as the velocity, determine the resistance of the

dashpot at unit velocity.

5. The mass of a single degree damped vibrating system is 7.5 kg and makes 24 free oscillations

in 14 seconds when disturbed from its equilibrium position. The amplitude of vibration

reduces to 0.25 of its initial value after five oscillations. Determine the stiffness of the spring.

6. The crank-pin circle radius of a horizontal engine is 300 mm. The mass of the reciprocating

parts is 250 kg. When the crank has travelled 600 from I.D.C., the difference between the

driving and the back pressures is 0.35 N/mm2. The connecting rod length between centres is

1.2 m and the cylinder bore is 0.5 m. If the engine runs at 250 r.p.m. and if the effect of piston

rod diameter is neglected, calculate: 1. pressure on slide bars, 2. thrust in the connecting rod,

3. tangential force on the crank-pin, and 4. turning moment on the crank shaft.

7. A machine of mass 75 kg is mounted on springs and is fitted with a dashpot to damp out

vibrations. There are three springs each of stiffness 10 N/mm and it is found that the

amplitude of vibration diminishes from 38.4 mm to 6.4 mm in two complete oscillations.

Assuming that the damping force varies as the velocity, determine: 1. the resistance of the

dashpot at unit velocity; 2. the ratio of the frequency of the damped vibration to the frequency

of the undamped vibration; and 3. the periodic time of the damped vibration.

8. An aeroplane makes a complete half circle of 50 m radius, towards right, when flying at 200

km/hr. The rotary engine and the propeller of the plane has a mass of 400 kg and the radius of

gyration of 0.3 m. The engine rotates at 2400 rpm anticlockwise when viewed from the rear.

Find the gyroscopic couple on the aircraft and states its effect on it.



Evaluate 1. A vertical double acting steam engine has a cylinder 300 mm diameter and 450 mm stroke

and runs at 200 r.p.m. The reciprocating parts has a mass of 225 kg and the piston rod is 50

mm diameter. The connecting rod is 1.2 m long. When the crank has turned through 125

degree from the top dead centre, the steam pressure above the piston is 30 kN/m2 and below

the piston is 1.5 kN/m2. Calculate the effective turning moment on the crank shaft.

2. The following data relate to a connecting rod of a reciprocating engine: Mass = 55 kg;

Distance between bearing centres = 850 mm; Diameter of small end bearing = 75 mm;

Diameter of big end bearing = 100 mm; Time of oscillation when the connecting rod is

suspended from small end = 1.83 s; Time of oscillation when the connecting rod is suspended

from big end = 1.68 s.

15MC403 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 3 2 0 4

Course Objectives

To impart knowledge on stress, strain and elastic modulii for components with mathematical

principles to solve engineering problems

To familiarize the method to find shear stress, bending stress, deflection and slopes in

statically determinate beams under different load conditions

To solve problems related to shafts and columns


1. Compute stress, strain and elastic moduli under given loading

2. Determine principal stresses and planes by analysing two dimensional stresses using

analytical and graphical methods

3. Construct shear stress and bending stress of standard beams and compute deflection and slope

4. Determine the crippling load of columns loaded with different end conditions.

5. Analyse the stresses and strains in shafts subjected to pure torsion

UNIT I

10 Hours

STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS Properties of mild steel, cast iron, aluminium alloys, copper alloys and magnesium alloys -

Mechanical properties of materials - Simple stress and strain - Stresses and strains due to axial force -

Hookes law - Factor of safety - Poissons ratio - Elastic constants and their relationship- Thermal

stresses: Simple and Composite bars

UNIT II 9 Hours

ANALYSIS OF STRESSES IN TWO DIMENSIONS State of stresses at a point - Normal and tangential stresses on inclined planes - Principal planes and

stresses - Plane of maximum shear stress - Mohrs circle for biaxial stresses

UNIT III 9 Hours

BEAMS Types of beams: Supports and Loads - Theory of simple bending - Stresses in beams: bending and

shear stress - Stress variation along the length and section of the beam, Slope and Deflection of

beams: Double integration for Cantilever and simply supported beams



UNIT IV 8 Hours

COLUMNS Columns - Buckling of long columns due to axial load - Equivalent length of a column - Eulers and

Rankines formulae for columns of different end conditions

UNIT V 9 Hours

TORSION IN SHAFTS Analysis of torsion of circular bars - Shear stress distribution - Bars of Solid and hollow circular

section - Compound shafts

FOR FURTHER READING Stress-Strain Curve for Ductile and Brittle Materials - Section modulus - Deflection in overhanging

beams


Reference(s)

1. R. K. Bansal, A text book of Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications (P) Limited, New

Delhi, 2012.

2. Egor P. Popov, Engineering Mechanics of Solids, Prentice Hall of India Learning. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2010.

3. R.K.Rajput, Engineering Materials, S. Chand and Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.

4. P. Purushothama Raj and V. Ramasamy, Strength of Materials, Pearson Education, India,

2013.

5. S. Rattan, Strength of Materials, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New

Delhi, 2011.

6. Irring H. Shames and James M. Pitarresi, Introduction to Solid Mechanics, Prentice Hall of

India Learning. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

Assessment Pattern



1 3 5

2 2

2 2

2 2

3

20

2 3 2

2 3

2 2

2

2

2

20

3 3 2

2 3

2

2

3

3

20

4 3 2

2 3

3

2

2

3

20

5 3 2

2 3

2 3

2

3

20

Total 100


1. Define stress and strain.

2. State Hooke’s law.

3. Define factor of safety.

4. Define principle stress and principle strain.

5. State the assumptions made in simple bending.

6. Write the simple bending equation of beam.

7. Define crippling load.

8. List the assumptions made in simple torsion.

9. Define section Modulus.

10. Define flexural rigidity.



Understand 1. State the role of factor of safety in the design of product.

2. Differentiate true stress and engineering stress.

3. How do you find the value of E using stress – strain diagram?

4. Give some practical examples where bending stresses may occur.

5. Distinguish pressure and stress.

6. State the use of Mohr’s circle.

7. Draw the schematic representation of hinged, continuous and over hanging beams.

8. What conditions must be met for neutral axis to pass through the centroid of a beam?

9. What do you mean by radius of curvature of the beam?

10. How do you reduce the stress induced in the cantilever beam where the load value remains

same?

Apply 1. State how normal stress varies with the orientation of the section in a long slender member

under axial load.

2. What is the difference between plane stress and plane strain situations? Give practical

examples.

3. Prove the torsion equation T/J=τ/R=C. θ/L for the solid circular shaft. State the various

assumptions used on above said equation.

4. A composite shaft consists of copper rod of 30mm diameter enclosed in a steel tube of

external diameter 50mm and 10 mm thick. The shaft is required to transmit a shaft is required

to transmit a torque of 1000N-m. Determine the shear stresses developed in copper and steel,

if both the shaft has equal length and welded to a plate at each end, so that their twists are

equal. Take modulus of rigidity for steel as twice that of copper.

5. The intensity of loading on a simply supported beam of 5m span increases uniformly from

8KN/m at one end to 16KN/m at the other end. Find the position and magnitude of the

maximum bending moment also draw S.F. and B.M. diagrams.

6. A cantilever of length 2m carries a uniformly distributed load of 1.5 KN/m run over the whole

length and appoint load of 2KN at a distance of 0.5 from the free end draw the S.F. and B.M.

diagrams for the cantilever.

7. Prove the bending Equation M/I=E/R=σ/Y.

8. Distinguish between rigid and deformable bodies.

9. A beam of length of 10 m is simply supported at its ends and carries two point loads of 100

KN and 60 KN at a distance of 2 m and 5 m respectively from the left support. Calculate the

deflections under each load. Find also the maximum deflection. Take I = 18 X 10^8 mm^4

and E = 2 X 10^5 N/mm^2.

10. What is the application of mohr's circle?

Analyse 1. Which shaft will you recommend for design purposes when maximum shear stress due to

torsion is same in both solid and hollow shaft?

2. How to find the maximum shear force and bending moment from shear force and bending

moment diagrams? Explain with an example.

3. What is understood by calculating the effort applied to a screw jack to lift up and lower down

the given amount of load? Justify the phenomenon.

4. In positioning a beam in a structure, always the depth portion is chosen greater than its width

portion. Analyze and write down the reason.

5. A column of timber section 15cm x 20cm is 6 meter long both ends being fixed. If the

Youngs modulus for timber is 17.5 KN/mm2, Determine: a) Crippling load and b) Safe load

for column if factor of safety is 3.

6. A beam is simply supported and carries a uniformly distributed load of 40kn/m run over

whole length or span. The section of the beam is rectangular having depth as 500mm. If the

stress in the material of the beam is 120N/mm2 and moment of inertia of the section is 7x108

mm4, find span of the beam.



7. A rod of 150 cm long and diameter 2.0cm is subjected to an axial pull of 20 KN. If the

modulus of elasticity of the material of the rod is 2x 10 ^5 N/mm 2 Determine 1. Stress 2.

Strain 3.the elongation of the rod.

8. The extension in a rectangular steel bar of length 400mm and thickness 10mm is found to

0.21mm .The bar tapers uniformly in width from 100mm to 50mm. If E for the bar is 2x 10 ^5

N/mm ^2, Determine the axial load on the bar.

Evaluate 1. For axially loaded members, what is the maximum normal stress and in which plane does this

stress act? What is the value of shear stress in this plane?

2. If axial force F is fixed, then find a relation of geometrical parameters of a cylindrical

pressure vessel for attainment of equal axial and hoop stress.

Create 1. It is required to design a closed coiled helical spring which shall deflect 1mm under an axial

load of 100 N at a shear stress of 90 Mpa. The spring is to be made of round wire having

shear modulus of 0.8 x 10^5 Mpa. The mean diameter of the coil is 10 times that of the coil

wire. Find the diameter and length of the wire.

2. The stiffness of close coiled helical spring is 1.5 N/mm of compression under a maximum

load of 60 N. The maximum shear stress in the wire of the spring is 125 N/mm^2. The solid

length of the spring (when the coils are touching) is 50 mm. Find the diameter of coil,

diameter of wire and number of coils. C = 4.5.

15MC404 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To understand the fluid properties and its application

To acquire knowledge on kinematics and dynamics of internal and external flow of fluids

To carry out the dimensional and model analysis of systems using Newtonian fluid

To understand the concepts of hydraulic machines


1. List and explain the applications and properties of fluid to meet engineering requirements

2. Calculate the forces and losses due to fluid structure and flow in various modes

3. Scale up the result from model to prototype using a suitable tool

4. Construct the velocity triangle and compute efficiencies of various turbines

5. Explain the construction and working of hydraulic pumps and terminologies associated with it

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO FLUID AND FLUID MOTION Fluid - Fluid Mechanics - Properties of fluids and its application - Types of fluid and fluid flow

Pressure measurement using U-tube and Differential Manometer -Dynamics of Fluid flow: Two

dimensional Continuity equation, Bernoulli equation, energy equation, momentum equation and

moment of momentum equation.

UNIT II 9 Hours

INTERNAL FLUID FLOW AND FRICTIONAL LOSSES Hagen Poiseuille flow in circular pipe, couette flow between parallel plates - Reynolds Experiment -

Darcy Weisbach equation - Chezy's formula -Minor losses in pipes - Flow through syphon - Flow

through pipes in series and in parallel



UNIT III 9 Hours

BOUNDARY LAYER FLOW AND DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS Definitions of Boundary layer - Expression for drag and lift on air foils - Separation of Boundary

layer - Dimensional analysis - Rayleigh's Method, Buckingham's Pi Theorem - Similitude - Types of

Similarities - Dimensionless parameters - Model laws

UNIT IV 9 Hours

HYDRAULIC MACHINES - TURBINES Turbines- definition - Classification, Types of Heads and Efficiencies - Pelton Wheel - Reaction

Turbine - Francis Turbine, Kaplan Turbine - working principles - velocity triangles - work done -

specific speed - Unit quantities - Characteristic curve for hydraulic turbines - Governing of turbines.

UNIT V 9 Hours

HYDRAULIC PUMPS Centrifugal pump: Construction and working principles - Velocity Triangle - Definitions of Head and

Efficiencies - Minimum speed - Priming and cavitation - Characteristic curves. Reciprocating Pump:

Construction and working principle - Slip - Classification of Reciprocating Pump - Indicator diagram

(Description only) Rotary pump: working principles of gear pump

FOR FURTHER READING Capillary and Surface Tension - Case studies - Analyze the fluid properties, fluid flow by simple

experiments

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. R. K. Bansal, A text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Laxmi Publications,

New Delhi, 2010.

2. Bruce R. Munson , Donald F. Young, Theodore H. Okiishi and Wade W. Huebsch,

Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, John Wiley and Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.

3. Pijush K. Kundu and Ira M. Cohen, Fluid Machines, Academic Press, Burlington, USA, 2010.

4. Yunus A. Cengel and John M. Cimbala, Fluid Mechanics Fundamentals and Application,

Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi 2009.

5. John F. Douglas, J. M. Gasoriek, John Swaffield and Lynne Jack, Fluid Mechanics, Pearson

Education, New Delhi, 2008.

6. S. K. Som , Gautam Biswas and S. Chakraborty, Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid

Machines, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi 2011.

Assessment Pattern



1 4

2 2

6

6

20

2

2

4 2

12

20

3 2

2

12

2

2

20

4 2

2

12

4

20

5

2

2

4

12

20

Total 100


1. Newtons law of viscosity for a fluid states that the shear stress is



a. Proportional to angular deformation

b. Proportional to rate of angular deformation

c. Inversely proportional to the angular deformation

d. Inversely Proportional to rate of angular deformation

2. The forces which acts on the Bernoulli’s equations

a. Gravity force, pressure force

b. Force due to viscosity and turbulence

c. Gravity force and compressibility

d. Pressure force and viscous force.

3. The Force per unit area is called

a. Pressure

b. Strain

c. Surface tension

d. Viscosity.

4. Study of fluid in motion when pressure force is not considered is called

a. Fluid Kinematics

b. Statics

c. Dynamics

d. Mechanics

5. The velocity distribution across a section of parallel plate is -------------

a. parabolic

b. elliptic

c.Hyperbolic

d. Spherical

6. Friction drag is otherwise called as ---------

a. head drag

b. skin drag

c. flow drag.

d. stream drag

7. Write the Hagen Poisullies Formula.

8. Define displacement thickness.

9. What are the methods of dimensional analysis?

10. What is called jet ratio?

Understand 1. What is priming. Why it is necessary.

2. Differentiate single acting and double acting centrifugal pump.

3. What do you understand by the characteristic curves of turbine?

4. Differentiate the inward and outward flow reaction turbine.

5. What is meant by geometric, dynamic and kinematic similarities? Are these similarities truly

attainable? If not why?

6. Show that the ratio of inertia force to viscous force is a Reynolds number.

7. Why the boundary layer increase with distance from upstream edge?

8. What do you understand by major and minor losses in pipes?

9. What do you mean by Isothermal process and adiabatic process?

10. How will you apply momentum equation for determining the force excreted by a flowing

liquid on a pipe bend?

Apply 1. Convert 1 kg per sec-m dynamic viscosity in to poise.

2. Calculate the specific weight, density and specific gravity of two liters of a liquid which

weight 15 N.

3. The rate of flow of water through a horizontal piie is 0.3m^3\s. The diameter of the pipe is

suddenly enlarged from 250 mm to 500 mm. The pressure intensity in the smaller pipe is



13.734 N\cm^2. Determine (i) loss of head due to sudden enlargement (ii) pressure intensity

in the large pipe and (iii) power lost due to enlargement.

4. A circular disc 4 m in diameter is held normal to 30 m\s wind of density 1.25 kg\m^3. If the

coefficient of drag disc = 1.1, what force is required to hold the disc at rest.

5. In a geometrically similar model of spillway the discharge per meter length 1\6 m^3\s. If the

scale of the model is 1\36, find the discharge per meter run of the prototype.

6. If the model prototype is 1:75 show that the ratio of discharges per unit width of spillway is

given by (1\75)^3\2.

7. A turbine is to operate under a head of 25 m at 200 r.p.m. the discharge is 9 cumec. If the

efficiency is 90%, determine: (a) specific speed of the machine, (b) power generated, and

Type of turbine.

8. A turbine develops 7357 Kw shaft power when running at 200 rpm. The head on the turbine

is 40m. if the head on the turbine is reduced to 25m, determine the speed and power

developed by the turbine.

9. The diameter of an impeller of a centrifugal pump at inlet and outlet are 30 cm and 60 cm

respectively. Determine the minimum starting speed of the pump if it works against a head of

30 m.

10. A single acting reciprocating ump running at 30 rpm, delivers 0.012m^3\s of water. The

diameter of the piston is 25 cm and stroke length 50 cm. Determine (i) theoretical discharge

of the pump (ii) coefficient of discharge (iii) slip and percentage of slip.

Analyse 1. The efficiency η of fan depends on density ρ, dynamic viscosity µ of the fluid, angular

velocity, Diameter d of the rotor and the discharge Q. Express η in terms of dimensionless

parameters. The pressure difference in a pipe of diameter D and length l due to turbulent flow

depends on the velocity, viscosity, density and roughness. Using Buckingham I theorem,

obtain the expression for pressure difference.

2. A partially submerged body is towed in water. The resistance R to its motion depends on y

dissipated density, the viscosity µ of water, length l of the body, velocity v of the body and

acceleration due to gravity g. Show that the resistance to the motion by dimensional analysis.

3. The discharge through an orifice depends on the dia D of the orifice, head H over the orifice,

density ρ of liquid, viscosity µ of the liquid and acceleration g due to gravity. Using

dimensional analysis, find an expression for the discharge. Hence find the dimensional

parameters on which the discharge coefficient of an orifice meter depends.

4. The force exerted by a flowing fluid on a stationary body depends upon the length of the

body, velocity of the fluid, density of fluid, viscosity of fluid and acceleration due to gravity.

Find an expression for the force using dimensional analysis.

Evaluate 1. A single acting reciprocating pump has a stroke length of 15 cm. The suction pipe is 7 meters

long and the ratio of the suction diameter to the plunger diameter is 3\4. The water level in

the sump is 2.5 meters below the axis of the ump cylinder, and the pump connecting the sump

and um cylinder is 7.5 cm diameter. If the crank is running at 75 rpm determine the pressure

head on the piston. (i) In the beginning of the suction stroke (ii) in the end of the suction

stroke (iii) in the middle of the suction stroke. Take co-efficient of friction as 0.01.

2. A centrifugal pump is running at 1000 rm. The outlet vane angle of the impeller is 45? and

velocity of flow at outlet is 2.5m\s. The discharge through the pump is 200 liter\sec when the

pump is working against a total head of 20 m. If the manometric efficiency of the pump is

80% determine: (i) diameter of the impeller and (ii) the width of the impeller at outlet.

3. 233 litre of water per second are sullied to an inward flow reaction turbine. The head

available is 11 m. The wheel vanes are radial at inlet and the inlet diameter is twice the outlet

diameter. The velocity of flow is constant and is equal to 1.83 m\s. The wheel makes 370

r.p.m. Find: (a) Guide vane angle, (b) Inlet and outlet diameter of the wheel, (c) the width of



the wheel at inlet and exit. Neglect the thickness of the vanes. Assume that the discharge is

radial and there are no losses in the wheel. Take speed ratio = 0.7 .

4. A pelton wheel is to be designed for the following specifications: shaft power=11,772kw;

Head=380metres; speed=750 r.p.m; overall efficiency=86%; jet diameter is not to exceed one

sixth of the wheel diameter. Determine: (a) The wheel diameter (b) the number of jet

required, and (c) Diameter of the jet.

5. Two tanks are connected with the help of two pipes in series. The lengths of the pipes are

1000 m and 800 m whereas the diameters are 400 mm and 200 mm respectively. The

coefficient of friction for both pies is 0.008. The difference of water level in the two tanks is

15 m. Find the rate of flow of water through the pipes, considering all losses. Also draw the

total energy line and hydraulic gradient lines for the system.

15MC405 CONTROL SYSTEM 3 2 0 4

Course Objectives

To describe feedback control and basic components of control systems

To understand the various time domain and frequency domain tools for analysis and design of

linear control systems

To study the methods to analyze the stability of systems from transfer function forms

To describe the methods of designing compensators


1. Derive the mathematical modelling of mechanical and electrical systems using various

techniques.

2. Understand the specifications of control systems and analyze its performance using time

response.

3. Conduct frequency response analysis to know the stability of systems from transfer function

forms.

4. Select the necessary compensator to improve the performance of the system

5. Check the system controllability and observability using state space approach

UNIT I 9 Hours

SYSTEMS REPRESENTATION Basic elements in control systems - open loop and closed loop - Transfer functions of mechanical,

electrical, thermal and analogous systems - Block diagram reduction - signal flow graphs

UNIT II 10 Hours

TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS Time response - Time domain specifications -Types of test inputs I and II order system response -

Steady state error, error constants, generalized error coefficient - Introduction to P, PI, PID controllers

- Stability concept and definition - Characteristic equation - Location of poles - Routh Hurwitz

criterion - Root locus techniques: construction

UNIT III 9 Hours

FREQUENCY TIME ANALYSIS Bode plots - Polar plot - Nyquist stability criterion - Correlation between frequency domain and time

domain specifications - stability analysis using frequency response methods.



UNIT IV 9 Hours

COMPENSATOR AND CONTROLLER DESIGN Realization of basic compensators - cascade compensation in time domain and frequency domain -

feed back compensation - Design of lag, lead, lag lead series compensator (using Bode plot)

UNIT V 8 Hours

STATE SPACE ANALYSIS State equation – Solutions, Realization, Controllability, Observability - State space to transfer

function conversion Pole placement.

FOR FURTHER READING Need for time domain, analysis and its applications - Need for frequency domain analysis and its

applications - Impacts of stability and its important methods - Application of compensation


Reference(s)

1. Norman S. Nise, Control System Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, 6th Edition, 2010

2. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New Age International Publisher,

New Delhi, 2011

3. Nagoor Kani A, Control systems Engineering, RBA Publications, Jan 2014

4. M. Gopal, Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

5. Rao V Dukkipatti, Control Systems, Narosa Publications, 2005

6. K. Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Pearson Edition 4th Ed. 2005

Assessment Pattern



1 2 3

2 5

2 2

2

2

20

2 4 3

2 4

2

3 2

20

3 2 3

2 5

3 3

2

20

4

2 2

4 3

2 7

20

5

2 2

4 3

2 7

20

Total 100


1. Define control system.

2. List the types of system.

3. Define the transfer function of a system.

4. State Mason’s gain formula.

5. Define settling time of a second order system with relevant equation.

6. Define peak overshoot of a second order system with relevant equation.

7. Define rise time and delay time of a second order system with relevant equation.

8. Define settling time of a second order system with relevant equation.

9. What are the time domain specifications?

10. What are the frequency domain specifications?

11. Define phase margin.

12. Define gain margin.

13. Define pole and zero.

14. Define relative stability.



Understand 1. What is peak time of a second order system with relevant equation?

2. Draw the block diagram and signal flow graph for armature controlled DC motor.

3. Draw the block diagram and signal flow graph for field controlled DC motor.

4. Derive the transfer function of mechanical systems.

5. Derive the transfer function of electrical systems.

6. Derive the response of under damped and over damped second order system with unit step

input.

7. Derive the response of critically damped second order system with unit step input.

8. Derive the expressions for time domain specifications of second order under damped system

with unit step input.

9. Explain the different types of controllers.

10. Explain the step by step procedure to obtain the bode plot.

11. Explain the magnitude plot and phase plot of the polar plot.

12. Draw the Lag compensator network and explain.

Apply 1. Determine the time domain specifications for the damping ratio = 0.6 and natural frequency =

5 rad/sec.

2. Sketch the polar plot of the transfer function and determine whether the plot crosses the real

axis. If so, determine the frequency at which the plot cross the real axis and and

corresponding magnitude G (jω).

3. Determine the phase margin and gain margin for the same.Sketch the bode plot of the transfer

function and determine the system gain K for the gain cross over frequency to be 5 rad/sec

G(s) = K/(1+0.2s)(1+0.02s).

4. Construct the Routh array and determine the stability of the system whose characteristic

equation is s6 + 2 s5 + 8s4 + 12 s3 + 20 s2 + 16 s + 16 = 0. Also determine the number of

roots lying on right half of s-plane.

Analyse 1. Compare the open loop system and closed loop system.

2. In what way the bode plot differ from polar plot?

3. Compare P, PI and PID controllers.

Evaluate 1. Analyze the lag, lead and lag-lead compensator.

15MC406 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

To obtain the switching characteristics of different types of power semi-conductor devices

To determine the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of converters

To understand the concept of DC and AC drives


1. Know the construction, operation and characteristics of different types of power semi-

conductor devices.

2. Understand the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of converters and

choppers.

3. Interpret the operation and characteristics of invertors and its related techniques.

4. Acquire the knowledge on solid state DC drives and its control.

5. Analyze the operations of various Solid state AC drives and power factor correction.



UNIT I 9 Hours

POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES Construction, Operation, Characteristics of Power Diode - SCR - TRIAC - Power transistor,

MOSFET and IGBT - di/dt and dv/dt protection

UNIT II 9 Hours

CONVERTERS AND CHOPPERS Phase Control - Single Phase and Three phase uncontrolled and controlled rectifiers with R and RL

load, Choppers, Time ratio control, Types, Buck-boost chopper-four quadrant operation,

cycloconverters

UNIT III 9 Hours

INVERTER Single phase and three phase (both 120 ° and 180 ° modes.) voltage source inverters - PWM

techniques: Sinusoidal PWM modified sinusoidal PWM and multiple PWM - Current source inverters

- Harmonics elimination technique

UNIT IV 9 Hours

SOLID STATE DC DRIVES Types of electrical drives - selection of drives - heating and cooling curves - Four quadrant operation

of hoist -Ward Leonard control system - Control of DC drives using rectifiers and choppers

UNIT V 9 Hours

SOLID STATE AC DRIVES Control of three phase induction motors using stator voltage and frequency control - variable

frequency drive - static rotor resistance control - Slip power recovery schemes - Static Kramer control

method - Static Scherbius control method - Power factor correction

FOR FURTHER READING Sepic, pi, T converters, UPS-PV power conversion, Application of Closed Loop control method,

Permanent magnet brushless DC motor drive.

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Characteristics of SCR

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Characteristics of IGBT

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Single phase uncontrolled and controlled rectifiers with R, RL load

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Three phase uncontrolled and controlled rectifiers with R, RL load

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Single phase PWM inverters


Reference(s)

1. Muhammad H. Rashid, Power Electronics - Circuits, Devices and Applications, Prentice Hall

of India Learning. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013



2. G. K. Dubey, Fundamentals of Electrical Drives, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2007

3. S. K. Pillai, A First Course on Electrical Drives, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,

2012.

4. M. D. Singh and K. B. Khanchandani, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.

5. Vedam Subrahmaniam, Electric Drives (concepts and applications), Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2007

6. P. S. Bhimbra, Power Electronics, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012

Assessment Pattern



1 4 3

2 4

2 3

2

20

2 4 2

2 4

4

2 2

20

3 2 3

2 5

2 2

2 2

20

4 2 3

5

3 3

2 2

20

5 2 3

2 5

4

4

20

Total 100


1. Define firing angle of SCR.

2. List the different types of power transistors.

3. Write the applications of chopper.

4. What is the function of freewheeling diodes in controlled rectifier?

5. List the types PWM techniques.

6. Define Modulation Index.

7. State are the functions of power modulator.

8. List the advantages of half controlled rectifier.

9. Write the different methods of speed control of 3-phase induction motor.

10. List the methods of power factor improvement.

Understand 1. Explain the internal structure, principle of operation, V-I and switching characteristics of p-

channel depletion MOSFET.

2. Describe the four modes of operation of a TRIAC.

3. With neat sketch, describe the working of buck-boost chopper.

4. Describe the principle of step-up chopper. Derive an expression for the average output

voltage in terms of input voltage ad duty cycle.

5. How the frequency of VSI is controlled?

6. Describe the working of single phase half bridge and full bridge inverter. Discuss how output

power in single-phase full bridge inverter becomes four times the power handled by a single-

phase half bridge inverter.

7. Explain the concept of electric drive. Illustrate your answer with examples.

8. Describe how the speed of a separately excited dc motor is controlled through the use of two

three phase full converters. Discuss how two-quadrant drive can be obtained from this

scheme.

9. Describe static rotor resistance control method for the speed control ofa 3-phase induction

motor. Derive expressions for inductor current and motor speed in terms of load torque,

supply frequency and motor turns ratio.

10. What is thyristor controlled inductor? Explain, how the inductance seen by the source can be

altered inTCI. Illustrate your answer with appropriate waveforms and phasor diagrams.



Apply 1. A device is required to act a switch for ratings of 500 V, 140 A. Select a device and explain

the switching characteristics.

2. Select a suitable PWM technique for producing two symmetrically spaced pulses per half

cycle

3. Apply the suitable control scheme for controlling the speed of dc shunt motor for above and

below base speed.

4. Apply the suitable drive for controlling the speed of dc series motor for below the

synchronous speed.

5. Apply the suitable drive system which is used in electro-mechanical drive systems to control

AC motor speed and torque by varying motor input frequency and voltage.

6. Select a suitable motor which is used as actuator in industrial robots and explain the working

of this motor. How does the input-cuurrent waveforms effect the constructional features?

7. A reactive load is connected to 1-phase 230 V, 50 Hz source. It is required that supply pf be

maintained at unity and fast reactive power compensation is necessary. Apply the suitable

compensator for this application and explain in detail.

8. Apply the suitable electric drive, which is used to control the speed of SRIM in

supersynchronous and subsynchronous speed.

9. Apply the suitable method to control the speed of induction motor and explain in detail.

10. Apply the suitable control scheme for controlling the speed of dc separately excited dc motor

for above and below base speed.

Analyse 1. Distinguish BJT and MOSFET.

2. Derive the approximate and exact equivalent circuits of an IGBT from its structural details.

And analyse output and transfer characteristics.

3. (i) For type-A chopper, dc source voltage = 230 V, load resistance = 10 ohms. Take a voltage

of 2 V across chopper when it is on. For a duty cycle of 0.4, calculate (A) average output

voltage (b) rms value of output voltage and (c) chopper frequency

(ii) a step-up chopper has input voltage of 220 V and the output voltage of 660 v. If the

conducting time of thyristor-chopper is 100 µs, compute the pulse width of output voltage. In

case output-voltage pulse width is halved for constant frequency operation, find the average

value of new output voltage. For the basic dc to dc converter, express the following variables

as functions of Vs, R and duty cycle in case load is resistive:

a. Average output voltage and current

b. Output current at the instant of commutation

c. Average and rms freewheeling diode currents

d. Rms value of the output voltage

e. Rms and average thyristor currents

f. Effective input resistance of the chopper

4. A step-up chopper has output voltage of two to four times the input voltage. For a chopping

frequency of 2000Hz, determine the range of off-periods for the gate signal.

5. Explain the operation of full wave controlled rectifier with RL load. Derive the expressions

for average and RMS output voltage and current, ripple factor &FF.

6. Discuss the principle of working of a three-phase bridge inverter with an appropriate circuit

diagram. Draw phase and line voltage waveform that each thyristor conducts for 1800 and the

resistive load is star-connected.

7. In a six- step bridge inverter, each thyristor conducts for1200. Draw the phase and line

voltage waveforms and explain in detail.

8. Compare the performance of dc series motor for chopper fed drive and converter fed drive.

9. Compare static scherbius and static kammer drive.

10. Distinguish CSI and VSI.



Create 1. An RL load is fed from single-phase supply through a thyristor. Derive an expression for load

current in terms of supply voltage and frequency. Indicate the time limits during which this

solution is applicable.

2. A single phase one-pulse controlled converter feeds RL load with a freewheeling diode across

the load. Discuss how freewheeling diode come into play when supply voltage is passing

through zero and becoming negative. Sketch waveforms for supply and load voltages.

15MC407 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY

LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To Gain knowledge on standard measurement techniques of fluid mechanics and their

applications.

To understand various flows, application of basic equations of Fluid mechanics and turbo

machinery.

To provide Knowledge on Measurement of friction loss, drag force, pressure drop

calculations, and performance of fluid flow machinery


1. Understand the basics of hydraulic machines and their operation design in water systems

2. Apply fundamental knowledge of fluid mechanics for making the design of pressure pipes

3. Become aware of disasters caused by the incorrect analysis of hydraulic engineering system

4. Calculate the flow characteristics such as friction factor, Coefficient of discharge and

Efficiencies

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Determination of coefficient of discharge by selecting a simple flow measuring device applicable to

any closed pipe flow

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Determination of coefficient of discharge by selecting an efficient flow measuring device to measure

the flow of water in a closed pipe

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Measurement of discharge of a pipe flow using a vertically oriented flow measuring device and

identifying the significant parameters

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Measure the discharge of open channel flow using V notch or trapezoidal notch

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Measure and Comparison of major losses in two pipes in which the water flowing inside them

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Selection of suitable pump for domestic application and determining its optimum performance

parameters.



4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Selection of a non rotary positive displacement pump and determining its optimum performance

parameters

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Design an experiment to verify the various fluid laws

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Yunus A. Cengel and John M. Cimbala, Fluid Mechanics Fundamentals and Application,

Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi 2009

2. P. N. Modi and S. M. Seth, Hydraulic and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines,

Standard Book House, New Delhi, 2011

3. Laboratory Manual prepared by faculty incharge

15MC408 COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE

DRAWING 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To know the specifications and symbols of standard machine components used in machine

drawing

To understand the concept of various tolerances and fits used for component design

To understand and practice the drawings of machine components and simple assemblies using

standard CAD packages

At the end of the course the students will able to understand and create drawings manually or

using any one CAD packages for standard machine components and assemblies with

tolerance


1. Know the specifications and symbols of standard machine components used in machine

drawing

2. Interpret various tolerances and fits used for component design and to practice the drawings

of machine components and simple assemblies using standard CAD packages

3. Sketch drawings manually or using anyone CAD packages for standard machine components

and assemblies

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Converting given isometric view into orthographic views

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Reading and understanding an industrial drawing: Joint pipe

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Direction control valves: 3/2 and 4/2 way valves

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Modeling of Proximity sensors using a modeling software



3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Modeling of Induction motor using a modeling software

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Modeling of Hydraulic lift using a modeling software

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Modeling of Universal coupling using a modeling software

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Modeling of Pedestal bearing using a modeling software

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Modeling of Screw jack using a modeling software

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 10 Modeling of Robot manipulator using a modeling software

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. K. R. Gopalakrishna, Machine Drawing, Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 1992

2. N.D. Bhatt and V.M. Panchal, Machine Drawing, Charotar Publishing House, New Delhi,

2011

15MC409 MINI PROJECT II 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives





effectiveness.




solutions.



of the project.






15GE410 LIFE SKILLS: VERBAL ABILITY 0 0 2 -

Course Objectives

Read and understand the unseen passages with appropriate speed

Effectively deal with different kinds of structures

Develop strategies for vocabulary development


1. Improve their performance in the verbal ability sections of different competitive

examinations.

15 Hours

UNIT 1 Synonyms - Antonym - Word groups - Verbal analogies - Etymology - Spellings - Critical Reasoning

- Cloze Test - One Word Substitutes - Idioms and Phrases - Text Completion

15 Hours

UNIT 2 Sentence Formation - Sentence Correction - Sentence Improvement - Completing Statements -

Sequencing of Sentences - Paragraph Formation - Instructions - Change of Voice - Change of Speech

- Reading Comprehension - Sentence Equivalence

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Murphy, Raymond. English Grammar in Use - A Self - study Reference and Practice Book

For Intermediate Learners of English.IVed. United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press.

2012.

2. Lewis, Norman.Word Power Made Easy. New York: Pocket Books.1991.

3. Baron's The Official Guide for New GMAT Review 2015. New Jersey: John Wiley &Sons,

Inc.

15MC501 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To gain a knowledge of the basic laws governing the operation of electrical instruments and

the measurement techniques.

To discuss about units, standards, error analysis and characteristics of measurement systems.

The intention and purpose of this course is to a make the students to get adequate knowledge

about virtual instrumentation.


1. Understand the units and standards, their conversions, characteristics and error analysis of

measurement systems.

2. Describe the different devices available in mechanical measurements

3. Classify and describe resistive, inductive and capacitive transducers which are used for

measuring various parameters like displacement, temperature, humidity etc.

4. Design a signal conditioning circuit and data acquisition system

5. Develop the LabView program for various applications and to know the use of LabView and

DAQ card



UNIT I 9 Hours

SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENT Units and Standards - Calibration techniques - Errors in Measurements - Generalized Measurement

System - Static and dynamic characteristics of transducers - Generalized Performance of Zero Order

and First Order Systems - Response of transducers to different time varying inputs. Classification of

transducers

UNIT II 9 Hours

MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS Temperature measurement: Filled thermometer - bimetallic thermometer -

Pressure measurement: manometers - elastic transducers - Bourdon gauge – bellows – diaphragm -

Vacuum measurement: McLeod gauge - thermal conductivity gauge - Ionization gauge -

Flow measurement: orifice – venture – nozzle - pilot tube - turbine flow meter - hot wire anemometer.

UNIT III 9 Hours

ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS Potentiometer - RTD - Thermistor - Thermocouple - Strain gauges - LVDT - RVDT - Capacitive

transducers - Piezo electric transducer - Pyrometers - load cell - Hall effect transducers - Photoelectric

transducers - Fiber optic transducers - Electromagnetic Transducers - Anemometers - Variable

reluctance type transducers and hygrometer.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

SIGNAL CONDITIONING AND DATA ACQUISITION Wheatstone and Schering bridges - Amplification - Filtering - V/I, I/V and I/P converters - Sample

and Hold circuits - D/A converter (R -2R ladder and weighted resistor types) - A/D converter (Dual

slope, successive approximation and flash types) - Data logging - Display devices: CRO, LED and

LCD

UNIT V 9 Hours

VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION Introduction to LabVIEW - Graphical user interfaces - Data types - Data flow programming -

Graphical programming - Palettes and tools Front panel objects - Functions and libraries - FOR Loops

- WHILE Loops - CASE Structure - Arrays and Clusters - Attribute modes Local and Global variables

- Data acquisition using DAQ card

FOR FURTHER READING Radiation Sensors - Smart Sensors - Film sensor, MEMS & Nano Sensors - applications -

Automobile, Aerospace, Home appliances, Manufacturing, Medical diagnostics, Environmental

monitoring.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. A.K.Sawhney and P.Sawhney, A Course on Mechanical Measurement Instrumentation and

Control, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2011.

2. E. O. Doeblin, Measurement Systems: Applications and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Limited, 2003.

3. D. Patranabis, Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing


4. Garry M. Johnson, Labview Graphical Programming, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing


5. Jeffrey Travis and Jim Kring, LabVIEW for Everyone: Graphical Programming made Easy

and Fun, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2006.



Assessment Pattern



1 2 3

2 5

2 3

3

20

2 2 3

2 4

2 3

2

2

20

3 2 3

2 4

2 2

3

2

20

4 2 3

2 4

2 2

2

2

4

20

5 2 3

2 3

2 2

2

4

20

Total 100


1. Define Units.

2. List the classification of units.

3. Define Standards.

4. Define Instrumental error.

5. What is primary transducer?

6. What are the different types of strain gauge?

7. What are the applications of strain gauge?

8. What are the applications of thermistor?

9. What are the applications of LVDT?

10. How to choose the specific type of A/D for the given application?

Understand 1. Differentiate between accuracy and precision.

2. Explain the different types of static errors.

3. Explain instrumental and environmental errors and the methods to avoid them.

4. Explain the principles involved in ultrasonic flow meter.

5. Compare primary and a secondary standard.

6. Outline the applications where thermistor is a preferred temperature sensor.

7. Compare resistance strain gauge and a semiconductor strain gauge.

8. Compare digital transducer with analog.

9. Compare constant current source and constant voltage source.

10. Explain the different types of oscillators.

Apply 1. A temperature transducer with a time constant of 0.4 sec and a static sensitivity of 0.05mV/ ºc

is used to measure the temperature of a hot liquid medium which changes from 25ºC to 65ºC.

The transducer is adjusted to read 0 and 25ºC.

2. Determine the time taken to read 80% of the final voltage value if the temperature changes as

a step.

3. Calculate the reading of the transducer at the end of 4 sec if the temperature changes at a

constant rate of 10º per sec from 25ºC to 65ºC.

4. The output of an LVDT is connected to a 5V voltmeter through an amplifier whose

amplification factor is 250. An output of 2 mV appears across the terminals across the

terminals of LVDT when the core moves through a distance of 0.5 mm. calculate the

sensitivity of the LVDT and that of the whole set up. The milli-voltmeter scale has 100

divisions. The scale can be read to 1/5 of a division. Calculate the resolution of the instrument

in mm.

Analyse 1. A Hall Effect transducer is used for the measurement of a magnitude field of 0.5 Wb/m2. The

2 mm thick slab is made of Bismuth for which the Hall’s co-efficient is -1x10-6 V m/ (A –

Wb m-2) and the current is 3A.



2. A thermistor has a resistance of 10K at 25C. The resistance temperature co-efficient is -

0.05/°C. A Wien’s bridge oscillator uses two identical thermistors in the frequency

determining part of the bridge. The value of capacitance used in the bridge is 500 pF.

Calculate the value of frequency of oscillations for (i) 20°C (ii) 25°C (iii) 30°C. The

frequency of oscillation is f=1/2πRC Hz where R and C are resistance and capacitance

respectively.

Evaluate 1. How is orifice used as a flow measuring instrument?

2. Compare different types of Analog to digital converter.

Create 1. Design signal conditioning circuit for a LVDT. The output current from the signal

conditioning circuit should be in the range 4 – 20 mA.


MICROCONTROLLER 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To give an emphasis on the hardware features of Microprocessor 8085, 8086 and

Microcontroller 8051 with their functions

To provide essential knowledge on various operating modes of I/O ports Timers/Counters,

control registers and various types of interrupts

To design and verify the various interfacing techniques.


1. Understand the fundamentals and programming knowledge on Microprocessor 8085.

2. Understand the fundamentals and programming knowledge on of Microprocessor 8086.

3. Ability to develop an interfacing circuit using various interfacing device with Microprocessor

8085

4. Acquaint the knowledge on architecture and programming of Microcontroller 8051.

5. Gain the knowledge on applications of Microprocessor 8085, 8086 and Microcontroller 8051.

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTEL 8085 MICROPROCESSOR Organization of 8085: Architecture, Internal Register Organization and Pin Configuration -

Instruction Set of 8085 - addressing modes - instruction and machine cycles with states and timing

diagram.

UNIT II 9 Hours

INTEL 8086 MICROPROCESSOR Introduction to Microprocessors, 8086 Architecture - Register organization of 8086, Modes of

Operation - Physical Memory organization - I/O addressing capability - Special Processor activities,

8086 Instruction set and assembler directives: Addressing modes of 8086 - Instruction set of 8086.

UNIT III 9 Hours

8085 INTERFACING DEVICES Programmable peripheral Interface (8255) - Programmable interval timer (8253) - Programmable

communication interface (USART) - Programmable interrupt controller - Programmable DMA

Controller (8257).



UNIT IV 9 Hours

8051 ARCHITECTURE Microcontroller Hardware - I/O Pins, Ports - External memory - Counters and Timers - Serial data I/O

- Interrupts - 8051 Assembly Language Programming: Instruction set of 8051, Addressing modes,

Data transfer instructions, Arithmetic and Logical Instructions, Jump and Call Instructions.

Introduction to ATMEGA and Arduino

UNIT V

9 Hours

APPLICATIONS Temperature monitoring system - Closed loop process control - Stepper motor control - Interfacing of

Keyboards - Interfacing of Display Devices - Analog to Digital and Digital to Analog Converter – DC

Motor control using Arduino FOR FURTHER READING Designing real time clock, detecting power failure, detecting presence of objects using 8253.

Microcontroller System Design - Testing the Design, Look up Tables.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Ramesh Gaonkar, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with the 8085

6/e, Penram International Publishing (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2013.

2. Douglas V Hall., Microprocessor and Interfacing: Programming and Hardware, McGraw Hill

Inc., New Delhi, Second Edition 2002.

3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillipie mazidi, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded

System, Pearson Education Asia, 2011.

4. Kenneth J Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture Programming and Application,

Thomson Delmar New Delhi, 2014.

5. Krishna Kant, Microprocessor and Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and System

Design using 8085, 8086, 8051 and 8096, PHI, 2007.

Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

2

2 2

20

2 2 4

4 4

2

4

20

3 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

4

2

2 2

4 4

2

4

20

5 2 2

2 6

2

2

2

2

20

Total 100


1. List the five addressing modes of 8085 microprocessor.

2. List the three buses of a microprocessor.

3. List the five arithmetic instructions of 8085.

4. State the function of RS1 and RS0 bits in the flag register of Intel 8051microcontroller?

5. What is microcontroller?

6. List the ten features of 8051 microcontroller.

7. List the memory specification of 8051.

8. What is direct memory access?

9. List the addressing modes of 8051.



10. Define baud rate of 8051.

Understand 1. Explain about external memory interfacing to 8051.

2. Desribe interfacing of stepper motor with 8051 microcontroller and write an 8051 ALP to run

the stepper motor in both forward and reverse direction with delay.

3. Mention the interrupt priority in 8051.

4. Define double buffering and multiple buffering.

5. Explain Minimum mode and maximum mode of operation in 8086.

6. Explain the various addressing modes of 8086 microprocessor with examples.

7. Explain the internal hardware architecture of 8086 microprocessor with neat diagram.

8. What are the features used mode 1 in 8255?

9. What are the essential items needed to make up a development system for programming

microcontrollers?

10. Define interrupt.

11. Design an interface circuit needed to connect DIP switch as an input device and display the

value of the key pressed using a 7 segment LED display. Using 8085 system, write a program

to implement the same.

Apply 1. Apply timing diagram to calculate the time required to execute MOV A, B.

2. Illustrate the 2 K memory construction with flip flops.

3. Validate I/O read and I/O write cylices for a given instruction.

4. Define interrupt and their two classes? Write in detail about interrupt service routine.

5. Write the Pnemonics to prove logic AND gate.

6. Predict the purpose of control word written to control register in 8255.

7. What is the use of stepper motor?

8. What are the use of PWM in motor control using microcontroller?

9. Use RST 5.5 instead of RST 7.5 and change mask pattern accordingly.

10. Show the control word format of 8255 and explain how each bit is programmed.

Analyse 1. Compare memory mapped I/O and peripheral mapped I/O.

2. Compare polling and interrupt.

3. Compare the features of A/D & D/A convertor.

4. Compare serial and parallel interface.

5. Differentiate microprocessor and microcontroller.

6. How will carry and zero flags reflect the result of the instruction CMP BX, CX?

Evaluate 1. Design a microprocessor system to interface an 8K × 8 EPROM and 8K × 8 RAM.

2. Design the schematic for interfacing a servo motor with 8051 microcontroller and write 8051

ALP for servo motor control.

3. Design the schematic to interface a stepper motor with 8051 microcontroller and explain also

write an 8051 ALP to run the stepper motor in both forward and reverse direction with delay.

Create 1. Write a program to display "HELLO WORLD" in the LCD display interfaced with the

microcontroller 8051.

2. Write a program to display room temperature in LCD interfaced with the microcontroller

8051 using temperature sensor.



15MC503 FLUID POWER SYSTEM 2 0 2 3

Course Objectives

To understand the concepts, construction and working principles of fluid power system

components

To apply various methods to design and execute hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for simple

applications using software and hardware tools


1. Explain the fundamentals of hydraulic systems and determine losses incurred in hydraulic

circuit.

2. Identify various pumps and actuators of hydraulic system and explain their working

principles.

3. Identify and draw the symbol of various hydraulic valves and explain their applications.

4. Explain the fundamentals of pneumatic systems and working of equipments used for air

generation, preparation and distribution.

5. Design hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for simple application

UNIT I 6 Hours

FLUID POWER SYSTEMS Introduction to fluid power – History – Pascal’s law – Components - Advantages – Drawbacks –

Applications. Hydraulic fluids: Functions, Properties. Darcy’s equation – Frictional losses – Losses in

valves and fittings – Determination of head losses & pump power in a hydraulic circuit

UNIT II 6 Hours

HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND ACTUATORS Positive and non positive displacement pumps – Pumping theory – Pump classification – Construction

and working principle of Gear, Vane and Piston pumps. Pump performance – Pump performance

curves. Hydraulic cylinder (double acting) – Construction & Working principle – Double rod cylinder

– Telescopic cylinder. Hydraulic motors: Gear, Vane and Piston motors

UNIT III 6 Hours

HYDRAULIC VALVES Directional control valves: Check valve – Pilot operated check valve – 3/2 valves – 4/2 valves –

methods of valve actuation – Shuttle valve. Pressure control valves: Pressure relief valves - Pressure

reducing valve, Unloading valves, Counter balance valves - Flow control valves - Servo valves:

Mechanical type

UNIT IV 6 Hours

PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS Introduction – Properties of air – gas laws – Compressors: Piston compressor, Screw compressor and

Vane compressor. Fluid conditioners: Air filters, Air pressure regulators, Air lubricators, Pneumatic

silencers and Air dryers. Pneumatic actuators: Pneumatic cylinders, Rotary air motors – Performance

curves.

UNIT V 6 Hours

DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC CIRCUITS Sequential circuit design for simple applications: Step counter method, Cascade methods &

Karnaugh Veitch map method – PLC circuit design using ladder logic



FOR FURTHER READING Applications of Pascal’s law – Accumulators: types and applications – Intensifiers - Hydraulic

system: maintenance, failure and troubleshooting

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Identification of fluid power system components

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Drawing standard symbols of FPS

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Actuating Single Acting Cylinder

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Actuating Double Acting Cylinder

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Simple sequencing

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Circuit design using ladder logic

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Circuit design using step counter method

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Circuit design using cascade method

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Circuit design using KV map method

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 10 Circuit design using three methods and making comparison


Reference(s) 1. Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, Pearson Education New Delhi, 2015.

2. S. R. Majumdar, Oil Hydraulics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd. New Delhi,

2014.

3. James L. Johnson, Introduction to Fluid Power, Delmar Thomson Learning, 2013.

4. S. R. Majumdar, Pneumatic systems - Principles and maintenance, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company Pvt Ltd. New Delhi, 2014.

5. Andrew Parr, Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Jaico Publishing House, 2015.

6. Illangov Soundarrajan, Introduction to Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Prentice hall of India,

New Delhi, 2015.



Assessment Pattern



1 2 3

2 3

2

3 2

3

20

2 2 3

2 3

2 3

3

2

20

3 2 3

2 3

3 3

2 2

20

4 2 3

2 3

3 2

2

3

20

5 2 3

2 3

2 2

3

3

20

Total 100


1. Define the term fluid power.

2. Name three basic methods of transmitting power.

3. Define the term mass density.

4. Define the term absolute viscosity and kinematic viscosity.

5. Define surface tension, capillarity.

6. What is oxidation stability?

7. State Pascal’s law State Pascal’s law.

8. State the continuity equation.

9. What are the various energy losses occur when liquid flows through a pipe?

10. What is the function of pump?

Understand

1. What is the fundamental difference between hydraulics and pneumatics?

2. State the effect of temperature and pressure on viscosity of liquids.

3. What is the difference between the force and pressure?

4. Where the hydrodynamic displacements pumps are employed? Why?

5. Which pump-external gear, internal gear, screw vane and piston –generates the least noise?

Why?

6. Why are centrifugal pumps not preferred for fluid power application?

7. Why are double acting cylinders known as differential cylinders?

8. Which hydraulic motor is generally the most efficient? Why?

9. State the difference between the hydraulic motor and hydraulic pump.

10. When do you prefer poppet type hydraulic valves?

Apply

1. To investigate a hydraulic and pneumatic system requirement: Two syringes of equal size.

A plastic tube of about 10 cm that will fit tightly over the opening of both syringes. Draw out

the plunger (piston) of one syringe and push in the plunger of the other syringe. Connect the

two syringes by means of the plastic tube.Push in the plunger of one syringe.Draw that

plunger out again.

2. Design the hydraulic circuit for the following sequence A+B+A-B- using cascade method

3. A positive displacement has an overall efficiency of 88% and a volumetric efficiency of 92%.

What is the mechanical efficiency?

4. The pressure drop across the sharp edged orifice is 100 psi. The orifice has a 1 -in diameter

and the fluid has a specific gravity of 0.9. Find the flow rate in units of gpm.

5. A needle valve is used to control the extending speed of a hydraulic cylinder. The needle

valve is placed in the outline line of the hydraulic cylinder. The following data are given

1. Desired cylinder speed = 10 in/s 2. Cylinder piston diameter = 2 in 3. Cylinder rod



diameter = 1 in 4. Cylinder load = 1000 lb 5. Specific gravity of oil = 0.90 6. Pressure relief

valve setting = 500 psi 7. Determine the required capacity coefficient of the needle valve.

Analyse

1. For the Hydraulic System shown, following data are given:

1. Pump is adding 5 hp (3730 W) to fluid

2. Pump flow is 0.001896 m3/s

3. Pipe has 0.0254 m inside dia

4. Sp. Gravity of oil = 0.9

5. Kinematic viscosity of oil is 100 CS

6. Elevation difference between station 1 and 2 is 6.096 m

7. Pipe lengths: 1 ft = 0.305 m, 4 ft = 1.22 m, 16 ft = 4.88 m

Find pressure available at inlet to hydraulic motor. The pressure at the oil top surface

level in the hydraulic tank is atmospheric (01 MPa).

2. Design the hydraulic circuit for the following sequence A+B+A-B- and also construct the

ladder logic diagram.

3. A pump operates at 3000 psi and delivers 5 gpm. It requires 10 hp to drive the pump.

Determine the overall efficiency of the pump. If the pump is driven at 1000 rpm, what is the

input torque to the pump?

4. A flow control valve experiences a pressure drop of 100 psi (687 kPa) for a flow rate of 25

gpm (94.8 Lpm). The fluid is hydraulic oil with a specific gravity of 0.90. Determine the

capacity coefficient.

5. A hydraulic motor has a 82 cm^3 volumetric displacement. If it has a pressure rating of 70

bars and it receives oil from a .06 m^3/s theoretical flow rate pump, find the motor

a. Speed

b. Theoretical torque

c. Theoretical power

Evaluate

1. Choose the best hydraulic fluid that can be used for cryogenic applications.

2. Determine the atmospheric pressure in N/mm^2.

Create

1. Generate the hydraulic circuit using PLC for the sequence of earth mover (e.g. JCB etc.).

2. Relate the viscosity of the oil with respect to the temperature.

15MC504 THERMODYNAMICS AND HEAT

TRANSFER

3 2 0 4

Course Objectives

To acquire knowledge on laws of thermodynamics concepts, principles and mechanism for

physical systems

To understand the applications of air standard cycles

To understand the application of various experimental heat transfer correlations in

engineering calculations




1. Express the laws and basic concept of thermodynamics

2. Draw PV diagram and obtain the performance of air standard cycles

3. Carry one dimensional heat transfer through conduction for a given system

4. Explain the types of convection and determine heat transfer coefficient

5. Compute the radiation effect among different surfaces

UNIT I 9 Hours

LAWS OF THERMODYNAMICS Systems-closed and open systems - properties, processes and cycles- equilibrium- work and heat

transfers-first law for a closed system and flow processes - enthalpy - second law -entropy- entropy

change

UNIT II 9 Hours

AIR STANDARD CYCLES Air standard cycles: Carnot cycle - Otto cycle - Diesel cycle - Brayton cycle - Rankine cycle- cycle

efficiency – IC Engine: two stroke and four stroke engines.

UNIT III 9 Hours

HEAT TRANSFER: CONDUCTION Basic Concepts- Mechanism of Heat Transfer - Conduction, Convection and Radiation - Fourier Law

of Conduction - General Differential equation of Heat Conduction -Cartesian and Cylindrical

Coordinates - One Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction

UNIT IV 9 Hours

CONVECTION Convection: Basic Concepts -Heat Transfer Coefficients - Boundary Layer Concept - Types of

Convection - Forced Convection - External Flow and Internal Flow - Flow over Plates, Cylinders and

Spheres.

UNIT V 9 Hours RADIATION Basic Concepts, Laws of Radiation - Stefan Boltzmann Law, Kirchhoff's Law -Black Body Radiation

and radiation between different surfaces.

FOR FURTHER READING Reversibility- S.I and C.I engines- Conduction through Plane Wall, Cylinders and Spherical system-

Grey body radiation -Shape Factor Algebra - Electrical Analogy- Convective Mass Transfer

Correlations

.


Reference(s) 1. P. K. Nag, Engineering Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,

New Delhi, 2008

2. Yunus A. Cengel and Michael A. Boles, Thermodynamics - An Engineering Approach in SI

Units, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2010

3. C. P. Kothandaraman and S. Subramanya, Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, New

Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2008

4. T. D. Eastop and McConkey, Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering Technologists,

Pearson, New Delhi, 2004



5. C. P. Kothandaraman, S. Domkundwar and A. V. Domkundwar, A course in Thermal

Engineering, Dhanpatrai and Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012

6. Frank P. Incropera and David P. DeWitt, Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, John

Wiley and Sons Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2006.

Assessment Pattern



1 2 3

2 3

4

2

2 2

20

2 2 3

2 3

2

2 3

3

20

3 3 3

2 2

4 2

2

2

20

4 2 3

2 3

3 3

2

2

20

5 3 2

2 5

3

1

4

20

Total 100


1. What is Fourier’s law and write the equation?

2. What is conduction?

3. What is meant by Lumped heat analysis?

4. Define overall heat transfer co-efficient.

5. State Stefan-Boltzmann law.

6. Define Radiation

7. Give application of boiling and condensation

8. Define Reynolds number, Prandtl number, Nusselt number, Grashoff number, Stanton

number.

9. What is meant by shape factor?

10. Define intensity of radiation

Understand 1. What is different between thermodynamics and heat transfer?

2. What is the significance of heat transfer?

3. Why is the semi-infinite solution applicable to any geometry at early times?

4. How does the local convection heat transfer coefficient vary with distance from the leading

edge for laminar flow over a flat plate?

5. What quantities change with location in a velocity boundary layer? A thermal boundary

layer?

6. What effect does fouling have on the overall heat transfer coefficient and hence the

performance of a heat exchanger?

7. Why is the maximum possible heat rate for a heat exchanger not equal to Cmax (Thi – Tci)?

8. How is local heat transfer from the surface of a flat plate affected by the existence of an

unheated starting length?

9. In a transient diffusion process, what can be said about the mass transfer Biot number?

10. Why are baffles used in a shell-and-tube heat exchanger?

Apply 1. How would you approximate the total irradiation of a small surface in a large isothermal

enclosure?

2. How does the directional emissivity of a material change as the zenith angle associated with

emission approaches 90ο If the spectral emissivity of material increases with increasing

wavelength, how does its total emissivity vary with temperature?



3. If a cube of sugar is placed in a cup of coffee, what is the driving potential for dispersion of

the sugar in the coffee? What is the physical mechanism responsible for dispersion if the

coffee is stagnant? What is the physical mechanism if the coffee is stirred?

4. An aluminium alloy fin of 7mm thick and 50mm long protrudes from a wall which is

maintained at 120ºC. The ambient air temperature is 22ºC. The heat transfer coefficient and

conductivity of the fin material are 140 W/m2K and 55 W/mK respectively. Determine (a)

Temperature at the end of the fin. (b) Temperature at the middle of the fin. (c) Total heat

dissipated by the fin.

5. A long cylindrical heater 30mm in diameter is maintained at 700ºC. It has surface emissivity

of 0.8. The heater is located in a large room whose wall are 35ºC. Find the radiant heat

transfer. Find the percentage of reduction in heat transfer if the heater is completely covered

by radiation shield (ε=0.05) and diameter 40mm.

6. In a double pipe heat exchanger, hot fluid with a specific heat of 2300J/kgK enters at 380ºC

and leaves at 300ºC. Cold fluid enters at 25ºC and leaves at 210ºC. Calculate the heat

exchanger area required for (a) Parallel flow (b) Counter flow. Take over all heat exchanger is

750W/m2K and mass flow rate of hot fluid is 1kg/s.

7. CO2 and air experience equimolar counter diffusion in a circular tube whose length and

diameter are 1.2m and 60mm respectively. The system is at a total pressure of 1atm and a

temperature of 273K. The ends of the tube are connected to large chambers. Partial pressure

of CO2 at one end is 200 mm of Hg while at the other end is 90 mm of Hg. Calculate the

following (a) Mass transfer rate of CO2 and (b) Mass transfer rate of air.

Analyse 1. Do we expect heat transfer to change with transition from a laminar to a turbulent boundary

layer? If so, How?

Evaluate 1. Design a Heat exchanger that meets the following specification:

m(kg/s) Tm,i (ºC) Tm,o (ºC)

Hot water 28 90 -

Cold water 27 34 60

Create 1. Derive one dimensional steady state heat conduction.

15MC507 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION

LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

The intention and purpose of this course is to acquire knowledge about LabVIEW

programming.

The intention and purpose of this course is to study the interfacing of different sensors with

LabVIEW.


1. Design a LabView program to obtain a required measurement data for temperature

2. Generate appropriate design procedure to obtain a required measurement data for force

3. Create appropriate design procedure to obtain a required measurement data for displacement.

4. Develop an appropriate design procedure, suitable for signal conversion to interface with

computer.

5. Develop the LabView program to control the speed and position of servomotor



3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Temperature Measurement using RTD

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Temperature Measurement using J,K and E Type Thermocouples

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Temperature Measurement using Thermistor

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Load Cell Measurement

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Strain Measurement using Strain Gauge

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Displacement Measurement using LVDT

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Vibration Measurement using Accelerometer

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Analog to Digital Conversion

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9

Digital to Analog Conversion 3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 10 Speed and Position Control of Servo Motor

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, Bangalore, 2011.

2. A. K. Sawhney and P. Sawhney, A Course on Mechanical Measurement Instrumentation and

Control, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2011


MICROCONTROLLER LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To focus on the implementation of arithmetic operations using microprocessors and

microcontroller.

To simulate assembly language programs.

To implement various on-chip and off-chip interfacing and algorithms.


1. Solve the arithmetic operations using microcontrollers and various on-chip and off-chip

interfacing and algorithms.

2. Design the digital and analog hardware interface for microcontroller-based systems.



EXPERIMENT 1 3 Hours Perform the basic arithmetic operations using Assembly Language Programming (ALP) in

Microprocessor 8085/8086.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Perform the search operation for finding the number (largest, smallest) in the array using Assembly

Language Programming (ALP) in Microprocessor 8085/8086.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Execute code conversions like HEX to ASCII and Vice versa using Assembly Language

Programming (ALP) in Microprocessor 8085/8086.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Perform the basic arithmetic operations using Assembly Language Programming (ALP) in

Microcontroller 8051.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Implement the search operation for finding the number (largest, smallest) in the array using Assembly

Language Programming (ALP) in Microcontroller 8051.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Execute code conversions like HEX to ASCII and Vice versa using Assembly Language

Programming (ALP) in Microcontroller 8051.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Perform the different mode of operation using Assembly Language Programming (ALP) by

interfacing the Programmable Peripheral Interface with the Microprocessor 8085 and Microcontroller

8051.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Perform the controlling operation to the stepper motor using Assembly Language Programming

(ALP) by interfacing the stepper motor with the Microprocessor 8085 and Microcontroller 8051.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Perform the controlling operation of DC motor using Assembly Language Programming (ALP) by

interfacing the DC motor controller with the Microprocessor 8085 and Microcontroller 8051.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 10 Conversion of Analog to digital and vice versa using Assembly Language Programming (ALP)

Microprocessor 8085/8086 and Microcontroller 8051.

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Ramesh Gaonkar, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with the 8085

6/e, Penram International Publishing (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2013.

2. Douglas V Hall., Microprocessor and Interfacing: Programming and Hardware, McGraw Hill

Inc., New Delhi, Second Edition 2002.

3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillipie mazidi, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded

System, Pearson Education Asia, 2011.

4. Kenneth J Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture Programming and Application,

Thomson Delmar New Delhi, 2014.



5. Krishna Kant, Microprocessor and Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and System

Design using 8085, 8086, 8051 and 8096, PHI, 2007.

15MC509 TECHNICAL SEMINAR I

0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To develop the self-learning skills to utilize various technical resources available from

multiple field.

To promote the technical presentation and communication skills.

To impart the knowledge on intonation, word and sentence stress for improving

communicative competence, identifying and overcoming problem sounds.


1. Refer and utilize various technical resources available from multiple field.

2. Improve the technical presentation and communication skills.

3. Understand the importance of intonation, word and sentence stress for improving


4. Interact and share their technical knowledge to enhance the leadership skills.

5. Understand and adhere to deadlines and commitment to complete the assignments.

Course Objectives





effectiveness.



1. Formulate a real world problem, identify the requirement and develop the design solutions.


3. Utilize the new tools, algorithms, techniques that contribute to obtain the solution of the

project.

4. Test and validate through conformance of the developed prototype and analysis the cost

effectiveness.


15GE511 LIFE SKILLS: APTITUDE I 0 0 2 -

Course Objectives

To expose the undergraduate students to such methods and practices that help, develop and

nurture qualities such as character, effective communication, aptitude and holding ethical

values.

15MC510 MINI PROJECT III 0 0 2 1




1. Distinguish the pattern of coding and decoding.

2. Demonstrate various principles involved in solving mathematical problems and thereby

reducing the time taken for performing job functions

3. Difference between sequence and series

4. Evaluate critically the real life situations by resorting and analyzing analytical reasoning of

key issues and factors

5. Identify the odd man out

6. Calculate the percentages and averages

7. Demonstrate the blood relation concept in Verbal Reasoning

8. Plot the diagrams based on direction

9. Explain the various operations

1 3 Hours

CODING AND DECODING Introduction - Description of Coding method - Coding patterns - Concepts of Coding and Decoding -

Problems involving Coding and Decoding methods

2 3 Hours

SEQUENCE AND SERIES Introduction - Sequences of real numbers - Number and Alphabet series - Description of Number and

Alphabet series - Analogy - Odd man out- Power series

3 3 Hours

DATA SUFFICIENCY Introduction to Data Sufficiency - Overview of the wide variety of Data Sufficiency problems - Basic

introduction on how to determine what information is sufficient to solve a given problem - Common

pitfalls to avoid

4 3 Hours

DIRECTION Introduction to Direction - sense test - Overview of the wide variety of Direction problems -Direction

- Plotting diagrams

5 3 Hours

PROBLEM ON AGES Introduction- basic concept - usage of percentage and averages- applications

6 3 Hours

ANALYTICAL REASONING Introduction - basic concept - non verbal analytical reasoning - arrangements

7 3 Hours

BLOOD RELATION Introduction - Basic concept - Kinds of relation - Tree diagram - Relations

8 3 Hours

BLOOD RELATION Introduction -Basic concept - Kinds of relation - Tree diagram - Relations

9 3 Hours

VISUAL REASONING Introduction - Basic concepts - Odd man out - Next series - Mirror image and water image

10 3 Hours

SIMPLIFICATIONS Introduction - Basic concepts - Arithmetic operations -Equation solving methods - Puzzles

Total: 30 Hours



Reference(s)

1. Abhijit Guha, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Fourth Edition, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2012

2. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Data Interpretation for the CAT, First Edition, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2012.

3. Dr.R S Aggarwal, Quantitative Aptitude, Seventh Revised Edition, S.Chand Publishing

Company Ltd, 2013.

4. Edgar Thorpe, Course In Mental Ability And Quantitative Aptitude For Competitive

Examinations, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2013.

5. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Quantitative Aptitude for the CAT, Fifth Edition, Tata


15GE601 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 2 0 0 2

Common to Common to AE, AG, AU, CE, ME, MTRS, BT, FT, TT (VI Semester) and to

CSE, ECE, EEE, EIE, IT (VII Semester)

Course Objectives

To understand Human values, ethical theory, codes of ethics, work place responsibilities,

rights, engineering experimentation, global issues and contemporary ethical issues

To understand personal ethics, legal ethics, cultural associated ethics and engineer’s

responsibility

Course Outcomes (COs) 1. Articulate engineering ethics theory with sustained lifelong learning to strengthen

autonomous engineering decisions

2. Be an example of faith, character and high professional ethics, and cherish the workplace

responsibilities, rights of others, public’s welfare, health and safety

3. Contribute to shape a better world by taking responsible and ethical actions to improve the

environment and the lives of world community

4. Fortify the competency with facts and evidences to responsibly confront moral issues raised

by technological activities, and serve in responsible positions of leadership

5. Be Proficient in analytical abilities for moral problem solving in engineering situations

through exploration and assessment of ethical problems supported by established

experiments

UNIT I 6 Hours

HUMAN VALUES Morals and Ethics - Honesty - Integrity - Values - Work Ethic - Civic Virtue - Respect for Others -

Living Peacefully - Caring and Sharing - Self-Confidence - Courage - Co-operation - Commitment -

Empathy.

UNIT II 6 Hours

ENGINEERING ETHICS AND PROFESSIONALISM Scope of 'Engineering Ethics'- Variety of moral issues - Types of inquiry - Accepting and sharing

responsibility - Ethical dilemmas - Moral autonomy - Kohlberg's and Gilligan's theory - Consensus

and controversy - Profession and Professionalism - Models of Professional Roles - Right action

theories - Senses of corporate responsibility - Codes of ethics: Importance - justification - limitation -

Abuse - Sample codes NSPE - IEEE - Institution of Engineers (India).



UNIT III 6 Hours

ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION Engineering as experimentation - Engineers as responsible experimenters - Balanced outlook on law -

Cautious optimism - Safety and risk - Assessing and reducing risk - Safe exits - The Challenger case

study - Bhopal Gas Tragedy - The Three Mile Island and Chernobyl.

UNIT IV 6 Hours

WORKPLACE RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS Fundamental Rights - Responsibilities and Duties of Indian Citizens - Teamwork - Ethical corporate

climate - Collegiality and loyalty - Managing conflict - Respect for authority - Collective bargaining -

Confidentiality - Conflicts of interest - Occupational crime - Professional rights - Employee rights.

UNIT V

6 Hours

GLOBAL ISSUES Multinational corporations: Technology transfer and appropriate technology - International rights -

promoting morally just measures - Environmental ethics: Engineering, ecology - economics - Human

and sentient centred - and bio and eco centric ethics - Computer ethics and internet - Engineers as

managers - Consulting engineers - Engineers as expert witnesses and advisors - Moral leadership.

FOR FURTHER READING The Challenger case study - Bhopal Gas Tragedy - The Three Mile Island and Chernobyl case studies

- Fundamental Rights, Responsibilities and Duties of Indian Citizens -Sample code of ethics like

IETE, ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of Engineers (India), Indian Institute of Materials

Management.

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Mike W Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, 4th edition, Tata McGraw

Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2014.

2. M Govindarajan, S Natarajan and V S Senthil Kumar, Engineering Ethics, PHI Learning

Private Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.

3. R S Naagarazan, A text book on professional ethics and human values, New age international

(P) limited, New Delhi, 2006.

4. Charles D Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India, New

Jersey, 2004.

5. Charles E Harris, Michael S Protchard and Michael J Rabins, Engineering Ethics - Concepts

and Cases, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United States, 2005.

6. http://www.slideworld.org/slidestag.aspx/human-values-and- Professional-ethics

Assessment Pattern



1 5 5

5

5

20

2

5

5

5

5

20

3

5

10

5

20

4 5

5

5 5

20

5 5

5

5

5

20

Total 100




1. Define Human Values.

2. What are Morals and Values?

3. What do you mean by Civic virtue and Respect for others?

4. Write the various meanings of Spirituality.

5. List four different types of Virtues.

6. Mention different Human values.

7. What is meant by moral autonomy?

8. Classify the types of inquiry.

9. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?

10. List the levels of moral development suggested by Kohlberg.

11. What do you understand by self-interest and ethical egoism?

12. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?

13. What are the three virtues of religion?

14. What are the professional responsibilities?

Understand 1. Which are the practical skills that will help to produce effective independent thought about

moral issues?

2. Why does engineering have to be viewed as an experimental process?

3. Why isn‘t engineering possible to follow a random selection in product design?

4. Why is the code of ethics important for engineers in their profession?

5. What does the Balanced Outlook on Law stress in directing engineering practice?

6. Are the engineers responsible to educate the public for safe operation of the equipment?

How?

7. What kind of responsibility should the engineer have to avoid mistakes that may lead to

accident due to the design of their product?

8. What is the use of knowledge of risk acceptance to engineers?

9. Why is Environmental Ethics so important to create environmental awareness to the general

public?

10. Why do the engineers refuse to do war works sometimes?

Apply 1. How does the consideration of engineering as a social experimentation help to keep a sense of

autonomous participation is a person’s work?

2. How does the code of ethics provide discipline among the engineers?

3. Exemplify the space shuttle Challenger case accident?

4. How does the manufacturer understand the risk in a product catalog or manual?

5. How does the knowledge of uncertainties in design help the engineers to access the risk of a

product?

6. How can the quantifiable losses in social welfare resulting from a fatality be estimated? Give

some examples.

7. How does the engineer act to safeguard the public from risk?

15MC602 PLC AND AUTOMATION 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To provide a clear view on Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC)

To learn the various methods involved in automatic control and monitoring

To familiarize with the communication protocols




1. Understand the different parts of PLC and its functions

2. Ability to apply and analyse the use of timers and counters in PLC

3. Develop the PLC program for various applications.

4. Realize the use Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)

5. Describe the basics about DCS and apply various interfaces used in DCS.

UNIT I 10 Hours

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS Introduction - Parts of PLC - Principles of operation - PLC sizes - PLC hardware components - I/O

section - Analog I/O modules - digital I/O modules CPU processor memory module - PLC

programming Simple instructions - Output control devices - Latching relays PLC ladder diagram,

Converting simple relay ladder diagram in to PLC relay ladder diagram.

UNIT II 9 Hours

INSTRUCTIONS Timer instructions ON Delay, OFF Delay and Retentive Timers-UP Counter, DOWN Counter and UP

down Counters, program control instructions - Data manipulating instructions-math instructions

UNIT III 8 Hours

APPLICATION OF PLC Traffic light control, 24 hour clock design, Automatic stacking process, temperature control,

Automatic control of warehouse door, Automatic lubrication of supplier Conveyor belt, motor control.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

NETWORKING OF PLC AND SCADA Networking of PLCs-Data communication-Fieldbus, PROFI bus, and Mod bus-OSI Model types-OPC

function. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition-Architecture-Remote terminal unit-Master

terminal unit-Data Storage

UNIT V 9 Hours

DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM Evolution - Architectures - Comparison - Local control unit - Process interfacing issues -

Communication facilities. Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces -

Operator displays - Engineering interfaces - Low level and high level engineering interfaces

FOR FURTHER READING Applications of DCS in - Pulp and paper environment -Power plant - Petroleum - Refining

environment

Introduction to Soft PLC.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Petruzella Frank D, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2010.

2. Lucas, M.P., Distributed Control System, Van Nonstrand reinhold Co. NY, 1986.

3. Webb, John W. Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Application, Fifth edition,


4. Stuart A. Boyer, SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition, (4e), ISA Publication,

2009.

5. Bolton , "Programmable Logic Controllers 5th Edition Newnes,2009



Assessment Pattern



1

4

4

4

4

4

18

2

8

6 6

20

3

4

6

6

4

22

4

4

6

6

4

20

5

4

6

10

20

Total 100


1. Expand and Define PLC.

2. What are the components of PLC?

3. What is optical isolation?

4. List out the advantages of PLC over Microcontrollers.

5. Define SCADA.

6. Define DCS.

7. List out the various programming languages of PLC.

8. Explain any two Data manupulation Instructions.

9. What is HMI?

10. Compare and contrast PLC and DCS.

Understand 1. Differentiate Inputs and Outputs of PLC.

2. Compare and Contrast HMI and SCADA.

3. Differentiate Analog I/O's and Discrete I/O's.

4. Were the industries automated before the invension of PLC? Explain How?

5. Explain about various Communication protocols and their uses.

6. Differentiate Industrial Automation and Home automation with examples.

7. Explain about NO and NC contacts of a Relay.

8. How can you interface Inputs and Outputs with PLC?

9. Explain in brief about Proximity sensors.

10. Give any one application of both contact type and noncontact type proximity sensors.

Apply 1. Write ladder logic program for AND and OR gate.

2. Write ladder logic program for NAND and NOR gate.

3. Write ladder logic program for NOT and EX-OR gate.

4. Explain how can HMI screen can be created for AND logic gate.

5. Consider an Automated cooldrink production industry, Explain How a labling process can be

automated?

6. Write a PLC program for the below logic.

1. When input A is pressed output X gets actuated.

2. When both inputs A and B gets pressed after a delay of 10sec output Y gets actuated.

3. When output Y is actuated, X should get deactuated.

7. How will you interface the single phase induction motor with PLC, and how can the speed of

the motor can be varied?

8. By cascading the Timers switch on the output X, when the input A is pressed.

9. By using the Retentive Timer switch on the output X, when the input A is pressed.

10. For the below logic do the ladder programming and show the how the values stored in

memory and changes according to the sequence.when the input A is pressed, output X gets

actuated.



Analyse 1. Analyse and explain the working of two way traffic signal and draw the scada screen.

2. Analyse the 2 digit digital output by using ladder logic diagram.

3. Analyse the ladder logic for NAND gate

4. Analyse the following ladder logic program and create an SCADA Screen for the same.

Evaluate 1. Analyse the following ladder logic program and spot the errors.

LOGIC: when the switch A is presses the light X should glow.

2. Analyse the following ladder logic program and spot the errors.

LOGIC: when the count of both the counter C1 and C2 is less than 5 the output should not

glow.

Create 1. Create the ladder logic for the following objective: A simple conveyor belt has a motor and

two capacitive proximity sensors (one at the start point and other at the end).

When the start button is pressed motor gets started and conveyor starts moving and when the

object crosses the sensor it gets counted individually on both sensors.

When the count of both sensor is equal to 5 motor goes off after the delay of 5 seconds.

2. Create the scada screen for the following Objective:

A simple conveyor belt has a motor and two capacitive proximity sensors (one at the start

point and other at the end).

When the start button is pressed motor gets started and conveyor starts moving and when the

object crosses the sensor it gets counted individually on both sensors.

When the count of both sensor is equal to 5 motor goes off after the delay of 5 seconds.

3. Create the Ladder logic for the two way traffic signal with the following logic.

Both side has red, green and yellow signal. The sequence is green signal glows for 20

seconds, followed by red for 15 seconds and then yellow for 5 seconds.

On both sides at the same time same color should not glow.

4. Create the SCADA screen for the process of Automatic car washing.

15MC603 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To impart knowledge on direct and inverse kinematics of manipulator

To understand the basic elements of serial and parallel robots

To learn trajectory and motion analysis of robotic movements


1. Understand the components and parameters of industrial robots.

2. Understand the classification of end effectors.

3. Evaluate the kinematic calculations to the industrial robots.

4. Apply trajectory planning to the robots.

5. Apply the role of various sensors used in robotics.

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION A brief history – Definition - Laws of Robotics - Basic components of robot - concept of workcell -

degrees of freedom (DOF) – Resolution – Accuracy – Repeatability – Payload – Precision -

classification of Industrial robot manipulator - common kinematic arrangement.



UNIT II 9 Hours

END EFFECTORS Unilateral Vs Multilateral end effectors - mechanical grippers: gripping force estimation with payload

under acceleration – vacuum - magnetic - air operated grippers Remote centre compliance - Robot cell

layouts.

UNIT III 9 Hours

KINEMATICS OF ROBOT MANIPULATOR Representing position and rotation - rotation in plane - rotation in three dimension - Rotational

transformation - Rotation with respect to the current frame and fixed frame - Rule for composition of

rotational transformation - Parameterization of rotation - Euler angle, Roll, Pitch, Yaw angles

Axis/angle representation - rigid motion - Homogeneous transformation - Denavit Hartenberg

convention

UNIT IV 9 Hours

ROBOT DYNAMICS AND TRAJECTORY PLANNING Velocity kinematics - Jacobian - Derivative of rotation matrix - addition of angular velocity -

Derivation of Jacobian combining the linear and angular velocity Jacobian - Euler Lagrange equation,

kinetic and potential energy, Equation of motion, Newton Euler formulation - Trajectory planning for

point to motion - Cubic polynomial - Quintic polynomial trajectory - Linear segment with parabolic

bend (LSPB) minimum time trajectory - trajectory for path specified by via point.

UNIT V 9 Hours

ROBOT SENSOR Ultrasonic sensors -Range finding- time of flight LIDAR- triangulation techniques -Vision for 3D

measurement - structured lighting stereo vision and camera calibration

FOR FURTHER READING Industrial robots for welding, painting and assembly, remote Controlled robots, Robots for nuclear

thermal and chemical plants, Industrial automation, typical example of automated industries,

application of visual inspection

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Mikell P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N. Nagel, Nicholas G. Odrey, "Industrial

Robotics:Technology, Programming and Applications", McGraw Hill Book Company, 2012

2. Ashitava Ghosal, Robotics: Fundamental Concepts and Analysis, Oxford University Press,

2008

3. J.J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, Prentice Hall Inc. / Pearson

Education, 2008

4. R.N. Jazer, Theory of Applied Robotics. Springer, 2010

5. Tsai, L. W., Robot Analysis: The Mechanics of Serial and Parallel Manipulators, John Wiley

& Sons, Inc, New York, 1999

6. Mark W Spong, Seth Hutchinson, M.Vidyasagar?? Robot Modeling and Control?? Wiley

India Edition , New Delhi., Nov, 2006



Assessment Pattern



1 2 3

2 3

2

3 2

3

20

2 2 3

2 3

2 3

3

2

20

3 2 3

2 3

3 3

2 2

20

4 2 3

2 3

3 2

2

3

20

5 2 3

2 3

2 2

3

3

20

Total 100


1. What is a manipulator?

2. Define robot arm.

3. Give the standard definition for an industrial robot.

4. State the laws of robot.

5. What is work volume of a robot?

6. Name the drive systems used for a robot.

7. Classify industrial robots.

8. Mention any two application areas of an industrial robot.

9. What is proximity sensor & touch sensor?

10. Name the methods used to estimate the cost in implementing a robot.

11. Write the D-H parameters.

12. Write the types of actuators used in robots.

13. What is the difference between direct and inverse kinematics?

14. Write down the inverse kinematics of constrained and redundant robots.

15. Write the equations of motion for parallel manipulator.

Understand 1. What is meant by Cartesian space trajectory planning?

2. Discuss in brief about the science and Technology of robots.

3. How the transmission is carried out in robots?

4. How can you represent the joints and links of robots using D-H parameters?

5. Derive the equation for inverse kinematics of constrained and redundant robots.

6. Write the Direct kinematics of Gough - Stewart platform.

7. Derive the Lagrangian formulation for equations of motion for serial and parallel

manipulators.

8. How can you generate symbolic equations of motion of robot using a computer?

9. How the constrained manipulators are controlled using hybrid position/force control?

10. Derive the analytical criterion for unforced motion.

Apply 1. Design the sensors used in robots based on Gough-Stewart platform.

2. A frame F has been moved 9 units along x-axis and 5 units along the y-axis of the reference

frame. Find the new location of the frame.

3. A point P (7, 3, 2) T and it is subjected to the transformation described (i) 0 rotation of 90º

about z-axis. (ii) Followed by a rotation of 90º about y-axis (iii) followed by a translation [4 -

3 7]. Find the coordinates of the point relative to the reference frame.

4. Write a program to flange drilling operation using VAL programming.



Analyse 1. Simulate the direct and inverse dynamic equations of motion of robot manipulator using

ADAMS software.

2. Calculate the inverse matrix of the following transformation matrix:

3. A LPG cylinder is to be arc welded using a robot; how to program it for automation?

Evaluate 1. Electric drives are not suitable robots handling inflammable products. State the reason

2. What kind of end effector is required to stack the glass plates? Why?

Create 1. A cool drink bottling company needs to utilize robot in the packing section. How to do it?

Justify your answer.

2. What type of robots can be applied in inspection? Give reasons

3. Design the sensors used in robots based on Gough-Stewart platform.

15MC604 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS 3 2 0 4

Course Objectives

To recall the basic concepts required to design machine components

To design simple machine elements like shaft, coupling, joint, lever, spring, flywheel and

bearing

Course Outcomes (COs) 1. Apply simple stress equations to design the machine components

2. Design shafts and couplings based on strength requirements

3. Design levers and joints made using welding, bolt and nut

4. Design energy storage elements like springs and flywheel

5. Calculate static and dynamic loads and select the suitable bearings

UNIT I 9 Hours

STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE MEMBERS Introduction to the design process - factor influencing machine design, selection of materials based on

mechanical properties - Direct, Bending and Torsional stress equations - Impact loading - Calculation

of principle stresses for various load combinations- Design of curved beams - Crane hook and C

frame - Factor of safety - The theories of failure - Introduction to fracture mechanics - Stress

concentration

UNIT II

9 Hours

DESIGN OF SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed - Design of keys and

key ways - Design of rigid and flexible couplings - Muff, Clamp, Rigid Flange, Bushed-pin flexible

couplings - Design of knuckle joints

UNIT III 9 Hours

DESIGN OF JOINTS AND LEVERS Threaded fasteners - Design of bolted joints - Eccentrically loaded bolted joint in shear - Eccentric

load perpendicular to axis of bolt - Eccentric load on Circular base - Design of welded joints for

structures - Butt, Fillet welded Joints - Strength of Parallel, Traverse fillet Welded Joints - Theory of

bonded joints - Design of levers



UNIT IV 9 Hours

DESIGN OF SPRINGS AND FLYWHEEL Design of helical, multi- leaf and torsional springs under constant loads and varying loads - End

conditions and length of springs - Stresses in Helical springs of circular wire - Wahl stress factor -

Design of flywheels involving stresses in rim and arm

UNIT V 9 Hours

DESIGN OF BEARINGS Design of bearings - Sliding contact and rolling contact types - Cubic mean load - Design of journal

bearings – McKee’s equation - Lubrication in journal bearings - Calculation of bearing dimensions

FOR FURTHER READING Stress intensity factor - Introduction to gear and shock absorbing couplings - Metal stir welding

Process - Flywheel energy storage - Advance Bearings


Reference(s)

1. V. B. Bhandari, Design of Machine Elements, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt.

Ltd., New Delhi, 2010

2. J. E. Shigley and C. R. Mischke, Mechanical Engineering Design, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003

3. R. C. Juvinall and K. M. Marshek, Fundamentals of Machine Component Design, John Wiley

and Sons, New Delhi, 2002

4. R. L. Norton, Design of Machinery, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2004

5. W. Orthwein, Machine Component Design, Jaico Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2003

6. Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology, Design Data Book,

M/s.Kalaikathir Achchagam, Coimbatore, 2009

Assessment Pattern



1 2 3

2 3

2 3

3 2

20

2 2 3

2 3

2 3

2 3

20

3 2 3

2 3

3 3

2 2

20

4 2 3

2 3

3 3

2 2

20

5 2 3

2 3

2 2

3 3

20

Total 100


1. Define standardization.

2. List out the factors influencing machine design.

3. Define principal stress.

4. What do you mean by curved beams?

5. Name some of the failure theories.

6. Define factor of safety.

7. Define torsional rigidity of the shaft.

8. Define lead of screw threads.

9. Define pitch of the thread.

10. List out types of joints used in welding.

11. Define spring index.



Understand 1. State the significance of factor of safety in machine design.

2. What are the causes for stress concentration?

3. What are the effects of stress concentration on machine component?

4. What are the methods of reducing stress concentration?

5. Why hollow shaft is stronger than solid shaft?

6. How resonance will be avoided in shafts?

7. Why maximum principal stress theory is not applicable for shafts?

8. What is the difference between coupling and clutch?

9. State the difference between rigid and flexible coupling.

10. In What situation flexible coupling is used?

11. Why taper is provided in the key?

Apply 1. What is approximate friction power loss in a single radial ball bearing having a bore diameter

of 55 mm and subjected to a radial load of 225 KN? The shaft rotates at 600 rpm.

2. Determine the approximate friction torque expected in single deep groove ball bearing under

a radial load of 30 KN. The bore of the bearing is 50 mm.

3. A shaft is subjected to the varying load cycle as follows; 3 KN for 1 s, 1 KN for 1s and 0.5

KN for 3s. If the shaft rotates at the constant speed of 500 rpm, what basic load rating for

each fraction of cycle should be used in selecting the ball bearing with a life of 15000 hours?

4. A hollow steel shaft of 800mm outside diameter is used to drive a propeller of a marine

vessel. The shaft is mounted on bearings 6m apart, and it transmits 6000kW at 200rpm. The

maximum axial thrust is 750kN and shaft weighs 75 kN.

Determine

a) Maximum shear stress induced

b) Angular twist of shaft between bearings.

5. A shaft 30mm diameter is transmitting power at a maximum shear stress of

80N/mm2. If a pulley is connected to the shaft by means of key, find the dimension of the key

so that the stress in the key is not to exceed 50N/mm2 and the length of key is 4 times of

width the key.

6. Design a bushed pin type of flexible coupling for connecting a motor and pump shaft for the

following data

Power = 20kW;

Speed = 1000rpm

Shaft diameter = 50mm;

Bearing pressure for rubber bush = 0.3N/mm2

7. Design a muff coupling to connect two shafts transmitting 40kW at 150rpm. The allowable

shear and crushing stresses for the shaft and key are 37N/mm2 and 96.25N/mm2

respectively. The permissible shear stress for the muff is 17.5N/mm2. Assume that the

maximum torque transmitted is 20% more than the mean torque. Take the width and depth of

the parallel key is 22mm and 14mm respectively.

8. A split muff coupling is to transmit 50 H P. at 120 r.p.m. Allowable stress are 30 N/mm2 in

shear for bolt and key 80 N/mm2 in crushing for key and 100 N/mm2 in tension for bolts.

Coefficient of friction between the muff and shaft may be assumed as 0.15. Design the

coupling assuming that the key and the friction between the muff and shaft are capable of

transmitting full torque independently.

9. A factory line shaft is 4 m long and is to transmit 75 kW at 200 rpm. The allowable stress in

shear is 40 MPa and maximum allowable twist is 10 in a length of 20 mm diameter.

Determine the required shaft diameter.

10. A 50kW power at 250rpm is transmitted from 60mm diameter shaft by means of Kennedy

key. The keys are made of C45 steel having strength of 370N/mm2 and factor safety is 2.5.

Design key.



Analyse 1. Taking stress concentration into account find the maximum stress induced when a tensile load

of 20 kN is applied to i) A rectangular plate 80 mm wide and 12 mm thick with a transverse

hole of 16 mm diameter ii) A stepped shaft of 60 mm and 30 mm diameter with 6 mm fillet

radius.

2. A factory line shaft is 4 m long and is to transmit 75 kW at 200 rpm. The allowable stress in

shear is 40 MPa and maximum allowable twist is 10 in a length of 20 mm diameter.

Determine the required shaft diameter.

3. Design a journal bearing for a centrifugal pump with the following data.

Diameter of the journal = 150 mm

Load on bearing = 40 KN

Speed of journal = 900 rpm

4. Design a close coiled helical compression spring for a service load ranging from 2250 N to

2750 N. The axial deflection of the spring for the load range is 6 mm. Assume a spring index

of 5. The permissible shear stress intensity is 420 N/mm2 and modulus of rigidity, G = 84

kN/mm2.

Neglect the effect of stress concentration. Draw a fully dimensioned sketch of the spring,

showing details of the finish of the end coils.

5. A helical compression spring made of oil tempered carbon steel, is subjected to a load which

varies from 400 N to 1000 N. The spring index is 6 and the design factor of safety is 1.25. If

the yield stress in shear is 770 Mpa and endurance stress in shear is 350 Mpa, find 1. Size of

the spring wire, 2. Diameter of the spring, 3. Number of turns of the spring, and 4. Free length

of the spring. The compression of the spring at the maximum of rigidity for the spring

material may be taken as 80 kN/mm2.

6. A footstep bearing supports a shaft of 150 mm diameter which is counter bored at the end

with a whole diameter of 50 mm. If the bearing pressure is limited to 0.8 N/mm^2 and the

speed is 100 r.p.m.; find: 1. the load to be supported; 2. the power lost in friction; and 3. the

heat generated at the bearing. Assume coefficient of friction = 0.015.

Evaluate 1. A compression coil spring made of an alloy steel is having the following specifications: Mean

diameter = 50 mm; Wire diameter = 5 mm; Number of active coils = 20. If this spring is

subjected to an axial load of 500 N; calculate the maximum shear stress (neglect the curvature

effect) to which the spring material is subjected.

2. A truck spring has 12 number of leaves, two of which are full length leaves. The spring

supports are 1.05 m apart and the central band is 85 mm wide. Te central load is to be 5.4 KN

with a permissible stress of 280 Mpa. Determine the thickness and width of the steel spring

leaves. The ratio of the total depth to the width of the spring is 3. Also determine the

deflection of the spring.

3. A helical spring is made from a wire of 6mm diameter and has outside diameter of 75 mm. If

the permissible shear stress is 350 N/mm2 and modulus of rigidity 84 kN/mm2, find the axial

load which the spring can carry by Neglecting the effect of curvature and considering the

effect of curvature.

4. A single cylinder, single acting, four stroke oil engine develops 20 kW at 300 r.p.m. The work

done by the gases during the expansion stroke is 2.3 times the work done on the gases during

the compression and the work done during the suction and exhaust strokes is negligible. The

speed is to be maintained within ± 1%. Determine the mass moment of inertia of the flywheel.



15MC607 PLC AND AUTOMATION LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To provide a clear view on Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC)

To learn the various methods involved in automatic control and monitoring


1. Understand the use of RS Logix software in PLC

2. Develop the PLC program for the implementation of logic gates

3. Develop the PLC program for controlling the parameters like Pressure, Level and Flow

4. Develop the PLC program for various applications like bottle filling, cylinder actuation and

elevator control

5. Identify the necessity of using Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) for

complex projects.

2 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Using RS logic software implementation of logic gates.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Automate the level and flow control using PLC

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Select the I/O module for temperature control using PLC

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Find I/O module and input and output devices for pressure and flow control using PLC

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Select the suitable I/O module for control of elevator using PLC

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Bottle filling process using PLC

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Identify I/O module for automate the cylinder sequencing using simple pneumatic direct control

valve.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Traffic light controller.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Choose the special I/O for speed control of DC motor using PLC.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 10 Programming in HMI and SCADA.

Total: 30 Hours



Reference(s)

1. Petruzella Frank D., Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.

Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

2. Webb, John W. Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Application, Fifth edition,


3. Bolton , "Programmable Logic Controllers” 5th Edition Newnes, ,2009

15MC608 ROBOTICS LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To know about the various types of robots

To understand the concept of programming the SCARA ROBOT


1. Understand the physique and configurations of industrial robots

2. Program the SCARA Robot

3. Apply SCARA robot for a various application

3 Hours EXPERIMENT 1 Study of various types of robots.

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Geometric Modeling: As an example of a geometric modeling system a SCARA robot is modeled in a

common modeling language using an industrial robot simulation system

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Offline Programming: The previously modeled SCARA robot is then programmed offline, also using

the industrial robot simulation system.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Forward and Inverse Kinematics: The forward and inverse kinematics of the SCARA robot are

derived and calculated in a simulation software.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Motion Planning: A small motion planning module for the SCARA robot has to be implemented that

can be checked in the framework of the simulation system

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Visualization of Denavit-Hartenberg parameter for the Robot with PRP configuration using Robo

Analyser.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Programming a parallel kinematic robot for a pick and place application

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Programming the robot for a drilling application

Total: 30 Hours



Reference(s)

1. Ashitava Ghosal, Robotics: Fundamental Concepts and Analysis, Oxford University Press,

2008.

2. Mikell P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N. Nagel and Nicholas G. Odrey, Industrial

Robotics Technology, Programming and Applications, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Limited, New Delhi, 2000

3. K. S. Fu, R. C. Gonzalez and C. S. G. Lee, Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision, and

Intelligence, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1987.

15MC609 TECHNICAL SEMINAR II 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To develop the self-learning skills to utilize various technical resources available from

multiple field.

To promote the technical presentation and communication skills.

To impart the knowledge on intonation, word and sentence stress for improving



1. Refer and utilize various technical resources available from multiple field.

2. Improve the technical presentation and communication skills.

3. Understand the importance of intonation, word and sentence stress for improving


4. Interact and share their technical knowledge to enhance the leadership skills.

5. Understand and adhere to deadlines and commitment to complete the assignments.

15MC610 MINI PROJECT IV 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives





effectiveness.




solutions.



of the project.






15GE611 LIFE SKILLS: APTITUDE II 0 0 2 -

Course Objectives

The undergraduate students to such methods and practices that help, develop and nurture

qualities such as character, effective communication, aptitude and holding ethical values


1. Perform arithmetical operations with complex numbers

2. Explain the meanings of a relation defined on a set, an equivalent relation and a partition of a

set

3. Calculate percentages in real life contexts , find any percentage of a given whole using their

knowledge of fraction multiplication and increase / decrease a given whole by a percentage

4. Calculate the Ratio, Proportions and Variation

5. Identify the percentage gain or percentage loss

6. Differentiate Pipes and Cisterns

7. Demonstrate the situations like motion in as straight line , Boats and Streams , Trains, Races

and clocks

8. Evaluate the Counting techniques, Permutation and Combination, Recursion and generating

functions

9. Categorize the distributions of probability with respect to the random variables

10. Discuss the different cases of Mixtures and Alligation

1 3 Hours

NUMBER SYSTEMS Introduction - definition- classification on Numbers -power cycles and remainders - short cut process

- concept of highest common factor - concept of least common multiple - divisibility - number of

zeros in an expression

2 3 Hours

PERCENTAGES Introduction - definition and Utility of percentage - importance of base/denominator for percentage

calculations - concept of percentage values through additions - fraction to percentage conversion table

3 3 Hours

AVERAGES Introduction - average of different groups - addition or removal of items and change in average-

replacement of some of the items

4 3 Hours

RATIO, PROPORTIONS AND VARIATION Introduction- Ratio- properties-dividing a given number in the given ratio - comparison of ratios -

proportions - useful results on proportion- continued proportion - relation among the quantities more

than two - variation

5 3 Hours

PROFIT AND LOSS Gain/Loss and percentage gain or percentage loss-multiplying equivalents to find sale price - relation

among cost price, sale price, gain/loss and percentage gain or percentage loss - an article sold at two

different selling price - two different articles sold at same selling price - percentage gain or percentage

loss on selling price - percentage gain or percentage loss on whole property



6 3 Hours

TIME AND WORK Introduction - Basic concepts -Concepts on working with different efficiency - Pipes and Cisterns -

Work Equivalence (Man Days) -Alternative approach

7 3 Hours

TIME, SPEED AND DISTANCE Definition - Basics of Time, Speed and Distance - Relative speed - Problems based on Trains?

Problems based on Boats and Streams -Problems based on Races - time taken with two difference

modes of transport - time and distance between two moving bodies

8 3 Hours

PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION Definition - Fundamental rules - Theorems on Permutation - Theorems on Combination

9 3 Hours

PROBABILITY Concept and importance of probability - underlying factors for Real- Life estimation of probability -

Basic facts about probability - some important consideration while defining event.

10 3 Hours

MIXTURES AND ALLIGATION Definition - alligation rule - mean value (cost price) of the mixture - some typical situations where

allegation can be used.

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Abhijit Guha, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Fourth Edition, Tata


2. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Data Interpretation for the CAT, First Edition, Tata


3. Dr.R S Aggarwal, Quantitative Aptitude, Seventh Revised Edition, S.Chand Publishing

Company Ltd, 2013.

4. Edgar Thorpe , Course In Mental Ability And Quantitative Aptitude For Competitive

Examinations, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2013

5. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Quantitative Aptitude for the CAT, Fifth Edition, Tata


15GE701 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS 3 0 0 3

Common to Common to CSE, ECE, EEE, EIE, IT (VI Semester) and to

AE, AG, AU, CE, ME, MTRS, BT, FT, TT (VII Semester)

Course Objectives

Provide the theoretical foundations in micro and macro analysis in terms of concepts and

theories

Emphasis the systematic evaluation of the costs and benefits associated with projects

Enumerate the idea of Balance sheet and Balance of payments


1. Understand the micro economic environment for creating a favourable business environment.

2. Take decision by making use of the major concepts and techniques of engineering economic

analysis.

3. Compare the cost of multiple projects by using the methods learned, and make a quantitative

decision between alternate facilities and/or systems.



4. Apply the appropriate engineering economics analysis method(s) for problem solving: present

worth, annual cost, rate-of-return, payback, break-even, benefit-cost ratio.

5. Examine and evaluate the issues in macro-economic analysis.

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION Introduction to Micro and Macro economics - Kinds of Economic Systems - Production Possibility

Frontier - Opportunity Cost - Objective of Organizations - Kinds of Organization.

UNIT II 9 Hours

DEMAND AND SUPPLY Functions of Demand and Supply - Law of diminishing Marginal Utility - Law of Demand and

Supply - Elasticity of Demand - Demand Forecasting Methods - Indifference curve.

UNIT III 9 Hours

PRODUCTION AND COST Production Function - Returns to Scale - Law of Variable Proportion - Cost and Revenue concepts

and Cost Curves - Revenue curves - Economies and Dis-economies of scale - Break Even point.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

MARKET STRUCTURE Market Structure - Perfect Competition - Monopoly - Monopolistic - Oligopoly - Components of

Pricing - Methods f Pricing - Capital Budgeting IRR - ARR - NPV - Return on Investment - Payback

Period.

UNIT V

9 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO MACRO ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING National Income - Calculation Methods - Problems - Inflation - Deflation - Business Cycle - Taxes -

Direct and Indirect Taxes - Fiscal and monetary policies. FOR FURTHER READING Nature and characteristics of Indian Economy - Role and functions of Central bank - LPG - GATT -

WTO.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. A Ramachandra Aryasri and V V Ramana Murthy, Engineering Economics and Financial

Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2006.

2. V L Samuel Paul and G S Gupta, Managerial Economics Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw

Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1981.

3. R Kesavan, C Elanchezhian and T Sunder Selwyn, Engineering Economics and Financial

Accounting, Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.

4. S N Maheswari, Financial and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand

5. V L Samuel Paul and G S Gupta, Managerial Economics-Concepts and Cases



Assessment Pattern



1 2

2

8

6

18

2

2

2

8

6

4

22

3

2

2

8

4

16

4 2

2

8

6

4

22

5

2

2

8

6

4

22

Total 100


1. Define Economics.

2. What is opportunity cost?

3. List the types of Demand.

4. State the law of Demand.

5. Define Elasticity of Demand.

6. State the different degrees of elasticity of Demand.

7. List the factors determining Elasticity of Demand.

8. State the Law Of Diminishing Marginal Utility.

9. Define Replacement Cost and Historic Cost.

10. Define Monopoly.

11. Define Oligopoly

12. Name the two types of Oligopoly.

13. List the objectives of Pricing.

14. Define Accounting.

15. Define inflation.

Understand

1. Explain the nature and scope of Economics.

2. List and explain the focus areas of Managerial economics.

3. Give reasons why mangers aim to maximize sales even at the cost of a lower profit.

4. Explain the nature of Demand.

5. What are the assumptions made when talking about the Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility?

6. Explain the characteristics of the Indifference Curve with examples.

7. Can Demand Forecasting principles be applied to Services? Substantiate your answer with

an example.

8. What are the characteristic features of an oligopoly industry?

9. What causes Oligopoly?

10. Explain the types and features of Cost Based Pricing.

11. Explain the types and features of Demand Based Pricing.

12. Under what conditions does a company go in for Cross Subsidization pricing?

13. What is the role of the Central bank in controlling inflation?

Apply

1. Explain decisions based on the degree of certainty of the outcome with examples.

2. Give examples of products falling under the various kinds of competition, and the reasons

they are able to survive in the market.

3. Give six examples of products that fall under Monopolistic Competitive pricing.

4. Give six examples of products that fall under Oligopolistic pricing.



5. Pick any six Consumer Items and based on your knowledge of the markets, explain the

pricing method that you think is most likely to have been followed for each of these items.

Analyse

1. Differentiate between Macro and Micro economics.

2. Differentiate between Extension and Increase in Demand.

3. Distinguish between Cost and Price.

4. Compare the merits and demerits of the Deductive Method and the Inductive Method

of Investigation.

5. The per-capita income of farmers in the country has to be raised by 20% this year to

prevent their migration to cities. Discuss this statement from the point of view of Positive and

Normative Economics.

6. Decision making improves with age and experience- Discuss.

7. Do a survey of the automotive (only cars) industry and analyze the reasons and timing for

discounts offered from the point of view of elasticity of demand.

8. How would you modify a sealed bid pricing system to take care of different

technical approaches by different bidders for a project for which bids are called for, given that

the cost varies depending on the technical approach?

Create

1. Create a matrix consolidating the definitions of the word economics as defined by the leading

economists in the prescribed textbook. Using this define economics the way you understand

it, in less than 50 words.

2. Study the price of a commodity over a period of one year and explain the possible reasons for

the fluctuations from an economist‘s point of view.

3. You are in a job which is paying you adequately. You are called for an interview for a job that

double your salary. Unfortunately you miss the only train that will take you in time for the

interview. How will you justify the cost of taking a flight considering the cost concepts you

have learnt.

4. Due to cancellation of an export order, you are stuck with a huge stock of jeans of

international quality. Device a pricing strategy for disposing this stock without incurring a

loss, considering that it is a very competitive market.

15MC702 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

The intention and purpose of this course is to study the basics of electronics, emission

controls and its importance in automobiles

To study the various sensors and actuators used in automobiles for improving fuel economy

and emission control

To study the various blocks of control units used for control of fuel, ignition and exhaust

systems.


1. Know the importance of emission standards in automobiles

2. Understand the electronic fuel injection/ignition components and their function

3. Choose and use sensors and equipment for measuring mechanical quantities, temperature and

appropriate actuators

4. Diagnose electronic engine control systems problems with appropriate diagnostic tools

5. Analyse the chassis and vehicle safety system



UNIT I 8 Hours

INTRODUCTION Evolution of electronics in automobiles - emission laws - introduction to Euro I, Euro II, Euro III,

Euro IV, Euro V standards - Equivalent Bharat Standards. Charging systems: Working and design of

charging circuit diagram - Alternators - Requirements of starting system - Starter motors and starter

circuits.

UNIT II 9 Hours

IGNITION AND INJECTION SYSTEM Ignition systems: Ignition fundamentals - Electronic ignition systems - Programmed Ignition -

Distribution less ignition - Direct ignition - Spark Plugs. Electronic fuel Control: Basics of

combustion - Engine fueling and exhaust emissions - Electronic control of carburetion - Petrol fuel

injection - Diesel fuel injection.

UNIT III

8 Hours

SENSORS AND ACTUATORS Working principle and characteristics of Airflow rate, Engine crankshaft angular position, Hall effect,

Throttle angle, temperature, exhaust gas oxygen sensors - study of fuel injector, exhaust gas re-

circulation actuators, stepper motor actuator, vacuum operated actuator.

UNIT IV 10 Hours

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Control modes for fuel control - Engine control subsystems - Ignition control methodologies -

Different ECU's used in the engine management - block diagram of the engine management system.

In vehicle networks: CAN standard, format of CAN standard - Diagnostics systems in modern

automobiles.

UNIT V 10 Hours

CHASSIS AND SAFETY SYSTEM Traction control system - Cruise control system - Electronic control of automatic transmission - Anti-

lock braking system - Electronic suspension system - Working of airbag and role of MEMS in airbag

systems - Centralized door locking system - Climate control of cars.

FOR FURTHER READING Power Train Control, Safety System Control (Brake System (ASR, ESP) and Airbag-Seat Belt

Tensioners), Steering System Control, Bharat IV & V – Emission Standard, Security System

(Centralized Remote Door Locking, Immobilizer).

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Tom Denton, Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems, Butterworth Heinemann

Publishers, India, 2012.

2. William Ribbens, Understanding Automotive Electronics, Newnes Publishers, India, 2013.

3. BOSCH Automotive Handbook, Bentley Publishers, USA, 2005.

4. Barry Hollembeak, Automotive Electricity, Electronics and Computer Controls, Delmar

Publishers, USA, 2001.

5. Ronald. K. Jurgon, Automotive Electronics Handbook, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.

6. Ronald. K. Jurgon, Automotive Electronics Handbook, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.



Assessment Pattern



1 3 4

6 3

2 2

20

2 3 4

6 3

2 2

20

3 3 4

3 3

4 3

20

4 3 4

3 3

4 3

20

5 3 3

3 3

2 6

20

Total 100


1. What is meant by distributor less ignition system?

2. What is the function of detonation sensor?

3. What is the purpose of using wheel sensor in ABS?

4. List the sources of exhaust gas emissions from the automobiles that affect the environmental

conditions.

5. What is meant by telematics?

6. Write the components of embedded system.

7. What are Euro Norms?

Understand 1. Differentiate between a solenoid switch and relay switch.

2. Whether the petrol fuel injection is different from diesel fuel injection? How does it differ?

3. Difference between MAF and MAP sensors.

4. Why do we use Hall Effect sensors in automotive application?

5. Where the cruise control system used in vehicles?

6. Why digital displays are multiplexed?

7. Differentiate throttle body and MPFI injection systems.

Apply

1. Calculate chemically correct air fuel ratio for complete combustion of octane (C8H18).

2. Design an Electric circuit for automatic seat adjuster, power window, auto lock and for

parking assist sensor.

15MC703 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL

SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To acquire a knowledge about materials for MEMS

To know about various micromanufacturing techniques

To have a knowledge about microsensors and microactuators


1. Know the scaling laws that are used extensively in the conceptual design of microdevices and

able to use materials for common microcomponents and devices

2. Select a fabrication process suitable for production of a MEMS device

3. choose a suitable micromachining technique for a specific MEMS fabrication process

4. Understand the working principles of microsensors, actuators, valves, pumps, and fluidics

used in Microsystems

5. Acquire knowledge on micro system packaging and design



UNIT I 9 Hours

SCALING LAWS AND MATERIALS FOR MEMS Introduction to Microsystems and micro electronics - Trimmers scaling vector and scaling laws -

scaling in geometry scaling in rigid body dynamics scaling in electrostatic forces scaling in electricity

- scaling in fluid mechanics scaling in heat transfer. Materials for MEMS: Silicon as a MEMS

material Crystal structure of silicon Miller indices - silicon compounds SiO2, SiC, and Si3N4 and

polycrystalline silicon silicon piezo-resistors - Gallium arsenide - polymers for MEMS - Need for

micromechanics considerations in MEMS design, Clean room technology - Substrates and wafer

UNIT II

9 Hours

FABRICATION OF MEMS Processes for Surface micromachining: Deposition processes - Ion implantation - Diffusion –

oxidation - chemical vapor deposition - physical vapor deposition - deposition by epitaxy –

photolithography - photoresists and light sources

UNIT III 9 Hours

OVERVIEW OF MICRO MANUFACTURING Processes for bulk micromachining Isotropic and Anisotropic etching - Wet etchants - Etch stop - Dry

etching - DRIE - Wet Vs dry etching - Surface micromachining - Mechanical problems associated

with surface micromachining - Limitations of Bulk and surface micromachining LIGA and SLIGA

UNIT IV 9 Hours

MICRO SENSORS AND ACTUATORS Piezoelectric crystals - Shape memory alloys - bimetallics - electrostatic forces. Micro motors - micro

grippers - Microfluidic devices - Micro pumps: mechanical and non - mechanical micro pumps -

micro valves - valve less micro pumps - Lab on Chip - Types of micro sensors: Micro accelerometer -

Micro pressure sensors.

UNIT V 9 Hours

MICROSYSTEM PACKAGING AND DESIGN Micro system packaging materials: Die, device, level system - level packaging techniques - die

preparation - surface bonding wire bonding - sealing – Design considerations: process design,

mechanical design

FOR FURTHER READING MEMS devices for automotive applications, bio medical, aerospace and telecommunication industries

- Optical MEMS devices, Use of MEMS devices in cell phones and robots

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Tai Ran Hsu, MEMS and Micro Systems Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.

2. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, The MEMS Handbook, CRC Press Publishers, India, 2005.

3. NadimMaluf, An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Design, Artech House

Publishers, London, 2004.

4. Chang Liu, Foundations of MEMS, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2014.

5. James J. Allen, Micro Electro Mechanical System Design, CRC Press Publishers, India, 2005.

6. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan and Osama O. Awadelkarim, Micro sensors MEMS and

smart Devices, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., England, 2013



Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

4 2

20

2 2 4

4 4

2

4

20

3 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

4

2

2 2

4 4

2

4

20

5 2 2

2 6

2

4

2

20

Total 100


1. Define MEMS.

2. What are the various modes of heat transmission system in MEMS?

3. State the piezoelectric effect.

4. State the working principle of Chemical vapor deposition process.

5. Write the three serious effects on micro mechanics exposed to elevated temperatures.

6. List the three stages of creep.

7. Write any three application of MEMS in bio medical.

8. Define micro actuation.

9. List the various levels of micro system packaging.

10. What are the major three task involved in micro system design?

Understand 1. Eexplain about the various design considerations in micro product development.

2. Explain about various types of bonding techniques.

3. Discuss the working principle of Micro sensor and Actuator with neat diagram.

4. Explain about the types, construction details and working principle of micro grippers.

5. Explain about the creep deformation of materials at elevated temperatures.

6. Explain the schematic configuration of micro accelerometers.

7. Explain the working principle of chemical vapor deposition process.

8. Explain how the silicon nitride and polycrystalline compound contributed for MEMS.

9. Explain the scaling in electrostatic forces in electrically charged parallel plates.

10. Explain the czochralski method to produce silicon.

11. Why the ESF used to run micromotors rather than conventional electromagnetic forces.

Apply 1. Compute the trimmer force scaling vector for acceleration, time and power density.

2. Find the reduction of electrostatic forces generated by a pair of parallel plate electrodes if

both the length L and the width W of these plates are reduced by a factor of 10.

3. Explain the vapour type epitaxy method which is used in IC industries.

4. Explain how the piezo electric transducer is used in various MEMS application.

5. Compute the expression for the bending of circular late with edge fixed.

6. With a suitable dimension find the damping coefficient of a micro accelerometer using a

cantilever beam spring.

7. What kind of actuation technique is used in micro motor? Classify and explain about the

working principle of micro motor with neat diagram.

8. Describe the four popular actuation techniques for micro devices.

9. Design a surface manufacturing process flow for making cantilever beam.

10. Describe in detail about application of micro system in automotive field.



Analyse 1. Estimate the variation of the total heat flow and the time required to transmit heat in a solid

with a reduction of size by a factor of 10.

2. Estimate the associated changes in the acceleration and the time t and the power supply to

actuate a MEMS components if its weight is reduced by a factor of 10.

3. Compare dry and wet etching.

4. Distinguish surface micromachining and bulk micromachining.

5. What is called fracture toughness? Explain the same for compact tension specimen.

6. Differentiate the micro actuator and micro sensor.

7. Distinguish micro valve and micro pump.

8. Differnetiate LIGA and SLIGA process.

9. Compare die level and device level of packaging.

Create 1. A rectangular diaphragm, 13.887 μm thick has the plane dimensions as shown in the figure.

The diaphragm is made of silicon. Derive the maximum stress and deflection when it is

subjected to a normal pressure, P = 20 MPa. All 4 edges of the diaphragm are fixed.

2. Determine the amplitude and frequency of vibration of a 10-mg mass attached to two springs

as shown in the figure. The mass can vibrate freely without friction between the rollers and

the supporting floor. Assume that the springs have same spring constant k1 = K2=k = 6 x 10-

5 N/m in both tension and compression. The vibration begins with the mass

being pulled to the right with an amount of δst = 5 μm. (as induced by acceleration or

deceleration).

15MC704 CNC TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Understand evolution and principle of CNC machine tools

Describe constructional features of CNC machine tools

Explain drives and positional transducers used in CNC machine tools

Write simple programs for CNC turning and machining centres

Generate CNC programs for popular CNC controllers

Describe tooling and work holding devices for CNC machine tools


1. Understand the evolution, principles, classification and applications of CNC machine tools

2. Realise the basic structure, construction, working and control of CNC machines

3. Identify the fundamentals of drive system and control modules of CNC technology

4. Develop program for CNC machines

5. Gather knowledge about different tooling and working holding devices of CNC

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO CNC MACHINE TOOLS Evolution of CNC Technology, principles, features, advantages, applications - CNC and DNC

concept, classification of CNC Machines turning centre, machining centre, grinding machine, EDM -

Types of control systems - CNC controllers, characteristics, interpolators - Computer Aided

Inspection



UNIT II 9 Hours

STRUCTURE OF CNC MACHINE TOOL CNC Machine building, structural details, configuration and design - Guide ways Friction - Anti

friction and other types of guide ways - Elements used to convert the rotary motion to a linear motion

Screw and nut, recirculating ball screw, planetary roller screw, recirculating roller screw, rack and

pinion -spindle assembly - torque transmission elements gears, timing belts, flexible couplings -

Bearings.

UNIT III 9 Hours

DRIVES AND CONTROLS Spindle drives - DC shunt motor, 3 phase - AC induction motor - Feed drives - Stepper motor - Servo

principle - DC and AC servomotors - Open loop and closed loop control - Axis measuring system -

synchro, synchro-resolver, gratings, moir fringe gratings, encoders, inductosysn, laser interferometer

UNIT IV

9 Hours

CNC PROGRAMMING Coordinate system - Structure of a part program - G & M Codes - Tool length compensation - Cutter

radius and tool nose radius compensation - Do loops, subroutines, canned cycles, mirror image,

parametric programming - Machining cycles and programming for machining - Generation of CNC

codes from CAM packages

UNIT V

9 Hours

TOOLING AND WORK HOLDING DEVICES Introduction to cutting tool materials: Carbides, Ceramics, CBN, PCD inserts classification - PMK,

NSH, qualified, semi qualified and preset tooling - Tooling system for machining centre and turning

centre - Work holding devices for rotating and fixed work parts - Economics of CNC - maintenance of

CNC machines FOR FURTHER READING CNC Program generation from CAD models, geometric modeling for NC machining & machining of

free-form surfaces, CNC controller & motion control in CNC system. Application of CNC and recent

advances in CNC machines, maintenance of CNC machine tools, CNC trainer

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. HMT, "Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2005

2. Warren S.Seamers, Computer Numeric Control, Fourth Edition Thomson Delmar, 2002.

3. P. N. Rao and N. K. Tiwari, Numerical Control and Computer Aided Manufacturing, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing company, New Delhi

4. Tilak Raj, ewCNC technology & programming, Dhanpat Rai publishing company(p) ltd., N

Delhi

5. P. Radhakrishnan, Computer Numerical Control Machine & Computer Aided Manufacturing,

New Academic Science Limited

6. M. Adithan & B. S. Pabla, CNC Machines, New Age International Publishers , New Delhi



Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

2 2 4

4 4

2

4

20

3 2 4

4 4

2 4

20

4

4

2 2

4 4

4

20

5 2 4

2 6

2

2

2

20

Total 100


1. Define CNC programming.

2. Designate the CNC cutting tools.

3. List the types of tool changers.

4. Name the codes used for units setting in CNC program.

5. Mention the M codes used for Spindle ON, OFF and START and STOP.

6. List the code with syntax used for feed rate in different unit system.

7. List G codes used for setting feed rate.

8. Define open loop and closed loop system.

9. List any 5 cutting tool materials used in CNC machining.

10. Explain the principle of servo motor.

Understand 1. How to select speed for drilling different materials?

2. How CNC machine works?

3. How the tool changer works?

4. Why CNC turning is preferred than conventional lathe?

5. Differentiate turning centre and machining centre?

6. Is G01 modal? How?

7. Differentiate the uses of G00 and G28.

8. How multiple threads are formed? Name the G code.

9. How circular interpolation is enabled?

10. What is the need of cutter compensation?

Apply 1. Explain in detail the classification of CNC machines with neat sketches.

2. What are the types of control system in CNC machining?

Analyse 1. List out the types of guide ways used in CNC machine and explain any two.

Create 1. Write the part program for any machining application.

15MC707 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL

SYSTEMS LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To draw the models in 2D and 3D

To understand fabrication process in MEMS

To analyze the responses of MEMS devices




1. Design the MEMS devices for a given applications

2. Analyze the performance of MEMS devices

3. Develop an appropriate procedure, for fabricating the MEMS devices

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Build a square structure with a circular hole in 3D builder using mask and direct method

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Build a comb drive using 3D builder and fabricate it using Intellifab

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Perform the transient analysis for a bimorph cantilever in a periodically changing magnetic field using

SYNPLE

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Perform electrostatic force analysis for a contact switch using Blueprint

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Perform the Anisotropic etching process using ANISE tool

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Perform the static analysis of piezoelectric beam using TEM module

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Perform the sub-harmonic response analysis for the beam fixed at both ends

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Build the RF switch using 3D builder and perform the static analysis

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Create a model using beams and plates and perform the AC analysis which is suitable for gyro

applications using SYNPLE

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 10 Perform the Thermo Mechanical Analysis of piezoelectric pump

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Chang Liu, Foundations of MEMS, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011.

2. James J. Allen, Micro Electro Mechanical System Design, CRC Press Publishers, India, 2005

15MC708 CAD/CAM LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To able to understand and handle design problems in a systematic manner

To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modeling software systems




1. Program CNC machines to generate any contour/ Profile

2. Generate part programs for CNC lathe

3. Develop the CNC program for machining centre

4. Sketch the drawings of standard machine components using any modelling software

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Exercise on linear and circular interpolation CNC Lathe

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Generation of CNC code for facing and step turning operation using simulation software

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 CNC code generation for taper turning operation using Caps turn

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Exercise on thread cutting

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Exercise on grooving cycle

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Exercise on drilling and boring cycle

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Exercise on linear and circular interpolation CNC Milling

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Exercise on contour milling

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 9 Exercise on drilling using suitable simulation software

3 Hours

EXPERIMENT 10 Modelling of tail stock in a LATHE using Creo Parametric

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. William W. Lugges, CNC A First Look Primer, Delmar Publishers, New York, 1997

2. Alan Overby, CNC Machining Handbooks: Building, Programming and Implementation,

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New York, 2011

15MC709 MINI PROJECT V 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To develop skills to formulate a technical project.

To give guidance on the various tasks of the project and standard procedures.

To teach use of new tools, algorithms and techniques required to carry out the projects.



To give guidance on the various procedures for validation of the product and analyse the cost

effectiveness.

To provide guidelines to prepare technical report of the project.


1. Formulate a real world problem, identify the requirement and develop the design solutions.

2. Identify technical ideas, strategies and methodologies.


project.

4. Perform test and validate through conformance of the developed prototype and analysis the

cost effectiveness.

5. Explain the acquired knowledge through preparation of report and oral presentations.

15GE710 LIFE SKILLS: COMPETITVE EXAMS 0 0 2 1

Course Objectives

To train the students for facing the competitive examinations of mechanical engineering and

instrumentation engineering sectors


1. The students will be able to solve problems on engineering mechanics, materials, metrology

and inspection

2. The students will be able to solve problems on circuit analysis and analog electronics

7 Hours

UNIT I Engineering Mechanics and Materials

Free-body diagrams and equilibrium; trusses and frames; virtual work; kinematics and dynamics of

particles and of rigid bodies in plane motion; impulse and momentum (linear and angular) and energy

formulations, collisions. Structure and properties of engineering materials, phase diagrams, heat

treatment, stress-strain diagrams for engineering materials.

7 Hours

UNIT II

Metrology and Inspection

Limits, fits and tolerances; linear and angular measurements; comparators; gauge design;

interferometry; form and finish measurement; alignment and testing methods; tolerance analysis in

manufacturing and assembly.

8 Hours

UNIT III Electrical Circuits Voltage and current sources: independent, dependent, ideal and practical; v-i relationships of resistor,

inductor, mutual inductor and capacitor; transient analysis of RLC circuits with dc excitation.

Kirchoff’s laws, mesh and nodal analysis, superposition, Thevenin, Norton, maximum power transfer

and reciprocity theorems. Peak-, average- and rms values of ac quantities; apparent-, active- and

reactive powers; phasor analysis, impedance and admittance; series and parallel resonance, locus

diagrams, realization of basic filters with R, L and C elements. One-port and two-port networks,

driving point impedance and admittance, open-, and short circuit parameters



8 Hours

UNIT IV

Analog Electronics

Characteristics and applications of diode, Zener diode, BJT and MOSFET; small signal analysis of

transistor circuits, feedback amplifiers. Characteristics of operational amplifiers; applications of

opamps: difference amplifier, adder, subtractor, integrator, differentiator, instrumentation amplifier,

precision rectifier, active filters and other circuits. Oscillators, signal generators, voltage controlled

oscillators and phase locked loop.

Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s)

1. R.K. Bansal, A Textbook of Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publications, 2002.

2. R.K. Rajput, Engineering Materials, S. Chand, 2008.

3. William H. Hayt, Jack E.Kimmerly and Steven M.Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, Tata

McGraw-Hill, 2013.

4. Robert Boylestad, Electronics devices and circuit theory, Pearson, 2009.

15MC804 PROJECT WORK - - - 9

Course Objectives





effectiveness.


Course Outcomes (COs) 1. Formulate a real world problem, identify the requirement and develop the design

solutions.



project.

4. Test and validate through conformance of the developed prototype and analysis the cost

effectiveness.




LANGUAGE ELECTIVES

15LE101 BASIC ENGLISH I

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives (COs):

To offer students the basics of the English Language in a graded manner.

To promote efficiency in English Language by offering extensive opportunities for the

development of all the four language skills (LSRW) within the classroom.

To focus on improving and increasing vocabulary.

To improve spelling and pronunciation by offering students rigorous practice and exercises.

Course Outcome (CO)

1. Converse in English with more confidence.

Unit I 7.5 Hours

Unit II 7.5 Hours

Unit III 7.5 Hours

Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets

11 Homophones Formal and informal methods

of self-introduction

Let’s Talk is a group

activity that gives them

some important

pointers of speech


1 Basic words- 12 most used words

in English, usage and pronunciation

Starting a conversation and

talking about what one does

Sentence construction

bolstered by mother

tongue

2 Basic words- 20 often used words,

usage and pronunciation

Analysing an action plan Creating and presenting

one’s own action plan

3 Basic words with a focus on

spelling

Discriminative listening Informal conversation

4 Basic words- 10 oft used words,

usage and pronunciation

Content listening and

Intonation

Reading

comprehension

5 Unit Test I


6 Basic words + greetings to be used

at different times of the day

Formal conversation Intonation to be used in

formal address

7 Last 28 of the 100 most used words Informal conversation

between equals

Reading practice and

peer learning

8 Using the 14 target words to form

bigger words

Informal dialogues using

contracted forms

Guided speaking-

talking to peers using

contracted forms

9 Palindromes, greetings- good luck,

festivals

Placing a word within its

context- culling out meaning

Offering

congratulations

10 Unit Test II



12 Homophone partners, matching

words with their meanings

Contracted forms of the –be

verbs, ‘ve and ‘s

Translating English

sentences to Tamil

13 Briefcase words- finding smaller

words from a big word

Formal and informal ways of

introducing others

Team work- speaking

activity involving

group work, soft skills

14 Compound words and

pronunciation pointers

Giving personal details about

oneself

Using the lexicon

15 Unit Test III

Unit IV 7.5 Hours


16 Proper and common nouns Asking for personal

information and details

Pronunciation pointers-

an informal

introduction to the IPA

17 Pronouns Telephone skills and etiquette Reading aloud and

comprehension

18 Abstract and common nouns Dealing with a wrong number Reading practice and

comprehension

19 Group names of animals,

adjectives

Taking and leaving messages

on the telephone

Pronunciation pointers

20 Unit Test IV

Unit V 7.5 Hours


21 Determiners Interrupting a conversation

politely- formal and

informal

Pair work reading

comprehension

22 Conjugation of the verb ‘to be’-

positive and negative forms

Thanking and responding

to thanks

Comprehension

questions that test

scanning, skimming

and deep reading

23 Am/is/are questions Giving instructions and

seeking clarifications

Small group activity

that develops dialogue

writing

24 Present continuous tense-form and

usage

Making inquiries on the

telephone

Finishing sentences

with appropriate verbs

25 Unit Test V

Unit VI 7.5 Hours


26 Words with silent ‘b’

Present continuous questions

Calling for help in an

emergency

Dialogue writing

27 Words with silent ‘c’

Simple present tense- form and

usage

Making requests and

responding to them

politely

Identifying elements of

grammar in text extract

28 Simple present tense- rules Describing people Guided writing

29 Words with silent ‘g’

Questions in the simple present

tense

Describing places Filling in the blanks

with correct markers of

tense

30 Unit Test VI

Total: 45 Hours



Reference(s)

1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.

15LE102 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH I

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To acquire effective listening and reading skills

To develop speaking and writing skills

To improve their understanding of grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation


1. Develop their fluency and language competency in English

UNIT I 9 Hours

GRAMMAR Content words- Structural words - Subject - Verbs and verb phrase - Subject - Verb agreement -

Tenses - Active voice and passive voice - Sentence types (declarative, imperative, exclamatory &

interrogative) - Framing questions - Comparative adjective

UNIT II 9 Hours

LISTENING Listening for specific information: Short conversations / monologues - Gap filling - Telephone

conversations - Note-taking - Listening for gist / interviews - Listening to songs and completing the

lyrics - Clear individual sounds - Word stress - Telephone etiquette

UNIT III 9 Hours

READING Prediction - Skimming for gist - Scanning for specific information - Understanding text and sentence

structure

UNIT IV

9 Hours

WRITING Short documents: E-mail - memo - note - message- notice -advertisement -Short reports / proposals -

Principles of writing a good paragraph: Unity, cohesion and coherence -Identifying the topic sentence

and controlling ideas - Paragraph writing (descriptive, narrative, expository & persuasive)

UNIT V 9 Hours

SPEAKING Self-introduction -Giving personal and factual information - Talking about present circumstances,

past experiences and future plans - Mini-presentation - Expressing opinions and justifying opinions -

Agreement / disagreement - Likes and dislikes - Speculation - Tongue twisters

FOR FURTHER READING

Self-Study: Novel Reading -Book Review

Total: 45 Hours



Reference(s)

1. Murphy, Raymond. English Grammar in Use - A Self-Study Reference and Practice Book For

Intermediate Learners of English .IVed. United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press. 2012.

2. Seely, John. Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking. Indian ed. New Delhi: Oxford

University Press. 2005.

3. Anderson, Kenneth etal. Study Speaking: A Course in Spoken English for Academic

Purposes. United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press. 2004.

15LE201 BASIC ENGLISH II

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives (COs)

To give room for a natural acquisition of Basic English Grammar through ample listening,

reading and writing inputs

To specifically focus on speaking and conversation skills with an aim to increase speaking

ability

To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering rigorous practice and exercises

Course Outcome (CO)

1. Communicate better with improved fluency, vocabulary and pronunciation.

Unit I 7.5 Hours


31 Difference between Present

Continuous and Simple Present

tense.

Calling for help in an

emergency

Reporting an event-

journalistic style

32 Verbs ‘have’ and ‘have got’ Describing animals Asking for and giving

directions

33 Simple Past Tense Inviting people,

accepting and

declining invitations

Self- enquiry and offering

one’s opinion on a given

topic.

34 Spelling rules & table of Irregular

Verbs

Refusing an invitation Reading and practicing pre-

written dialogues

35 Unit Test I

Unit II 7.5 Hours


36 Questions and the negative form

of the simple past tense

Apologizing and

responding to an

apology

(Reading) conversation

practice

37 Asking questions in the simple

past tense

Reading

comprehension

Seeking, granting and

refusing permission



38 Past continuous tense

Paying compliments

and responding to them

Pair work: writing dialogues

and presenting them

39 Difference between simple past

and past continuous- when and

where to use each

Describing daily

routines

Reading and comprehension

skills

40 Unit Test II

Unit III 7.5 Hours


41 Simple future tense Talking about the

weather

Making plans- applying

grammar theory to written

work

42 Simple future tense- more aspects,

possessive pronouns

Talking about

possessions

Opening up and expressing

one’s emotions

43 Future continuous tense Talking about current

activities Listening comprehension

44

Revision of future tense- simple

and continuous forms,

prepositions used with time and

date

Asking for the time

and date

Discussion- analyzing and

debating a given topic

45 Unit Test III

Unit IV 7.5 Hours


46 Articles a/an Writing, speaking and

presentation skills

Transcribing dictation

47 Singular- Plural (usage of a/an) Reading practice-

independent and

shared reading

Comprehension –logical

analysis, process analysis and

subjective expression

48 Countable and uncountable nouns-

a/an and some

Listening

comprehension

Vocabulary: using context

tools to decipher meaning

49 Articles- the Sequencing sentences

in a paragraph

Listening to a poem being

recited, answer questions on

it and practice reciting the

same

50 Unit Test IV

Unit V 7.5 Hours




51 Articles- the: usage and avoidance Speaking: sharing

stories about family,

village/town,

childhood, etc. 10

students

Listening: comprehend and

follow multiple step

instructions read out by the

teacher

52 Articles- the: usage and avoidance

with like and hate

Speaking: sharing


village/town,

childhood, etc. 10

students

Reading: make inferences

from the story about the plot,

setting and characters

53 Articles- the: usage and avoidance

with names of places

Speaking: sharing


village/town,

childhood, etc. 10

students

Comprehension passage

54 This/ that/ these and those Writing a notice-

announcement

Speaking: Debate

55 Unit Test V

Unit VI 7.5 Hours


56 One and ones Collaborative

learning- problem

solving

Writing short answers to

questions based on reading

57 Capitalization and punctuation Controlled writing Listen to a story and respond

to its main elements

58 Syntax and sentence construction-

rearrange jumbled sentences

Guided writing Listen to a poem and discuss

its elements

59 Cloze Free writing Frame simple yet purposeful

questions about a given

passage

60 Unit Test VI

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.

15LE202 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH II 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To acquire skills for using English in workplace effectively

To communicate for essential business needs

To prepare students for taking BEC Vantage level examination which is an International

Benchmark for English language proficiency of Cambridge English Language Assessment

(CELA)

To enhance the communicative ability from Intermediate to Upper Intermediate level




1. Get International recognition for work and study.

2. Use English confidently in the International business environments.

3. Take part in business discussion, read company literature, write formal and informal business

correspondences and listen and understand business conversations.

UNIT I 9 Hours

GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY Simple, compound and complex sentences - Direct and indirect speech - Conditionals - Business

vocabulary - Collocations -Discourse markers

UNIT II 9 Hours

LISTENING Listening to identify topic, content, function - Sentence stress - Rhythm - Intonation

UNIT III 9 Hours

READING Reading graphs and charts - Skimming and scanning texts - Job advertisements - Read business

articles for specific information - Understanding the structure of a text - Error identification

UNIT IV 9 Hours

WRITING Formal and Informal English - Longer Documents: writing individual paragraphs to longer text,

Business Correspondence, Reports and Proposals - Transcoding

UNIT V 9 Hours

SPEAKING Collaborative task - Turn taking (initiating and responding appropriately) - Negotiating - Exchanging

information - Language Functions: suggesting - comparing and contrasting - expressing - Finding out

facts, attitudes and opinions - Commonly mispronounced words

FOR FURTHER READING

Reading Novels (The Monk Who Sold His Ferrari by Robin Sharma; Three Mistakes of my Life by

Chetan Bhagat; The Fountainhead by Ayn Rand)

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Jeremy Comfort, Pamela Rogerson, Trish Stott, and Derek Utley, Speaking Effectively

Developing Speaking Skills for Business English, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,

2002.

2. Eric H. Glendinning and Beverly Holmstrom, Study Reading: A Course In Reading for

Academic Purposes.United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press, 2004.

15LC203 CHINESE

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives (COs)

To help students acquire the basics of Chinese language

To teach them how to converse in Chinese in various occasions

To teach the students the Chinese cultural facets and social etiquettes



Course Outcomes (COs):

1. Improve fluency in Chinese

2. Clarity on the basic sounds of the Chinese Language

Unit I 9 Hours

Nǐ hǎo - 你好

Xuéhuì wènhòu de jīběn biǎodá yòngyǔ - 学会问候的基本表达用语 ; Xuéhuì jièshào zìjǐ de

xìngmíng, guójí - 学会介绍自己的姓名，国际 ; Xuéhuì hànyǔ pīnyīn de shèngmǔ -

学会汉语拼音的圣母 ; yùnmǔ hé shēngdiào - 韵母和声调 ; Pīn dú hé shēngdiào liànxí - 拼读和

声调练习

Unit II 9 Hours

Xiànzài jǐ diǎn - 现在几点

Xuéhuì shíjiān, rìqí de biǎodá - 学会时间，日期的表达 ; Rèshēn - 热身 ; Shēngcí - 生词 ; Jùzi -

句子 ; Huìhuà - 会话 ;Huódòng - 活动 ; Kàn tú wánchéng huìhuà - 看图完成会话 ; Xué cíyǔ shuō

shíjiān ; Tìhuàn liànxí - 替换练习Dú yī dú ránhòu lián xiàn - 读一读然后连线 ; Bǎ xiàmiàn de cí àn

zhèngquè de shùnxù páiliè chéngjù - 把下面的词按正确的顺序排列成句

Unit III 9 Hours

Nà jiàn máoyī zěnme mài? - 那件毛衣怎么卖 ?

Xúnwèn jiàqián jí qián de biǎodá - 询问价钱及钱的表达 ; Tǎojiàhuánjià - 讨价还价 ; Tíchū duì suǒ

mǎi dōngxī dàxiǎo, yánsè děng děng jùtǐ yāoqiú - 提出对所买东西大小，颜色等等具体要求 ;

Shēngcí Huódòng - 活动 ; Kàn tú wánchéng huìhuà - 看图完成会话 ; Xué cíyǔ shuō shíjiān ;Dú yī

dú ránhòu lián xiàn - 读一读然后连线 ;Tīng lùyīn xuǎnzé zhèngquè dá'àn - 听录音选择正确答案 ;

Bǔchōng cíyǔ biǎo - 补充词语表

Unit IV 9 Hours

Xuéhuì xúnwèn jiātíng qíngkuàng, zhíyè hé niánlíng - 学会询问家庭情况，职业和年龄

Xuéhuì diǎn cài tí yāoqiú jiézhàng - 学会点菜提要求结账 ; Shēngcí - 生词 ; Jùzi - 句子 ; Huìhuà -

会话 ;Huódòng - 活动 ; Kàn tú wánchéng huìhuà - 看图完成会话 ; Xué cíyǔ shuō shíjiān ;Dú yī dú

ránhòu lián xiàn - 读一读然后连线 ;Tīng lùyīn xuǎnzé zhèngquè dá'àn - 听录音选择正确答案 ;

Bǔchōng cíyǔ biǎo - 补充词语表Juésè bànyǎn - 角色扮演 ; Tīng lùyīn pànduàn duì cuò -

听录音判断对错

Unit V 9 Hours

Nǐ zài nǎ'er gōngzuò - 你在哪儿工作

Xuéhuì xúnwèn jiātíng qíngkuàng, zhíyè hé niánlíng - 学会询问家庭情况，职业和年龄 Shēngcí -

生词 ; Jùzi - 句子 ; Huìhuà - 会话 ; Huódòng - 活动 ; Kàn tú wánchéng huìhuà - 看图完成会话

;Tīng lùyīn xuǎnzé zhèngquè dá'àn - 听录音选择正确答案 ; Bǔchōng cíyǔ biǎo - 补充词语表 -

Tīng lùyīn xuǎnzé zhèngquè dá'àn - 听录音选择正确答案 ; Bǔchōng cíyǔ biǎo - 补充词语表

Total: 45 Hours



Reference(s)

1. Tiyan Hanyu Shenghuo Pian “Experiencing Chinese” Ying Yu Ban Di 1 Ban. Beijing:

Higher Education Press: Gao deng jiao hu chu ban she. 2011

2. Mandarine Day - Hancel Don : Chinese learning Software

3. My Chinese Classroom - David J. White

Websites:

www.chinesexp.com.cn

www.yiwen.com.cn

15LF203 FRENCH 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To help students acquire the basics of French language

To teach them how to converse in French in various occasions


1. The students will become familiar with the basics of French language and start conversing in

French.

6 Hours UNIT I Alphabet Français (alphabets) - Les Accents Français (the accents in French) - aigu - grave -

circonflexe - tréma cédille - écrire son nom dans le français (spellingone-sname in French) - Les noms

de jours de la semaine (Days of the week)

6 Hours

UNIT II Les noms de mois de l'année (Months) - Numéro 1 à 100 (Numbers 1 to 100) GRAMMAIRE

:Conjugaison

10 Hours

UNIT III Moyens de transport (Transport) - Noms de Professions (Professions) - Noms d'endroits communs

(Places) - Nationalités (Nationalities)ECOUTER : (Listening)

Écouter l- alphabet associéà des prénoms français - Écouter et répondre PARLER

(Speaking)Présntation - même /Présentez- Vous (Introducingoneself)LIRE :Lireles phrases simples

12 Hours

UNIT IV Pronoms (Pronouns) - Noms communs masculins et de femme (Common masculine and

Femininenouns) - Verbes communs (Common verbs)COUTER :couter et crier les prnoms - Observer

les dessins et couter les dialogues LIRE : Lire les profils d'utilisateurs d'interlingua (alter

ego)PARLER :Parler de sa ville - Parler de sa profession

11 Hours

UNIT V Narration de son nom et l'endroit où on vit - Son ge et date de naissance - Numéro de téléphone

et'dresse - Narration du temps - La France en Europe PARLER :Conversation entre deux amis - Jouer

la scène ÉCOUTER :Ecouter les conversations (CD alter ego)ÉCRIRE :Écrireune carte postale

Total: 45 Hours

http://www.chinesexp.com.cn/

http://www.yiwen.com.cn/



Reference(s) 1. Alter ego+ Niveau a1 ,Catherine Hugot,, HACHETTE LIVRE 2012

2. Cahier alter ego+

3. Grammaire Progressive du Français, CLE international, 2010

4. Collins Easy Learning French Verbs& Practice, Harpercollins, 2012

5. Barron's Learn French, 3rd edition

6. FrançaisLinguaphone, Linguaphone Institute Ltd., London, 2000. FrançaisI.Harrisonburg:

The Rosetta stone: Fairfield Language Technologies, 2001.

15LG203 GERMAN 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To help students acquire the basics of German language

To teach them how to converse in German in various occasions


1. An ability to communicate effectively with: (a) Clarity on the basic sounds of the German

language (b) Improved fluency in German (c) Proper vocabulary

UNIT I 9 Hours

GRAMMAR Introduction to German language: Alphabets, Numbers - Nouns - Pronouns Verbs and Conjugations -

definite and indefinite article - Negation - Working with Dictionary - Nominative - Accusative and

dative case - propositions - adjectives - modal auxiliaries - Imperative case - Possessive articles.

UNIT II 9 Hours

LISTENING Listening to CD supplied with the books, paying special attention to pronunciation: Includes all

lessons in the book - Greetings - talking about name - country - studies - nationalities - ordering in

restaurants - travel office - Interaction with correction of pronunciation.

UNIT III 9 Hours

SPEAKING Speaking about oneself - about family - studies - questions and answers - dialogue and group

conversation on topics in textbooks - talks on chosen topics.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

READING: Reading lessons and exercises in the class - pronunciation exercises: Alphabet: name, country, people,

profession, family, shopping, travel, numbers, friends, restaurant, studies - festivals

UNIT V 9 Hours

WRITING Alphabets, numbers - words and sentences - Exercises in the books - control exercises - writing on

chosen topics such as one self, family, studies - country.

Total: 45 Hours



Reference(s)

1. Grundkurs DEUTSCH A Short Modern German Grammar Workbook and Glossary,

VERLAG FUR DEUTSCH, Munichen, 2007.

2. Grundkurs, DEUTSCH Lehrbuch Hueber Munichen, 2007.

3. Cassel Language Guides - German: Christine Eckhard, Black & Ruth Whittle, Continuum,

London / New York, 1992.

15LH203 HINDI 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To help students to acquire the basics of Hindi

To teach them how to converse in Hindi on various occasions

To help learners acquire the ability to understand a simple technical text in Hindi


1. An ability to communicate effectively with: (a) Improved fluency in Hindi (b) Clarity on the

basic sounds of the Hindi language (c) Proper vocabulary

UNIT I 9 Hours

HINDI ALPHABET Introduction - Vowels - Consonants - Plosives - Fricatives - Nasal sounds - Vowel Signs - Chandra

Bindu&Visarg -Table of Alphabet -Vocabulary.

UNIT II 9 Hours

NOUNS IN HINDI Genders (Masculine & Feminine Nouns ending in a, e, i, o, u,) - Masculine & Feminine - Reading

Exercises.

UNIT III 9 Hours

PRONOUNS AND TENSES Categories of Pronouns - Personal Pronouns - Second person (you & honorific) - Definite & Indefinite

pronouns - Relative pronouns - Present tense - Past tense - Future tense - Assertive & Negative

Sentences - Interrogative Sentences.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

CLASSIFIED VOCABULARY Parts of body - Relatives - Spices- Eatables- Fruit & Vegetables - Clothes - Directions-Seasons -

Professions.

UNIT V 9 Hours

SPEAKING Model Sentences - Speaking practice for various occasions.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. B. R. Kishore, Self Hindi Teacher for Non-Hindi Speaking People, Vee Kumar Publications

(P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2009

2. Syed, PrayojanMulak Hindi, RahamathullahVaniPrakasan, New Delhi, 2002.

3. Ramdev, VyakaranPradeep, SaraswathiPrakasan, Varanasi, 2004.



15LJ203 JAPANESE 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To help students acquire the basics of Japanese language

To teach them how to converse in Japanese in various occasions

To teach the students the Japanese cultural facets and social etiquettes


1. An ability to communicate effectively with: (a) Improved fluency in Japanese (b) Clarity on

the basic sounds of the Japanese language (c) Proper vocabulary

9 Hours UNIT I Introduction to Japanese - Japanese script - Pronunciation of Japanese(Hiragana) - Long vowels -

Pronunciation of in,tsu,ga - Letters combined with ya,yu,yo - Daily Greetings and Expressions -

Numerals. N1 wa N2 des - N1 wa N2 ja arimasen - S ka - N1mo - N1 no N2 - .san - Kanji - Technical

Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) - Phonetic and semantic resemblances between Tamil and

Japanese

9 Hours

UNIT II Introduction - Kore - Sore - are - Kono N1 - Sono N1 - ano N1 - so des - so ja arimasen - S1 ka - S2

ka - N1 no N1 - so des ka ' koko - soko - asoko - kochira - sochira - achira - N1 wa N2 (Place) des -

dhoko-N1 no N2 - Kanji-10 - ima-.ji-fun des - Introduction of verb - V mas - V masen - V mashitha -

V masen deshitha - N1(Time) ne V - N1 kara N2 des - N1 tho N2 / S ne Kanji-10 - Technical

Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) - Dictionary Usage.

9 Hours

UNIT III - N1(Place) ye ikimas - ki mas - kayerimasu - Dhoko ye mo ikimasen - ikimasendheshitha -

N1(vehicle) de ikimasu - kimasu - kayerimasu - N1(Personal or Animal) tho V ithsu - S yo. - N1 wo

V (Transitive) - N1 wo shimus - Nani wo shimasu ka - Nan & Nani - N1(Place) de V - V masen ka -

V masho - Oo. Kanji-10 , N1( tool - means ) de V - Word / Sentence wa go nan des ka - N1( Person )

ne agemus - N1( Person ) ne moraimus - mo V shimashitha - , Kanji-10 - Japanese Typewriting using

JWPCE Software, Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)

9 Hours

UNIT IV Introduction to Adjectives - N1wanaadj des. N1 wa ii adj des - naadjna N1 - ii adj ii N1 - Thothemo -

amari - N1 wadho des ka - N1 wadhonna N2 des ka - S1 ka S2 - dhore - N1 gaarimasu - wakarimasu -

N1 ga suki masu - N1 gakiraimasu - jozu des - hetha des - dhonna N1 - Usages of yoku - dhaithai -

thakusan - sukoshi - amari - zenzen - S1 kara S2 - dhoshithe, N1 gaarimasu - imasu - N1(Place) ne N2

gaarimasu - iimasu - N1 wa N2(Place) ne arimasu - iimasu - N1(Person,Place,or Thing ) no N2

(Position) - N1 ya N2, Kanji-10 - Japanese Dictionary usage using JWPCE Software, Technical

Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)

9 Hours

UNIT V Saying Numbers , Counter Suffixes , Usages of Quantifiers -Interrogatives - Dhonokurai - gurai -

Quantifier-(Period ) ne -.kai V - Quantifier dhake / N1 dhake Kanji - Past tense of Noun sentences and

na Adjective sentences - Past tense of ii-adj sentences - N1 wa N2 yoriadj des - N1 tho N2 tho

Dhochiragaadj des ka and its answering method - N1 [ no naka ] de nani/dhoko/dhare/ithsu ga

ichiban adj des ka - answering -N1 gahoshi des - V1 mas form dhake mas - N1 (Place ) ye V masu



form ne ikimasu/kimasu/kayerimasu - N1 ne V/N1 wo V - Dhokoka - Nanika - gojumo - Technical

Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s) 1. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook1-1, Goyal Publishers and Distributors

Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, 2007.

2. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook 1-2, Goyal Publishers and Distributors

Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, 2007.

Software(s): 1. Nihongo Shogo-1

2. Nihongo Shogo-2

3. JWPCE Software

Web Reference(s): 1. www.japaneselifestyle.com/

2. www.learn-japanese.info/

3. www.kanjisite.com/

4. www.learn-hiragana-katakana.com/typing-hiragana-characters/



PHYSICS ELECTIVES

15PH201 PHYSICS OF MATERIALS 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

To understand the physical properties of conductors, semiconductors and superconductors

To recognize the basic principles of interaction of light with matter and working of optical

devices

To classify the types of dielectric, magnetic materials and polarization mechanisms with their

properties


1. Exemplify the physical properties of conductors, superconductors and semiconductors with

applications

2. Identify the suitable semiconducting material for solar cell applications

3. Select the suitable materials for insulating and dielectric applications

4. Compare the optical properties of display devices

5. Analyze the properties of magnetic materials for practical applications

UNIT I 9 Hours

CONDUCTING AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS Electrical and thermal conductivity of metals - Wiedemann Franz law - band theory of metals -

density of states. Superconductors: properties - types - High Tc superconductors- applications.

UNIT II 10 Hours

SEMICONDUCTORS Elemental and compound semiconductors - intrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration - electrical

conductivity- band gap. Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration - variation of Fermi level.

Hall effect: theory and experimental determination -applications:Solar cells

UNIT III 9 Hours

DIELECTRIC MATERIALS Types of polarization: electronic, ionic, orientation and space charge polarization mechanisms -

Langevin-Debye equation - frequency and temperature effects on polarization - dielectric strength and

loss -dielectric breakdown mechanisms - active dielectric materials: pizo, pyro and ferroelectricity -

applications.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

OPTICAL MATERIALS Interaction of light with materials - optical absorption - transmission - Luminescence in solids -

Fluorescence and Phosphorescence - Optical band gap - LED ,LCD.

UNIT V 8 Hours

MAGNETIC MATERIALS Classification and properties - domain theory - hard and soft magnetic materials - anti-ferro and ferri

magnetic materials - applications: magnetic recording and memories.

FOR FURTHER READING Photonic crystals – LIFI



2 Hours


4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Using Lees disc apparatus, determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Find the band gap value of the given semiconductor diode. Based on the band gap value, identify the

given semiconductor.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 With the aid of travelling microscope, find the refractive index of a transparent solid and liquid

material.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Determine the wavelength of polychromatic source in the visible region using spectrometer.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Based on Hall Effect, calculate the charge carrier density of a given semiconductor and identify the

nature of the semiconductor.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Draw the B-H curve of a ferromagnetic material subjected to external magnetic field and hence

identify the nature of the material.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Determine the V-I characteristics of a solar cell.


Reference(s)

1. Saxena, Gupta, Saxena, Mandal, Solid State Physics, Pragati Prakashan Educational

Publishers, 13th revised edition, Meerut, India, 2013.

2. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand &

Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.

3. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2010.

4. M.A. Wahab, N.K. Mehta, Solid state physics-structure and properties of materials, Narosa

publishing house Pvt. Ltd, 6th edition, 2010.

5. Semiconductor Physics and Devices, Donald A. Neamen , Mc Graw-Hill, 2011.

6. P.K. Palanisamy, Materials Science, Scitech Publications India Pvt. Ltd, 2014.



Assessment Pattern



1 2 4 2

1 4 2

1 2

1 1

20

2 2

2

2

4

5 3

4

22

3 1 2 1

3 4

3 4

2

20

4 2 2

2 5

2 5

2

20

5 1 3

3 2 3

3 1

2

18

Total 100


1. State Meissner effect.

2. List six properties of superconducting materials.

3. Define photovoltaic effect.

4. List the six common applications of dielectric materials.

5. Retrieve optical absorption in metals.

6. Reproduce the principle of LCD in display devices.

7. Recall the term hysteresis in ferromagnetic materials.

8. List four applications of magnetic materials.

9. Recognize the need of optical band gap in differentiating the materials.

10. Reproduce five applications of hard magnetic materials in day to day life.

Understand 1. Explain the principle, construction and working of LED.

2. Classify the three types of materials based on band gap energy.

3. Interpret the working mechanism and characteristics of a solar cell.

4. Illustrate Hall Effect experiment used to find the concentration of charge carriers in n- type

semiconductors and hence explain the necessary theory.

5. Summarize the various dielectric breakdown mechanisms observed in dielectric materials

6. Infer the principle involved in working of magnetic levitation.

7. Classify the two types of luminescence in solids with appropriate energy level diagrams

8. Subsume the four types of polarization mechanisms involved in dielectric materials.

9. Illustrate the V-I characteristics of a solar cell.

10. Extrapolate the Clausius Mosotti equation for the dielectric material which is subjected to

external electric field.

Apply 1. Free electron density of aluminum is 18.10x1028 m-3. Calculate its Fermi energy at 0K.

Planck’s constant and mass of free electron are 6.62x10-34 Js and 9.1x10-31 Kg.

2. Compute the relation between Remanence and Coercivity.

3. Demonstrate the domain theory of ferromagnetism.

4. Derive the expressions for electrical and thermal conductivity of metals and hence compute

the Wiedemann Frantz law.

5. Compute the carrier concentration in intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.

6. Calculate the number of free electrons per unit volume in a metal in terms of Fermi energy.

7. Assess the Magnetic levitation and SQUIDS in day to day life.

8. Show the importance of dielectric breakdown mechanisms in dielectrics.

9. Implement the applications of dielectric materials in real world problems.

10. Compute the relation between polarization vector (P) and electric field (E).



Analyse 1. Differentiate Phosphorescence and Fluorescence.

2. Can we increase the orientation polarization with increase in temperature? Justify.

3. Justify the principle, construction, working, advantages and disadvantages of LCD.

4. Compare hard and soft magnetic materials.

5. Differentiate the ferromagnetic and anti-ferromagnetic materials with examples.

6. Compare dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.

7. Distinguish between polarization and polarizability.

8. Differentiate elemental and compound semiconductors.

9. Compare type I and type II superconductors.

10. Compare LED and LCD.

15PH202 APPLIED PHYSICS 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

To understand conducting, semiconducting, dielectric and magnetic properties of materials

and exemplify their applications

To analyze the basic concepts of thermodynamics and heat transfer with illustrations

To gain knowledge about acoustical standards of buildings


1. Differentiate the materials based on their properties and suit them for appropriate applications

2. Select the suitable materials for insulating and dielectric applications

3. Investigate the working mechanisms and efficiency of heat engines by applying the laws of

thermodynamics

4. Compare the different heat transfer mechanisms and its applications

5. Choose the proper acoustic materials for the construction of buildings

UNIT I 11 Hours

CONDUCTORS AND SEMICONDUCTORS Conductors: Classical free electron theory - electrical and thermal conductivity- Wiedemann - Franz

law - merits and demerits of classical free electron theory - band theory - density of states.

Semiconductors: Elemental and compound semiconductors - intrinsic semiconductors -Fermi level

and electrical conductivity - band gap energy - extrinsic semiconductors - n-type and p-type

semiconductors: variation of Fermi level with temperature (qualitative) - Hall effect - applications.

UNIT II 9 Hours

DIELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS Dielectrics: Fundamental terminologies - electronic and ionic polarizations - orientation polarization

mechanism (qualitative) - space charge polarization - Langevin -Debye equation - dielectric loss -

applications of dielectric and insulating materials.

Magnetic Materials: Properties of dia, para and ferromagnetic materials - domain theory of

ferromagnetism - hysteresis curve - hard and soft magnetic materials - applications

UNIT III 9 Hours

THERMODYNAMICS Zeroth law of thermodynamics - Heat - equilibrium and quasistatic process - path functions -

comparison between heat and work - internal energy - first law of thermodynamics - isothermal and

adiabatic process - work done - reversible and irreversible process - second law of thermodynamics -

entropy - enthalpy - Carnot ideal engine and its efficiency - Carnot's theorem-actual heat engine:

Diesel engine and its efficiency



UNIT IV 9 Hours

HEAT TRANSFER Modes of heat transfer - thermal conductivity - heat capacity and diffusivity - rectilinear flow of heat -

conduction through bodies in series and parallel - determination of thermal conductivity: good

conductor: Searle's method - bad conductor: Lee's disc method - applications of heat transfer:

formation of ice in ponds - conductivity of earth's crust and age of earth - practical applications

UNIT V 7 Hours

ACOUSTICS Classification of sound based on frequency - characteristics of audible sound - reverberation time:

Sabine's formula - determination of absorption coefficient - Erying's formula (qualitative). Sound

insulation - sound absorbing materials - factors affecting the acoustics of building - remedies

FOR FURTHER READING Nanomaterials and its applications

2 Hours


4 Hours


4 Hours



4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 With the aid of traveling microscope, find the refractive index of a transparent solid and liquid

material

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Determine the wavelength of polychromatic source in the visible region using spectrometer

4 Hours



4 Hours



4 Hours



Reference(s)

1. William D. Callister, Materials Science and Engineering an Introduction, John Wiley and

Sons,Inc, 2010

2. BrijLal, N. Subrahmanyam and P. S. Hemne, Heat, Thermodynamics & Statistical Physics, S.

Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2012



3. Saxena, Gupta, Saxena, Mandal, Solid State Physics, Pragati Prakashan Educational

Publishers, 13threvised edition, Meerut, India, 2013

4. P.K. Mittal, Applied Physics, I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, 2008

5. Donald A. Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices,McGraw-Hill, 2011

Assessment Pattern



1 3 4

3

4 4

2

4

24

2 2 2

4 2

2 4

4

20

3 2 4

4 2

4 2

2

20

4 2 2

4 2

2 4

4

20

5 2 2

2 2

4

4

16

Total 100


1. State Ohm’s law.

2. Define drift velocity.

3. List the two drawbacks of classical free electron theory.

4. State Wiedemann-Franz law.

5. Mention the practical unit used for electron’s magnetic moment.

6. Recall the term hysteresis in ferromagnetic materials.

7. List the four uses of magnetic materials.

8. State Zeroth law of thermodynamics.

9. State the Kelvin’s statement of second law of thermodynamics.

10. Name the three modes of heat transfer.

11. State Echelon effect.

Understand 1. Illustrate the significance of Fermi energy.

2. Why indirect gap semiconductors are preferred in fabricating transistors?

3. Classify the types of magnetic materials.

4. Outline the term retentivity and coercivity.

5. Compare dia, para and ferro magnetic materials.

6. Point out the ideal conditions required for diesel cycle.

7. Sketch the isothermal and adiabatic processes in P-V diagram.

8. Is it possible for a practical engine to have 100% efficiency? Justify.

9. Ice kept in saw dust or wrapper in a blanket will not melt. Why?

10. Classify the types of sound waves.

11. Explain the three characteristics of musical sound.

Apply 1. The average energy of a conduction electron in copper at 300 K is 4.23 eV. Calculate the

Fermi energy of copper at 300 K.

2. Determine the carrier concentration of p-type semiconductor whose hall coefficient is 3.6610-

4 m3/C.

3. Compute the efficiency of Carnot’s engine operating between the temperatures 3270C and

270C.

4. Point out practical applications of heat conduction.

5. Compute the efficiency of Carnot’s engine working the steam point and the ice point.

6. Assess the reason for the formation ice on pond surface.



7. The intensity of sound produced by thunder is 0.1 Wm-2.Calculate the intensity level in

decibels.

8. Calculate Sabine’s mathematical relation for reverberation time of the hall.

9. Compute the minimum wavelength of audible sound at zero degree centigrade.

Analyse 1. Distinguish between relaxation time and collision time.

2. Differentiate between electrical and thermal conductivity.

3. List the various applications of soft and hard magnetic materials for day to day life.

4. Analysis the six properties of hard and soft magnetic materials.

5. If the system and surrounding are in thermal equilibrium, is it necessary they are in same

state? Comment the statement.

6. Differentiate isothermal and adiabatic process.

7. Entropy remains constant in an adiabatic process. Justify the statement.

8. Compare Carnot’s cycle and diesel cycle.

9. Distinguish between loudness and intensity of sound.

10. Compare reverberation and echo.

11. How do you maintain optimum reverberation in a hall? Justify.

15PH203 MATERIALS SCIENCE

3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

To explain the properties of conducting, semiconducting and dielectric materials

To impart fundamental knowledge in optical materials

To understand the nature and applications of different magnetic materials


1. Distinguish electrical properties of different kinds of conducting materials

2. Identify the different types of semiconductors and its applications

3. Categorize the various polarization mechanisms in dielectrics

4. Choose the suitable material for the construction of display devices

5. Select appropriate magnetic materials for magnetic storage devices

UNIT I 8 Hours

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF METALS Quantum free electron theory: Fermi-Dirac distribution function - Fermi energy and its variation with

temperature - density of energy states - calculation of density of electrons and fermi energy at 0K -

mean energy of electrons at 0K - problems.

UNIT II 10 Hours

SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS Introduction - elemental and compound semiconductors - intrinsic semiconductors: expressions for

number of electrons and holes - determination of carrier concentration and position of Fermi energy -

electrical conductivity - band gap energy determination - carrier concentration in extrinsic

semiconductors. Hall effect: theory and experimental determination - uses - problems.



UNIT III 9 Hours

DIELECTRICS Introduction - fundamental definitions in dielectrics - expressions for electronic and ionic

polarizations - orientation polarization (qualitative) - space charge polarization - Langevin - Debye

equation - frequency and temperature effects on polarization - internal field - expression for internal

field (cubic structure) - Clausius-Mosotti equation and its importance - applications of dielectric

materials - problems.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

OPTICAL MATERIALS Introduction - optical absorption in metals, semiconductors and insulators. Fluorescence and

phosphorescence. Light emitting diode: principle, construction, working and applications. Liquid

crystal display: general properties - dynamic scattering display - twisted nematic display - applications

- comparison between LED and LCD. Blue ray disc - principle - working.

UNIT V 9 Hours

MAGNETIC MATERIALS Introduction - orbital and spin magnetic moments - Bohr magneton - basic definitions - classification

of magnetic materials - domain theory of ferromagnetism - process of domain magnetization -

explanation of hysteresis curve based on domain theory - hard and soft magnetic materials.

FOR FURTHER READING Optical data storage and Giant magnetoresistance

2 Hours


4 Hours


4 Hours



4 Hours


material.

4 Hours


4 Hours



4 Hours



4 Hours





Reference(s)


Sons, Inc, 2010.

2. S.O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2014.

3. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand &


4. P.K. Palanisamy, Physics For Engineers, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai,

2010.

5. V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.

6. R.K.Gaur and S.L.Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai publications, New Delhi, 2010.

Assessment Pattern



1 2 5 2

1 5 2

1

18

2 2

2

2 3 2

5

2

4

22

3 1 2 1

3 3

3 5

2

20

4 2 3

3 3

2 5

2

20

5 1 3

3 2 5

3 1

2

20

Total 100


1. Define density of electron energy states in metals.

2. Recall Fermi energy.

3. State Hall Effect.

4. List out the four advantages of semiconductors.

5. Define dielectric constant.

6. Recall electric polarization.

7. Define Fluorescence.

8. Recognize hard and soft magnetic materials.

9. State the working principle of LED.

10. Define Bohr magnetron.

Understand 1. Classify three types of free electron theory.

2. Represent the variation of Fermi level with temperature.

3. Explain Clausius-Mosotti relation.

4. Compare element and compound type semiconductors.

5. Illustrate the variation of Fermi level with temperature in n-type semiconductors.

6. Distinguish between a dielectric and insulator.

7. Mention the technique to increase the emission time in phosphorescence.

8. Exemplify hysteresis on the basis of domain theory of ferromagnetism.

9. Identify four examples for hard magnetic materials.

10. Identify four properties of ferromagnetic materials.

Apply 1. Compute the Fermi direc function for energy kT above the Fermi energy.

2. Asses the Fermi-Dirac distribution function.

3. Energy level of p-type and n-type semiconductors and justify the results.

4. Compute the carrier concentration of intrinsic semiconductors.



5. Explain the principle, construction and working of Hall Effect.

6. Show that electronic and ionic polarizabilities are independent of temperature.

7. Calculate the polarization of an atom above value five.

8. Differentiate the dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.

9. Compute the B-H Hysteresis curve on the basis of domain theory.

Analyse 1. Discriminate drift velocity and thermal velocity of an electron.

2. Difference between p-type and n-type semiconductors.

3. Obtain the expression for concentration of charge carriers in p-type semiconductor.

4. In practical dielectrics, the current does not exactly lead the voltage by 90? Justify.

5. Local field is the space and time average of the electric field acting on a particular molecule.

6. Justify the special features of magnetic blue ray disks.

7. Analyze the role of energies in the domain growth.

8. Explain the roll of activators in optical materials.

9. Describe the working of twisted pneumatic display device.

10. Compare LED and LCD.

15PH204 PHYSICS OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

To familiarize with the physical properties of materials

To gain practical applications of modern spectroscopy and microscopy techniques

To understand the preparation of bio and nanomaterials


1. Identify the electrical and thermal properties of conducting and semiconducting materials

2. Analyze the various polarization mechanisms in dielectrics

3. Choose specific materials for optical and magnetic data storage devices

4. Investigate the specimen with the aid of suitable spectroscopic techniques

5. Realize the methods adopted for preparing nano materials

UNIT I 10 Hours

CONDUCTING AND SEMICONDUCTING PROPERTIES Quantum free electron theory - Fermi-Dirac distribution function - effect of temperature on Fermi

function - density of energy states - calculation of density of electrons and Fermi energy at 0 K.

Intrinsic semiconductors: expressions for density of electrons and holes - intrinsic carrier

concentration - band gap energy. Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration in n-type and p-type

semiconductors - variation of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration - problems.

UNIT II 9 Hours

DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES Introduction: fundamental definitions in dielectrics - types of polarization - expressions for electronic

and ionic polarization mechanisms - orientation polarization (qualitative) - Langevin-Debye equation

- frequency and temperature effects on polarization - dielectric loss - dielectric breakdown

mechanisms - active dielectric materials - applications of dielectric materials - problems.



UNIT III 10 Hours

OPTICAL AND MAGNETIC PROPERTIES Optical properties: introduction - light interaction with solids - atomic and electronic interactions -

optical properties of metals, semiconductors and insulators - reflection - refraction - absorption -

transmission - luminescence and photoconductivity. Magnetic properties: introduction - origin of

magnetic moment - properties of dia, para and ferro magnetic materials - domain theory and

hysteresis effect - hard and soft magnetic materials - problems.

UNIT IV 8 Hours

SPECTROSCOPY AND MICROSCOPY TECHNIQUES Introduction: different types of spectroscopy techniques - basic principle of FTIR spectroscopy and X-

ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS). Basic principle and working mechanisms of Scanning

Electron Microscope (SEM) - Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) - Atomic Force Microscope

(AFM).

UNIT V 8 Hours

BIO AND NANO MATERIALS Biomaterials: classification of biomaterials - development of biomaterials - applications.

Nanomaterials: properties - synthesis of nanomaterials - top-down approach: ball milling technique -

bottom-up approach: Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) - uses of nanomaterials. Carbon nanotubes:

properties and applications.

FOR FURTHER READING Health and environmental impacts

2 Hours


4 Hours


4 Hours



4 Hours


material.

4 Hours


4 Hours



4 Hours





4 Hours



Reference(s)

1. William D. Callister, Materials Science and Engineering An Introduction, John Wiley and

Sons, Inc, 2010.


3. Jacob Milliman, Christos Halkias, Satyabrata JIT, Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw

Hill Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.

4. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2010.

5. Subbiah Pillai, Nanobiotechnology, MJP Publishers, 2010.

6. Yang Leng, Materials Characterization: Introduction to Microscopic and Spectroscopic

Methods, Wiley-VCH, 2013.

Assessment Pattern



1 1 4 2

2 5 2

2 2

1 1

22

2 2

2

2

2

5 3

4

20

3 2

2

3 3 2

3 3

2 2

22

4 1 2 1

3 3

3 3

2

18

5 2 2

3 2 3

2

2 2

18

Total 100


1. Recall the merits of quantum free electron theory over classical free electron theory.

2. Define carrier concentration.

3. Recall Fermi energy.

4. List the four types of polarization mechanisms.

5. Recognize polar and non-polar molecules.

6. Define Bohr magneton.

7. Recall coercivity and retentivity.

8. Point out the four salient features of biomaterials.

9. Define bioactive materials.

10. State the working principle of FTIR spectroscopy.

Understand 1. Classify three types of materials based on bandgap energy.

2. Explain fermi-distribution function and effect of temperature on Fermi function.

3. Represent the variation of Fermi level with temperature.

4. Explain intrinsic and thermal breakdown mechanisms.

5. Infer the importance of Fermi level in a semiconductor.

6. Illustrate the phenomenon of B-H hysteresis on the basis of domain theory.

7. Classify four types of biomaterials.

8. Represent the scanning electron microscope to determine the grain size of the nanomaterials.

9. Explain the principle, construction and working of Scanning electron microscope.

10. Explain the principle and working mechanism of X – ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS).



Apply 1. Find the variation of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration in n-type

semiconductors.

2. Show that electronic and ionic polarizabilities are independent of temperature.

3. Show that the position of Fermi level is exactly at the midpoint of forbidden energy gap in

intrinsic semiconductor.

4. Compute the relationship between polarizability and electric flux density.

5. Assess the properties of dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.

6. Show that top down method is inferior to bottom up method.

7. Construct B-H Hysteresis curve on the basis of domain theory.

8. Design the principle, construction and working of chemical vapour deposition.

9. Show that the electronic polarizability is directly propotional to the volume of an atom.

10. Compute the expression for carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors.

Analyse 1. Extrinsic semiconductors possess high electrical conductivity than intrinsic semiconductors.

Justify.

2. Silver is the best conductor of electricity. But gold is used in high-end electronic connectors.

Justify.

3. Identify the role of impurity concentration in the variation of Fermi level in the case of p-type

semiconductors.

4. Compare polar dielectrics with non-polar dielectrics.

5. Analyse the features of hard and soft magnetic materials.

6. Compare the six properties of dia, para and ferro magnetic materials.

7. Differentiate top down approach from bottom up approach.

8. Select the four important features of TEM.

9. Justify the electronic polarizability of Argon is much greater than that of Helium.

10. Intrinsic semiconductors are insulators at 0K. Justify.

15PH205 SOLID STATE PHYSICS 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

To explain the properties of conducting, semiconducting and dielectric materials

To understand the working mechanism of junction diodes

To impart knowledge in optical and magnetic materials


1. Identify different types of emission of electrons and significance of Fermi function

2. Explore the carrier concentration and its variation with temperature of different

semiconducting materials

3. Analyze the I-V characteristics of a junction diode

4. Investigate the various polarization mechanisms in dielectrics

5. Select appropriate optical and magnetic materials for data storage devices

UNIT I 10 Hours

EMISSION PROPERTIES AND QUANTUM THEORY OF SOLIDS Emission of electrons: types thermionic emission-principle- Richardson equation- secondary

emission- principle- work function- Fermi-Dirac distribution function and its temperature dependence

significance of Fermi energy- density of energy states- calculation of density of electrons and Fermi

energy at 0K- average energy of electrons at 0K problems.



UNIT II 9 Hours

SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS Intrinsic semiconductors: the law of mass action - expressions for density of electrons and holes -

determination of carrier concentration - band gap energy. Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier

concentration in p-type and n-type semiconductors. Hall Effect: theory - experimental determination

of Hall voltage - applications - problems.

UNIT III

9 Hours

JUNCTION DIODE CHARACTERISTICS Introduction - pn junction diode - volt-ampere characteristics - diode current equation - static and

dynamic resistances - space charge - diffusion capacitance - junction diode switching times. Diode

circuit with DC voltage source. Applications: full wave rectifier - capacitor filters - clamper circuits.

UNIT IV

9 Hours

DIELECTRICS Introduction: fundamental definitions in dielectrics - expressions for electronic and ionic polarizations

- orientation polarization (qualitative) - space charge polarization - Langevin Debye equation -

frequency and temperature effects on polarization - expression for internal field (cubic structure) -

Clausius-Mosotti equation - dielectric loss - applications of dielectrics - problems.

UNIT V 8 Hours

OPTOELECTRONICS AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS Principle, working and characteristics of LED and LCD - blue ray disc. Magnetic materials: basic

definitions - properties of dia, para and ferro magnetic materials - explanation of hysteresis curve

based on domain theory - hard and soft magnetic materials. Magnetic storage device: principle -

working - giant magnetoresistance.

FOR FURTHER READING Motion of an electron in uniform and non-uniform magnetic fields - electric and magnetic fields in a

crossed configuration.

2 Hours


4 Hours


4 Hours



4 Hours


material.

4 Hours




4 Hours



4 Hours



4 Hours



Reference(s)

1. Jacob Millman, Christos Halkias and Satyabrata JIT, Electronic Devices and Circuits,

McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.


sons, Inc, 2010.


4. R. S. Sedha, A textbook of Applied Electronics, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi,

2010.

5. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2010

6. M. N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand &


Assessment Pattern



1 1 2 2

2 4 2

2 5

2

22

2 2 2

2

3

2 3

6

20

3 2

1

3

2

5

2 2

3

20

4 2 2 2

2 3

2 5

2

20

5 2 2

3 2 2

2

5

18

Total 100


1. Recall the Richardson equation.

2. Define dynamic resistance.

3. State the law of mass action.

4. Define Hall Effect.

5. Define polarization.

6. List the three practical applications of p-n junction diode.

7. List the four types of polarizations in dielectrics.

8. Reproduce the expressions for electronic and ionic polarization.

9. State the working principle of LED.

10. Define retentivity and coercivity.

Understand 1. Explain the variation of Fermi-Dirac distribution function with temperature.

2. Indicate the importance of Fermi level.



3. Indicate the reason for preferring extrinsic semiconductors over intrinsic semiconductors.

4. Represent four applications of Hall Effect.

5. Represent the switching action of a diode.

6. Interpret the relation between polarization and polarisability in dielectrics.

7. All the dielectrics are insulators but all the insulators are not dielectrics. Illustrate with

examples.

8. Interpret the relation between the dielectric constant and electric susceptibility.

9. Explain the phenomenon of electroluminescence in LED.

10. Summarize the working principle of giant magnetoresistance.

Apply 1. Find the expression for density of electrons and Fermi energy at 0 K.

2. Using the Fermi function, compute the temperature at which there is 1% probability that an

electron in a solid will have energy 0.5 eV above EF of 5 eV.

3. Explain how phosphorous atoms donate electrons to the conduction band.

4. Apply the law of mass action to determine the carrier concentration of intrinsic

semiconductors.

5. Construct a circuit using p-n junction diode and execute its V-I characteristics.

6. Construct a diode circuit with DC voltage source and demonstrate its working conditions.

7. Show that electronic polarizability is independent of temperature.

8. Explain frequency dependence of dielectrics with a neat sketch.

9. Apply the domain theory to the hysteresis effect observed in ferromagnetic materials.

10. Compute the wavelength of light emitted by an LED with band gap energy of 1.8 eV.

Analyse 1. The average energy of electrons at 0 K depends on Fermi level. Justify.

2. Differentiate p-type and n-type semiconductors.

3. Outline the working principle of full wave bridge rectifier.

4. At optical frequencies the total polarization is less. Justify.

5. Outline the causes for dielectric loss in dielectric materials.

6. Analyze the magnetic behavior of dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.

7. Compare the properties of LED and LCD.

8. Outline the difference between hard and soft magnetic materials.

Evaluate 1. Evaluate the resistance value using V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode.

2. Evaluate the value of Fermi distribution function for an energy kT above the Fermi energy at

that temperature and comment on the answer.

CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES

15CH201 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

Recall the terminologies of electrochemistry and explain the function of batteries and fuel

cells with its electrochemical reactions

Understand the fundamentals of corrosion, its types and polymers with its applications

Choose appropriate instrumentation technique for interpreting analytical data




1. Construct an electrochemical cell and measure its potential.

2. Identify the components and processess in batteries and infer the selection criteria for

commercial battery systems with respect to different applications.

3. Utilize electrochemical data to formulate an electrochemical half-cell and cell reactions for

corrosion control processes.

4. Differentiate the polymers used in day to day life based on its source, properties and

applications.

5. Identify the applications of analytical methods for the estimation of elements in aqueous

media.

UNIT I 10 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO ELECTROCHEMISTRY Types of electrodes - electrode potential - salt bridge - cell reaction - cell representation - silver-silver

chloride electrode - calomel electrode - determination of single electrode potential - electrochemical

series and its importance. Ion-selective electrode: glass electrode - measurement of pH using glass

electrode. Concentration cells (electrode and electrolyte). Potentiometry - potentiometric titrations

(redox titration). Difference between electrochemical and electrolytic cells

UNIT II

9 Hours

ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES Batteries - characteristics of battery - types of batteries. Construction, working and applications:

Primary (alkaline) and secondary (lead-acid and nickel-cadmium) - Modern batteries (zinc air battery

and lithium batteries) - precautions for battery maintenance. Comparison with conventional galvanic

cells. Fuel cells - Types of fuel cells: solid polymer electrolyte fuel cell - solid oxide fuel cells -

microbial fuel cell. Hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell - construction, working, advantages and limitations

UNIT III 8 Hours

CORROSION SCIENCE Corrosion: definition - types of corrosion: chemical and electrochemical corrosion - Pilling-Bedworth

ratio - types of oxide layer (stable, unstable, volatile and porous) - hydrogen evolution and oxygen

absorption mechanism for electrochemical corrosion - mechanism for rusting of iron. Types of

electrochemical corrosion: Galvanic corrosion - differential aeration corrosion (pitting, waterline and

pipeline). Galvanic series - applications. Factors influencing corrosion: nature of metal and

environment. Corrosion control methods: sacrificial anode method - impressed current cathodic

protection method - electroplating - electroless plating

UNIT IV 10 Hours

POLYMERS AND ITS PROCESSING Advantages of polymers over metals. Monomers - polymers - polymerization - functionality - degree

of polymerization - classification of polymers based on source and applications - Molecular weight

determination. Types of polymerization: addition, condensation and copolymerization - mechanism of

free radical polymerization. Preparation, properties and applications of thermosetting (epoxy resin and

bakelite) and thermoplastics (polyvinyl chloride and polytetrafluoroethylene). Compounding of

plastics - injection and extrusion moulding methods

UNIT V 8 Hours

INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES FOR CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Beer - Lamberts law. Principle, instrumentation (block diagram only) and applications: Ultra violet

spectroscopy - Atomic absorption spectroscopy - Colorimetry (estimation of a transition metal) -

Flame photometry (estimation of an alkali metal).



FOR FURTHER READING Nobel Prize winners in chemistry over past 5 years

2 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 General instructions to students - Handling reagents and safety precautions

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Determination of amount of hydrochloric acid present in the given sample using pH meter

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Determination of strength of a commercial mineral acid by conductometric titration.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Conductometric titration of mixture of acids

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Electro analytical determination of strength of iron in the given sample by potentiometric method

using saturated calomel electrode.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Measurement of rate of corrosion on zinc/mild steel in aerated neutral/acidic/alkaline solution by

weight loss measurements / Tafel polarization method

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method


Reference(s)

1. M. Munjal and S.M. Gupta, Wiley Engineering Chemistry, Second edition, Wiley India Pvt.

Ltd, New Delhi, 2013.

2. A. Pahari and B.Chauhan, Engineering Chemistry, Infinity Science press LLC, New Delhi,

2010.

3. P.H. Rieger, Electrochemistry, Springer, Netherland, Second Edition (Reprint) 2012.

4. Fred W. Billmeyer JR, Textbook of polymer science, John Wiley & sons, Third edition, 2008.

5. Willard Merritt and Dean Settle, Instrumental methods of analysis, CBS publishers, Seventh

edition, 2012.

Assessment Pattern



1 1 1 1

3 4 2

4 4

1

2

23

2 1 1 1

4 4 3

1 2

1 2

20

3 1 1 1

2 2 1

2 2

2 1

1

1

17

4 5 3 2

3 1 1

1

1 2 2

1 1

23

5 1

3

3

7

2

1

17

Total 100




1. List any four significances of EMF series.

2. Define the term single electrode potential.

3. Recall the four advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell.

4. Define the term functionality of a monomer.

5. State Pilling-Bedworth rule.

6. Name two monomers used for the preparation of epoxy resin.

7. Label the parts and charge carried by electrodes in electrochemical and electrolytic cells.

8. List any two significances of monomer functionality.

9. State Beer - Lamberts law.

10. Define concentration cell.

Understand 1. Classify two types of polymers based on source.

2. Compare electrochemical cell and electrolytic cell with suitable diagrams.

3. Illustrate the mechanism involved in electrochemical corrosion.

4. Explain the principle and five components of UV-visible spectrophotometer.

5. Outline the mechanism for the synthesis of –(CF2-CF2)n– polymer.

6. Identify any two analytical methods to estimate sodium present in aqueous media.

7. Illustrate the injection molding process with a necessary explanation and two advantages.

8. Indicate any two importance of salt bridge in an electrochemical cell.

9. Ilustrate the route to synthesis epoxy resin from its two monomers.

10. Summarize any four advantages of polymers over metals in everyday life.

Apply 1. Calculate the single electrode potential value zinc half-cell dipped in a 0.01M ZnSO4 solution

at 25°C? E° Zn/Zn 2+ = 0.763 V, R=8.314 JK -1 Mol -1, F= 96500 Coulombs.

2. Identify two advantages of degree of polymerization.

3. Find the concentration of given solution using spectrophotometer, if %T, bath length and

molar adsorptionÂ coefficient are 18, 1 cm and 6000 L/mol. cm.

4. Derive an equation for determination pH of unknown solution using glass electrode.

5. Elaborate any six applications of electrochemical series.

6. Select and explain suitable potentiometric titration to estimate the amount of ferrous ion in the

given solution.

7. Discuss the construction and working of electrolyte concentration cell with suitable example.

8. Assess the significance of functionality of monomer in the properties and structure of

polymer.

Analyse 1. Outline any two methods for preventing chemical and electrochemical corrosion.

2. Compare the advantages and limitations of electro and electroless plating of nickel.

3. The statement “prevention is better than cure” is not suitable for corrosion science and

engineering-Justify your answer.

4. Differentiate addition and condensation polymers based on its synthesis.

5. Arrange the following polymers based on the increasing order of resistance towards chemical

1. Poly (ethylene) 2. Starch 3.Baklite 4.Teflon.

Evaluate 1. Calculate the electrode potential of zinc metal if EMF of the cell is 1.10 V (Sat. Calomel

electrode was used for complete cell formation.

2. Electrode potentials of A and B are E 0 A/A+ = +0.76 V and E 0 B/B+ = -0.34 V

respectively. Choose the appropriate anode half-cell and cathode half-cell by giving the cell

representation.

3. Find out the degree of polymerization for a low density polytetrafluoroethylene with a

molecular weight of 10002 amu. (Atomic weights of F=18.9; C=12).



4. The standard reduction potentials of metals Ag, Fe, Cu and Zn are +0.80v,-0.44v, +0.34v and

-0.76v respectively. Arrange the metals in the increasing order of their ability to undergo

corrosion.

Create 1. A ship hull in ocean is safe against corrosion under any circumstance - Argue.

2. Derive the probable reason and possible solution for the following:

i. Stainless steel should not be used to build ship hull.

ii. Small anodic area results in intense corrosion.

iii. Metal under water drop undergoes accelerated corrosion.

15CH202 APPLIED CHEMISTRY 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

Understand the necessity of water softening processes.

Recognize the fundamentals of corrosion, alloys, phase rule and fuels with its applications.

Characterize the chemical compounds using analytical techniques.


1. Attribute the internal and external treatment methods for the removal of hardness in water for

domestic and industrial applications.

2. Exemplify the type of corrosion and its mechanism which will help to develop the corrosion

control methods.

3. Apply the applications of alloying and phase rule in the field of metallurgy.

4. Analyse the three types of fuels based on calorific value for selected applications.

5. Recognize the applications of analytical methods in characterizing the chemical compounds.

UNIT I 10 Hours

WATER PURIFICATION Hardness of water - classification of hardness (temporary and permanent) - units of hardness (ppm,

mg/l, degree Clark, degree French) - expression of hardness in terms of calcium carbonate

equivalence - estimation of hardness by EDTA Method - Uses of water for industrial purpose -

requirements of boiler feed water - disadvantages of using hard water in industrial boilers: scale -

sludge - priming - foaming - caustic embrittlement. Removal of dissolved salts from hard water:

Internal conditioning (phosphate, carbonate, calgon and colloidal methods) - external conditioning:

ion exchange process, reverse osmosis, electrodialysis. Uses of water for domestic purpose -

municipal water purification (screening, aeration, coagulation, sedimentation, filtration and

disinfection of water- break point chlorination).

UNIT II 8 Hours

CORROSION SCIENCE Corrosion - chemical and electro chemical corrosion -Pilling Bedworth rule - Mechanism (type of

oxide layer, oxygen absorption - hydrogen evolution) - Galvanic series - types of electrochemical

corrosion: galvanic corrosion - differential aeration corrosion (pitting, pipeline and waterline

corrosion) - Factors influencing corrosion (nature of metal & environment). Corrosion control:

sacrificial anode - impressed current method. Protective coatings - paints - constituents and functions.



UNIT III 9 Hours

ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE Alloys: purpose of alloying - function and effects of alloying elements -properties of alloys -

classification of alloys. Ferrous alloys: nichrome and stainless steel. Non-ferrous alloys: brass and

bronze. Heat treatment of steel (Annealing, hardening, tempering, normalising, carburizing and

nitriding).

Phase rule: Phase - component - degree of freedom - phase rule - phase diagram - Applications - one

component system (water system). Reduced phase rule - two component system (lead and silver

system).

UNIT IV

10 Hours

FUELS Classification - characteristics - calorific value - solid fuel - coal - types - analysis of coal (proximate

and ultimate analysis) - processing of coal to coke - carbonization - types (low temperature and high

temperature carbonization) - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method). Liquid

fuels - petroleum - refining of crude oil - knocking - octane number - cetane number. Liquid fuel from

coal (Bergius process). Gaseous fuels - natural gas (CNG) - coal gas - producer gas - syn gas - shale

gas.

UNIT V 8 Hours

INSTRUMENTAL METHODS Beer - Lamberts law. Principle, instrumentation (block diagram only) and applications: Ultra violet

spectroscopy - Infrared spectroscopy - Atomic absorption spectroscopy - Colorimetry (estimation of

transition metal) - Flame photometry (estimation of alkali metal).

FOR FURTHER READING Synthesis and applications of bio-fuels.

2 Hours


4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Water quality of BIT campus - River - Bore well water with respect to hardness, TDS and pH.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid in a given solution using pH meter.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Determination of the strength of Fe(II) in the given sample by potentiometric method.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Measurement of rate of corrosion on mild steel in aerated, neutral, acidic and alkaline medium by

Tafel polarization method/ weight loss method.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Estimation of copper content in brass by EDTA method.



4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method.


Reference(s)


2010.

2. M. Munjal et.al., Wiley Engineering Chemistry, Second edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, New

Delhi, 2013.

3. Willard Merritt and Dean Settle, Instrumental methods of analysis, CBS publishers, Seventh

edition, 2012.

Assessment Pattern



1 1 1 1

3 4 2

1 4 4

1

1

23

2 1 1 1

2 2 1

1 2 2

2 1

1

17

3 1 1 1

4 4 3

1 2

2

1

20

4 5 3 2

3 1 1

1 1

1 2 1

1 1

23

5 1

3

3

7

2

1

17

Total 100


1. Define the term hardness of water.

2. List any two internal conditioning methods to convert hard water to soft water.

3. List the two types of electrochemical corrosion.

4. Recall any two reasons for galvanic corrosion.

5. List the four major objectives of alloying steel.

6. State Gibbs phase rule.

7. Define octane number.

8. State Beer-Lambert’s law.

9. Recall any four applications of colorimetry.

Understand 1. Compare temporary and permanent hardness in water.

2. Illustrate the estimation of carbonate, non-carbonate and total hardness by EDTA method.

3. Identify the needs of corrosion control methods with suitable examples.

4. Indicate the two suitable conditions for electrochemical corrosion to occur.

5. Classify the three types of alloys based on metal composition.

6. For one component water system, the triple point is an invariant point. Reason out.

7. Distinguish between syn gas and coal gas.

8. With a neat diagram, explain the processes involved in Bergius process to get synthetic petrol.

9. Differentiate chromophore and auxochrome with an example.

10. Infer the role of ammonium thiocyanate in the colorimetric estimation of iron.

Apply 1. Illustrate the necessary steps involved in municipal water treatment.

2. Suggest a suitable laboratory method to estimate carbonate, non-carbonate and total hardness

of water.

3. Sketch a suitable protection method to prevent ship’s hull made of iron from corrosion.

4. Assess the effects of alloying elements.



5. Apply Gibbs phase rule for one component water system with a neat diagram.

6. Find the combusted products of the following components.

(i) 2H2 (ii) CH4

7. Find the application of colorimetry for the estimation of iron.

8. Calculate the number of the modes of vibrations for the following molecules.

(i) C6H6 (ii) CO2

Analyse 1. How can the effect of caustic embrittlement in boiler be resolved?

2. Identify the problems created in boilers if priming and foaming takes place.

3. Increase in temperature increases corrosion rate. Justify.

4. Zinc is more corroded when coupled with copper than lead – Reason out.

5. Distinguish ferrous and non-ferrous alloys with examples.

6. Arrange the following materials based on their increasing calorific value. peat, lignite,

bituminous, wood, anthracite and sub-bituminous.

Evaluate 1. Bolt and nut made of the same metal is preferred in practice. Give reason.

2. Support the statement “Coke is a better fuel than coal”.

3. Calculate the absorbance if 10% of light is transmitted.

4. Determine the effect of pH of the conducting medium on corrosion.

5. Determine the number of phases present in the following systems.

(i) Two miscible liquids (alcohol & water)

(ii) Two immiscible liquids (benzene & water)

Create 1. Derive the probable reason and possible solution for the following:

i) Stainless steel should not be used to build ship hull.

ii) Small anodic area results in intense corrosion.

iii) Metal under water drop undergoes accelerated corrosion.

2. AAS is a better method for environmental analysis than calorimetric analysis. Justify.

15CH203 APPLIED ELECTROCHEMISTRY 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

Understanding the basic concepts of electrochemistry and their application

Expanding knowledge about corrosion and methods of control

Gaining information regarding principle, working and application of batteries and fuel cells


1. Construct an electrochemical cell and measure its potential.

2. Measure the emf of a cell using different electrodes.

3. Identify the components and processes in batteries and infer the selection criteria for

commercial battery systems with respect to different applications.

4. Differentiate types of corrosion and its prevention by suitable techniques.

5. Recognize the importance of fuel cells and solar battery.



UNIT I 9 Hours

FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTROCHEMISTRY Introduction - electrical conductance in solution - electrical double layer - electrode potential -

importance of electrode potential. Electrochemical cell - standard cell: Weston cadmium cell -

Concentration cell: electrode and electrolyte - applications. Applications of electrolytic cells:

electrolysis of water, electrolysis of brine and electroplating of copper and gold

UNIT II 9 Hours

REFERENCE ELECTRODES Primary and secondary reference electrodes - metal-metal ion electrode, metal-metal insoluble salt

electrodes: silver-silver chloride electrode, calomel electrode - ion-selective electrode: glass electrode

- measurement of pH of a solution using glass electrode. Quinhydrone electrode: construction -

advantages - limitations. Applications of EMF measurements: Potentiometric titrations: acid-base

titration - oxidation-reduction titration - precipitation titration

UNIT III 10 Hours

ENERGY STORING DEVICES Types of batteries - alkaline, lead-acid, nickel-cadmium and lithium batteries - construction, working

and commercial applications. Electrochemical sensors. Decomposition potential: variation of

decomposition potential for different metals - importance of decomposition potential. Over voltage:

factors affecting over voltage value. Maintenance and precautions in battery handling

UNIT IV 10 Hours

CORROSION SCIENCE Corrosion - causes - dry and wet corrosion - Pilling-Bedworth rule - mechanism (hydrogen evolution

and oxygen absorption) - rusting of iron. Galvanic series - applications. Galvanic corrosion -

differential aeration corrosion (pitting, waterline and stress) - factors influencing corrosion. Corrosion

control - sacrificial anode and impressed current cathodic protection methods - Metallic coatings:

chromium plating - nickel plating - galvanizing and tinning

UNIT V 7 Hours

FUEL CELL AND SOLAR BATTERY Introduction - types of fuel cell: low, medium and high temperature fuel cell. Hydrogen-Oxygen fuel

cell - advantages. Solid polymer electrolyte fuel cell, solid oxide fuel cells, biochemical fuel cell.

Solar battery - domestic, industrial and commercial applications. Environmental and safety issues

FOR FURTHER READING Document the various batteries with its characteristics used in mobile phones and laptops

Maintenance free batteries, Battery recycling

2 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 General instructions to students - Handling reagents and safety precautions.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Determination of strength of a commercial mineral acid by conductometric titration.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Electroplating of copper onto a stainless steel object.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Determination of strength of iron in a given solution by potentiometric method.



4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Determination of amount of hydrochloric acid present in the given sample using pH meter.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Determination of corrosion inhibition on mild steel using natural inhibitors.

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 8 Estimation of barium by precipitation titration.


Reference(s)

1. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1&2, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

2. B. S. Chauhan, Engineering Chemistry, 3rd Edition, Laxmi Publication Ltd, New Delhi,

2010.

3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma and Madan S Pathania, Principles of physical chemistry, 46th

Edition, Vishal publishing Ltd, New Delhi, 2013.

4. B. S. Bahl, G. D. Tuli and Arun Bahl, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, 5th Edition, S. Chand

& Company, New Delhi, 2012.

5. S. Vairam, Engineering Chemistry, 1st Edition, John -Willy, India private limited, New Delhi,

2014.

6. Sashi Chawla, Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi,

2010.

Assessment Pattern



1 2 2

2 1 1

2 1

1 1 2

2 1

1 1

20

2 1 4

2 4 1

2

1 2

1 2

20

3

1 1

4 5

2 4

2 1

1 2

23

4 2 1

2 5 1

3

2

2 2

2

22

5 2 2

1 4

2 1

1 1

1

15

Total 100


1. List any two advantages of hydrogen oxygen fuel cells.

2. Name any two secondary batteries used in electronic appliances.

3. State pilling bedworth rule.

4. List any two applications of lithium battery.

5. Define overvoltage.

6. Recall the two limitations of quinhydrone electrode.

7. List the three major applications of galvanic series.

8. Recall the term redox reaction.

9. Define standard electrode potential.



Understand 1. Identify any two factors affecting the rate of corrosion based on the nature of metal.

2. Compare solar battery with lead acid-battery with respect to cell reactions, advantages and

limitations.

3. Explain the working of hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell with necessary diagram and cell reactions.

Mention its two advantages and limitations.

4. Identify the four advantages of electroless plating over electroplating.

5. Explain the difference between galvanic and differential aeration corrosion with an example

each.

6. Summarize any five factors that affect overvoltage value of a cell.

7. Differentiate cell from battery.

8. Sketch and explain the construction and working of saturated calomel electrode with

necessary cell reactions.

9. With a neat sketch explain the working of a silver – silver chloride electrode.

10. Elucidate the working principle of Weston cadmium cell with suitable cell reactions.

11. Distinguish galvanic and electrolytic cells based on cell reactions.

Apply 1. Assess the six advantages of solid polymer electrolyte fuel cell.

2. Many metals form oxide layer when exposed to atmospheric conditions due to corrosion.

Predict the four types of metal oxide layers formed with two examples each.

3. An iron pipe line buried under soil is used to carry natural gas, suggest any two corrosion

control techniques that can be employed to minimize/control corrosion.

4. Predict the type of corrosion taking place when a piece of iron rod is exposed to moisture and

explain the mechanism of rust formation.

5. Illustrate the construction of 6V lead-acid battery and explain its functioning during

discharging and charging process.

6. Select a suitable secondary storage battery used in mobile phones. Explain its reactions during

charging and discharging process.

7. Find the electrode potential of zinc rod using saturated calomel electrode as reference

electrode (E cell value is 1.10 V).

8. Apply the principle of ion selective electrode to find the pH of HCl solution using glass

electrode with necessary equations.

9. Can we use KCl salt bridge to construct a cell using Ag and Pb half-cell? Give reason.

10. Identify a suitable technique to achieve copper coating on stainless steel object with a neat

diagram.

Analyse 1. Can you store zinc sulphate solution in a copper container? Give reason if your answer is

yes/no.

2. Predict why copper cannot displace hydrogen from mineral acid solution.

3. Compare a deep cycle battery and a starting battery based on its application.

4. Zinc corrodes at a faster rate when coupled with copper than lead. Give reason.

5. Does the water exhaust from hydrogen - oxygen fuel cell is drinkable? Give reasons if

Yes/No.

Evaluate 1. Electrode potentials of A and B are E0A/A+ = +0.76 V and E0B/B+ = -0.34 V respectively.

Choose the appropriate anode half-cell and cathode half-cell by giving the cell representation.

2. Glass electrode cannot be used in solutions having pH greater than 9.0. Give reason.

3. Represent diagrammatically an electrochemical cell that produces 1.1 volt as an output. Write

the half-cell reactions responsible for that.

4. The standard reduction potentials of metals Ag, Fe, Cu and Zn are +0.80v,-0.44v, +0.34v and

-0.76v respectively. Arrange the metals in the increasing order of their ability to undergo

corrosion.

5. Identify any two advantages of microbial fuel cell over lead acid battery.



Create 1. Derive the probable reason and possible solution for the following:

i) Stainless steel should not be used to build ship hull.

ii) Small anodic area results in intense corrosion.

iii) Metal under water drop undergoes accelerated corrosion.

2. As an engineer, which type of metal oxide forming metal you will choose for your design?

Reason out.

15CH204 INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

Impart knowledge on the principles of water characterization, treatment methods and

industrial applications

Understand the principles and applications of electrochemistry, fuels and combustion

Recognize the fundamentals of polymers, nano chemistry and analytical techniques


1. Identify the internal and external treatment methods for the removal of hardness in water for

domestic and industrial applications.

2. Utilize the concepts of electrochemistry in real time applications.

3. Realize the importance of fuel chemistry in day to day life.

4. Differentiate the polymers used in day to day life based on its source, properties and

applications

5. Familiarize with the synthesis and characterization techniques of nanomaterials.

UNIT I 10 Hours

WATER PURIFICATION TECHNOLOGY: SOFTENING AND DESALINATION Hardness of water: Equivalents of calcium carbonate - Units of hardness - Degree of hardness and

estimation (EDTA method). Use of water for industrial purposes: Boiler feed water-scale-sludge -

priming and foaming -caustic embrittlement. Softening of hard water: External conditioning - ion

exchange methods - Internal conditioning - trisodium, dihydrogen, trihydrogen phosphate and sodium

hexameta phosphate- carbonate- colloidal methods. Desalination: Reverse osmosis - electrodialysis.

Domestic water treatment - Disinfection of water - break point chlorination

UNIT II 10 Hours

ELECTROCHEMISTRY Introduction - EMF - Single electrode potential -Calomel electrode - Glass electrode -pH

measurement using glass electrode - Electrochemical series. Cells: Electrochemical cells - Cell

reactions- Reversible cells and irreversible cells. Batteries - characteristics of battery - types of

batteries, construction, working and applications: Primary (alkaline) and secondary (lead-acid and

nickel-cadmium) - Modern batteries (zinc air battery and lithium batteries) - precautions for battery

maintenance. Fuel cell: Hydrogen - Oxygen fuel cell.Electroplating of copper and electroless plating

of nickel

UNIT III 8 Hours

FUELS AND COMBUSTION Fuel: Introduction - classification of fuels - calorific value - higher and lower calorific values -

analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) - carbonization - manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius



process) - knocking - octane number - cetane number - natural gas - Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)-

Liquefied Petroleum Gases (LPG) - producer gas - water gas. Combustion of fuels: introduction-

theoretical calculation of calorific value - calculation of stoichiometry of fuel and air ratio - ignition

temperature

UNIT IV 9 Hours

POLYMER AND COMPOSITES Monomers - functionality - degree of polymerizations - classification of polymers based on source

and applications; porosity - tortuosity - molecular weight determination by Ostwald method -

polymerization methods: addition, condensation and copolymerization - mechanism of free radical

polymerization -thermosetting and thermoplastics. Polymer blends - composites, significance,

blending-miscible and immiscible blends, phase morphology, fibre reinforced plastics, long and short

fibre reinforced composites

UNIT V 8 Hours

NANOMATERIALS Types of Nanomaterials - Nano particles - nanoclusters - nano rod - nanowire -nano tube. Synthesis:

Top down process: laser ablation - electrodeposition - chemical vapor deposition. Bottom up process:

Precipitation - thermolysis - hydrothermal - solvothermal process. Carbon nanotubes: Types -

production - properties - applications. Working principle and applications - Scanning Electron

Microscope (SEM) - Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) - UV-Visible spectrophotometer

FOR FURTHER READING Application of nanomaterials in medicine, environment, energy, information and communication

sectors

2 Hours


4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Water quality of BIT campus - River - Bore well water with respect to hardness, TDS and pH

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid in a given solution using pH meter

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Determination of strength of a commercial mineral acid by conductometric titration

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Conductometric titration of mixture of acids

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Determination of the strength of iron in the given sample by potentiometric method

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol by Ostwald viscometry method

4 Hours





Reference(s)


Ltd, New Delhi, 2013


2010

3. P.H. Rieger, Electrochemistry, Springer, Netherland, Second Edition (Reprint) 2012

4. Fred W. Billmeyer JR, Textbook of polymer science, John Wiley & sons, Third edition, 2008

5. G. Cao, Ying Wang, Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties, and

Applications, World Scientific, New Jersey, 2011

6. S. Sarkar, Fuels and combustion, 3rd edition, Orient Longman Ltd. New Delhi, 2010

Assessment Pattern



1 1 1 1

2 4 3

1 3

1

3

1

21

2 2 1 2

2 5 2

1 1 3

1

1

21

3 1 2 2

1 3 3

2 2

1 1

1

19

4 1 1 1

3 4 1

1 1 3

1 2

1

20

5 1 1 1

1 2 2

2 3

2 2

2

19

Total 100


1. Define the term break point chlorination.

2. Name a method to prevent the scale formation in the industrial boilers.

3. Define single electrode potential of an electrode.

4. List any two advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell.

5. Define functionality of a monomer.

6. Name any two thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers.

7. List any two applications of SEM.

8. Recall any two application of X-Ray diffractometer.

9. List three factors which affects the standard electrode potential of cell.

Understand 1. Illustrate any three applications of electrochemical series.

2. Summarize the four applications of calorimeter.

3. Explain the components of TEM with a neat sketch.

4. Compare bottom up approach with top down approach of nanoparticle synthesis.

5. Distinguish between alkaline and non alkaline hardness.

6. Differentiate between thermoplastic and thermosetting plastics

7. Why copper cannot displace hydrogen from mineral acid solution?

8. Identify two significances of RO method in water treatment.

9. Indicate any two advantages of water gas over producer gas.

10. Compare nanocluster with nanocrystal.

11. Identify the reasons for change of properties of materials at nanoscale.

Apply 1. A water sample contains 204 mgs of CaSO4 and 73 mgs of Mg(HCO3)2 per litre. Calculate

the total hardness in terms of CaCO3 equivalence.



2. 100 ml of sample water has hardness equivalent to 12.5ml of 0.08N MgSO4. Calculate

hardness in ppm.

3. Find out the single electrode potential of a half cell of zinc electrode dipped in a 0.01M

ZnSO4 solution at 25°C? E° Zn/Zn 2+ = 0.763 V, R=8.314 JK-1Mol-1, F= 96500 Coulombs.

4. Calculate the reduction potential of Cu2+/Cu=0.5M at 25°C. E° Cu 2+/ Cu= +0.337V.

5. Find out the weight and volume of air required for the complete combustion of 1 kg of coke.

6. A sample of coal containing 60% C, 6% H, 33% O, 0.5 % S, 0.2% N and 0.3% of ash. Find

the gross and net calorific value of coal.

7. Calculate the degree of polymerization of polypropylene having molecular weight of 25200.

8. Apply the principle of ion selective electrode to determine the pH of HCl solution using glass

electrode with equations.

Analyse 1. Calgon conditioning is advantageous over phosphate conditioning- reason out.

2. Soft water is not demineralized water whereas demineralized water is a soft water- Jusify.

3. Hydrogen electrode is not generally used for pH measurements – Why?

4. Zinc reacts with dil.H2SO4 to give hydrogen but silver doesn’t liberate hydrogen. Give

reasons.

5. Good fuel should have low ash content- Give reasons.

6. Sugar is an example of non-electrolyte - Reason out.

Evaluate 1. Hydrogen fuel is an ideal fuel for the future among all other fuels- Justify.

2. Choose a best method for water purification and explain their components

15CH205 WATER TECHNOLOGY AND GREEN

CHEMISTRY 3 0 2 4

Course Objectives

Imparting the knowledge on the principles of water technology and green chemistry

Understanding the principles and applications of green technology in water treatments

Infer the engineering applications of green chemistry in dyes, corrosion engineering and

nanotechnology


1. Understand the importance of green chemistry with its emergence and development.

2. Realize the designing of safer methodologies for green technology to meet the objectives of

green engineering.

3. Identify the type of corrosion and its mechanism which will help to develop the corrosion

control methods.

4. Apply suitable technique to extract natural dye from its source.

5. Familiarize with the synthesis and characterization techniques of nanomaterials.

UNIT I 9 Hours

WATER TREATMENT Water quality parameters - Hardness of water - Disadvantages of hard water - Degree of hardness and

its estimation (EDTA method) - Boiler feed water - Boiler troubles: Priming, foaming and caustic

embrittlement - Softening of hard water: Internal conditioning: Sodium hexameta phosphate -

Phosphate methods; External conditioning: Ion exchange method - Desalination: Reverse osmosis -

Electrodialysis. Domestic water treatment - Disinfection of water - Break point chlorination.



UNIT II 8 Hours

WASTE WATER ANALYSIS Basic principles and concept of green chemistry - Need of green chemistry in day-to-day life -

Scientific areas for practical applications of green chemistry - Industrial effluents - Waste water

analysis: Concept of chemical oxygen demand (COD) and biological oxygen demand (BOD) -

Removal of trace pollutants in waste water: Membrane Bioreactor (MBR) technology - Wet oxidation

method.

UNIT III 10 Hours

CHEMISTRY OF CORROSION Corrosion: Mechanism of corrosion - chemical and electrochemical - Pilling-Bedworth rule - oxygen

absorption - hydrogen evolution - galvanic series. Types of corrosion: Galvanic corrosion -

differential aeration corrosion (pitting, pipeline, water line and wire fence corrosion) - factors

influencing corrosion. Methods of corrosion control: choice of metals and alloys - proper designing -

cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode method, impressed current method)-modifying the environment.

Protective coatings: Concept of electroplating: electroplating (gold and copper) - electroless plating

(nickel and copper).

UNIT IV 9 Hours

NATURAL DYES Introduction - definition - classification of natural dyes - concept of chromophores and auxochromes -

Extraction process of colour component from natural dyes: Aqueous extraction, non-aqueous

extraction - Purification of natural dyes: Chromatography techniques - Types - Column

chromatography - thin layer chromatography - Qualitative analysis: UV-Visible spectroscopic study -

Mordant: Metallic and non-metallic mordant - advantages and disadvantages of natural dyes.

UNIT V

9 Hours

NANOMATERIALS Types of Nanomaterials - Nano particles - nanoclusters - nano rod - nanowire - nano tube. Synthesis:

Top down process: laser ablation - electrodeposition - chemical vapor deposition. Bottom up process:

Precipitation - thermolysis - hydrothermal - solvothermal process. Carbon nanotubes: Types -

production - properties - applications. Working principle and applications: Scanning Electron

Microscope (SEM) - Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) - UV- Visible spectrophotometer.

Synthesis of Au and Ag nanoparticles using plant extract - Advantages.

FOR FURTHER READING Protection of metals in concrete against corrosion microwave technology on green chemistry

2 Hours


4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Water quality- river/bore well water with respect to hardness and TDS

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid in a given solution using pH meter

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Estimation of strength of iron by potentiometric method using calomel electrode



4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Extraction of a natural dye by aqueous extraction method

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 6 Measurement of rate of corrosion of mild steel in aerated neutral/acidic/alkaline solution by weight

loss measurements/Tafel polarization method

4 Hours

EXPERIMENT 7 Determination of dye concentration in a given sample by using UV-Visible spectroscopic method

4 Hours



Reference(s)


Ltd, New Delhi, 2013

2. V K Ahluwalia, Green Chemistry - Environmentally Benign Reactions, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2012

3. Giusy Lofrano, Green Technologies for Wastewater Treatment - Energy Recovery and

Emerging Compounds Removal, Springer Dordrecht Heidelberg, New York, London, 2012

4. Ashis Kumar Samanta and Adwaita Konar, Natural Dyes - Dyeing of Textiles with Natural

Dyes, Dr.Emriye Akcakoca Kumbasar (Ed.), InTech Publisher, New Delhi, 2011

5. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1&2, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010

6. David Pozo perez, Nanotechnology and Nanomaterials, InTech Publishers, NewDelhi, 2010

Assessment Pattern



1 2 2

3 3

3 3

2 2

20

2 2

3 4

2 2

2 2

17

3 1 2 1

4 3 3

3

1 2

2

1

23

4 1 2

6 6

3

2

20

5 3 2 2

3 6 2

2

20

Total 100


1. List out any four water quality parameters.

2. Name the salts responsible for temporary hardness of water.

3. Recall any two practical applications of green chemistry.

4. Define wet oxidation in waste water treatment.

5. State Pilling Bed-worth′s rule.

6. Recall any two examples for differential aeration corrosion.

7. Name any two natural dyes.

8. Recall the role of auxochromes in dyes.

9. Name the four methods of nanomaterial synthesis.

10. Name any two plant extracts used in silver nanoparticles synthesis.



Understand 1. Hardness of water is always expressed in terms of CaCO3 equivalent. Reason out.

2. Soft water is not demineralized water whereas demineralized water is soft water - Justify.

3. Represent the need of green chemistry in waste water treatment.

4. Indicate the importance of MBR technology in waste water treatment.

5. Express the mechanism of wet corrosion.

6. Bolt and nut made from same metal is preferred in practice. Reason out.

7. Classify the types of natural dyes based on their chemical structure.

8. Compare the properties of metallic and non-metallic mordents.

9. Infer any two important needs of green chemistry in nanotechnology sector.

10. Identify the physicochemical and engineering properties of nanomaterials.

Apply 1. A sample of water contains 180 mgs of MgSO4 per litre. Calculate the hardness in terms of

CaCO3 equivalents. (Molecular weight of MgSO4 is 120).

2. Calculate the non-carbonate hardness of a sample of water containing the dissolved salts as

given below in mg/l Mg(HCO3)2 = 7.3; Ca(HCO3)2 = 40.5 and NaCl =50.

3. Select the scientific areas for the practical applications of green chemistry.

4. Predict the significance of sacrificial anode in the prevention of corrosion.

5. Outline the principle of electro-deposition to achieve copper coating on stainless steel object

with a neat diagram.

6. Select a suitable technique used for the purification of natural dye.

7. Assess the role of Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) in nano-materials characterization.

Analyse 1. Distinguish between scale and sludge.

2. Identify the four reasons for boiler troubles.

3. Differentiate between BOD and COD.

4. The rate of corrosion increases with increase in temperature. Give reason.

5. Outline the effect of pH of the conducting medium on corrosion.

6. Differentiate chromophores & auxochromes in dyes.

Evaluate 1. Substantiate the statement that nature of the environment affects corrosion...

2. Choose and explain any two best methods to synthesis nanoparticles.

Create 1. Plan and execute a method to get pure water from waste water using available low coast

material in your area.

2. Relate the characteristic properties of natural with synthetic dyes.



DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES

15MC001 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND

ASSEMBLY 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To introduce the basic concepts and design guidelines that suite for different manufacturing

processes

To make students familiar with solving different problems in design modifications of the

product made through various manufacturing techniques


1. Select the suitable tolerance refer to Indian standards and ASME Y 14.5

2. Redesign the casting with consideration to materials and surface properties

3. Design parts based on machining considerations in manufacturing

4. Use DFMA tools for minimizing the effort and cost in manufacturing and assembly

5. Explain environmental considerations in parts design and assembly

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO TOLERANCES Tolerances: Limits and Fits, tolerance Chains and identification of functionally important dimensions.

Dimensional chain analysis-equivalent tolerances method, geometric tolerancing for manufacture as

per Indian Standards and ASME Y 14.5 standard, surface finish

UNIT II 9 Hours

FORM DESIGN OF CASTINGS Materials choice - Influences of materials - Space factor - Size - Weight - Surface properties and

production method on form design. Redesign of castings based on parting line considerations,

Minimizing core requirements, redesigning cast members using Weldments

UNIT III 9 Hours

COMPONENT DESIGN - MACHINING CONSIDERATIONS Design features to facilitate machining - Drills - Milling cutters - Keyways - Doweling procedures,

Counter sunk screws - Reduction of machined area - Simplification by separation - Simplification by

amalgamation - Design for machinability - Design for economy

UNIT IV 9 Hours

DFMA TOOLS Rules and methodologies used to design components for manual, automatic and flexible assembly,

traditional design and manufacture Vs concurrent engineering, DFA index, poke-yoke, lean

principles, six sigma concepts, design for manual assembly; design for automatic assembly

UNIT V 9 Hours

DESIGN FOR THE ENVIRONMENT Introduction Environmental objectives Global issues Regional and local issues Basic DFE methods

Design guide lines Example application Lifecycle assessment Techniques to reduce environmental

impact Design to minimize material usage Design for disassembly Design for Recyclability



FOR FURTHER READING Form design aspects in Forging and sheet metal components - machining considerations, redesign for

manufacture, examples - Design for energy efficiency Design to regulations and standards

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. A.K. Chitale and R. C. Gupta, Product Design and Manufacturing, PHI 2007

2. G. Boothroyd, P. Dewhurst and W. Knight, Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly,

Marcell Dekker, 2002

3. R. Bryan, Fischer, Mechanical Tolerance stackup and analysis, Marcell Dekker, 2004

4. M. F. Spotts, Dimensioning and Tolerance for Quantity Production, Prentice Hall Inc., 2002

5. J.G. Bralla, Hand Book of Product Design for Manufacturing, McGraw Hill Publications,

2000

Assessment Pattern



1 4 3

2 7

2

2

20

2 4 3

2 7

2

2

20

3 4 3

2 4

3 3

1

20

4 4 3

2 4

3 3

1

20

5 4 3

3

4 4

2

20

Total 100


1. Define the term design.

2. What is the difference between fits and tolerance?

3. Define tolerance.

4. What are the types of fits?

5. Draw the tolerance symbol for parallelism.

6. Define parting line.

7. What is the use of core?

8. What are the types of milling cutters?

9. Define datum.

10. What is meant by DFA index?

Understand 1. How to identify the types of fit in an assembly?

2. What is the use of functionally important dimensions?

3. How to eliminate the core in casting?

4. What is the use of clamp in an assembly?

5. What is the use of datum in an assembly?

6. What is meant by amalgamation?

7. What is the difference between flexible and automatic assembly?

8. What is the difference between traditional design and concurrent design?

9. What are the various environmental objectives?

10. Explain design for disassembly.

Apply 1. Discuss the various types of clearances in an assembly.

2. How the various types of geometric tolerances applied in an assembly?



3. Explain the difference between Simplification by separation and Simplification by

amalgamation.

4. Why the keyways are used in an assembly?

5. How to minimize the material usage in manufacturing?

Analyse 1. Discuss the various types of geometric tolerances as per Indian and ASME Y 14.5 Standard?

2. Discuss the Surface properties and production method on form design.

3. How the Rules and methodologies are used to design components for manual, automatic and

flexible assembly?

4. How the Form design aspects in Forging and sheet metal components helps in an assembly?

5. Why the interference fit is preferred for bearing fixed to the shaft?

15MC002 MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To understand various types of maintenance, their procedure and defects analysis commonly

adopted in manufacturing industries.

To know about usage of computers for maintenance management and various condition

monitoring techniques.


1. Analyze the defects and failures encountered in manufacturing system

2. Classify the maintenance system and select suitable one based on requirement.

3. Explain the documentation and record updation involved in maintenance systems

4. Explain the scope of computers in maintenance system

5. Establish monitoring strategies according to system characteristics

UNIT I 9 Hours

DEFECTS AND FAILURE ANALYSIS Defect generation-types of failures-Defects reporting and recording-Defect analysis-Failure analysis-

Equipment down time analysis-Breakdown analysis-FTA, FMEA.

UNIT II 9 Hours

MAINTENANCE SYSTEMS Planned and un-planned maintenance - Breakdown maintenance - Corrective maintenance -

Opportunistic maintenance - Routine maintenance - Preventive maintenance, Predictive maintenance -

Condition based maintenance system selection of maintenance system.

UNIT III 9 Hours

SYSTEMATIC MAINTENANCE Codification and Cataloguing-Instruction manual and operating manual-Maintenance manual and

Departmental manual-Maintenance time standard-Maintenance work order and work permit -

Feedback and control-Maintenance records and documentation.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

COMPUTERIZED MAINTENANCE SYSTEM Selection and scope of computerization-Equipment classification-Codification of breakdown, material

and facilities- - Material management module-Captive Engineering module.



UNIT V 9 Hours

CONDITION MONITORING Condition monitoring techniques-Visual monitoring-Temperature monitoring-vibration monitoring-

Lubricant monitoring-Cracks monitoring-Thickness monitoring-Noise and sound monitoring-

condition monitoring of hydraulic system. Machine diagnostics-Objectives-Monitoring strategies-

Examples of monitoring and Diagnosis

FOR FURTHER READING Failure mode effects and criticality analysis- Design out maintenance- Job monitoring- Job

sequencing- Control structures for machine diagnosis

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Sushil Kumar Srivastava, Industrial Maintenance Management, S. Chand and Company Ltd,

New Delhi, 2006.

2. Manfred Weck and H. Bibring, Handbook of Machine Tools, John Wiley and Sons, New

York, 1984.

3. Don Nyman and Joel Levitt, Maintenance Planning, Scheduling and Coordination, Industrial

Press Inc., New York, 2010.

4. Michael E. Brumbach and Jeffrey A. Clade, Industrial Maintenance, Cengage Learning India

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.

5. R. Keith Mobley, Maintenance Fundamentals, Butterworth Heinmann Publications, USA,

2004.

Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

2

2 2

20

2 2 4

4 4

2

4

20

3 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

4

2

2 2

4 4

2

4

20

5 2 2

2 6

2

2

2

2

20

Total 100


1. Classify the types of failures.

2. Define FMEA.

3. What is meant by breakdown maintenance?

4. What is meant by predictive maintenance?

5. Define codification.

6. What is meant by maintenance work order?

7. What is the scope of computerization?

8. Define captive engineering module.

9. Write the condition monitoring techniques.

10. Define machine diagnostics.

Understand 1. Why defect and failure analysis are needed?

2. How the breakdown analysis is carried out?

3. Write the maintenance techniques used?



4. What is meant by maintenance manual and Departmental manual?

5. Discuss in brief about the job monitoring techniques.

6. Discuss in brief about the computer managed maintenance system.

7. Why the condition monitoring is needed?

8. Discuss in brief about the various condition monitoring techniques.

9. How will you perform 'Equipmemt classification'?

10. How will you select an appropriate maintenance system?

Apply 1. Design out the maintenance systems.

2. Discuss about the control structures for machine diagnosis.

3. Perform failure mode effect annalysis for a CNC machine.

4. Predict what would happen if Routine maintenance is not performed as per schedule.

5. Which kind of mainenance is more productive? Explain.

6. Explain defect analysis with an example.

7. Explain Down time analysis with an example.

8. Explain how temprature monitoring is useful.

9. Develop an instruction manual to any particular type of machine.

10. Develop an operating manual to any particular type of machine.

Analyse 1. What is the importance of predictive maintenance?

2. What is the need for condition monitoring?

3. Explan how maintenance record and documents will be useful.

4. Illusrate the difference between corrective and preventive maintenance with suitable example.

5. Illusrate the difference between work order and work permit with suitable example.

6. Explain - in which way spending for maintenance is reasonable.

Evaluate 1. What do you think about Equipment Classification?

2. What is the scope of computerized maintenance system?

3. It is found that an electric motor used in drilling machine is malfunctioning. Using the

Failiure analysis technique, find out possible causes.

4. Explain the advantage and disadvantage of computerized maintenance system over manual

maintenance with an example.

Create 1. Create maintenance plan for CNC machine avilable in our lab.

2. Design a noise and sound monitoring system that could be employed in the CNC machine

available in our lab and explain it working.

15MC003 ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND

METALLURGY 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To provide knowledge on classification, micro structure, heat treatment and testing methods

for metals.

To understand the types and properties of non metallic materials




1. Interpret various materials through microstructure and phase diagrams

2. Choose the suitable heat treatment process to achieve the desired properties of the material

3. Select materials for various applications based on required properties

4. Explain the properties and application of polymers and ceramics

5. Explain testing of various properties of engineering materials.

UNIT I 9 Hours

PHASE DIAGRAMS AND CONSTITUTION OF ALLOYS Alloys, Solid solutions Phase diagram, phase rule, lever rule, Binary phase diagram (Isomorphous,

eutectic, peritectic, eutectoid reactions) - Iron-Carbon phase diagram? Metallography, microstructure

UNIT II 9 Hours

HEAT TREATMENT PROCESSSES Purpose of heat treatment Annealing (stress relief, recrystallization, spheroidizing) and Normalizing

Hardening and Tempering, Isothermal transformation diagrams (T-T-T diagrams), Cooling curves

superimposed on TTT diagrams (martensite and bainite phase formation) Hardenability, Jominy end

quench test, Case hardening processes, carburizing, nitriding, carbontiriding, cyaniding, flame

hardening, induction hardening

UNIT III 9 Hours

ENGINEERING METALS AND ALLOYS Classification of Engineering materials Ferrous metals Plain carbon steel (low carbon, medium carbon

and high carbon steels), microstructure/composition, properties, applications Alloy steels, effect of

alloying additions on steels, stainless steels, HSLA, maraging, tool steels - Cast iron (grey, white,

malleable, sphreoidial cast iron), microstructure, properties, applications Non-ferrous metals (Ni, Cu,

Ti, Al, Mg, Zn alloys), microstructure/composition, properties and applications Bearing materials

UNIT IV 9 Hours

POLYMERS AND ENGINEERING CERAMICS Polymers Types of polymers Thermoplasts and thermosets -Properties and applications of engineering

polymers Rubber and its types, Ceramics Classification, types and applications

UNIT V 9 Hours

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTING Elastic and plastic deformation, slip and twinning Tensile test, stress-strain behavior of ductile and

brittle materials - Stress-strain behavior of elastomers Viscoelasticity - Compression test - Hardness

and testing methods - Impact test - Fatigue test, S-N curve, endurance limit, factors affecting fatigue -

Creep test, creep curves Types of fracture.

FOR FURTHER READING Introduction to Super alloys, Shape memory alloys, Composites, Importance of surface properties of

materials (corrosion and wear).

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Sydney H. Avner, Introduction to Physical Metallurgy, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2010

2. William D.Callister, Material Science and Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, Singapore,

2010



3. Kenneth G.Budinski and Michael K.Budinski, Engineering Materials,Prentice Hall of India

Learning. Ltd.,New Delhi, 2010.

4. V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Learning. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2009.

5. O.P.Khanna, Material Science and Metallurgy, Dhanpat Rai Publications (P) Ltd, New Delhi,

2013

6. G. E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New

Delhi, 2007

Assessment Pattern



1 5 5

5 5

20

2 2 3

4 6

2 3

20

3 4 6

2 3

3 2

20

4 4 6

2 3

3 2

20

5 3 3

3 4

3 4

20

Total 100


1. State Gibbs phase rule and give its mathematical expression.

2. Define ferrite and austenite.

3. List the three stages of a heat treatment process.

4. What is meant by quenching? List any three quenching medium.

5. What is meant by cupronickel?

6. What are the effects of Vanadium and Tungsten in low alloy steels?

7. Draw the molecular structure of polyethylene and poly propylene.

8. Write the characteristics of engineering ceramics.

9. Define endurance limit in fatigue test.

10. What is the attractive feature of Vickers hardness test?

Understand 1. How will you express the deformation characteristics of a material through tensile testing?

2. Distinguish elasticity and plasticity.

3. Why the additives are added to polymers?

4. What is the importance of alumina and silicon nitride?

5. What is the purpose of magnesium treatment in producing S.G iron?

6. What are the main differences between brass and bronze?

7. Case carburizing heat treatment is not generally carried out for medium carbon steel. Why?

8. What is the need for providing a tempering treatment after quench hardening of steel?

9. What is cooling curve? How does the time temperature cooling curve of an alloy of eutectic

composition different from that of a pure metal?

10. Differentiate steel and cast iron.

Apply 1. Metal A has melting point at 1000 C . Metal B has melting point of 5000 C. Draw one phase

diagram (between the elements A & B ) for each of the following conditions. (i)The two

elements exhibit unlimited solid solubility.(ii)The alloy systems show formation of two

terminal solid solution and a eutectic point at 50%A and at7000 C.

2. Elements A & B melt at 7000 C and 10000 C respectively. Draw a typical isomorphous phase

diagram between the elements A & B.



3. Elements A & B melt at 7000 C & 10000 C respectively. They form a eutectic at 35%A at

temperature 5000 C. Draw a typical phase diagram between A & B.

4. Draw the schematic isothermal transformation diagram corresponding to 0.8% of carbon

steel.

15MC004 PRODUCT DESIGN AND COSTING 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To study about the concept of product costing, patenting and manufacturing economics in

product design.

Understand the relationship between customer desires, functional requirements, product

materials, product design, and manufacturing process selection


1. Identify the customer requirements to start new project and carryout product planning.

2. Generate and select suitable ideas to pursue successful design

3. Quantify and access the manufacturing process and cost to make well defined component

4. Express the process of patenting the Intellectual property

5. Apply economic reasoning to analysis the contemporary problem for newly developed

product

UNIT I 10 Hours

PRODUCT PLANNING FOR CUSTOMER NEEDS Product Planning Process- Identifying Opportunities- Evaluating and Prioritizing Projects- Allocating

Resources and Timing- Pre-Project Planning-Reflect on the Results and the Process-Identifying

Customer Needs- Raw Data from Customers- Interpreting Raw Data in Terms of Customer Needs-

Organizing the Needs into a Hierarchy-Establishing the Relative Importance of the Needs-Reflecting

on the Results and the Process

UNIT II 9 Hours

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CONCEPT GENERATION Specifications - Specifications Established - Establishing Target Specifications-Setting the Final

Specifications-Concept Generation-The Activity of Concept Generation-Clarify the Problem- Search

Externally-Search Internally-Explore Systematically- Reflect on the Results and the Process.

UNIT III 9 Hours

DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING COST DFM Cross functional team-Estimate the manufacturing cost, Reduce the Cost of components,

Reduce the cost of assembly, Rescue the cost of supporting production-Impact of DFM decisions-

Development time, Development cost, Product quality, External factors.

UNIT IV 7 Hours

PATENTS AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY Overview of patents, Utility patents, Preparing a disclosure - Formulate strategy plan- Study of prior

invention - Outline claims - Description of inventions - Refine claims - Pursue application - Reflect of

result and process.

UNIT V 10 Hours

PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS Elements of economic analysis -Quantitative analysis, Qualitative analysis - Building a Base-Case

Financial Model - Sensitivity analysis-Development cost and time with examples - Project tradeoffs -



Six potential interactions, Tradeoff rules, Limitations - Influence of qualitative factor on project

success - Qualitative analysis FOR FURTHER READING Understanding and Representing tasks, Base line project planning, accelerating projects, Project

execution, Postmortem Project evaluation

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Karl T. Ulrich and Stephen D. Eppinger, Product Design and Development, McGraw-Hill

Book Company, New Delhi, 2009.

2. George E. Dieter, Engineering Design - Materials and Process Approach, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008.

3. S. Dalela and MansoorAli, Industrial Engineering and Management Systems, Standard

Publishers Distributors Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.

4. Harry Nystrom, Creativity and Innovation, John Wiley and Sons Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 1988

5. Benjamin W. Niebeland Alanb.Draper, Product Design and Process Engineering, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 1976.

Assessment Pattern



1 3 3

3 3

4 4

20

2 3 4

4 3

3 3

20

3 4 2

2 4

3 3

20

4 3 3

2 6

3 3

20

5 3 3

2 6

3 3

20

Total 100


1. Define a process for finding a job.

2. What is product architecture?

3. Define Product plan.

4. List the four types of Product Development Projects.

5. Write the use of Technology S-Curve.

6. Define Product-process change matrix.

7. What is called as pipeline Management?

8. Define Core team.

9. What are called specifications?

10. List any four important benifits that the concept generation tree provides.

11. Mention the use of concept combination table.

12. Write the expression for DFA Indes.

13. What is meant by javajacket?

14. State Patent law.

15. List the four steps that are recommended for the economic analysis of a product development

project.

Understand 1. Mention the inefficiencies that organization need to face if the project is not well planned.

2. What is meant by Oppertunity funnel?

3. Why are some customer needs difficult to map to a single metric?

4. Why should the independent design variables are nor be used as metrics?



5. Why the design for manufacturing is universally important?

6. Differentiate fixed and varibale cost.

7. What is error proofing?

Apply 1. Explain the five steps involved to identify the customer needs for a Motor boat.

2. Explain the five step process for refining the specification for a suitable product.

3. Could you apply the five step method to an everyday problem like choosing the food for a

picnic?

4. With an aid of flowchart explain the design for manufactirng method.

5. Explain how you could estimate the overhead cost and cost of assembly.

6. Describe the steps involved for preparing a disclosure for a suitable patent.

7. Build a quantitative model to analyze the development and sale of a bicycle light. Assume

that you could sell 20000 units per year for five years at a sale price of Rs.20 per unit and a

manufacturing cost of Rs.10 per unit. Assume that the production ramp-up expenses would

be Rs.20000, ongoing marketing and support costs would be Rs.2000 per month, and

development would take another 12 months. How much development spending could such a

project justify?

8. Generate one or more product concepts that are very different from the coffin and sorensesn

inventions to address the problem of handling a hot coffee cup and that dont infringe the

coffin and Sorensen patents.

15MC005 RAPID PROTOTYPING 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To provide knowledge of methods for the manufacturing of prototypes from computer based

models

To understand the entire process of direct manufacturing from the creation of computer based

models to their physical realization

To understand the various methods of manufacturing and their merits, demerits and

applications

To impart students to convert CAD models in to real life engineering components


1. Design a prototype the models of real world engineering parts

2. Assess the Principle and Effect of process parameters in RP process

3. Develop the model using various RP processes

4. Develop the various Printer models using RP process

5. Apply RP of Tools using RP techniques

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION Need for time compression in product development, Product development-conceptual design -

development - detail design- prototype -RP Data Formats - Information flow in a RP system -

Generation of STL file- Steps in RP- Factors affecting RP process- Materials for RP- applications of

RP- RP in Indian scenario

UNIT II 9 Hours

STEREOLITHOGRAPHY Classification of RP systems, Stereolithography systems - Principle- process parameters - process

details - machine details, Applications - Direct Metal Laser Sintering (DMLS) system -Principle -

process parameters -process details - machine details, Applications



UNIT III

9 Hours

FDM AND LOM Fusion Deposition Modeling -Principle- process parameters - process details - machine details,

Applications - Laminated Object Manufacturing- Principle - process parameters - process details -

machine details, Applications

UNIT IV 9 Hours

SGC, 3DP AND LENS METHODS Solid Ground Curing- Principle-process parameters -process details- machine details, Applications. 3

- Dimensional printers - Principle - process parameters - process details - machine details,

Applications, and other concept modelers like thermo jet printers, Sander-s model maker, JP system 5,

Object Quadra system. Laser Engineering Net Shaping (LENS) - Ballistic Particle Manufacturing

(BPM) - Principle

UNIT V 9 Hours

RAPID TOOLING AND APPLICATIONS OF RPT Introduction to rapid tooling - Direct and indirect method - Software for RP -STL files, Magics,

Mimics. Application of Rapid prototyping in Medical field, manufacturing and automotive industries

FOR FURTHER READING Application of stereolithography in bio-medical engineering- application of to geometric modeling -

wireframe, surface and solid modeling - Case study on FDM in evaluation and testing of sukhoi super

jet landing gear - Manufacturing RC car parts with 3D printing - Rapid prototyping finishing

processes

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Chua Chee Kai, Leong Kah Fai and Lim Chu Sing, Rapid Prototyping: Principles and

Applications, World Scientific Publishing Company, Singapore, 2010

2. D. T. Pham and S. S. Dimov, Rapid Manufacturing, Springer-Verlag, London, 2001.

3. Paul F. Jacobs: Stereo Lithography and other RP & M Technologies, SMENY, 1996.

4. Frank W. Liou, Rapid Prototyping and Engineering Applications: A toolbox for prototype

development CRC Press- Technology and Engineering, 2007

5. Terry Wohlers, Wohlers Report 2000, Wohlers Associates, USA, 2000

6. J. G. Conley, Rapid Prototyping and Solid Free Form Fabrication, Journal of Manufacutring

Science and Engineering, vol. 19, Nov 1997, pp 811-815

Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

2

2 2

20

2 2 4

4 4

4 2

20

3 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

4

2

2 2

4 4

4

2

20

5 2 2

2 6

2

2

4

20

Total 100




1. Define Rapid prototyping.

2. State triangulation algorithm.

3. What is the importance of Time compression engineering or concurrent engineering?

4. State the various types of RP processes.

5. What are the different geometric modeling techniques?

6. Define Vertex-to-vertex rule.

7. How rapid prototyping processes are classified?

8. What are the process parameters affecting model creation in Stereolithography?

9. What are the Different RP formats available?

10. What are the process parameters affecting model creation in FDM, LOM, SGC & 3DP?

Understand 1. What are the limitations of wireframe and surface modeling over Solid modeling?

2. How a solid model is developed using Constructive Solid Modeling?

3. How the parts made by FDM process are superior to other RP processes?

4. Why are post processing operations necessary for RP processes?

5. Why support materials not necessary in SLS process?

6. Distinguish between any two Direct and Indirect tooling.

7. How the Rapid prototyping processes are classified?

8. Why RP process generated models are preferred in medical applications?

9. List some of the medical applications using RP models.

10. Name some neutral file format used for slicing of parts.

Apply 1. How the photo polymerization process occurs in STL?

2. How process parameters affect surface finish, dimensional accuracy of parts manufactured in

stereolithography process?

3. Evaluate the effect of process parameters in Selective Laser Sintering Process?

4. How lateral distortion of paper prototype by water absorption is prevented in LOM?

Analyse 1. Why carbon dioxide atmosphere is necessary in SLS process?

2. How models are developed by material addition and material removal process?

3. How information flows from data creation to STL file formatting across an RP system?

Evaluate 1. How Solid ground curing is carried out?

2. Which method is used for curing of parts made by FDM process?

3. How the photo polymerization process occurs in STL?

15MC006 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To introduce the concept of analyzing discrete time signals and systems in the time and

frequency domain

To study various transformation techniques and their computation.

To study the concept, design and implementation of filters.




1. Interpret the characterization and classification of signals and concepts of signal processing.

2. Analyze discrete time signals and systems in time and frequency domain.

3. Infer analog and discrete signals in frequency domain using fourier transforms

4. Understand various transformations and their computation of continuous signals.

5. Realize the digital filters

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION Characterization and classification of signals - examples of signals - multichannel - multi-dimensional

continuous versus discrete - analog versus digital - concept of frequency. Concepts of signal

processing - typical applications.

UNIT II 9 Hours

DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS Representations - classifications - time domain and frequency domain characterization - transfer

functions Z- transform and applications.

UNIT III 9 Hours

FREQUENCY ANALYSIS OF SIGNALS Analysis of analog and discrete signals - using Fourier series, Fourier transform, Fourier transform of

discrete sequence and discrete Fourier transform -computation of discrete Fourier transforms.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

DIGITAL PROCESSING OF CONTINUOUS SIGNALS Radix 2. FFT algorithms. Sampling of continuous signals - anti aliening filters - sample and hold

circuit reconstructing filters - analog to digital and digital to analog converters

UNIT V 9 Hours

DIGITAL FILTERS Discretization of analog filters - direct discrete design - window functions -filter realization -

introduction to digital signal architecture-IIR and FIR structures.

FOR FURTHER READING Quantization noise - Derivation for quantization noise power Over flow error - Truncation error -

Limit cycle oscillation - Signal scaling - Interpolation and Decimation , Decimation by an integer

factor - Interpolation by an integer factor - Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor.

Applications: Signal processing- Spectral estimation, enhancement.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. S. K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing - A computer based approach, Tata McGraw-Hill


2. Joyce Van de Vegte, Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing, Prentice Hall of India

Learning. Ltd., New Delhi, 2001.

3. Alan V. Oppenheim and Ronald W. Schafer, Discrete Time Signal Processing, Pearson

Education,New Delhi, 2010.

4. R. G. Lyons, Understanding Digital Signal Processing, Addison Wesley Publishing Company,

India, 2004.



Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

2

2 2

20

2 2 4

4 4

2

4

20

3 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

4

2

2 2

4 4

2

4

20

5 2 2

2 6

2

2

2

2

20

Total 100


1. What is meant by LTI system?

2. What is the causality condition for an LTI system?

3. State the Sampling Theorem.

4. Give the mathematical and graphical representations of a unit sample, unit step sequence.

5. Write the relationship between system function and the frequency response.

6. What is an aliasing? How to overcome this effect?

7. State initial value theorem of Z transform.

8. What is the relation between Fourier transform and z transform?

9. What are Twiddle factors of the DFT?

10. Is the DFT of a finite length sequence is periodic?

Understand 1. Define DTFT pair.

2. State Periodicity Property of DFT.

3. What is the use of Fourier transform?

4. State and proof the properties of Fourier transform.

5. Define canonic and non canonic form realizations.

6. What is linear phase filter?

7. Mention the properties of Chebyshev filter?

8. Define sampling rate conversion.

9. Define multi channel and multi dimensional signals.

10. State the Sampling Theorem.

Apply 1. Differentiate recursive and non recursive difference equations.

2. List the use of Fourier transform.

3. How many multiplication and additions are required to compute N point DFT using radix 2

FFT?

4. Mention advantages of direct form II and cascade structure.

5. What are the design techniques available for IIR filter?

6. List the various applications of DSP.

7. Give the transform relation for converting LPF to BPF in digital domain.

8. Why rectangular window are not used in FIR filter design using window method?

9. Explain the method of design of IIR filters using bilinear transform method.

10. Prove that an FIR filter has linear phase if the unit sample response satisfies the condition

h(n) = ± h(M-1-n), n =0,1,….. M-1.Also discuss symmetric and anti symmetric cases of FIR

filter.

Analyse 1. Compare Hamming and Hanning window?

2. Derive bilinear transformation for an analog filter with system function H(s) = b/ s + a.



3. Obtain the i) Direct forms ii) cascade iii) parallel form realizations for the following systems

y (n) = 3/4(n-1) – 1/8 y(n-2) + x(n) +1/3 x(n-1).

4. Determine the Discrete Fourier transform x (n) = (1, 1, 1, 1) and Proof x(n)*h(n) =X(z) H(z).

Evaluate 1. Determine the Inverse Fourier transform H (w) = (1-ae-jw) -1.

2. Design a realize a digital filter using bilinear transformation for the following specifications

i) Monotonic pass band and stop band

ii) -3.01 db cut off at 0.5 π rad

iii) Magnitude down at least 15 db at ω = 0.75 π rad.

3. Design a digital Butterworth High pass filter satisfying the following specifications

0.9 ≤ |H (e jw)| ≤1, 0 ≤ ω ≤ π/2

|H (e jw)| ≤0.2, 3π/4 ≤ ω ≤π with T= 1 sec. using impulse invariant transformation.

4. Design a digital Butterworth filter satisfying the following specifications 0.7 ≤ |H (e jw)| ≤1, 0

≤ ω ≤ 0.2π |H (e jw)| ≤0.2, 0.6π ≤ ω ≤π with T= 1 sec .Determine system function H(z) for a

Butterworth filter using impulse invariant transformation.

5. Find the DFT of a sequence x(n)=(1,1,0,0) and find IDFT of Y(k) =(1,0,1,0).

6. Compute the DFT for the sequence.(0.5,0.5,0.5,0.5,0,0,0,0).

Create 1. Design a single pole low pass digital IIR filter with -3db bandwidth of 0.2Π by using bilinear

transformation.

2. Design a HPF of length 7 with cut off frequency of 2 rad/sec using Hamming window. Plot

the magnitude and phase response.

15MC007 SOFT COMPUTING 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To provide an overview of soft computing techniques

To provide a strong foundation of neural networks

To introduce the applications of Fuzzy and Genetic algorithm


1. Comapare and Contrast various soft computing techniques.

2. Explain the pattern association algorithm

3. Familiar with ART and neural networks.

4. Understand the fuzzy logic concepts

5. Apply genetic algorithm in real time problems

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS Differences between Biological and Artificial Neural Networks - Typical Architecture, Common

Activation Functions, McCulloch - Pitts Neuron, Linear Separability - Hebb Net, Perceptron, Adaline,

Madaline - Architecture, algorithm, and Simple Applications.

UNIT II 9 Hours

PATTERN ASSOCIATION Training Algorithms for Pattern Association - Hebb rule and Delta rule, Heteroassociative, Auto

associative and Iterative Auto associative Net, Bidirectional Associative Memory - Architecture,

Algorithm.



UNIT III 9 Hours

ADAPTIVE RESONANCE AND BACKPROPAGATION NEURAL NETWORKS ART1 and ART2 - Basic Operation and Algorithm, derivation of earning Rules, Boltzmann Machine

Learning - Architecture, Algorithm and Simple Applications.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

CLASSICAL, FUZZY SETS AND RELATIONS Properties and Operations on Classical and Fuzzy Sets, Crisp and Fuzzy Relations - Cardinality,

Properties and Operations, Composition, Tolerance and Equivalence Relations.

UNIT V 9 Hours

GENETIC ALGORITHM Working principles, Coding, fitness function, GA operators, Differences and similarities between GAs

and traditional methods, GAs for constrained optimization, Real-coded GAs.

FOR FURTHER READING Simple Neural Nets for Pattern Classification - Simple Applications in pattern associations - Standard

Backpropagation Architecture - Simple Problems on Classical, Fuzzy Sets and Relations - Advanced

GAs.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. S.N.Sivanandam and S.N.Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley India(P) Ltd,2011

2. Timothy J.Ross, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, McGraw-Hill, 2000

3. Davis E.Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning,

Addison Wesley, N.Y., 1989

4. Jang.J.S.R., Sun.C.T.and Mizutami.E, Neuro fuzzy and Soft computing, Prentice Hall, New

Jersey-2010

Assessment Pattern



1 4 2

2 3 4

2 3

20

2 2 2

2 3 4

2

2

3

20

3 4 2

2 4 2

3

3

20

4 2 2

2 4

3 4

3

20

5 2 2

4 2

2

4

4

20

Total 100


1. What is called de-fuzzification? Mention its types.

2. What are the applications of neural networks?

3. What are the three basic elements of a neuron model?

4. Name some of the multi layer neural network

5. Mention the advantages of the back propagation algorithm.

6. Mention some of the applications of the fuzzy logic controllers in real time world.

7. What are the various applications of fuzzy logic?

8. What are the different types of learning rules?



Understand

1. Discuss the simplified model of an artificial neuron.

2. Illustrate the training and classification of continuous perception with an example.

3. Illustrate back propagation algorithm with your own training sets, and explain.

4. Describe the operations of dendrite, soma, and axon in the biological neuron.

5. Explain briefly about the perceptron multilayer net and explain it briefly with its algorithm.

6. Explain the role of knowledge based systems.

7. Describe the steps in designing a fuzzy control system.

Apply

1. Compare and contrast Fuzzy sets and CRISP sets.

2. How ANN resembles brain?

3. Analyze the goal of inverted pendulum.

4. Bring out the necessity of fuzzy databases and explain.

5. Compare single layer perception classifier and multi-layer perception classifier.

6. How ANN resembles brain?

Analyse

1. Differentiate supervised and unsupervised learning.

2. Give similarities and dissimilarities between Fuzzy logic and neural networks.

3. Why modeling of the process, blood pressure control difficult.

Evaluate

1. Differentiate forward and backward chaining.

2. Discuss about the techniques involved in pattern recognition.

Create

1. The weight matrix neurons is given as W for a single-layer feedback network with three

Calculate the gradient vector, VE(v), for the energy function in three dimensional output

space and its Hessian matrix, V2~(v)P. rove that the Hessian matrix is not positive definite.

2. Translate the following text into predicate calculus formula: - If 'A' is greater than 'B' and 'B'

is greater than 'C' then 'A' is greater than 'C'.

3. Write the algorithm for Back propagation training and explain about the updation of weights

4. A fully connected feed forward network has 10 source nodes, 2 hidden layers, one with 4

neurons and the other with 3 neurons, and a single output neuron. Construct an architectural

graph of this network.

5. Assume that the vertices of a three-dimensional bipolar binary cube are used to represent

eight states of recurrent neural network with three bipolar binary neurons. The equilibrium

states are p = [ - 1 - 1 - 1]l and q = [ 1 1 1 ]l . Sketch the desirable state transitions between

the vertices.

15MC008 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To study the IC fabrication procedure.

To study the characteristics, realize circuits, design for signal analysis using Op-amp ICs.

To study the applications of Op-amp.



To study internal functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like Timers, PLL

circuits, regulator circuits, ADCs.


1. Demonstrate the various methods used in IC fabrication.

2. Characterize and analyze the performance of operational amplifier ICs.

3. Understand the applications of Op-amp and various methods used in ADC and DAC.

4. Acquire the basic knowledge in applications of special ICs like Timers, PLL circuits, and

regulator circuits.

5. Gain the knowledge on various application ICs.

UNIT I 9 Hours

IC FABRICATION IC classification - Fundamental of monolithic IC technology - epitaxial growth, masking, diffusion of

impurities - Realization of monolithic ICs and packaging.

UNIT II 9 Hours

CHARACTERISTICS OF OPAMP Ideal OP-AMP characteristics - DC characteristics - AC characteristics - Offset voltage and current:

voltage series feedback and shunt feedback amplifiers - Differential amplifier -Frequency response of

OP-AMP - Basic applications of op-amp.

UNIT III 9 Hours

APPLICATIONS OF OPAMP Instrumentation amplifier - First and second order active filters - V/I and I/V converters –

Comparators – Multivibrators - Waveform generators – Clippers – Clampers - S/H circuit, D/A

converter (R-2R ladder and weighted resistor types) - A/D converter - Dual slope, successive

approximation and flash types.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

SPECIAL ICS 555 Timer circuit Functional block - Characteristics and applications - 566-voltage controlled

oscillator circuit - 565-phase lock loop circuit functioning and applications - IC L8038 function

generator - IC 723 general purpose regulator.

UNIT V 9 Hours

APPLICATION ICS IC voltage regulators - LM317 - 723 regulators, switching regulator - MA 7840 - LM 380 power

amplifier - ICL 8038 function generator IC - Isolation amplifiers - Opto coupler.

FOR FURTHER READING Etching, summer, differentiator and integrator, peak detector, Analog multiplier ICs, opto electronic

ICs.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Ramakant A. Gayakward, Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education, New

Delhi, 2009.

2. D. Roy Choudhury and Sheil B. Jani, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age International, New

Delhi, 2010.

3. Jacob Millman and Christos C.Halkias, Integrated Electronics - Analog and Digital Circuits

System, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2003.



4. Robert F. Coughlin and Fredrick F. Driscoll, Op-amp and Linear ICs, Pearson Education,

New Delhi, 2008.

5. David A. Bell, Op-amp and Linear ICs, Prentice Hall of India Learning. Ltd., New Delhi,

2007.

Assessment Pattern



1 4 2

2 3 4

2 3

20

2 2 2

2 3 4

2

2

3

20

3 4 2

2 4 2

3

3

20

4 2 2

2 4

3 4

3

20

5 2 2

4 2

2

4

4

20

Total 100


1. List the five processes used to fabricate IC’s using silicon planar technology.

2. Define slew rate.

3. Define CMRR.

4. List the four popular IC packages available.

5. State the output voltage equation for an inverting amplifier.

6. List the four applications of precision diode.

7. Mention the five application of non-linear opamp circuits.

8. Give the conditions to be satisfied for sustained oscillation.

9. What are the three stages through which PLL operates?

10. List the five types of ADCs.

Understand 1. Explain the steps involved in the fabrication of the circuit using IC technology.

2. Illustrate the circuit diagram of op-amp differentiator, integrator and derive an expression for

the output in terms of the input.

3. Explain the successive approximation type ADC.

4. Explain the five types of digital to analog converters.

5. Explain the functional diagram of LM 380 power amplifier.

6. Show the important features of instrumentation amplifier.

7. Draw the block diagram of an Astable multivibrator using 555timer and derive an expression

for its frequency of oscillation.

8. Derive the gain of inverting and non-inverting amplifier.

9. Draw the circuit of a first order and second order butter worth active low pass filter and derive

its transfer functions.

10. Explain the comparator used as a zero crossing detector.

Apply 1. Explain the opamp is used as a linear amplifier.

2. A PLL has free running frequency of 500 kHz and bandwidth of the low pass filter is 10 kHz.

Will the loop acquire lock for an input signal of 600 kHz? Justify your answer. Assume that

the phase detector produces sum and difference frequency components.

3. How many total number of clock pulses required for 8-bit successive-approximation type A/D

converter?

4. Predict an adder circuits using operational amplifier to get the output expression as V0 = -

10.1v1 +v2 + 5 v3?



5. Explain the concept of the use of Voltage reference. Also explain the function of

voltage reference source using temperature compensation and avalanche diode

reference

6. List the applications of practical integrator.

7. Explain the applications of comparator.

8. What is the need for Phase detector in PLL?

9. Mention the application of analog multiplier.

10. Explain the application of PLL as AM detector, FM Detection and FSK

demodulation.

Analyse 1. What is VCO? What is the purpose of VCO? Draw the block diagram and connection

diagram of IC 566 VCO and explain. Obtain an expression for frequency of oscillation.

2. Draw the functional block schematic of a NE565 PLL and explain the roles of the low pass

filter and VCO. Derive the expression for the capture range and lock in range of the PLL.

3. Why is an inverted R-2R ladder network DAC better than R-2R ladder DAC?

4. Explain weighted resistor type and R-2R ladder type DAC, Inverter R-2R Ladder DAC.

5. For a square wave oscillator calculate the frequency of oscillation if R2=10kΩ, R1=8.6kΩ,

Rf= 100kΩ &C= 0.01μF

6. A PLL frequency multiplier has an input frequency of “f” and a decade counter is introduced

in the loop. What will be the frequency of the PLL output?

Evaluate 1. For a dual input, balanced output differential amplifier, Rc=2.2.KΩ, RE=4.7KΩ,

Rs1=Rs2=50Ω. The supply voltages are ±10V. the hfe for the transistor is 50. Assume silicon

transistors and hie =1.4KΩ. Determine the operating point values, differential gain, common

mode gain and CMRR.

2. Explain the steps involved in the design of a band pass filter using OPAMP

3. In the connection diagram of VCO shown below, +V = 12V, R2 = 1.5KO, R1=R3=10KO and

C1=0.001F, a. Determine the nominal frequency of output waveform b. Compute the

modulation frequency in the output frequency if control voltage is varied between 9.5V and

11.5V.

4. The R-2R ladder DAC shown below consists of 10KΩ & 20KΩ resistors, VREF = 2V and R1

= 10KΩ. Determine the values required for RF such that VFS = 10V. For a particular dual

slope ADC, t1 is 83.33 ms and the reference voltage is 100 mV. Calculate t2 if (Apr-

2013,Apr-2010) (i) V1 is 100 mV and (ii) 200 mV.

Create 1. For an n-bit flash type A/D converter, how many comparators are required?

2. 4-bit DAC has VFS = 10V. Determine Vo, given the following binary inputs.

a. 00012 b. 01002 c. 10002 d. 11112

15MC009 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To learn industrial electronics in applied manner with perspective of mechatronics

engineering.

To introduce the design philosophy for mechanical processes control based on analog and

digital electronics and electrical machines.

To focus on integration of the marketing, design, and manufacturing functions of the firm in

creating a new product.




1. Acquire basic knowledge on power semiconductor device and its characteristics.

2. Understand the different types of converters.

3. Understand the concepts of speed control of DC motor using solid state devices.

4. Understand the concepts of speed control of AC motor using solid state devices.

5. Gain the knowledge on the application of industrial electronics.

UNIT I 9 Hours

THYRISTORS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS Introduction - Applications - Principle of Operating of an SCR - Two- Transistor Analogy of SCR -

DIAC - TRIAC - GTO - IGBT - MCT - Basic Triggering circuits for Thyristors -Rectifier Circuits

using SCR.

UNIT II 9 Hours

INVERTERS, CHOPPERS AND CONVERTERS Commutation Circuits - Inverters - series and parallel - VSI - Choppers: Step up, Morgan's, Jone's -

Single phase and three phase Converters, Fly-back convertors, Buck-Boost convertors - Introduction

to cycloconverters and ac controllers

UNIT III 9 Hours

SOLID STATE CONTROL OF DC MOTORS Introduction - Advantage of Electronic Control - D.C. Motor Speed Control - Speed Control of DC

Shunt Motors using Thyristor Technology - Overvoltage Protection of DC Motors.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

SOLID STATE CONTROL OF AC MOTORS Introduction - A.C. Motor control - Speed control motors - Speed control A.C. shunt motors using

thyristors, Speed - torque characteristic of induction motor -

V/f control Static rotor resistance control - Slip power recovery scheme.

UNIT V 9 Hours

APPLICATIONS Electronic timers - Digital counters - Voltage regulators - Voltage doubler - Online and offline ups -

Switched mode power supply - Principle and application of induction and dielectric heating.

FOR FURTHER READING Protection of power devices - Dual converters - Closed Loop control - Self control of synchronous

motor - Static stator voltage control.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Frank D. Petruzella, Industrial electronics, McGraw Hill, 1996.

2. Mohammed H. Rashid, Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications, Pearson

Education India, 2013.

3. Terry Baltelt, Industrial electronics, devices, systems and applications, Delmar publishers,

1997.

4. Bhattacharya / S Chatterjee.S.K, Industrial Electronics and Control, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.

5. James T. Humphries, Leslie P.,Industrial Electronics, Delmar Publications, 1993.



Assessment Pattern



1 4 2

2 3 4

2 3

20

2 2 2

2 3 4

2

2

3

20

3 4 2

2 4 2

3

3

20

4 2 2

2 4

3 4

3

20

5 2 2

4 2

2

4

4

20

Total 100


1. List the five methods to turn on the thyristor.

2. What are the two types of power MOSFET?

3. Define latching current.

4. Define holding current.

5. What is a snubber circuit?

6. List the losses occur in a thyristor during working conditions.

7. State the function of freewheeling diodes in controlled rectifier.

8. Define commutation.

9. Identify the condition condition to be satisfied in the selection of L and C in a series inverter.

10. Predict the control range of firing angle in ac voltage controller with RL load.

Understand 1. Define hard driving or over driving.

2. Define commutation angle.

3. Write the expression for the average output voltage for step down and step up chopper.

4. Define inverter.

5. What is the main drawback of a single phase half bridge inverter?

6. Differentiate the ON-OFF control and phase control.

7. Difference between continuous and discontinuous conduction mode.

8. Give the condition to be satisfied to operate a motor in regenerative braking mode.

9. Define v/f control.

10. Mention the features of variable frequency induction motor drives.

Apply 1. Mention the six applications of controlled rectifier.

2. Illustrate the working of single phase full converter with RL load.

3. A 1 phase two pulse bridge converter feeds power to RLE load with R=6ohm, L= 6mH, E =

60v, ac source voltage is 230v, 50Hz for continuous conduction. Find the average value of

load current for firing angle of 50 °. In case one of four SCR???S gets open circuited.

Calculate the new value of average load current assuming the output current as continuous.

4. Classify the two types of inverter.

5. Classify the seven types of motor duty and how it influence in selecting the motor for a

particular application.

6. Compare the constant torque and constant power operation of the DC motor.

7. Write the control algorithm used for open loop and closed loop operation of DC drives.

8. A 200 V, 875 rpm, 150 A separately excited dc motor has an armature resistance of 0.06 Ω. It

is fed from a single phase fully controlled rectifier with an ac source of 220 V, 50 Hz.

Assuming continuous conduction, calculate the firing angle for rated motor torque and 750

rpm.

9. Illustrate the v/f control of induction motor drives.



10. The single phase full bridge inverter has resistive load of R=2.4 ohm and dc input voltage is

48v. Determine rms output voltage at the fundamental frequency, output power. And the total

harmonic distortion.

Analyse 1. A dc chopper has an input voltage of 200V and a load of 15ohm resistance. When the chopper

is on, its voltage drop is 1.5V and the chopping frequency is 10 KHz. If the duty cycle is 80%.

Determine

i) average and rms output voltage ii) chopper on time.

ii) Prove the output voltage of step down chopper is Vo = D Vs.

2. Compare the push pull SMPS, half bridge and full bridge SMPS.

3. Compare the current sourse inverter and voltage source inverter with relevent waveforms.

4. A single phase voltage controller feeds power to a resistive load of 3Ω from 230V, 50 Hz

source. Determine 1) The maximum values of average and RMS thyristor currents for any

firing angle Ø. 2) The minimum circuit tiurn off time for any firing angle Ø. 3) the ratio of

third harmonic voltage to fundamental voltage for Ø= 60 º

5. Compare the constant torque and constant power operation of the DC motor.

6. A 50 KW, 240V, 1700 rpm separately excited DC motor is controlled by a converter. The

field current is maintained at If=1.4A and the machine back EMF constant is Kv=.91 VA

rad/sec. The armature resistance is Rm=0.1Ω and the viscous friction constant is

B=0.3Nm/rad/sec. The amplification of the speed sensor is K1=95 mV/rad/sec and the

gain of the power controller is K2=100. i) Determine the reference voltage Vr to drive the

motor at the rated speed. (ii) If the reference voltage is kept unchanged, determine the speed

at which then motor develops rated torque.

Evaluate 1. Three phase fully controlled rectifier is connected to three phase ac supply of 230V, 60 Hz.

load current is continuous and has a negligible ripple. If the average load current Idc =150 A

and the commutating inductance Lc = 0.1mH. Determine the overlap angle when α = 10°.

2. Design a filter component of a buck converter which has an input voltage of 12 V and output

voltage of 5V. The peak to peak output ripple voltage is 20mV and peak to peak ripple

current of inductor is limited to 0.8A. The switching frequency is 25 KHz.

3. Design with circuit diagrams and waveform the three phase controlled converter fed

seperately excited DC motor.

4. Compare CSI fed drives and VSI fed drives.

Create 1. Draw the mind map for the v/f control of induction motor.

2. Draw the mind map for the speed control of AC motor using thyristors.

15MC010 FUZZY LOGIC AND NEURAL

NETWORKS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To make the students to understand Fuzzy logic and Neural Network concepts

To equip the students with the latest application of soft computing


1. Implement machine learning through neural networks

2. Interpret the concept of artificial neural networks and their control applications

3. Explain the concept of fuzzy set theory and its architectures.

4. Make use of the knowledge based rules and its controller types

5. Apply the fuzzy knowledge representation and multi objective decision making controllers



UNIT I 9 Hours

ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORK Introduction -biological neuron and their artificial models - neuron modelling- learning rules - types

of neural networks - single layer - multi layer feed forward network - back propagation - learning

factors

UNIT II 9 Hours

NEURAL NETWORKS IN CONTROL APPLICATIONS Feedback networks - Hopfield networks - Applications of neural networks - Process identification -

Artificial neuro controller for inverted pendulum

UNIT III 9 Hours

FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEMS Classical sets-fuzzy sets- fuzzy operation -fuzzy relations - fuzzification - defuzzification - if-then

rules- Fuzzy functions

UNIT IV 9 Hours

FUZZY RULES AND LOGIC Membership function-knowledge base - data base - rule base -decision-making logic -fuzzy logic

controller: Mamdani and Sugeno-Takagi architecture

UNIT V 9 Hours

FUZZY SYSTEMS Representation of fuzzy knowledge - fuzzy inference systems - Fuzzy decision making - Multi

Objective Decision Making

FOR FURTHER READING Fuzzy controller for inverted pendulum, image processing, blood pressure during anaesthesia

Introduction to neuro-fuzzy controllers

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Jacek M. Zurada, Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems, Jaico Publishing House, New

Delhi,2012

2. John Yen, Reza Langari, Fuzzy logic Intelligence, control and Information, Pearson

Education,1999

3. C T Jang, J S R Sun and E Mizutani , Neuro Fuzzy and Soft computing, Pearson

Education,2006

4. Laurene Fauseett: Fundamentals of Neural Networks, PHI,2004

5. Timothy J.Ross: Fuzzy Logic Engineering Applications, McGrawHill, 2004

6. B. Yagnanarayanan, Artificial Neural Networks, Prentice Hall of India Ltd .,New Delhi.2012

Assessment Pattern



1 4 2

2 3 4

2 3

20

2 2 2

2 3 4

2

2

3

20

3 4 2

2 4 2

3

3

20

4 2 2

2 4

3 4

3

20

5 2 2

4 2

2

4

4

20

Total 100




1. What are the three basic elements of a neuron model?

2. What is called defuzzification?

3. Mention the types of defuzzification.

4. What are the applications of neural networks?

5. Name some of the multilayer neural network.

6. Mention the advantages of the Back propagation algorithm.

7. List out some of the applications of the fuzzy logic controllers in real time world.

8. Mention the few properties of fuzzy sets.

9. What are the various applications of fuzzy logic?

10. What are the different types of learning rules?

11. Draw AND function neuron and OR function neuron and state its output.

Understand 1. What is Hebbian learning rule?

2. Demonstrate the simplified model of an artificial neuron.

3. Illustrate the training and classification of continuous perception with an example.

4. Demonstrate back propagation algorithm with your own training sets, and explain.

5. Explain the operations of dendrite, soma and axon in the biological neuron.

6. Elucidate briefly about the perceptron multilayer network with its algorithm.

7. Explicate the steps in designing a fuzzy control system.

8. Explicate the defuzzification methods.

9. Discuss the fuzzy rule for home heating system.

10. Explain the operation of the fuzzy logic control with the process inference block.

Apply 1. Give similarities and dissimilarities between Fuzzy logic and neural networks.

2. Why is modeling a blood pressure control difficult?

3. Discuss the techniques involved in pattern recognition.

4. Infer the role of knowledge based systems.

5. Judge the necessity of fuzzy databases and explain.

Analyse 1. Differentiate feed-forward and feed-back neural network.

2. Differentiate supervised and unsupervised learning.

3. Compare Fuzzy sets and Crisp sets.

4. Analyze the goal of inverted pendulum.

Evaluate 1. How does ANN resemble brain?

2. Compare single layer perceptron classifier and multi-layer perceptron classifier.

Create 1. Assume that the vertices of a three-dimensional bipolar binary cube are used to represent

eight states of recurrent neural network with three bipolar binary neurons. The equilibrium

states are p = [- 1 - 1 - 1] and q = [1 1 1]. Sketch the desirable state transitions between the

vertices.

2. Construct Fuzzy logic control of blood pressure during Anesthesia.

3. Design a Hopfield network for 4 bit bipolar patterns. The patterns are 1st sample S1 = [1

1 -1 -1], 2n sample S2 = [-1 1 -1 1], 3rd sample S3 = [-1 -1 -1 1]. Find the weight matrix and

the energy for the threinput samples. Determine the pattern to which sample S = [-1 1 -1 -1]

associates.



15MC011 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

The intention and purpose of this course is to a make the students to understand the role of

instrumentation in bio medical applications

The intention and purpose of this course is to a make the students to gain adequate knowledge

on ECG, EEG and EMG

The intention and purpose of this course is to a make the students to analyze parameters of

medical imaging and its measurements


1. Gain adequate knowledge on ECG, EEG and EMG

2. Acquire knowledge on characteristics and applications of a variety of signal transducers

3. Understand the various recording and display devices

4. Distinguish between various health measurement and monitoring system

5. Familiarize various medical equipment’s and their technical aspects

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION Cell structure - electrode - electrolyte interface, electrode potential, resting and action potential -

electrodes for their measurement, ECG, EEG, EMG and EOG - machine description - methods of

measurement, Stem cells.

UNIT II 9 Hours

BIO MEDICAL SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Basic transducer principles Types - source of bio electric potentials - resistive, inductive, capacitive,

fiber-optic, photoelectric, chemical, active and passive transducers and their description and feature

applicable for biomedical instrumentation.

UNIT III 9 Hours

SIGNAL CONDITIONING, RECORDING AND DISPLAY Input isolation, DC amplifier, instrumentation, charge amplifier, power amplifier, and differential

amplifier - feedback, op Amp - Electrometer amplifier, carrier Amplifier - instrument power supply.

Oscillagraphic - Galvanometric - XY, magnetic recorder, storage oscilloscopes - electron microscope

- PMMC writing systems - Telemetry principles.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

MEDICAL MEASUREMENT AND MONITORING SYSTEMS Blood pressure measurement: by ultrasonic method - plethysonography - blood flow measurement by

electromagnetic flow meter cardiac output measurement by dilution method - phonocardiography -

vector cardiography. Heart lung machine - artificial ventilator - Anesthetic machine - Basic ideas of

CT scanner - MRI and ultrasonic scanner - laser equipment and application - cardiac pacemaker - DC

- defibrillator patient safety - electrical shock hazards.

UNIT V 9 Hours

BIO MEDICAL DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTATION Introduction - computers in medicine - basis of signal conversion and digital filtering, data reduction

technique - time and frequency domain technique, Biomatics.



FOR FURTHER READING Equipment failures and troubleshooting - ECG Analysis - Centralized patent monitoring system - Bio

telemetry - Bio, Nano sensors and application.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. R. S. Khandpur, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing


2. Cromwell, Weibell and Pfeiffer, Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements, Prentice

Hall of India Learning. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.

3. L. A. Geddes and Baker, L.E., Principles of Applied Bio-medical Instrumentation, John

Wiley and Sons Publishing Company, New York, 1995.

4. W. J. Tompkins, Biomedical Digital Signal Processing, Prentice Hall of India Learning. Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2000.

Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

2

2 2

20

2 2 4

4 4

2

4

20

3 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

4

2

2 2

4 4

2

4

20

5 2 2

2 6

2

2

2

2

20

Total 100


1. Define a cell structure.

2. Define depolarization of a cell.

3. What is a cell and which is the principal fluid medium in it?

4. Mention the bio signal frequency range from various sections of the human body.

5. Define an electrode potential.

6. What is meant by sodium pump?

7. Name the principal ions responsible for the action potentials.

8. What are called electrodes?

9. Mention the electrode having high input impedance.

10. What is a Micro-electrode and where it is used?

11. What is meant by ventricular fibrillation?

12. What information is provided by electrocardiograph?

13. State the sensitivity rate of ECG.

14. Specify the characteristics of ECG preamplifier.

15. List the important parts of an ECG recorder.

16. Mention the lead configurations used in ECG.

17. What is Einthoven triangle?

18. Give the range of frequency for ECG signals.

19. What are the 2 types of electrodes used for ECG recording?

20. Mention the ranges of frequency and voltage related to EEG.

21. In which type of biomedical recorders loud speakers are used?

22. What is meant by 10-20 system?

23. Mention the clinical uses of EMG instrument?

24. Why a.c magnetic fields are used in electromagnetic blood flow meters?



Understand 1. Describe the characteristics of resting potential and action potential in the cell.

2. Explain the cardio pulmonary blood circulation system.

3. Mention the salient features of needle electrodes.

4. Explain the depolarization and repolarization of heart muscle with reference to ECG wave

form.

5. Explain the origin of different heart sounds.

6. Describe 10-20 electrode systems used in EEG.

7. Explain about the analysis of EEG signal.

8. What is EMG? Describe the recording setup used in EMG.

9. Discuss measurement of blood pressure and possible errors due to trauma or other

psychological effects on the patient?

10. Discuss the principle and working of electromagnetic blood flow meters.

11. Explain the working of X-ray machine.

12. Explain the infrared thermo graphic instrumentation with suitable diagram.

Apply 1. The ECG of a patient is being recorded using the three standard frontal plane leads. If the

cardiac vector is oriented at an angle of 45 degrees to Lead I and has a magnitude of 3mV,

what are the voltages seen on Leads I, II and III?

2. A patient has a cardiac output of 4 liters/min, a heart rate of 86 beats per minute, and a blood

volume of 5 liters. Calculate the stroke volume and the mean circulation time. When is the

mean blood velocity in the aorta (in feet per second) when the vessel has a diameter of

30mm?

3. In the standard 12-lead ECG recording system, how many electrodes are required to be

attached to a human subject for recording any one of the unipolar chest lead signals?

4. Demonstrate the working of an ECG machine with a neat block diagram.

5. Compute the ultrasonic imaging system (M-mode) with a suitable diagram.

Analyse 1. By using which type of electrode the hydrogen ion concentration of the blood is easily

determined?

2. Distinguish between metallic microelectrode and non-metallic microelectrode.

Evaluate 1. For perfect lock, what should be the phase relation between the incoming signal and VCO

output signal?

2. On what parameters does the free running frequency of VCO depend on?

3. Why is essential that a coupling medium like olive oil or special jelly is used in ultrasonic

imaging system?

Create 1. Design a coronary-care hospital suite. Show the all rooms in a layout plan. Illustrate all your

instrumentation systems by block diagrams.

2. A certain patient monitoring unit has an input amplifier with a CMRR of 1, 00,000:1 at 60

Hz. At other frequencies, CMRR is 1000:1. Do you consider these ratios adequate for the

monitoring the ECG? Explain.

3. Volume of air expired and inspired during each respiratory cycle varies from 0.5 to 3.9 litres

during exercise, what is this value called and what does it mean?

4. A person has a total lung capacity of 5.95 litres. If the volume of air left in the lungs at the

end of maximal expiration is 1.19 liters, what is his vital capacity?

5. Construct an adder circuit using op-amp to get the output expression as V

0 =-(0.1V 1 +V, V2 and Vare the inputs.32+10V3) where V1



15MC012 PROCESS CONTROL 2 0 2 3

Course Objectives

To obtain the mathematical models for first order and higher order real-time systems and also

understand the concept of self-regulation

To get adequate knowledge about the characteristics of various controller modes and

controller tuning methods

To understand how to apply the control schemes for various applications


1. Solve the mathematical models for first order real time systems.

2. Understand the characteristics of various control modes and the concept of various control

schemes.

3. Understand the various controller tuning methods to tune the controller.

4. Know the construction, characteristics and applications of different type of actuators.

5. Apply the process control knowledge on Industrial environment.

UNIT I 6 Hours

INTRODUCTION Need for process control - Continuous and batch process - Mathematical model of first order level:

pressure and thermal processes, interacting and non-interacting systems - Servo and regulator

operation - self-regulation

UNIT II 6 Hours

CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICS Basic control actions - Characteristics of On-Off, proportional, integral and derivative control modes -

Composite control modes: P+I, P+D and P+I+D control modes - Selection of control mode for

different processes typical control schemes for level, flow, pressure and temperature processes.

UNIT III 6 Hours

TUNING OF CONTROLLERS AND MULTI-LOOP CONTROL Optimum controller settings - Evaluation criteria-IAE, ISE and ITAE decay ratio - Tuning of

controllers by process reaction curve method, damped oscillation method Ziegler-Nichol's tuning,

feed forward control - ratio control, cascaded control, averaging control, inferential and split range

control.

UNIT IV 6 Hours

FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT Pneumatic and electric actuators - Valve positioner - Control valve characteristics - Type of valves:

globe, butterfly, diaphragm, ball valves and control valve sizing cavitation and flashing in control

valves - Response of control valves - Electric and electro pneumatic valves - Selection of control

valves

UNIT V 6 Hours

SELECTED UNIT OPERATIONS Distillation column control of top and bottom product compositions reflux ratio. Case study: control

of CSTR, control of heat exchanger, Steam boiler: drum level control and combustion control.

FOR FURTHER READING Interacting and non interacting system-Cascade control for level process-temperature process station.



6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 1 Characteristics of interacting and non-interacting systems.

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 2 Closed loop response of temperature process station

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 3 I / P to P / I Converter

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 4 Tuning of PID using different techniques

6 Hours

EXPERIMENT 5 Implementation of cascade control scheme for level process


Reference(s)

1. George Stephanopoulos, Chemical Process Control, Prentice Hall of India learning Pvt. Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2012

2. B. Wayne Bequette, Process Control: modeling, design, and simulation, Prentice Hall of India

Learning Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 2008

3. Donald P. Eckman, Automatic Process Control, Wiley-India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009

4. Dale E. Seborg, D. A. Mellichamp and Thomas F Edgar, Process Dynamics and Control,

Wiley-India, 2010.

5. Peter Harriott, Process Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008

6. S B Thakore and B I Bhatt, Introduction to Process Engineering and Design, Tata McGraw-

Hill PublishingCo. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.

Assessment Pattern



1 5 5

5 5

20

2 2 3

4 6

2 3

20

3 4 6

2 3

3 2

20

4 4 6

2 3

3 2

20

5 3 3

3 4

3 4

20

Total 100


1. Define process.

2. Why process control is needed in industries?

3. Define interacting system and give an example.

4. What is the degree of freedom of a process?

5. List the characteristics of ON-OFF controller.

6. State the different types of control modes.

7. Name the different types of test inputs.

8. State the relationship between proportional band and proportional gain.

9. Give the demerits of P, I and D controllers.



10. What is ultimate gain and ultimate period?

11. Give the settings recommended by Ziegler and Nichols for feedback controllers.

12. List the features of simple performance criteria used in controller tuning.

13. Draw the P&I diagram of butterfly control valve and various instrument lines.

Understand 1. Differentiate between manipulated variable and controlled variable.

2. What do you mean by self-regulation?

3. Distinguish between continuous process and batch process.

4. Why do we need mathematical modeling of a process?

5. When a PID controller is preferred rather than PI controller?

6. Differentiate between offset and error.

7. Select suitable control schemes for temperature process and flow process

8. How the offset can be minimized with P-I controllers?

9. What type of controller is preferred in the inner loop of cascade control? Why?

10. What is the purpose of final control element in a process?

11. State the importance of air-fuel ratio in combustion chamber.

Apply 1. A tank operating at 50 feet head 51 lpm out flow through a valve and has a cross section area

of 10 square feet calculate the time constant

2. Obtain the optimum controller settings for the model G(s)=e -0.5s /(4s +1) using process

reaction Curve Method?

3. Find the proper Cv for a valve that must allow 150 gallons of ethyl alcohol per minute with a

specific gravity of 0.8 at a maximum pressure of 50 psi and the required valve size

Valve Size ¼ ½ 1 1½ 2 3 4 6 8

Cv 0.3 3 14 35 55 108 174 400 758

4. Implement the split-range controller to a pressure control process and explain its operation.

5. Obtain the transfer function of a pneumatic valve.

6. Select the gain of proportional controller using Ziegler-Nichols method. Consider a unit step

change in the set point. The process is second order with kp =5, time constant =2, and

damping ratio=3. Assume that Gm(s)=Gf(s) =1 and apply it for interacting system?

15MC013 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To understand the use of forecasting, control of inventory, process of routing and scheduling

for improving productivity

To build and solve linear programming problem

To analyse deterministic and probabilistic models of problems related to networks and

queuing


1. Explain the ways of improving productivity by job design, work study, ergonomics,

forecasting techniques and following safety.

2. Explain inventory control techniques and the need for material requirement planning.

3. Solve sequencing of ‘n’ jobs with two and more machines and also compute the

characteristics of single server queuing models.

4. Formulate linear programming problems and find the optimum solution.

5. Construct the network model and identify the critical path of deterministic and probabilistic

models



UNIT I 9 Hours

PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL Productivity - Productivity index -Productivity measurement - Job design - Job standard - Work study

- Method study - Operation process chart - Motion study - Motion econoomy - SIMO chart - Work

measurement - PMTS - Ergonomics - Industrial safety: losses due to accidents, causes, preventive

measures

Forecasting - Types - Accuracy of forecast -Sales forecasting techniques - Time series method: simple

moving average, weighted moving average, exponential smoothing

UNIT II 9 Hours

INVENTORY CONTROL Inventory control - Purpose - Inventory costs - EOQ - Deterministic models - Shortage model -

Classification: ABC analysis, FSN analysis - Material Requirement Planning (MRP)

UNIT III 9 Hours

SCHEDULING AND QUEUING Introduction -Rules - Factors affecting - Master schedule - Gantt chart - Sequencing problem: Models

with n jobs with 2 machines Models with n jobs with 3 machines

Queuing models - Queuing systems and structures - Notation - Parameter - Poisson input -

Exponential service - Constant rate service - Infinite population - Single server models

UNIT IV 9 Hours

LINEAR PROGRAMMING Introduction - Formulation - Graphical method, Simplex method Artificial Variable techniques: Big

M method - Transportation Problems: North West corner method, Least cost method, Vogel's

approximation method - MODI method - Assignment problems with Hungarian algorithm

UNIT V 9 Hours

NETWORK MODELS Network models - Shortest route - Minimal spanning tree - Maximum flow models - Project network -

CPM and PERT networks - Critical path scheduling

FOR FURTHER READING Simulation Process - Stochastic Simulation - Monte Carlo Sampling Process, Random Process

Generation - Simulation of Queuing System

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. T. R. Banga, N. K. Agarwal and S. C. Sharma, "Industrial Engineering and Management

Science", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1996.

2. 2. Prem Kumar Gupta and D. S. Hira, "Operations Research", S. Chand and Co., New Delhi,

2014.

3. S. B. Srivastava, "Industrial Management", I. K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2012.

4. Hamdy A. Taha, "Operation Research: An introduction", Pearson Publications., New Delhi,

2010.

5. Frederick S. Hiller and Gerald J. Liberman, Operations Research: Concepts and cases, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.



Assessment Pattern



1 4 4

2 4

2 4

20

2

4

2 8 2

4

20

3 2 2

2 4

2 4

4

20

4

2

2

4

2 4

2 4

20

5

2

2

2

4 4

3

3

20

Total 100


1. State the use of SIMO chart.

2. Recognize two reasons for industrial accidents.

3. Recall two purposes of having inventory.

4. What are the main characteristics of OR?

5. What do you mean by unbounded solution?

6. List any three approaches used to find an IBFS for transportation problem.

7. What is meant by buffer stock?

8. What is called processing order?

9. What is meant by critical path?

10. List out some basic characteristics of queuing system

11. What do you mean by FCFS?

12. Define feasible solution.

13. When a transportation problem does is treated as unbalanced?

Understand 1. Explain two differences between method study and work study.

2. What is the main difference between production and productivity?

3. What is the use of productivity index?

4. Compare and list two points between ABC and FSN analyses.

5. How to solve n jobs with three machine problem?

6. What is the difference between queue length and system length?

7. Distinguish between PERT and CPM.

8. When do you use dummy activity in the network?

9. How do you check the degeneracy in transportation?

10. In what way it is understood that the given LPP has mulltiple solutions?

Apply 1. Enumerate the steps involved in method study.

2. When to go for PMTS?

3. Which method of inventory control model is adopted in majority of industries? Why?

4. Is material requirement planning necessary for a small scale industry? Justify.

5. Write the way to identify optimal solution in graphical method.

6. Can a LPP with 3 constraints be solved using graphical method? Justify.

7. State the procedure to convert the maximization assignment problem into a minimization one.

8. State the application of travelling salesman problem.

9. Why, among all the paths, a critical path is the longest always?

10. ISRO has launched a satellite for education purpose. What technique in OR can be used to

model it when the project was taken up?

Analyse

1. Analyze the various losses those happen due to accidents in an industry.

2. How the safety stock level can be determined?



3. A company owns a small paint factory that produces both interior and exterior house paints.

The whole sale price/ton is Rs.3000 & Rs.2000 for exterior & interior paints respectively.

For exterior paints 1 ton of raw material A and 2 tons of raw materials B are used and that for

interior is 2 tonnes and 1 ton respectively. Formulate the LPP if at least 6 tons of raw

material A and 8 tons of raw materials are available.

4. An automobile manufacturer makes automobiles and trucks in a factory that is divided into

two shops. Shop A, which performs the basic assembly operation must work 5 man days on

each truck but only 2 man days on each automobile. Shop B, which performs finishing

operation must work 3 man days for each truck (or) automobile that it produces. Because of

men and machine limitation, shop A has 180 man days per week available while shop B has

135 man days per week. If the manufacturer makes a profit of Rs. 300 on each truck and Rs.

200 on each automobile, how many of each should he produce to maximize his profit?

5. Customers arrive at a small office at the rate of 30 per hour following Poisson process.

Service by the clerk on duty takes an average of 1 min. per customer following exponential

distribution. Calculate

Average no. of customers in the queue

Mean no. of customers in the system

Mean customer time spent waiting in line

Expected waiting time of customers in the system

Clerk’s idle time in an 8 hour day.

6. Consider the following table:

Activity Predecessor

activity

Time in weeks

Optimistic (a) Most likely (m) Pessimistic (b)

A - 2 3 10

B - 2 3 4

C A 1 2 3

D A 4 6 14

E B 4 5 12

F C 3 4 5

G D, E 1 1 7

7. Draw the network diagram.

8. Find the critical path and variance of each event

9. What is the probability that the project will be completed in 16 weeks?

10.

Activity Predecessor

activity

Time in weeks

Optimistic

(a)

Most

likely (m)

Pessimistic

(b)

A - 2 3 10

B - 2 3 4

C A 1 2 3

D A 4 6 14

E B 4 5 12

F C 3 4 5

G D, E 1 1

11. Draw the network diagram.

12. Find the critical path and variance of each event.

13. What is the probability that the project will be completed in 16 weeks?

14. Given the following information

Activity : 1 - 2 1 – 3 1 – 5 2 – 3 2 – 4 3 – 4 3 – 5

3 – 6 4 – 6 5 – 6



Duration: 8 7 12 4 10 3

5 10 7 4

Draw the arrow diagram. Identify the critical path and the total project duration. Determine

the total float, free float and independent float.

15. There are seven jobs, each of which has to go through the machines A,B in the order A to B.

Processing time in hours is as follows.

Job 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

MA 3 12 15 6 10 11 9

MB 8 10 10 6 12 12 3

16. Determine the sequence of these jobs that will minimize the total elapsed time and find the

idle time.

17. Himachal fertilizers Ltd, distributes its products by trucks loaded at its loading station. Both

company trucks and customer’s trucks are used for this purpose. Trucks arrive at a rate of 10

per minute and the average loading time is 6 minutes.

You are required to determine

i). the probability that a truck has to wait.

ii). the waiting time of a truck that waits.

Evaluate 1. Which forecasting techniques may be reliable for a domestic product? Why?

Create 1. Make an ergonomic study in using a desktop computer and conclude your recommendations.

2. Anna University prepares answer booklets from three presses locted in three different cities

and the same should be distributed to seven zones withing the state. Suggest an OR technique

that could be best suitable to do the process with least cost/time.

15MC014 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Ability to understand comprehensively the technologies and techniques underlying in

building an embedded solution to a wearable, mobile and portable system

Course Outcomes (COs) 1. Identify an embedded system and compare with general purpose System.

2. Understand the various embedded processor and internal memory architecture

3. Know the various Input and output devices and Network protocols

4. Get introduced to RTOS and related mechanisms 5. Choose the Design methodologies for the real time application

UNIT I

8 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM System Design: Definitions - Classifications and brief overview of micro-controllers -

Microprocessors and DSPs - Embedded processor architectural definitions - Typical Application

scenarios of embedded systems.

UNIT II 9 Hours

PROCESSOR AND MEMORY ORGANIZATION Bus Organization - Memory Devices and their Characteristics - Instruction Set Architecture [RISC,

CISC] - Basic Embedded Processor/Microcontroller Architecture [8051, ARM, DSP, PIC] - Memory



system architecture [cache, virtual, MMU and address translation] - DMA, Co-processor and

Hardware Accelerators - Pipelining

UNIT III 10 Hours

I/O DEVICES AND NETWORKS I/O Devices[Timers, Counters, Interrupt Controllers, DMA Controllers, A/D and D/A Converters,

Displays, Keyboards, Infrared devices] - Memory Interfacing - I/O Device Interfacing [GPIB,

FIREWIRE, USB, IRDA] - Networks for Embedded systems (CAN, I2C, SPI, USB, RS485, RS 232)

-Wireless Applications [Bluetooth, Zigbee].

UNIT IV 9 Hours

OPERATING SYSTEMS Basic Features of an Operating System - Kernel Features [polled loop system, interrupt driven system,

multi rate system] - Processes and Threads - Context Switching - Scheduling[RMA, EDF, fault

tolerant scheduling] - Inter-process Communication - Real Time memory management [process stack

management, dynamic allocation] - I/O[synchronous and asynchronous I/O, Interrupts Handling,

Device drivers] - RTOS [ VxWorks, RT-LINUX].

UNIT V 9 Hours

EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT Design Methodologies [UML as Design tool, UML notation, Requirement Analysis and Use case

Modeling] - Design Examples [Telephone PBX, Inkjet Printer, PDA, Elevator Control System, ATM

System] - Fault-tolerance Techniques - Reliability Evaluation Techniques.

FOR FURTHER READING Discussion of specific examples of complete embedded systems using mc68 HC11, mc8051,

ADSP2181, Arduino microcontroller, Raspberry Pi, PIC series of microcontroller

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Wayne Wolf Computers as components: Principles of Embedded Computing System. design

The Morgan Kaufmann Series in Computer Architecture and Design, 2008

2. Jane W. S., Liu, Real time systems, Pearson Education, 2000

3. Raj Kamal, Embedded systems Architecture, Programming and design, Second Edition, 2008

4. Robert Ashby, Designer's Guide to the Cypress PSoC Newnes, 2005

5. Microblaze processor Reference guide, Xilinx

6. NIOS II Processor reference Handbook, ALTERA

Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

2

2 2

20

2 2 4

4 4

2

4

20

3 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

4

2

2 2

4 4

2

4

20

5 2 2

2 6

2

2

2

2

20

Total 100




1. What is an embedded system?

2. List the peripherals in the embedded systems.

3. Compare hardware and software tradeoffs.

4. What do you mean by SOC?

5. Define ISR.

6. List the components of an embedded software system.

7. What are the types of scheduling algorithms available in embedded system?

8. Define context, interrupt latency and interrupt service deadline.

9. Suggest some methods for handling deadlocks in real time embedded systems.

10. What are the classic problems of synchronization?

Understand 1. What are the issues and challenges in embedded system design?

2. Differentiate configurable processors and multi-core processors.

3. What are the levels in instruction set architecture?

4. List the types of addressing modes in RISC processors

5. Define RISC architecture.

6. What do you mean by cache coherency problem?

7. What is a linker & Loader?

8. How peripherals are programmed using embedded software

9. List the bus devices for embedded processors.

10. What is TPU?

11. How CPU is managed in embedded systems?

12. What are all the basic concepts involved in memory interfacing?

Apply 1. Draw the ten ways by which the synchronous signals with the clocking information transmit

from a master device to slave device.

2. Draw the signals, clock-inputs, control bits and status flags at registers or memory in a

hardware timer device.

3. Write a program to perform the DAC with square waveform using 8051

4. Generate a square wave to perform timer operation using 8051.

5. Application areas of embedded systems are telecom, missiles and satellites, computer

networking, digital consumer electronics, automotive and smart cards.

6. Write a C programming example for generating interrupts in HCS12 processor.

7. Write a C program for UART in HCS12 processor.

8. C program for interfacing CAN bus in cold fire processor.

Analyse 1. Examine the response time of CAN in cold fire processor.

2. How a byte is transferred to a slave device using I2C bus?

3. What is the role of processor reset and system reset?

4. How do you use the vector address for an interrupt source?

Evaluate 1. Calculate the UART bit time for embedded system processor.

2. What are the techniques of power and energy management in a system?

3. How much shall be reduction in power dissipation for a processor CMOS circuit when

voltage reduces from 5V to 1.8V operation?

4. How do you assign service priority to the multiple device drivers of a system?



Create 1. Design an embedded system for an adaptive cruise control system in a car.

2. Design an embedded system for a smart card and automatic chocolate vending machine.

3. Design the hardware and software for pre-settable alarm system.

4. Design microcontroller system to control traffic signals.

5. Design a 4 seven segment LED display using 8051.

6. Design a RTOS for medical application.

15MC015 CAM AND FACTORY AUTOMATION 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To impart knowledge about latest machine vision techniques

To develop programming skill in CNC and in robotics.

To apply various automatic material handling techniques


1. Understand the basic structure & working of machine vision system

2. Comprehend the working and importance of lighting system

3. Develop knowledge based on image processing

4. Gather knowledge about AS/RS and AGVs

5. Learning on application of computers in manufacturing scenario

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION AND FUNDAMENTALS OF VISION SYSTEM Vision system human vision, disadvantages - machine vision, advantages components and working

principles of MVS - fundamental of Imaging MVS specifications design requirements Human

machine interfaces MVS Integration of Mechanical, Electrical, Optical, Software, Mechatronics

engineering.

UNIT II 9 Hours

LIGHTING SYSTEM Importance of Illumination Light and light perception - light characteristics Light sources

monochromatic light, white light, UV, IR LED and Laser polarized lighting , filtered lighting - types

of illuminators illumination techniques factors to be considered in design of Lighting of a MVS

UNIT III 9 Hours

IMAGE ANALYSIS AND IMAGE PROCESSING Introduction to digital images Image analysis Basic, scalar, arithmetic - Image enhancement

thresholding, histogram , line profile , intensity measurement - Image processing lookup tables(LUT),

Morphology, spatial filters, Frequency domain processing - Blob analysis, Particle measurement,

Dimension measurement Edge detection, alignment, Pattern matching.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

AUTOMATED MATERIAL HANDLING AND INSPECTION Introduction to Automated Guided Vehicle (AGV), Systems - Automated Storage and retrieval system

(AS/RS): basic components, types and its application - Automated inspection principles - off line and

on line inspection, distributed inspection and final inspection



UNIT V

9 Hours

COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING AND GROUP TECHNOLOGY Introduction – CAM - Manufacturing planning - manufacturing control - Computer integrated

manufacturing - Flexible manufacturing systems: Components, types of systems, FMS layout and

FMS benefits - Computer aided process planning: Retrieval CAPP - Systems and generative CAPP

systems - Benefits of CAPP - Group Technology Part families FOR FURTHER READING Pneumatic and hydraulic control system-Interfacing of components of CNC system-Part programming

examples-Features of CAM packages-Sensor technologies for automated inspection and Shop floor

control-Parts classification and coding- Benefits of group technology

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s) 1. Harley R . Myler , Fundamentals of Machine Vision , Prentice - Hall

2. Louis J Galbiati , Image Processing Fundamentals, Prentice - Hall

3. D. Richard Klafter, Thomas A Cmielewski and Michael Negin, Robotc Engineering, An

Integrated Approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1999

4. M. P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss, N.Roger Nagel and G. Odrey, Industrial Robotics, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005

5. Yoram Koren, Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005

6. P. Radhakrishnan, Computer Numerical Control Machines and Computer Aided Manufacture,

New Central Book Agency Pvt. Ltd., India, 2012.

Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

2

2 2

20

2 2 4

4 4

2

4

20

3 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

4

2

2 2

4 4

2

4

20

5 2 2

2 6

2

2

2

2

20

Total 100


1. Define CNC programming.

2. Designate the CNC cutting tools.

3. List the types of tool changers.

4. What is meant by modal and non-modal codes?

5. List the code with syntax used for feed rate in different unit system.

6. Define morphology.

7. Define histogram.

8. Define AGV.

9. Write down the equipment/devices used in Factory Data Collection Systems.

10. What is meant by AS/RS?

Understand 1. Write down the advantages of Machine vision system.

2. What are the basic requirements of human machine interface and explain in detail.

3. Illustrate on the importance of light illumination and light perception.

4. What are the factors to be consider in design of lighting of MVS?



5. What are the parameters to be consider for image enhancement?

6. Define spatial filters with suitable example.

7. Differentiate offline programming and on-line programming.

8. What is purpose of dry run with air cutting?

9. How nose radius compensation is done?

10. Differentiate between the variant process planning and generative process planning

approaches.

Apply 1. Explain the components and working priniciple of machine vision system.

2. Explain in detail about the design specification and requirements of human machine interface.

3. Explain in detail about any 3 light sources listed below

a. Monochromatic light

b. White light

c. UV

d. IR

e. LED

f. Laser polarized lighting

4. What are the type of illuminators? And write down illumination techniques in MVS.

5. Explain the following

a. Particle measurement

b. Dimension measurement

c. Edge detection

d. Pattern matching

Analyse 1. With suitable application. Explain the working of Retrival CAPP system.

2. Explain in term computer integrated manufacturing with its benefits and components.

Evaluate 1. Explain in detail about the basic components, types and applications of automated storage and

Retrival system.

2. Differentiate online and offline monitoring system with neat sketch.

3. Describe in detail about distribute inspection and final inspection with suitable example.

4. Explain in detail about the working of flexible manufacturing system with its components and

types.

Create 1. Design an AGV for agricultural application and explain in detail about the component

specifications required.

ENTREPRENEURSHIP ELECTIVES

15GE001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Study of this subject provides an understanding of the scope of an entrepreneur, key areas of

development, financial assistance by the institutions, methods of taxation and tax benefits, etc


1. Gain Knowledge about entrepreneurship, motivation and business.

2. Develop small scale industries in different field.

UNIT I 9 Hours

BASICS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP Nature, scope and types of Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneur Personality Characteristics,

Entrepreneurship process. Role of entrepreneurship in economic development



UNIT II 9 Hours

GENERATION OF IDEAS Creativity and Innovation, Lateral Thinking, Generation of Alternatives, Fractionation, Reversal

Method, Brain Storming, Analogies

UNIT III 9 Hours

LEGAL ASPECTS OF BUSINESS Contract act-Indian contract act, Essential elements of valid contract, classification of contracts, sale

of goods act- Formation of contract of sale, negotiable instruments- promissory note, bills and

cheques, partnership, limited liability partnership (LLP), companies act-kinds, formation,

memorandum of association, articles of association.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

BUSINESS FINANCE Project evaluation and investment criteria (cases), sources of finance, financial statements, break even

analysis, cash flow analysis.

UNIT V 9 Hours

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Importance- functions-deciding on the production system- facility decisions: plant location, plant

layout (cases), capacity requirement planning- inventory management (cases)-lean manufacturing, Six

sigma.

FOR FURTHER READING Role of social networking sites in business

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi: 2005

2. Prasanna Chandra, Projects Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi: 2000.

3. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill: 2006

Assessment Pattern



1 3

2 2

1

2

2

2

2

4

20

2

3

2

2

2

2

2

3

4

20

3

3

2

2

2

4

3

4

20

4

3

2

2

2

3

4

4 20

5

1

2

2

2

2

2

5

4

20

Total 100


1. What is entrepreneurship?

2. What are the factors that motivate people to go into business?

3. Define a small-scale industry.

4. Who is an intrapreneur?

5. State functions of SISI.



6. What is serial entrepreneur?

7. What is Technopreneurship?

8. What is reversal method?

9. What is brainstorming?

10. What do you mean by term business idea?

11. Mention any two schemes Indian government provides to the development of

entrepreneurship.

12. What is a project report?

13. What is project scheduling?

14. Mention any four techniques available for project scheduling.

15. What is contract act?

16. Define MOU.

17. Mention any five external sources of finance to an entrepreneur.

18. Classify the financial needs of an organization.

19. Why is motivational theories important for an entrepreneur?

Understand 1. Why is entrepreneurship important of growth of a nation?

2. Mention the essential quality required for someone to be an entrepreneur.

3. How is network analysis helpful to the development of an entrepreneur?

4. Mention the essential requirements for a virtual capital.

5. How under-capitalization affects an entrepreneur.

6. Mention the causes of dissolution of a firm.

7. How important is the support of IDBI to an entrepreneur?

8. What are the salient features of New Small Enterprise Policy, 1991?

9. Why scheduling is very important for a production design?

Apply 1. If you want to become as an entrepreneur, what will be your idea?

2. Select any one of the creative idea generation method and suggest an innovation that you can

implement in your business.

3. Write a short notes on various legal aspects that you have to consider to run you business.

4. How will you generate your capital and other financial supports?

5. In case of getting enough financial support, plan your business and plot the various stages

using any of the tools or techniques.

Create

1. Draft a sample project report for your business.

2. Do a network analysis using PERT and CPM for your business plan.

3. Write a brief report to apply to a financial organization for seeking financial support to your

business.

15GE002 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT II 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Evolve the marketing mix for promoting the product / services

Handle the human resources and taxation

Understand Government industrial policies / support provided and prepare a business plan


1. Increase in awareness of the entrepreneurship Development for engineering decisions.



UNIT I 9 Hours

MARKETING MANAGEMENT Marketing environment, Segmentation, Targeting and positioning, Formulating marketing strategies,

marketing research, marketing plan, marketing mix (cases)

UNIT II 9 Hours

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT Human Resource Planning (Cases), Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development, HRIS,

Factories Act 1948 (an over view)

UNIT III 9 Hours

BUSINESS TAXATION Direct taxation, Income tax, Corporate tax, MAT, Tax holidays, Wealth tax, Professional tax

(Cases).Indirect taxation, Excise duty, Customs, Sales and Service tax, VAT, Octroi, GST (Cases)

UNIT IV 9 Hours

GOVERNMENT SUPPORT Industrial policy of Central and State Government, National Institute-NIESBUD, IIE, EDI. State

Level Institutions-TIIC, CED, MSME, Financial Institutions

UNIT V 9 Hours

BUSINESS PLAN PREPARATION Purpose of writing a business plan, Capital outlay, Technical feasibility, Production plan, HR plan,

Market survey and Marketing plan, Financial plan and Viability, Government approvals, SWOT

analysis.

FOR FURTHER READING Ethics in Entrepreneurship

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi: 2005.

2. Philip Kotler., Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi: 2003

3. Aswathappa K, Human Resource and Personnel Management - Text and Cases, Tata McGraw

Hill: 2007.

4. Jain P C., Handbook for New Entrepreneurs, EDII, Oxford University Press, New Delhi:

2002.

5. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill: 2006.

6. http://niesbud.nic.in/agencies.htm

Assessment Pattern



1 2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2

2 20

2 2

6

6

6

20

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

3 20

4

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

20

5

3

3

3

3

3 2

3 20

Total 100




1. Who are Fabian Entrepreneur?

2. Mention the three functions of NSIC.

3. Narrate the role of IDBI in the development of Entrepreneurship?

4. What are the stages in a Project Lifecycle?

5. Give the meaning of Feasibility Report.

6. What is Motivating Training?

7. Who is a Small Scale Entrepreneur?

8. How to develop Rural Entrepreneur?

9. What are the Social Problems of Women Entrepreneur?

10. What are the types of entrepreneurs?

11. List the various qualities of entrepreneur.

12. What is entrepreneurship training?

13. State the role of NISIET.

14. List the challenges and opportunities available in SSI's?

Understand

1. What are the elements of EDP?

2. How would you Classify Projects?

3. What is the role played by commercial banks in the development of entrepreneur?

4. What are the target groups of EDP?

5. What are the major problems faced by Small Entrepreneur?

6. What are the problems & prospects for women entrepreneur in India?

Apply

1. Describe the various functions performed by Entrepreneurs.

2. Explain the role of different agencies in the development of Entrepreneur.

3. Discuss the criteria for selecting a particular project.

4. Describe the role of Entrepreneur in the Development of Country.

5. Define business idea. Elaborate the problems and opportunities for an entrepreneur.

6. Elaborate the schemes offered by commercial banks for development of entrepreneurship.

7. Explain the significant role played by DIC & SISI for the development of entrepreneurship.

Analyse

1. Differentiate between entrepreneur and entrepreneurship.

2. What are the problems of Women entrepreneurs and discuss the ways to

overcome these barriers?

3. Discuss the importance of small scale industries in India.

Evaluate

1. Review the entrepreneurial growth by the communities of south India.

2. Critically examine the growth and development of ancillarisation in India.

Create

1. Design a short entrepreneurship development programme for farmer.

2. "All economy is the effect for which entrepreneurship is the cause"-Discuss.



3. Discuss the various sources and collection of credit information of entrepreneurs.

4. Discuss the role of the government both at the Central and State level in motivating and

developing entrepreneurship in India.

5. Briefly explain the recommendation and policy implication for survival of SME's.

6. Developing countries like India need imitative entrepreneurs rather than innovative

entrepreneurs”. Do you agree? Justify your answer with examples.

7. Discuss the “Culture of Entrepreneurship” and its role in economic development of a nation.

What factors contribute to nurturing such a culture?

PHYSICAL SCIENCE ELECTIVES

15GE0P1 NANOMATERIALS SCIENCE 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Understand the fundamentals of physics of nanomaterials

Correlate on multidisciplinary branch

Acquire the knowledge in nanomaterials synthesis, compile and analyze data and draw

conclusions at nano level


1. Categorize nanomaterials based on their properties

2. Design different experimental methods for preparation of nanomaterials

3. Infer the working mechanism of different characterization instruments as well as analyses and

interpret data

4. Know the different techniques for making nano semiconducting materials and utilize them for

applications

5. Understand the impact of nanomaterials and their applications in nanodevices

UNIT I 9 Hours

NANO SCALE MATERIALS Introduction-Feynman's vision-national nanotechnology initiative (NNI) - past, present, future -

classification of nanostructures,nanoscale architecture - effects of the nanometer length scale -

changes to the system total energy, and the system structures- effect of nanoscale dimensions on

various properties -magnetic properties of nanoscale materials -differences between bulk and

nanomaterials and their physical properties.

UNIT II 9 Hours

NANOMATERIALS SYNTHESIS METHODS Top down processes - mechanical milling, nanolithography and types based on radiations - Bottom up

process - chemical vapour deposition, plasma enhanced CVD, colloidal and sol-gel methods -

template based growth of nanomaterials - ordering of nanosystems, self-assembly and self-

organization - DC sputtering and RF sputtering process.

UNIT III 9 Hours

CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES General classification of characterization methods - analytical and imaging techniques - microscopy

techniques - electron microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy,

atomic force microscopy - diffraction techniques - X-ray spectroscopy - thermogravimetric analysis of

nanomaterials.



UNIT IV 9 Hours

SEMICONDUCTOR NANOSTRUCTURES Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures - quantum wells, quantum wires, quantum

dots, super lattices-epitaxial growth of nanostructures-MBE, metal organic VPE, LPE - carbon nano

tubes- structure, synthesis and electrical properties -applications- fuel cells - quantum efficiency of

semiconductor nanomaterials.

UNIT V 9 Hours

NANOMACHINES AND NANODEVICES Microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) and Nanoelectromechanical systems (NEMS)-fabrication,

actuators-organic FET- principle, description, requirements, integrated circuits- organic LEDâ??s -

basic processes, carrier injection, excitons, optimization - organic photovoltaic cells- nano motors -bio

nano particles-nano - objects - applications of nano materials in biological field.

FOR FURTHER READING Application of graphene in various field - supercapacitors - third generation solar cell-dye sensitized

solar cell (DSSC) -fuel cells.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Willam A. Goddard, Donald W.Brenner, Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering, and

Technology, CRC Press, 2012.

2. Charles P. Poole Jr and. Frank J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley Interscience,

2007.

3. Guozhong Cao, Y. Wang, Nanostructures and Nanomaterials-Synthesis, Properties &

Applications, Imperials College Press, 2011.

4. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology,

McGraw - Hill Education (India) Ltd, 2012.

5. Robert W. Kelsall, Ian W. Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology,

John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2006

6. Viswanathan B, AuliceScibioh M, Fuel cells: Principles and Applications, University Press,

2009.

Assessment Pattern



1 3 4 4

2

4

3

4

24

2 2 3 4

4 4

3

4

24

3 2 4 2

2 2

2

2

16

4

2

2 4

2

4

3

17

5 2 4

3 2

4

4

19

Total 100


1. Explain the term nano

2. List three types of classifications of nanomaterials.

3. Recall the principle behind lithography.

4. Define top-down and bottom-up approach.

5. Name two types of nanoarchitecture



6. Define nanocomposites.

7. Recall the principle of electron microscopy. 8. List 5 characterization techniques in nanotechnology.

9. Define quantum well and quantum wire. 10. Write the allotropy of carbon.

Understand

1. Explain the effect of nanometer length scale.

2. Can affect the system total energy when particle size reduced? Justify.

3. Explain plasma enhanced CVD.

4. Identify the difference between self-assembly and self-organization.

5. Name 3 synthesis process under bottom-up approach.

6. Explain contact mode in AFM.

7. Is it possible to explain the entire details of the sample by taking one characterization

technique? if no, justify.

Apply

1. Find three day to day live commercial application of nanotechnology?

2. Choose two template methods used to obtain nanowire or nanorods.

3. Construct the experimental setup for organic LED.

4. Find 4 industrial applications of CNT.

Analyse

1. Differentiate between bulk and nanomaterials.

2. Identify the roll of nanoparticles in biological field.

3. Distinguish between glow discharge and RF sputtering.

4. Criticize the future challenges for nanotechnology?

Evaluate

1. Nanomaterials, do they exist in nature? If yes, identify the nanomaterials and recognize.

15GE0P2 SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND

DEVICES 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Impart knowledge in physical properties of semiconducting materials

Analyze the factors affecting the operation of semiconductor devices

Apply the physics of semiconductors to develop semiconductor devices


1. Exemplify the transport properties of semiconductors

2. Understand the physics of PN junction

3. Analyze the factors affecting the properties of PN junction diode

4. Demonstrate the geometry and operation of bipolar junction Transistors

5. Summarize the optical properties and design of optoelectronic devices



UNIT I 9 Hours

CARRIER TRANSPORT IN SEMICONDUCTORS Carrier drift - drift current density - mobility effects on carrier density - conductivity in semiconductor

- carrier transport by diffusion - diffusion current density - total current density - breakdown

phenomena - avalanche breakdown.

UNIT II 9 Hours

PHYSICS OF P-N JUNCTION Basic structure-Built in potential barrier, Electric field and space charge width of P-N junction under

zero, forward and reverse bias- Diffusion capacitance - one sided and linearly graded junctions.

UNIT III 9 Hours

P-N JUNCTION DIODE Qualitative description of charge flow in p-n junction - boundary condition - minority carrier

distribution - ideal p-n junction current - temperature effects - applications - the turn on transient and

turn off transient.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR Introduction to basic principle of operation - the modes of operation - amplification - minority carrier

distribution in forward active mode - non-ideal effects - base with modulation - high injection emitter

band gap narrowing - current clouding - breakdown voltage - voltage in open emitter configuration

and open base configuration.

UNIT V 9 Hours

OPTO ELECTRONIC DEVICES Optical absorption in a semiconductor, photon absorption coefficient - electron hole pair generation -

solar cell - homo junction and hetero junction - Photo transistor - laser diode, the optical cavity,

optical absorption, loss and gain - threshold current.

FOR FURTHER READING Organic semiconductors- diodes - transistors-working and applications

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Donald A Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

2. S. M. Sze and M. K. Lee, Semiconductor Devices, Physics and Technology, John-Wiley &

Sons, 2015.

3. Ben. G. Streetman and S. K. Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, Pearson Education Ltd,

2015.

4. C. Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, John-Wiley & Sons, 2012.

5. J. Millman and C. Halkias, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.

6. Hagen Klauk, Organic Electronics: Materials, Manufacturing and Applications, Wiley-VCH,

2006.



Assessment Pattern



1 3 4 4

2

2

3

2

20

2 2 3 4

4 4

3

4

24

3 2 4 2

2 2

4

4

20

4

2

2 4

2

4

4

18

5 2 4

2 2

4

4

18

Total 100


1. Define drift current density

2. Recall diffusion capacitance

3. Write the ideal diode equation

4. List the three modes of transistor operation

5. State the principle of solar cell

Understand

1. Identify the two scattering mechanisms that affect mobility of charge carriers in

semiconductors

2. Sketch the energy band diagram of a P-N junction under thermal equilibrium

3. Exemplify the boundary conditions used to calculate minority carrier distribution in a junction

diode

4. Explain the base width modulation occur in transistors

5. Illustrate the working mechanism of a phototransistor

Apply

1. By applying the concept of scattering, explain the mobility of holes in a semiconductor.

2. Apply Poission equation to space charge region and hence derive the electric field under zero

bias

3. Show that the minority carrier concentrations in a diode decay exponentially with distance

away from the junction to their thermal-equilibrium values.

4. Derive an expression for excess minority current in the emitter region under forward action

mode by applying the ambipolar transport equation.

5. Show that the minority carrier concentrations in a diode decay exponentially with distance

away from the junction to their thermal-equilibrium values.

Analyse

1. Differentiate drift current and diffusion current

2. Space charge width increases upon reverse bias. Justify

3. Silicon is preferred over germanium for the manufacture of semiconductor devices. Justify

4. Compare emitter bandgap narrowing and current crowding.

5. Differentiate homojunction and heterojunction laser



15GE0P3 APPLIED LASER SCIENCE 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Impart knowledge on laser science

Explore different strategies for producing lasers

Create expertise on the applications of lasers in various fields


1. Realize the concept of stimulated emission and apply the same for laser oscillation

2. Understand the properties laser and working of different laser systems

3. Determine the rotation of earth, velocity and distance using lasers and apply the same for day

today applications

4. Design the different laser based instrumentation for medical field

5. Summarize the applications of lasers in industry

UNIT I 9 Hours

LASER FUNDAMENTALS Introduction - principle - Einstein's prediction - spontaneous emission - stimulated emission -

Einstein's relations - A and B coefficients - population inversion - condition for large stimulated

emission - spontaneous and stimulated emission in optical region - light amplification.

Components of lasers: active medium - pumping - pumping mechanisms - resonant cavity.

UNIT II 9 Hours

CHARACTERISTICS AND TYPES OF LASERS Introduction - directionality - intensity - coherence - monochromaticity. Classification of lasers -

principle, construction, working, energy level diagram and applications of CO2 laser - dye laser -

excimer laser - Nd: YAG laser - semiconductor laser.

UNIT III 9 Hours

LASERS IN SCIENCE Harmonic generation - stimulated Raman emission - lasers in chemistry - laser in nuclear energy -

lasers and gravitational waves - LIGO - rotation of the earth - measurement of distance - velocity

measurement - holography.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

LASERS IN MEDICINE AND SURGERY Eye laser surgery - LASIK - photocoagulations - light induced biological hazards: Eye and skin -

homeostasis - dentistry - laser angioplasty - laser endoscopy - different laser therapies.

UNIT V 9 Hours

LASERS IN INDUSTRY Applications in material processing: laser welding - hole drilling - laser cutting. Laser tracking:

LIDAR. Lasers in electronics industry: ranging - information storage - bar code scanner. Lasers in

defence: laser based military weapons - laser walls.

FOR FURTHER READING Q-switching - mode locking - thermo-optic effects - astronomy lasers - fighting crime with lasers -

laser engraving.



Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. K. Thiyagarajan and A. K. Ghatak, LASERS: Fundamentals and Applications, Springer,

USA, 2015.

2. M. N. Avadhanulu, An Introduction to Lasers Theory and Applications, S. Chand Publisher,

2013.

3. W. Koechner, M. Bass, Solid State Lasers: a graduate text, Springer Verlag, New York, 2006.

4. K. P. R. Nair, Atoms, Molecules and Lasers, Narosa Publishing House, 2009.

5. K. R. Nambiar, Lasers: Principles Types and Applications, New Age International

Publications, 2006.

6. A. Sennaroglu, Solid-State Lasers and Applications, CRC Press, 2006.

Assessment Pattern



1 2 2

2 2 1

2 3 1

2

1 2

20

2 2 2

3 2 2

2 2

1 1

1

2

20

3 3

2 2 1

2

3

2 1 1

1 2

20

4 2 2

2 1 1

2 2 1

2 2 1

1 1

20

5 2 1

1

3

2

2

2 1

1 2 3

20

Total 100


1. Recognise the term LASER

2. Define stimulated absorption

3. Define spontaneous emission

4. Define stimulated emission

5. Distinguish between spontaneous and stimulated emission

6. State population inversion

7. List the four characteristics of lasers

8. Mention the five medical applications of lasers

9. State the principle behind the holography

10. Recall the term resonant cavity

Understand

1. Identify the condition needed for laser action

2. Interpret the pumping of atoms

3. Exemplify the optical excitation occurs in three level laser systems

4. Explain the determination of rotation of earth using laser

5. Summarize the application of lasers in welding and cutting

6. Explain the term LASIK

7. Classify the different types of lasers based on materials

8. Illustrate the working of laser in material processing

Apply

1. Predict the condition for laser action

2. Derive the Einstein’s A and B coefficients



3. Deduce the expression for large stimulated emission

4. Construct the experimental setup for distance measurement

5. Find the applications of lasers in stimulated Raman

6. Assess the wavelength of emission of GaAs semiconductor laser whose bandgap energy is

1.44 eV.

Analyse

1. Laser beam should be monochromatic, Justify?

2. Differentiate ordinary light source from laser source

3. Compare the working of gas lasers with excimer laser

4. Four level laser systems are more efficient than three level laser systems. Justiify?

Evaluate

1. Determine the intensity of laser beam be focused on an area equal to the square of its

wavelength. For He-Ne laser wavelength is 6328 A0 and radiates energy at the rate of 1mW.

2. Choose the appropriate lasers for the materials processing in industry

15GE0C1 CORROSION SCIENCE 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Recognize the terminologies used in corrosion science.

Impart knowledge about the various types of corrosion and its mechanism.

Understand the various methods of corrosion control, corrosion testing and monitoring.


1. Familiarize with the fundamentals of corrosion science.

2. Understand the types of corrosion and role of chemistry behind corrosion of metals.

3. Develop their ability to identify, formulate and solve corrosion based problems.

4. Calculate the corrosion rate using different methods.

5. Analyze the analytical part of corrosion science which gives contextual knowledge to their

higher research programmes.

UNIT I 9 Hours

CORROSION Importance of corrosion - spontaneity of corrosion - passivation - direct and indirect damage by

corrosion - importance of corrosion prevention in industries - area relationship in both active and

passive states of metals - Pilling Bedworth ratio and its significance - units of corrosion rate (mdd and

mpy) - importance of pitting factor - Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their advantages and

disadvantages.

UNIT II 7 Hours

TYPES OF CORROSION Eight forms of corrosion: uniform, galvanic, crevice corrosion, pitting, intergranular corrosion,

selective leaching, erosion corrosion and stress corrosion. High temperature oxidation, kinetics of

protective film formation and catastrophic oxidation corrosion.



UNIT III 9 Hours

MECHANISM OF CORROSION Hydrogen embrittlement - cracking - corrosion fatigue - filliform corrosion - fretting damage and

microbes induced corrosion - corrosion mechanism on steel, iron, zinc and copper metal surfaces -

thick layer and thin layer scale formation - in situ corrosion scale analysis.

UNIT IV 10 Hours

CORROSION RATE AND ITS ESTIMATION Rate of corrosion: factors affecting corrosion - electrochemical methods of polarization - Tafel

extrapolation polarization, linear polarization, impedance techniques - weight loss method -

susceptibility test - testing for intergranular susceptibility and stress corrosion. Visual testing - liquid

penetrant testing - magnetic particle testing - eddy current testing.

UNIT V 10 Hours

CORROSION CONTROL METHODS Fundamentals of cathodic protection - types of cathodic protection. Stray current corrosion problems

and its prevention. Protective coatings: anodic and cathodic coatings - metal coatings: hot dipping

(galvanizing, tinning and metal cladding) - natural inhibitors. Selection of sacrificial anode for

corrosion control.

FOR FURTHER READING Corrosion issues in supercritical water reactor (SCWR) systems.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Mouafak A. Zaher, Introduction to Corrosion Engineering, CreateSpace Independent

Publishing Platform, 2016.

2. E.McCafferty, Introduction to Corrosion Science, Springer; 2010 Edition, January 2010.

3. R. Winstone Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig, Corrosion and Corrosion Control: An Introduction

to Corrosion Science and Engineering, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Science, 2008.

4. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.

5. David E.J. Talbot (Author), James D.R. Talbot, Corrosion Science and Technology, Second

Edition (Materials Science & Technology), CRC Press; 2nd Edition, 2007.

6. http://corrosion-doctors.org/Corrosion-History/Eight.htm

Assessment Pattern



1 1 2 2

1 2 1

1 1 1

1 1 2

2 1

1

20

2 1 3

2 1 1

2

1 2

1 1

1

16

3 2 1

1 4 1

3

2

2 2

2

20

4 1 1 1

2 3 1

2 2 1

2 1 1

1 2

1

22

5 1 2

1 2

2 3

2 3

1 2

1 2

22

Total 100


1. Define Corrosion

2. Mention the five types of corrosion

3. Define dry corrosion. Explain the mechanism.



4. What are corrosion inhibitors? Give two examples.

5. Write the working principle of Tafel polarization techniques.

6. How polarization and impedance techniques are used to measure the corrosion products?

7. Define cathodic protection.

8. Ellaborate non-electrochemical and electrochemical methods of corrosion testing and

monitoring.

9. What is Tafel linear polarization?

Understand

1. Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion.

2. Identify the relation between the two units used to measure corrosion rate.

3. Illustrate the Pourbaix digrams of Mg/Al/Fe and their limitations.

4. List the eight forms of corrosion. Explain each type with an example.

5. What are the factors influencing the corrosion rate? Explain.

6. Discuss the Pilling-Bedworth rule.

7. Differentiate between electrochemical and dry corrosion.

8. How inhibitors are used to protect the corrosion rate of the metal? Explain.

9. What are consequences of Pilling-Bedworth ratio?

10. List the difference between filliform corrosion and pitting corrosion.

Apply

1. Area relationship between the anodic and cathodic part in galvanic corrosion. Discuss.

2. Describe alternatives to protective coatings.

3. How Tafel polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products?

Analyse

1. Explain why corrosion rate of metal is faster in aqueous solution than atmosphere air?

2. Why pitting corrosion is localized corrosion? Explain.

3. Compare the effects of corrosion products.

4. Identify different forms of corrosion in the metal surface.

5. What are the major implications of enhanced techniques of corrosion product analysis?

15GE0C2 ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL

CELLS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Understand the concept, working of different types of batteries and analyze batteries used in

electric vehicles.

Identify the types of fuel cells and to relate the factors of energy and environment.

Analyze various energy storage devices and fuel cells.


1. Understand the knowledge of various energy storing devices.

2. Acquire the knowledge to analyze the working of different types of primary and secondary

batteries.

3. Differentiate the types of fuel cells and recognize the utility of hydrogen as a fuel.

4. Realize the importance of using green fuel for sustainable development.



UNIT I 6 Hours

BASICS OF CELLS AND BATTERIES Components - classification - operation of a cell - theoretical cell voltage - capacity - specific energy -

energy density of practical batteries - charge efficiency- charge rate - charge retention - closed circuit

voltage, open circuit voltage current density - cycle life - discharge rate-over charge-over discharge.

UNIT II

10 Hours

BATTERIES FOR PORTABLE DEVICES AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES Primary batteries- zinc-carbon, magnesium, alkaline, manganous dioxide, mercuric oxide, silver oxide

batteries - recycling/safe disposal of used cells. Secondary batteries - introduction, cell reactions, cell

representations and applications - lead acid, nickel-cadmium and lithium ion batteries - rechargeable

zinc alkaline battery. Reserve batteries: Zinc-silver oxide, lithium anode cell, photogalvanic cells.

Battery specifications for cars and automobiles.

UNIT III 10 Hours

TYPES OF FUEL CELLS Importance and classification of fuel cells - description, working principle, components, applications

and environmental aspects of the following types of fuel cells: alkaline fuel cells, phosphoric acid,

solid oxide, molten carbonate and direct methanol fuel cells.

UNIT IV 10 Hours

HYDROGEN AS A FUEL Sources and production of hydrogen - electrolysis - photocatalytic water splitting - biomass pyrolysis

-gas clean up - methods of hydrogen storage- high pressurized gas - liquid hydrogen type - metal

hydride - hydrogen as engine fuel - features, application of hydrogen technologies in the future -

limitations.

UNIT V 9 Hours

ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT Future prospects of renewable energy and efficiency of renewable fuels - economy of hydrogen

energy - life cycle assessment of fuel cell systems. Solar Cells: energy conversion devices,

photovoltaic and photoelectrochemical cells - photobiochemical conversion cell.

FOR FURTHER READING Energy conservation, over utilization, Energy demanding activities.

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. M. Aulice Scibioh and B. Viswanathan, Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications, University

Press, India, 2009.

2. F. Barbir, PEM fuel cells: Theory and practice, Elsevier, Burlington, MA, Academic Press,

2013.

3. M. R. Dell Ronald and A. J. David, Understanding Batteries, Royal Society of Chemistry,

2001.

4. J. S. Newman and K. E. Thomas-Alyea, Electrochemical Systems, Wiley, Hoboken, NJ,

2012.

5. Shripad T. Revankar, Pradip Majumdar, Fuel Cells: Principles, Design, and Analysis, CRC

Press, 2016.

6. Thomas B. Reddy, Linden's Handbook of Batteries, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Professional,

2010



Assessment Pattern



1 2 2

1 2 2

1

1 3

1

15

2 4 1

4 5 2

2

1 2

1

22

3 3

4 6 2

1 3

1 1

1

22

4 1 2

4 4 1

4

2 4

22

5 2 2

2 5

3

2 3

19

Total 100


1. How galvanic cell is differing from electrolytic cell?

2. How is the potential of an electrochemical cell calculated?

3. List any four characteristics of primary batteries.

4. Mention any two characteristics and applications of zinc-carbon battery.

5. Recognize any two applications and characteristics of primary magnesium batteries.

6. Identify the applications and characteristics of Zn/HgO primary batteries.

7. Indicate any two applications of Zn/alkaline/MnO2 battery.

8. Mentioned any two applications of Zn/Ag2O primary battery.

9. Define capacity of a cell

10. Define discharge rate of a battery.

11. Describe the construction, cell reaction and applications of zinc-carbon battery.

12. Explain the construction, chemistry, advantages and uses of mercuric oxide battery.

13. Explain the major components and reaction of direct methanol fuel cell. List two applications.

14. Explain the working principle, components and applications of alkaline fuel cells

15. Discus the conversion of sunlight into electrical power in photoelectrochemical cells.

Understand

1. Mention the five different types of energy storage devices

2. Define the term battery

3. List any two differences between battery and cell.

4. Mention the three major components of cell.

5. Classify the batteries based on their cell reversibility.

6. Define cycle Life of a cell.

7. Explain the construction, cell reaction and applications of silver oxide batteries.

8. With a neat sketch explain the construction and working of phosphoric acid fuel cell.

9. Explain the major components and reactions of direct methanol fuel cell

10. Explain the production of hydrogen photobiochemical conversion cell.

Apply

1. Specific gravity is an indicator of charge in lead acid battery – Justify.

2. Illustrate the process of water electrolysis for the production of hydrogen.





Analyse

1. In the mid-winter car battery is not working –reason out.

2. Discuss the hydrogen energy strategies for sustainable development.

3. How galvanic cell is differing from electrolytic cell?

4. How batteries are rated?

5. Differentiate between primary and secondary batteries.

15GE0C3 POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND

PROCESSING 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

Impart knowledge on the basic concepts of polymers and its mechanism

Use the appropriate polymerization techniques to synthesize the polymers and its processing

Select the suitable polymers for various applications


1. Understand the basic concepts of polymer chemistry and mechanism of polymerization

reactions

2. Acquire knowledge of polymerization techniques

3. Identify the structural, mechanical and electrical features of polymers

4. Apply the polymer processing techniques to design polymer products

5. Realize the applications of specialty polymers

UNIT I 10 Hours

POLYMERS AND ELASTOMERS Classification of polymers - Mechanism: Addition polymerization - free radical polymerization -

cationic, anionic and co-ordination (Ziegler-Natta) polymerization, copolymerization, condensation

polymerization (nylon-6,6) ring opening polymerization (nylon-6). Elastomers: Natural rubber -

vulcanization - synthetic rubber: styrene -butadiene rubber (SBR), butyl, neoprene, thiocol rubbers.

High performance polymers: polyethers, polyether ether ketone (PEEK), polysulphones, polyimides.

UNIT II 8 Hours

POLYMERIZATION TECHNIQUES Homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization - bulk polymerization (PMMA, PVC) solution

polymerization - polyacrylic acid, suspension polymerization (ion-exchange resins) - emulsion

polymerization (SBR) - advantages and disadvantages of bulk and emulsion polymerization. Melt

solution and interfacial poly-condensation.

UNIT III 8 Hours

CHARACTERIZATION AND TESTING Characterization of polymers by Infrared Spectroscopy (IR) and Nuclear Magnetic Spectroscopy

(NMR) - Thermal properties by TGA and DSC, Testing tensile strength, Izod impact, Compressive

strength, Rockwell hardness, Vicot softening point. Test for electrical resistance, dielectric constant,

dissipation factor, arc resistance and dielectric strength - water absorption.



UNIT IV 9 Hours

POLYMER PROCESSING Moulding: Compression - injection - extrusion and blow mouldings. Film casting - calendering.

Thermoforming and vacuum formed polystyrene - foamed polyurethanes. Fibre spinning: melt, dry

and wet spinning. Fibre reinforced plactics fabrication: hand-layup - filament winding and pultrusion.

UNIT V 10 Hours

SPECIALITY POLYMERS Preparation and properties of heat resistant and flame retardant polymers. Polymers for electronic

applications: liquid crystalline, conducting and photosensitive polymers. Polymer for biomedical

applications: artificial organs, controlled drug delivery, hemodialysis and hemofiltration.

FOR FURTHER READING Biodegradable polymers

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. V. R. Gowarikar, N. V. Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Age

International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.

2. Joel R. Fried, Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice Hall of India (P). Ltd., 2014

3. F. W. Billmeyer, Text Book of Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2007

4. Barbara H. Stuart, Polymer Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008

5. George Odian , Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2004

6. R. J. Young and P. A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, CRC Press, New York, 2011

Assessment Pattern



1 1 1 3

2 2 3

2 2 3

1 1 1

22

2 1 1 4

1 1 3

1 1 3

1 1

18

3 1 1 1

1 1

1 2 2

2

1 1 4

18

4 1

1 2 2

3 2 2

2 2 1

2

20

5 1 1 1

2 2 1

2 2 3

2 2 3

22

Total 100


1. Recall two factors that govern termination of cationic polymerization.

2. Identify the monomers used in styrene -butadiene rubber.

3. Give an examples for the thermosetting and thermoplastic polymers.

4. What is copolymerization? Give an example

5. Name two synthetic polymers which are used for making textile fibres.

6. Define the role of Ziegler – Natta catalysts

7. List the examples of Ziegler – Natta catalysts.

8. Identify the four types of polymerization technique.

9. List any two disadvantages of suspension polymerization.

10. Point out the advantages of bulk polymerization technique.

11. Why does natural rubber need compounding?

12. List any four applications of injection moulding process.

13. List the various additives in processing of plastics.

14. List the two properties of heat resistant polymers.



15. Mention the application of flame retardant polymers.

Understand

1. Classify the polymers based on source

2. Discuss the addition and chain growth polymerization with example

3. Compare addition and condensation polymerization reaction with example for each type.

4. Explain homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization.

5. Explain the mechanism involved in addition polymerization of vinylChloride

6. Explain the condensation polymerization method taking nylon 6, 6, nylon synthesis as a

representative example.

7. Discuss the preparation method and any three properties of Polysulphone.

8. Summaries the salient features, advantages and disadvantages of bulk and emulsion

polymerization techniques.

9. Compare the homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization method.

10. With a neat sketch, discuss the functioning of melt, dry and wet spinning process.

11. Illustrate the compression and extrusion moulding of plastics with diagram neat diagram.

12. Explain the coordination polymerization mechanism using a sutable example.

Apply

1. Relate the various steps involved in anionic and cationic polymerisation using suitable

examples.

2. Select the suitable polymerization techniques for synthesis of PMMA and SBR

3. Assess the characterisation techniques used to find the structure of polymer.

4. Find the method to process the composite materials with example.

5. Execute the filament – winding Technique for manufacturing of rocket motor bodies.

Analyse

1. Distinguish between addition and condensation polymerisation.

2. Natural rubber need vulcanization –Justify.

3. Compare the salient features, advantages and disadvantages of solution and suspension

polymerization techniques.

4. Bring out the differences between thermoforming and vacuum-forming process.

5. Outline the applications of polymer in controlled drug delivery and artificial organs.

Evaluate

1. Judge the biomedical applications of polymers in Hemo dialysis and hemo filtration.

2. Choose the suitable moulding Technique for polyvinyl chloride.



OPEN ELECTIVES

15MC0YA FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMATION

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To impart fundamental knowledge in the areas of robotic system

To apply fundamental knowledge hydraulic and pneumatic system

To use the Microprocessor and PLC in various applications

To apply the basic principles of mechatronics in various fields


1. Understand the fundamental of robotic system

2. Identify and use different kinds of sensors

3. Understand the fundamental of hydraulic and pneumatic systems

4. Realise the mechanical and electrical actuation systems

5. Acquire basic knowledge on PLC for various applications

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO MECHATRONICS AND ROBOTICS Introduction - Systems - Open loop system-closed loop system, Basic elements, sequential controller

and Microprocessor based controllers. Industrial Robot: Definition, laws of robots- Robot Anatomy -


movement - Application

UNIT II 8 Hours

SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Introduction to sensors and transducers , Types-Displacement, position and proximity - velocity and


UNIT III 10 Hours




UNIT IV 9 Hours





UNIT V 9 Hours

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Introduction - Basic structure - input/output processing - programming - mnemonics - Timers, relays

and counters - shift registers - Data handling - Analogue input/output - Selection of PLC - Simple

problems



FOR FURTHER READING Application of PLC - elevator control, traffic light control, sensors in automobiles, ATM & mobiles


Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)



2. Devdas Shetty, Richard A. Kolk, Mechatronics System Design, Cengage Delmar Learning

India Pvt Learning, 2012


Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2008



Singapore, 1996

5. V. S. Bagad, Mechatronics, Technical Publication, Pune, 2009

Assessment Pattern



1 6 5

2 7

20

2 4 3

2 7

2 2

20

3 2 2

2 4

3 3

2 2

20

4 2 2

2 2

2 3

3

2 2

20

5

2 2

2

2 4

2 2

2 2

20

Total 100


1. Define the term Mechatronics.

2. What are the three elements used in measurement system?

3. What are the two basic form of control system?



6. List the various types of drive systems used in robotics.

7. Define sequential controller.

8. Define range and span.

9. What is meant by error?

10. Mention the various types of sensors.

Understand 1. How the Automation is different from conventional system?

2. When the open and closed loop control system is choosed?

3. Elucidate the significance of robots.

4. How the errors can be checked and minimized in various application?

5. What is the importance of repeatability during measurement?

6. Give the importance of sensors in various applications.


8. Differentiate the single and double acting cylinder?

9. Give the importance of Pressure sensors in various applications.

10. What are the various steps involved while designing the circuit?



Apply 1. Discuss the relation of fixed, flexible and programmable automation.

2. Intelligent robot can alter their program of their own. Justify.

3. Sketch the block diagram of open loop and closed loop control system.

4. How can you determine the level of fluid in container?

5. Explain how thermocouple is used in sensing temperature?

Analyse 1. How do you calculate the overall gear ratio G?

2. Why the input data stored in accumulator register?

3. Explain the various steps involved to develop the program in microcontroller.

4. Explain how the sequence followed by PLC while carry out a program?

5. How can you control the timer and counter in PLC?

Evaluate 1. How can you control the timer and counter in PLC?

2. How the PLC is different from other computers?

3. How can you make a programming in microcontroller?

Create 1. Sketch a PLC program for traffic light control.

2. Sketch a PLC program for bottle filling plant.

15MC0YB ROBOTICS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To analyze robot manipulators in terms of their kinematics, control

To program and control an industrial robot system that performs a specific task

To discuss various applications of industrial robot systems


1. Identify the configuration of a robot

2. Analyze the kinematics and control of robots

3. Understand different robot sensors and vision system

4. Perform simple programming of robot

5. Identify a suitable robot for a given application

UNIT I 8 Hours

INTRODUCTION Definition of a robot - scope of industrial robots, Robot anatomy - robotics and automation, law of

robots, specification of robots, resolution, repeatability and accuracy of manipulator. Classification of

robots and justifying the use of robots. Drive mechanisms - hydraulic, electrical, pneumatic drives

UNIT II 10 Hours

ROBOT CONTROL AND KINEMATICS Power transmission systems and control - mechanical transmissions method- Rotary to rotary, rotary

to linear conversions - rotary problem- remote centered compliance devices. End effectors - vacuum,

magnetic and air operated grippers. Robot Kinematics- Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and

Differences -Forward Kinematics and Reverse Kinematics of Manipulators with Two, Three Degrees

of Freedom (In 2 Dimensional), Four Degrees of Freedom (In 3 Dimensional) -DH matrices



UNIT III 9 Hours

ROBOT SENSORS AND VISION SYSTEMS Sensors - types - tactile sensors, proximity and range sensors, contact and non-contact sensors,

velocity sensors, touch and slip sensors, force and torque sensors. Robotic vision systems, imaging

components, image representation - picture coding, object recognition and categorization, visual

inspection, robot cell, design and control layouts

UNIT IV 9 Hours

ROBOT PROGRAMMING AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE Robotics programming: Teach Pendant Programming, Lead through programming, Robot

programming Languages - VAL Programming - Motion Commands, Sensor Commands, End effector

commands, and Simple programs. Basics - Goals of Artificial Intelligence

UNIT V 9 Hours

INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS Application of robots in machining - Welding - Assembly - Material handling - Loading and

unloading-CIM-hostile and remote environments. Inspection and future application-safety, training,

maintenance and quality. Economic analysis of robotics. SCARA robots, wheeled robots, Bipedal

robots (humanoid robots), hexapod robots

FOR FURTHER READING Economic and social issues - Micro motor and micro gripper - Performance characteristics of a robot -

Simple programs for drilling operations using VAL - Robot cell

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. M. P. Groover, Industrial Robotics - Technology, Programming and Applications, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011

2. K. S. Fu, R. C. Gonzalez and C. S. G. Lee, Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and

Intelligence, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003

3. D. Richard, Klafter A. Thomas, Chmielewski and Michael Negin, Robotics Engineering - An

Integrated Approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009

4. Ramesh Jain, Machine Vision, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,

1995

5. Yoram Koren, Robotics for Engineers, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2004

6. James G. Keramas, Robot Technology Fundamentals, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2011

Assessment Pattern



1 4 5

4 7

20

2 4 3

2 5

2 4

20

3 2 2

2 4

2 4

2 2

20

4 2

2 2

2 3

2 3

2 2

20

5

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

20

Total 100






3. List the various types of drive systems used in robotics.

4. What is a manipulator?

5. Define ‘robot arm’.

6. Give the standard definition for an industrial robot.

7. Expand: PUMA, SCARA and UNIMATION.

8. What is work volume of a robot?

9. Name the drive systems used for a robot.

10. What are types of robot programming?

Understand 1. How to increase the accuracy of a robot arm?

2. Why the payload is calculated with load at the outer position of the arm?

3. Why RCC is required?

4. Which application is easiest to program for a robot?

5. What kind of end effector is required to stack the glass plates? Why?

6. A LPG cylinder is to be arc welded using a robot; how to program it for automation?

7. Electric drives are not suitable robots handling inflammable products. State the reason.

8. Why force sensor is needed for a robot?

Apply 1. A frame F has been moved 9 units along x-axis and 5 units along the y-axis of the reference

frame. Find the new location of the frame.

2. A point P (7, 3, 2) T and it is subjected to the transformation described (i) 0 rotation of 90º

about z-axis. (ii) Followed by a rotation of 90º about y-axis (iii) followed by a translation [4 -

3 7]. Find the coordinates of the point relative to the reference frame.

Analyse 1. Calculate the inverse matrix of the following transformation matrix:

2. A cool drink bottling company needs to utilize robot in the packing section. How to do it?

Justify your answer.

Evaluate 1. Write a program to flange drilling operation using VAL programming.

2. What type of robots can be applied in inspection? Give reasons.

Create 1. Can robots completely replace the human efforts in industry? Why?

2. What are the job opportunities available in a robot assisted automation?

15MC0YC MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL

SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To acquire a knowledge about fabrication process in MEMS

To know about various etching techniques in micromachining

To have a knowledge about applications in micromachining techniques




1. Know the scaling laws that are used extensively in the conceptual design of micro-devices

and able to use materials for common micro-components and devices

2. Select a fabrication process suitable for production of a MEMs device

3. Choose a micromachining technique, such as bulk micromachining and surface

micromachining for a specific MEMS fabrication process

4. Understand the working principles of micro-sensors, actuators, valves, pumps, and fluidics

used in Microsystems

5. Acquire knowledge on micro system packaging and design

UNIT I 9 Hours

INTRODUCTION Introduction to MEMS: Introduction to Microsystems and micro electronics - Market scenario for

MEMS. Working principle: Trimmers scaling vector and scaling laws - scaling in geometry - scaling

in rigid body dynamics- scaling in electrostatic forces - scaling in electricity - scaling in fluid

mechanics - scaling in heat transfer. Materials for MEMS: Silicon as a MEMS material - Crystal

structure of silicon - Miller indices - silicon compounds - SiO2, SiC, Si3N4 and polycrystalline silicon

- silicon piezo-resistors - Gallium arsenide - polymers for MEMS -quartz.

UNIT II 9 Hours

FABRICATION OF MEMS Clean room technology - Substrates and wafer - single crystal silicon wafer formation - ideal

substrates - mechanical properties - Processes for bulk micromaching - Wet Vs dry etching -

Chemical etching of Silicon - etchant systems and etching process - Reactive ion etching and DRIE -

mask layout design. Processes for Surface micromaching - Deposition processes - ion implantation -

Diffusion - oxidation - chemical vapor deposition -physical vapor deposition - deposition by epitaxy -

photolithography and photoresists. Limitations of Bulk and surface micromachining - LIGA, SLIGA

and other micromolding processes such as HeXIL

UNIT III 9 Hours

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS BASED ON MICROMECHANICS Micromechanics considerations - static bending of thin plates - circular plates with edge fixed -

rectangular plate with all edges fixed - square plate with all edges fixed - mechanical vibration -

resonant vibration - micro accelerometers - design theory and damping coefficients - thermo

mechanics - thermal stresses - fracture mechanics - stress intensity factors - fracture toughness - and

interfacial fracture mechanics

UNIT IV 9 Hours

MEMS DEVICES Micro actuation techniques - piezoelectric crystals - Shape memory alloys - bimetallics - conductive

polymers. Micro motors - micro grippers - Microfluidic devices - Micro pumps - mechanical and

nonmechanical micropumps - micro valves - valveless micropumps - Lab on Chip. Types of micro

sensors - Microaccelerometer - Micropressure sensors, MEMS switches/resonators, MEMS reliability.

UNIT V 9 Hours

MICROSYSTEM PACKAGING AND DESIGN Micro system packaging - materials die level device level - system level - packaging techniques - die

preparation - surface bonding - wire bonding - sealing - Case studies. Design considerations - process

design - mechanical design - applications of micro system in automotive - bio medical - aerospace -

telecommunication industries



FOR FURTHER READING Use of gold and other metals in MEMS- MEMS devices for automotive application-MEMS device for

the same purpose may be manufactured by different types of processes-Need for micromechanics

considerations in MEMS design- Optical MEMS devices- Use of MEMS devices in cell phones,

robots, automobiles, etc

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, The MEMS Handbook, CRC Press Publishers, India, 2002

2. Tai Ran Hsu, MEMS and Micro Systems Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2008

3. Nadim Maluf, An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Design, Artech House

Publishers, London, 2004

4. Chang Liu, Foundations of MEMS, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011.James J. Allen,

Micro Electro Mechanical System Design, CRC Press Publishers, India, 2005

5. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan and Osama O. Awadelkarim, Micro sensors MEMS and

smart Devices, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., England, 2002

6. E.H. Tay, Francis and W.O.Choong, Micrfluids and Bio MEMS applications, Springer, 2002

Assessment Pattern



1 2 4

4 4

4 2

20

2 2 4

4 4

2

4

20

3 2 4

4 4

4

2

20

4

2

2 2

4 4

2

4

20

5 2 2

2 6

2

4

2

20

Total 100


1. What is MEMS technology?

2. What do you mean by micro fabrication?

3. What is the significance of comb drives capacitive actuator?

4. What do you mean by micromachining?

5. Define plasma etching.

6. Compare the wet etching and dry etching of silicon.

7. Define DRIE.

8. What is meant by PDMS?

9. Define LCP.

10. Define stress and strain.

Understand 1. Draw the micro technology subfields.

2. What are the factors should be considered for selecting the tactile sensor?

3. Draw the materials and interfaces in a schematic microstructure.

4. Draw the lithographic patterning process.

5. Draw the various types of beams and their deflected shapes.

6. Write the equation that would quantify the electrical field between two large parallel plates.

7. Explain the assembly of 3D MEMS.



8. Draw the fabrication process for a dual-valve unpowered micro flow system using parylene as

structural layer.

9. Explain the different types of etching process.

10. Explain the need of optical MEMS.

Apply 1. Structural tests using a MEMS acoustic emission sensor.

2. Traffic flow control using surface acoustic wave sensors.

3. Pipeling implementation using optical sensors.

4. MEMS application in pavement condition monitoring.

5. Application of MEMS in consumer electronic products.

Analyse 1. What is the role of magnetic actuators?

2. How MEMS mirror chips are used in projection screen TVs?

Evaluate 1. How will you find the speed of the car using MEMS accelerometer?

2. How airbags systems are triggered using MEMS accelerometer chip?

Create 1. Design and carry out experiments requiring the assembly of custom fixtures, materials, etc.

2. Design of heartbeat measuring transducer.

15MC0YD SENSORS AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To make the students to gain a clear knowledge of the basic laws governing the operation of

electrical instruments and the measurement techniques

Emphasis is laid on the meters used to measure current & voltage

Detailed study of resistance, inductance and capacitance measuring methods

Detailed study of display and recording devices

To get adequate knowledge about virtual instrumentation


1. Understand the different measurement standards and different kinds of errors

2. Choose use appropriate sensors for mechanical measurements

3. Understand different devices available for electrical measurements

4. Design a signal conditioning circuit and data acquisition system

5. Develop Lab VIEW programs for various applications and to know the use of DAQ card

UNIT I 9 Hours

SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENT Units and Standards - International standards of measurement. Generalized Measurement System.

Static and dynamic characteristics of transducers- Errors in Measurements - Gross errors, Systematic

errors, Random errors. Calibration techniques. Generalized Performance of Zero Order and First

Order Systems - Response of transducers to different time varying inputs. Classification of

transducers



UNIT II

8 Hours

MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS Temperature measurement - Filled thermometer - Bimetallic thermometer. Pressure measurement -

manometers - Bourdon gauge - bellows - diaphragm - McLeod gauge - thermal conductivity gauge.

Flow measurement - Rotameter, orifice, venturi. Level measurement - Float gauge, capacitance and

ultrasonic. Control of flow and pressure monitoring with PID controls

UNIT III 10 Hours

ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS Potentiometer. Temperature measurement - RTD - Thermistor - Thermocouple - Pyrometers. LVDT -

RVDT - Capacitive transducers - Piezo electric transducer - Strain gauges - load cell - Hall effect

transducers -Photoelectric transducers - Fiber optic transducers - electromagnetic - Anemometers -

Variable reluctance type transducers and Hygrometer

UNIT IV 9 Hours

SIGNAL CONDITIONING AND DATA ACQUISITION PRESENTATION Wheatstone and Schering bridges - Amplification - Filtering - V/I, I/V and I/P converters - Sample

and Hold circuits - D/A converter (R -2R ladder and weighted resistor types), A/D converter, Dual

slope, successive approximation and flash types - Data logging - Display devices: CRO, LED and

LCD

UNIT V 9 Hours

VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION VI - Graphical user interfaces - Data types - Data flow programming - Graphical programming

palettes and tools - Front panel objects - Functions and libraries. FOR Loops, WHILE Loops, CASE

Structure - Arrays and Clusters - Attribute modes Local and Global variables - Data acquisition using

DAQ card

FOR FURTHER READING Transducer - Application of Sensor and Actuator. Applications of Rotameter - Application of LVDT -

Application of Wheatstone bridge - Advantages of Virtual Instruments over conventional instruments

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. A. K. Sawhney and P. Sawhney, A Course on Mechanical Measurement Instrumentation and

Control, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2011

2. Garry M. Johnson, Labview Graphical Programming, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing


3. D. Patranabis, Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing


4. J. P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, Addison Wesley Longman Ltd., UK, 2005

5. K.Krishnaswamy and S.Vijayachitra, Industrial Instrumentation, New age International

Private limited, 2005

6. E. O. Doeblin, Measurement Systems: Applications and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Limited, 2003



Assessment Pattern



1 2 3

2 5

2 3

3

20

2 2 3

2 4

2 3

2

2

20

3 2 3

2 4

2 2

3

2

20

4 2 3

2 4

2 2

2

2

4

20

5 2 3

2 3

2 2

2

4

20

Total 100


1. Define Units.

2. List the classification of units.

3. Define Standards.

4. Define Instrumental error.

5. What is primary transducer?

6. What is active transducer?

7. What is analog transducer?

8. Define static characteristics of a transducer.

9. What is a dynamic characteristic?

10. Mention different type’s dynamic characteristics of transducer.

Understand 1. Differentiate between accuracy and precision.

2. Explain the different types of static errors?

3. Explain instrumental and environmental errors and the methods to avoid them.

4. Explain the principles involved in ultrasonic flow meter.

5. Compare primary and a secondary standard?

6. Outline the applications where thermistor is a preferred temperature sensor.

7. Compare resistance strain gauge and a semiconductor strain gauge.

8. Compare digital transducer with analog.

9. Compare constant current source and constant voltage source.

10. Explain the different types of oscillators.

Apply 1. A temperature transducer with a time constant of 0.4 sec and a static sensitivity of 0.05mV/ ºc

is used to measure the temperature of a hot liquid medium which changes from 25ºC to 65ºC.

The transducer is adjusted to read 0 and 25ºC.

2. Determine the time taken to read 80% of the final voltage value if the temperature changes as

a step.

3. Calculate the reading of the transducer at the end of 4 sec if the temperature changes at a

constant rate of 10º per sec from 25ºC to 65ºC

4. The output of an LVDT is connected to a 5V voltmeter through an amplifier whose

amplification factor is 250. An output of 2 mV appears across the terminals across the

terminals of LVDT when the core moves through a distance of 0.5 mm. calculate the

sensitivity of the LVDT and that of the whole set up. The milli-voltmeter scale has 100

divisions. The scale can be read to 1/5 of a division. Calculate the resolution of the instrument

in mm.

5. A Hall Effect transducer is used for the measurement of a magnitude field of 0.5 Wb/m2. The

2 mm thick slab is made of Bismuth for which the Hall’s co-efficient is -1x10-6 V m/ (A –

Wb m-2) and the current is 3A.



Analyse 1. A thermistor has a resistance of 10K??? At 25C. The resistance temperature co-efficient is -

0.05/°C. A Wien’s bridge oscillator uses two identical thermistors in the frequency

determining part of the bridge. The value of capacitance used in the bridge is 500 pF.

Calculate the value of frequency of oscillations for (i) 20°C (ii) 25°C (iii) 30°C. The

frequency of oscillation is f=1/2πRC Hz where R and C are resistance and capacitance

respectively.

2. How is orifice used as a flow measuring instrument?

Evaluate 1. Compare different types of Analog to digital converter.

Create 1. Design signal conditioning circuit for a LVDT. The output current from the signal

conditioning circuit should be in the range 4 – 20 mA.

15MC0YE MECHATRONICS 3 0 0 3

Course Objectives

To provide a basic background to mechatronics and link to more specialized skills

To develop the mix of skills in mechanical engineering, electronics and computing

To familiarize about sensors and control system used in mechatronics

To develop confidence and competence in designing mechatronics systems


1. Understand the fundamentals of mechatronics systems

2. Understand the functioning of different actuation systems

3. Model different kinds of system and identify a suitable controller

4. Understand the fundamentals of PLCs

5. Design a Mechatronics system for a given application

UNIT I 9 Hours

MECHATRONICS Introduction to Mechatronics Systems - Measurement Monitoring Systems Automation - Control

Systems -Microprocessor based Controllers. Sensors and Transducers - Performance Terminology -

Sensors for Displacement, Position and Proximity; Velocity, Motion, Force, Fluid Pressure, Liquid

Flow, Liquid Level, Temperature, Light Sensors - Selection of Sensors

UNIT II 8 Hours

ACTUATION SYSTEMS Pneumatic and Hydraulic Systems - Directional Control Valves - Rotary Actuators. Mechanical

Actuation Systems - Cams - Gear Trains - Ratchet and pawl - Belt and Chain Drives - Bearings.

Electrical Actuation Systems - Mechanical Switches - Solid State Switches - Solenoids - D.C Motors -

A.C Motors - Stepper Motors -Servomotors.

UNIT III 10 Hours

SYSTEM MODELS AND CONTROLLERS Building blocks of Mechanical, Electrical, Fluid and Thermal Systems, Rotational - Translational

Systems, Electromechanical Systems - Hydraulic - Mechanical Systems. Continuous and discrete



process Controllers - Control Mode - Two - Step mode - Proportional Mode - Derivative Mode -

Integral Mode-PID Controllers-Digital Controllers - Velocity Control - Adaptive Control - Digital

Logic Control - Micro Processors Control.

UNIT IV 9 Hours

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS Programmable Logic Controllers - Basic Structure - Input / Output Processing -Programming -

Mnemonics - Timers, Internal relays and counters - Shift Registers - Master and Jump Controls - Data

Handling - Analogue Input / Output - Selection of PLC

UNIT V 9 Hours

DESIGN OF MECHATRONICS SYSTEM Stages in designing Mechatronics Systems - Traditional and Mechatronic Design - Possible Design

Solutions Case Studies of Mechatronics Systems, Automatic washing Machine - Automatic Camera -

Pick and place robot - Automatic Car Park Systems - Engine Management Systems

FOR FURTHER READING Smart sensors - Hybrid motor - Advanced Controllers - PLC in Mechatronics - Fault finding

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. W. Bolton, Mechatronics: Electronic control systems in Mechanical and Electrical

Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi,2013

2. David G. Alciature and Michael B. Histand, Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement

Systems, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2007

3. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, Mechatronics : Principles, Concepts and Applications, Tata

McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2008

4. M. D. Singh, and J. G. Joshi, Mechatronics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2009

5. K. P. Ramachandran, G. K. Vijayaraghavan, and M. S. Bala-Sundram, Mechatronics :

Integrated Mechanical Electronic Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi 2008

6. Newton C. Braga, Mechatronic Source Book, Delmar Cengage Learning, 2009

Assessment Pattern



1 2 5

2 3

2 3

3

20

2 2 3

2 4

2 3

2

2

20

3 2 3

2 4

2 2

3

2

20

4 2 3

2 4

2 2

2

2

4

20

5 2 3

3

2 2

2 2

4

20

Total 100


1. Define mechatronics.

2. What is meant by cylinder sequencing?

3. List the factors to be considered when selecting the belt drives.

4. State the objectives of DCVs.

5. What are the factors to be considered for selecting solenoids?

6. What is the purpose of Air receiver?

7. List down the features of JFET.

8. What is meant by adaptive control?



9. What is damper?

10. What are counters?

Understand 1. State the difference between primary and secondary transducer.

2. How the mechatronics used in industries?

3. State, in general, the principle of operation of transducers and highlight their difference with

sensors.

4. Distinguish between accuracy and sensitivity of a transducer.

5. What are the configurations in operating stepper motor?

6. Differentiate between DIAC and TRIAC.

7. Why derivative controller is never used alone?

8. Compare the PLC and a general-purpose computer.

9. Distinguish between traditional design approach and mechatronics approach.

10. How does a simple weighing scale work using traditional mechanical system?

Apply 1. Identify and explain the various elements that might be present in a control system involving

a thermostatically controlled electric heater.

2. Compare and contrast the control system for the domestic central heating system involving a

bimetallic thermostat and that involving a microprocessor.

3. You are offered a choice of an incremental shaft encoder or an absolute shaft encoder for the

measurement of an angular displacement. What is the principal difference between the results

that can be obtained by these methods?

Analyse 1. Suggest a sensor that could be used, as part of a control system, to determine the difference in

levels between liquids in two containers. The output is to provide an electrical signal for the

control system.

2. Derive differential equations for a permanent magnet D.C. motor.

3. Derive an expression for a Hydraulic – mechanical systems.

Evaluate 1. Devise a timing circuit that will switch an output ON for 1 s then OFF for 20s, then ON for

1s, then OFF for 20 s and so on.

2. Device a circuit by using Ladder logic format and Mnemonics that could be used with a

domestic Washing machine to switch on pump to pump water for 100sec into the machine,

then switch off and switch on the heater for 50sec to heat the water. The heater is then

switched off and another pump is to empty the water from the machine for 100sec.

3. Case studies –

1) Engine Management System

2) Automatic Camera

3) Automatic Car park system

Create 1. How a traditional design of temperature control of domestic central heating system is

improved by mechatronic design?



ONE CREDIT COURSES

15MC0XA INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS

- - - 1

Course Objectives

To study the various standards and principles in hydraulics and pneumatics

To understand the real time application in hydraulics and pneumatics

To practically study the various hydraulics and pneumatics components and their

manufactures


1. Choose specific hydraulic application related to the need

2. Find easy to Control various valves and accessories in hydraulic systems

3. Undergo maintenance activities related to hydraulics

UNIT I

INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS An Introduction to Hydraulics and its Principles - Hydraulic Fluids: Contamination control

and fluid conductors - Hydraulic actuators and its use - Hydraulic cylinders - Hydraulic Motors -

Hydraulic control elements - Hydraulic Pumps - Directional control valves - Pressure control Valves -

Flow Control Valves - Cartridge Valves - Proportional and Servo Valves - Hydraulic Accessories -

Accumulator and its application - Intensifiers - Pressure switches and Pressure gauges - Measuring

equipments: Flow , Temp , Oil level - Sound Dampening devices - Filters and other Tank Accessories

- Oil coolers - Hydraulic Symbols - Designing of a Hydraulic Systems and Circuit design -

Calculations for designing a Hydraulic Systems - Analyzing the Hydraulic circuits - Basics to be

considered while Assembling the Hydraulic systems - Standards for Hydraulics - Trouble shooting in

Hydraulic Systems - Maintenance requirements in Hydraulic Systems - Application and usage of

Hydraulics in Industries - Manufacturers of Hydraulic elements - Manufacturers of Hydraulic

Machines - Scope and Future for Hydraulic Industry

Total: 15 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Henry M. Morris and James M. Wiggert., "Applied Hydraulics in Engineering", John Wiley

& Sons Publications., New York, 1972.

2. John H. Pippenger, Tyler G. Hicks., "Industrial Hydraulics", Gregg Division McGraw-Hill.,

New York, 1979

3. Majumdar .S.R., "Oil Hydraulic Systems: Principles and Maintenance"., McGraw-Hill

Education, New York 2003



15MC0XB AC/DC DRIVES - - - 1

Course Objectives

To study the various power electronics devices and their characteristics

To understand the real time application in AC/DC DRIVES

To practically study the various AC/DC Drives foe speed control application


1. Choose the devices for application they need

2. Find easy to Control the various speed control AC/DC Drives

UNIT I

AC/DC DRIVES Brief Basic Power Electronics (including Thyristors, Power-Transistors & IGBTs). DC Motor

Basics (construction, principle of operation, T-N Characteristic etc). DC Drives Basics (Block

diagram, 1Q-4Q principle of operation, T-N Curves etc) Selections, Calculations & applications of

typical DC drives. Siemens DC Drives (6RA70) - Ratings, Specs, features, options & applications.

AC Motor Basics (construction, principle of operation, T-N Characteristic etc). AC Drives Basics

(Block diagram, 1Q-4Q principle of operation, T-N Curves etc) Selections, Calculations &

applications of typical AC drives. AC Drives (Micromaster-MM4)-Ratings, Specs, features, options &

applications. AC Drives (Master Drive-VC): Ratings, Specs, features, options & applications. AC

Drives (Sinamics-G)-Ratings, Specs, features, options & applications in brief. MEDIUM VOLTAGE

(MV Drives & Motors): MV Motor types & Fundamentals (including starting methods,

options/features), MV Motor offers from Germany (separately for Induction & Synchronous Motor),

MV Converter Basics & types (Voltage, Current Source & Cyclo-converters), Siemens MV

Converters (Sinamics GM, Simovert-S and Perfect Harmony), Selection, configuration &

Applications of MV Drive systems

Total: 15 Hours

Reference(s)

1. G. K. Dubey, Fundamentals of Electrical Drives, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.

2. S. K. Pillai, A First Course on Electrical Drives, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,

2012.

3. Vedam Subrahmaniam, Electric Drives (concepts and applications), Tata McGraw-Hill




ADDITIONAL ONE CREDIT COURSES (I to III Semesters)

15GE0XA HEALTH AND FITNESS

- - - 1

Course Objectives

To understand the fundamental concepts about physical fitness & its types, training and

assessment of physical fitness.


1. Acquire the knowledge and training of the individual physical, mental and social concepts.

2. Understand the fundamental concepts of yogic practice and physical fitness.

3. To acquire the knowledge about nutrition and health consciousness.

FITNESS: Meaning & Definition – Need & importance of Physical fitness – Types Physical fitness -

Exercise, Training and Conditioning and it is important.

YOGA: Meaning and definition – Principles of practicing – Basic Asana and it important –

Pranayama and Meditation - Relaxation Techniques.

NUTRITION AND BALANCE DIET: Needs and Important – Significant of Nutritional Food - Tips

for balance diet. Common Diseases for IT professionals: Common diseases - cause – prevention –

First aid for common sports injuries.

Total: 15 hours

References

1. Anderson, Bob. Pearl, Bill. &Burke, Edmund R., (2001). Getting in Shape Workout Programs

for Men&Women. Mumbai: Jaico Publishing House.

2. Baechle, Thomas. R, & Earle, Roger. W., (2000). Essentials of Strength Training and

Conditioning. Champaign: Human Kinetics.

3. Iyengar, BKS., (2003). The Art of Yoga. New Delhi: Harper Collins Publishers.

4. Singh, Hardayal, (1995). Science of Sports training. New Delhi: D.V.S. Publications.

5. Begum, Raheena. M., (2002). A Textbook of Foods, Nutrition and Dietetics. New Delhi:

Sterling Publishers Private Limited.



15GE0XB FOUNDATION COURSE IN COMMUNITY RADIO TECHNOLOGY

- - - 1

Course Objective

The course focuses on community radio technology and various program productions

techniques for radio broadcasting.


1. Understand the hardware required for field recording and setting up a studio and carry out

studio and field recording

2. Examine the available options for telephony interfaces for radio

3. Demonstrate proper techniques of wiring, fixing of connectors, soldering and use of tools and

equipment for studio work.

INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNITY RADIO

Evolution of Community Radio (CR) in India- principles behind setting up of CR- policy guidelines

and their impact on technology and content of a CR station- fundamental principles behind deciding

the technology for a CR station.

STUDIO TECHNOLOGY

Properties and components of sound-difference between analogue and digital audio-hardware required

for field recording and setting up a studio-fundamental principles for setting up an audio studio

AUDIO PRODUCTION

Concept of recording and storing audio-hardware related to audio recording-open source software

solutions for audio production- telephony interfaces for radio- audio Post Production

STUDIO OPERATIONS

Wiring, fixing of connectors, soldering and use of tools and equipment- preventive and corrective

maintenance of studio and equipment.

RADIO TRANSMISSION TECHNOLOGY

Components of the FM transmission chain- FM transmitter-different types of FM antenna - coaxial

cable- propagation and coverage of RF signals-FM transmitter setup

Total: 15 Hours



Reference(s)

1. UNESCO (2001). Community Radio Handbook.

2. Vinod Pavarala, Kanchan K Malik, “Other Voices: The Struggle for Community Radio in India”,

SAGE Publications India,2007.

3. Steve Buckley, Mark Raboy, Toby Mendel, Kreszentia Duer, Monroe E. Price, Seán Ó Siochrú,

“Broadcasting, Voice, and Accountability: A Public Interest Approach to Policy, Law, and

Regulation”, University of Michigan Press, 2008.

4. www.floridasound.com

5. www.mediacollege.com

6. www.procosound.com

15GE0XC VEDIC MATHEMATICS

- - - 1

Course Objectives

To improve their calculation speed, analytical thinking and numerical skills.

Course outcome (CO)

1. Solve problems creatively in mathematics and its applications.

Vedic Mathematics

Addition- Subtraction- System of Multiplication- Squaring numbers- Cube roots- Square roots-

Solution of simultaneous equations- Solutions of Quadratic equations-

Total: 15 Hours

References

1. Dhaval Bathia, Vedic Mathematics, JAICO Publishing House, 29th Edition, Mumbai, 2014.

2. Jagadguru Swami Sri Bharathi Krsna Tirthaji Maharaja, Vedic Mathematics, Motilal

Banarsidass Publishers Private Limited, New Delhi, 1997.

15GE0XD INTRODUCTION TO ALGORITHMS

- - - 1

Course Objectives

Analyze the asymptotic performance of algorithms, Divide and conquer and Dynamic

Problems.

Use Sorting and Searching algorithms for arranging the data.

Apply important algorithmic techniques to solve the real world Problems.

http://www.mediacollege.com/




1. Apply Divide and conquer and Dynamic Programming Algorithm techniques to Provide the

solutions for simple Problems.

2. Design algorithms for Performing Sorting and Searching of data.

3. Construct the Graph, Heap and BST for the given Data information.

Algorithm Design Techniques: Divide and Conquer, Dynamic Programming, Sorting and Searching,

Basic graph algorithms –Simple Data Structures: Heaps, Balanced Search Trees.

Total: 15 Hours

References

1. Mark Allen Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Second Edition, Pearson

Education, 2015.

2. Thomas H. Cormen. Charles E. Leiserson. Ronald L. Rivest. Clifford Stein, Introduction to

Algorithms, Second Edition, MIT Press, 2014.

3. J.P.Tremblay and P.G.Sorenson, An Introduction to Data Structures with Application II

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2008

15GE0XE ETYMOLOGY

- - - 1 Course Objectives

To increase vocabulary and enhance use, knowledge, and understanding of the English

language;

To stimulate an appreciation for the English language, including how it developed, how

new wordsenter the language, and how it continues to be dynamic;

To demonstrate the importance of a broad-based vocabulary for effective oral and

writtencommunication; and


1. Examine prefixes, roots, and suffixes of Latin, Greek, Germanic, and Anglo-Saxon origin.

2. Explore the historical aspects of language, including the infusion of Indo-European

languages, semantic changes, and the influence of world events.

CONVENTIONS &VOCABULARY

Acronyms – Abbreviations – Initialisms – Jargon – Neologisms - Idiomatic Expressions –

Euphemisms – Spoonerisms – Malapropisms – Mondegreens - Words Derived from Latin - Words

Derived from Greek - Words Derived from - Germanic/Anglo-Saxon - Abstract word Acronym -

Affix Analogy - Antonym – Apheresis - Blend word Assimilation - Colloquial language Clipped word



WORD ANALYSIS

Concrete word Derivative - Dialect Diminutive suffix - Dissimilation Doublet - Etymology

Euphemism - Figurative word Homonym - Hybrid word Inflection - Informal language Infusion -

Jargon Linguistics - Loan words Metathesis – Modify - Philology Onomatopoeia - Romance language

Prefix - Semantics - Root-base word - Suffix Slang - Word component Synonym

Total : 15 hours

Reference(s)

1. Norman, Lewis. Word Power Made Easy,Goyal Publisher. Edition 2.2014.

2. C T Onions. The Oxford Dictionary of English Etymology.Volume 11, Issue 1.70, Wynford

Drive, Don Mills, Ont.Oxford University Press.1965.

3. Nurnberg W, Maxwell and Rosenblum, Morris, How to build a better Vocabulary,

Completely Revised and Updated, Popular Library.1961

15GE0XF HINDUSTANI MUSIC

- - - 1

Course Objectives

To have an awareness on aesthetic and therapeutic aspects of Hindustani music

To identify and differentiate the various styles and nuances of Hindustani music

To apply the knowledge accumulated throughout the duration of the course by way of

improvisation, composition and presentation

Course Outcome (CO)

1. Have Basic knowledge of aesthetic and therapeutic value of Hindustani Music

Aesthetics

Introduction to music - Aesthetics of Hindustani Music - Classification (Raga, instruments, style as

per the presentation and the gharaanaas) - Folk music, Dhamaar, Dhrupad

Composition and Therapeutic Value

Taal and Raga - Bandeesh, Taraanaa – Madhya and drut laya, Vilambit khyaal as demonstration -

Therapeutic benefits of Hindustani music - Stage performance

Total: 20 hours

Reference(s):

1. Devdhar B.R., Raga bodh (Part 1 & 2), Devdhar School of Indian Music, Mumbai, 2012.

2. Vasant, Sangeet Vishaarad , Hathras, Uttar Pradesh, 2015.



Websites:

1. raag-hindustani.com/

2. play.raaga.com/Hindustani

3. raag-hindustani.com/Scales3.html

4. www.poshmaal.com/ragas.html

5. www.soundofindia.com/raagas.asp

6. https://www.quora.com/Which-is-the-toughest-raga-in-Indian-classical-music

7. www.likhati.com/2010/10/20/popular-ragas-for-the-beginner-ear-durga

15GE0XG CONCEPT, METHODOLOGY AND

APPLICATIONS OF VERMICOMPOSTING - - - 1

Course Objectives

To understand the importance of safe methods of treating solid wastes generated through

various human activities

To appreciate the skills / devices / practices associated with the compact proceedures of

biodegradation of unwanted solid residues


1. Understand the role of recycling of garbage leading to the sustenance of our health and

environment.

2. Recognize the organic farming practices and production of healthy food products.

3. Prepare and maintain tips for small scale compost units and thereby becoming more

environmentally conscious.

Vermicomposting Technology 15 Hours

Ecological roles and economic importance of earthworms - need for earthworm culture – scope and

importance of vermiculture – limiting factors - types of worm culturing and the relative benefits –

Small scale and commercial methods: process & advantages – Vermicomposting equipments, devices

– Design and maintenance of vermi bed - Products from vermiculture (matter & humus cycle) –

vermicastings in organic farming/horticulture - Marketing the products of vermiculture – quality

control, market research, marketing techniques – Applied vermiculture: use of urban solids & farm/

industrial residues for vermicomposting - Constraints of vermiculture and its future perspectives –

Artificial Earthworm as a standalone biodegradation assembly.

Total: 15 Hours

http://www.poshmaal.com/ragas.html

http://www.soundofindia.com/raagas.asp

https://www.quora.com/Which-is-the-toughest-raga-in-Indian-classical-music

http://www.likhati.com/2010/10/20/popular-ragas-for-the-beginner-ear-durga



Reference(s)

1. Sultan Ahmed Ismail, 2005. The Earthworm Book, Second Revised Edition. Other India

Press, Goa, India.4

2. Vermiculture Technology; Earthworms, Organic Wastes and Environmental Management,

2011, Edited by Clive A Edwards, Norman Q Arancon & Rhonda Sherman, CRC Press

3. www.organicgrowingwithworms.com.au

4. New York Times – Scientists Hope to Cultivate and Immune System for Crops

15GE0XH AGRICULTURE FOR ENGINEERS

- - - 1

Course Objectives

1. To impart the basic knowledge of agricultural and horticultural crops, cropping systems

2. To study the weed and nutrient management, irrigation water requirement and its quality


1. Understand the science of Agriculture

2. Summarize and apply the methodologies needed in agriculture based on the field conditions.

3. Develop enough confidence to identify the crop patterns in real world and offer appropriate

solutions.

Agronomical practices and Crops 5 hours

Definition and scope of agronomy , Classification of Crops, agricultural and horticultural crops Effect

of Different Weather Parameters on Crop Growth and Development , Principal of Tillage, Tilth and

Its Characteristics, Role of Water in Plant and Its Absorption, Conduction and Transpiration of Water

and Plant Processes, Soil Water Extraction Pattern and Plant Response. Introduction to weeds, Weeds

Control.

Crop rotation, cropping systems, relay and mixed cropping 5 hours

Crop Rotation, Different Cropping Systems – I, Different Cropping Systems – II, Scope of

Horticultural Crops, Soil Requirement for Fruits, Vegetables and Flowers Crops, Climatic

Requirement for Fruits, Vegetables and Flowers Crops.

Plant nutrients 5 hours

Essential Plant Nutrients, Nutrient Deficiency, Toxicity and Control Measures. Chemical fertilizers,

fertilizer Reaction in Soil and Use Efficiency

http://www.organicgrowingwithworms.com.au/



Quality of irrigation water and irrigation methods 5 hours

Quality of Irrigation Water, Poor Quality of Irrigation Water and Management Practices. Surface

Irrigation methods, and micro irrigation methods

Total: 20 hours

References

1. SP. Palaniappan, and S. Sivaraman, Cropping systems in the tropics- Principles and

Management, New Age international publishers, New Delhi, (2nd edition), 1998.

2. S.Sankaran and V.T Subbaiah Mudaliar, Principles of Agronomy, The Bangalore Printing and

Pubg Co, Bangalore, 1993.

3. P.Balasubramain and SP. Palniappan, Principles and Practices of Agronomy, Agrobios

publishers, Ludhiana, 2001.

4. T.Yellamanda Reddy and G.H. Sankara Reddi, Principles of Agronomy, Kalyani publishers,

Ludhiana, 2005

5. B.Chandrasekaran, B. , K. Annadurai and E. Somasundaram, A Text book of Agronomy,

Scientific publishers, Jodhpur, 2007

6. George Acquaah, Horticulture-principles and practices, Prentice-Half of India Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2002.

15GE0XI INTRODUCTION TO DATA ANALYSIS USING SOFTWARE

- - - 1

Course Objectives

To familiarize students on the features of MS Excel.

To enable the students to use Excel in the area of critical evaluation.

Facilitate the student to construct graphs.


1. Create versatile Excel document.

2. Apply built in functions for data analysis.

3. Prepare dynamic Charts.

Excel Fundamentals and Editing 4 Hours

Starting and Navigating a Worksheet– Entering Information – Hyperlinks – Saving – Editing

Techniques – Entering a Series of Labels, Numbers and Dates – Checking Errors.

Formatting 4 Hours

Formatting Cells – Changing Column Widths and Row Heights – Creating Conditional Formatting –

Using Styles – Creating and Modifying Templates – Changing Page Breaks.



Power Organizing and Customizing Excel 4 Hours

Managing Worksheets – Referencing Cells in Other Worksheets – Using More than One Work Book

– Managing Shared Work Books – Protecting Worksheets and Workbooks.

Adjusting Views – Setting Printing Options – Using Multiple Panes – Customizing Excel Using the

Options Dialog Box.

Crunching Numbers 5 Hours

Building a Formula – Using Basic Built-in Functions – Using Functions to Analyze Data – Using

Names in Functions – Array Functions

Work Sheet Charts 3 Hours

Planning a Chart – Creating Chart – Formatting a Chart – Adding Labels and Arrows.

Total: 20 Hours

References

1. Michael J. Young, Michael Halvorson, “Office System 2007 Edition”, Prentice-Hall of India

(P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2007

2. John Walkenbach, “Microsoft Office Excel 2007”, Wiley Publishing, Inc. 2007

3. Curtis D. Frye, Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Step by Step, Microsoft Press, 2007

4. Mark Dodgeand Craig Stinson, “Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Inside Out”, Microsoft Press,

2007

15GE0XJ ANALYSIS USING PIVOT TABLE

- - - 1

Course Objectives

To familiarize students on the features of Pivot Table.

To enable the students to use Pivot Table in the area of data analysis.

Facilitate the student to construct the charts for visualization of data.


1. Able to construct the Pivot Table and Group, Sort, Filter the Data to do the analysis.

2. Able to do the Calculation with in Pivot Table for advance analysis.

3. Capable of Constructing Pivot Charts to make visual presentation.

Pivot Table Fundamentals 4 Hours

Introduction about Pivot Table, Why and When to use the Pivot Table, Anatomy of the Pivot Table,

Limitations, Preparing the Source Data, Creating the Pivot Table.



Grouping Pivot Table Data 4 Hours

Grouping the Items in a Report Filter, Grouping Text Items, Grouping Dates by Month, Grouping

Dates Using the Starting Date, Grouping Dates by Fiscal Quarter, Grouping Dates by Week, Grouping

Dates by Months and Weeks, Grouping Dates in One Pivot Table Affects Another Pivot Table,

Grouping Dates Outside the Range.

Sorting and Filtering Pivot Table Data 4 Hours

Sorting a Pivot Field: Sorting Value Items, Sorting Text Items, Sorting Items in a Custom Order.

Filtering a Pivot Field: Manual Filter, Label Filter, Value Filter, Multiple Filters.

Calculations within the Pivot Tables 5 Hours

Using Formulae: Creating a Calculated Field with and without “IF Condition, Calculated Item, Using

Custom Calculations: % of Column, % of Row, % of Total, % Of, Running Total, Difference From,

% Difference From, Index.

Pivot Charts 3 Hours

Creating a Normal Chart from Pivot Table Data, Filtering the Pivot Chart, Changing the Series Order,

Changing Pivot Chart Layout Affects Pivot Table, Changing Number Format in Pivot Table Affects

Pivot Chart, Converting a Pivot Chart to a Static Chart, Refreshing the Pivot Chart, Creating Multiple

Series for Years

Total: 20 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Debra Dalgleish, “Excel 2007 - PivotTables Recipes A Problem-Solution Approach”,

Apress, 2007, (ISBN-13 (pbk): 978-1-59059-920-4)

2. Bill Felen and Michael Alexander, “Pivot Table Data Crunching for Microsoft Office

2007”, Pearson Education, Inc., QUE Series.

3. Wayne L. Winston, “Microsoft Office Excel 2007: Data Analysis and Business

Modeling”, Microsoft Press, 2007

4. John Walkenbach, “Microsoft Office Excel 2007”, Wiley Publishing, Inc. 2007

5. Mark Dodgeand Craig Stinson, “Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Inside Out”, Microsoft

Press, 2007

6. Curtis D. Frye, Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Step by Step, Microsoft Press, 2007



BRIDGE COURSES

15MCB01 INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION

UNIT I 6 Hours

INTRODUCTION TO MECHATRONICS AND ROBOTICS Introduction - Systems - Open loop system - closed loop system, Basic elements, sequential controller

and Microprocessor based controllers. Industrial Robot: Definition, laws of robots - Robot Anatomy -


movement - Application

UNIT II 6 Hours

SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Introduction to sensors and transducers, Types - Displacement, position and proximity - velocity and


UNIT III 6 Hours




UNIT IV 6 Hours





UNIT V 6 Hours

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Introduction - Basic structure - Input/output processing - programming - Mnemonics - Timers, relays

and counters - Shift registers - Data handling - Analogue input/output - Selection of PLC - Simple

problems

FOR FURTHER READING Application of PLC - Elevator control, traffic light control, sensors in automobiles, ATM & mobiles


Total: 30 Hours

Reference(s):



2. Devdas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, Mechatronics System Design, Cengage Delmar Learning

India Pvt Learning, 2012.


Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2008.

4. V. S. Bagad, Mechatronics, Technical Publication, Pune, 2009.



Singapore, 1996.



15MCB02 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT I 6 Hours

ELECTRIC CIRCUITS Definition of Voltage, Current, Electromotive force, Resistance, Power & Energy, Ohms law and

Kirchoffs Law & its applications - Series and Parallel circuits - Voltage division and Current division

techniques - Generation of alternating emf - RMS value, average value, peak factor and form factor-

Definition of real, reactive and apparent power.

UNIT II 6 Hours

DC MACHINES Introduction of magnetic circuits - Law of Electromagnetic induction, Flemings Right & Left hand

rule- Types of induced emf - Definition of Self and Mutual Inductance - DC Motor- Contruction -

Working Principle- Applications

UNIT III 6 Hours

ELECTRON DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION Characteristics of PN Junction diode and Zener diode - Half wave and Full wave Rectifiers - Bipolar

Junction Transistor - Operation of NPN and PNP transistors - Logic gates - Introduction to

communication systems.

UNIT IV 6 Hours

ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURING PROCESSES Materials classification, mechanical properties of cast iron, steel and high speed steel Casting process-

Introduction to green sand moulding, pattern, melting furnace electric furnace Introduction to metal

forming process and types Introduction to arc and gas welding Centre lathe, Drilling and Milling

machines principal parts, operations.

UNIT V 6 Hours

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND REFRIGERATION Internal Combustion (IC) Classification, main components, working principle of a two and four stroke

petrol and diesel engines, differences Refrigeration working principle of vapour compression and

absorption system Introduction to Air conditioning

Total: 30 Hours FOR FURTHER READING Voltage Regulator - Stepper motor - Energy meter - SMPS, Satellite and Optical communication.

Reference(s):

1. T. K. Nagsarkar and M. S. Sukhija, Basic of Electrical Engineering, Oxford University Press,

2011.

2. Smarjith Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Prentice Hall

(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2010

3. G. Shanmugam & S Ravindran, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2010

4. S. R. J. Shantha Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai,

2000